2014 MAZDA3 Owner's Manual MyMazda - Mazda Owners

Copy and paste this link to your website, so they can see this document directly without any plugins.



Keywords

vehicle, with, system, when, your, When, will, from, Mazda, light, could, button, seat, NOTE, that, front, switch, tire, page, engine, audio, Driving, while, System, warning, device, Press, display, Select, this

Transcript

A Word to Mazda Owners
Thank you for choosing a Mazda. We at Mazda design and build vehicles with complete
customer satisfaction in mind.
To help ensure enjoyable and trouble-free operation of your Mazda, read this manual
carefully and follow its recommendations.
An Authorized Mazda Dealer knows your vehicle best. So when maintenance or service is
necessary, that's the place to go.
Our nationwide network of Mazda professionals is dedicated to providing you with the best
possible service.
We assure you that all of us at Mazda have an ongoing interest in your motoring pleasure
and in your full satisfaction with your Mazda product.
Mazda Motor Corporation
HIROSHIMA, JAPAN
Important Notes About This Manual
Keep this manual in the glove box as a handy reference for the safe and enjoyable use of your Mazda. Should you
resell the vehicle, leave this manual with it for the next owner.
All specifi cations and descriptions are accurate at the time of printing. Because improvement is a constant goal at
Mazda, we reserve the right to make changes in specifi cations at any time without notice and without obligation.
Air Conditioning and the Environment
Your Mazda's genuine air conditioner is fi lled with HFC134a (R134a), a refrigerant that has been found not to
damage the earth's ozone layer. If the air conditioner does not operate properly, consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
Perchlorate
Certain components of this vehicle such as [air bag modules, seat belt pretensioners, lithium batteries,…] may
contain Perchlorate Material-- Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal. See www.
dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Please be aware that this manual applies to all models, equipment and options. As a result, you may fi nd
some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.
©2013 Mazda Motor Corporation
Printed in Japan Sep. 2013 (Print1)
How to Use This Manual
We want to help you get the most driving
pleasure from your vehicle. Your owner's
manual, when read from cover to cover,
can do that in many ways.
Illustrations complement the words of
the manual to best explain how to enjoy
your Mazda. By reading your manual, you
can fi nd out about the features, important
safety information, and driving under
various road conditions.
The symbol below in this manual means
"Do not do this" or "Do not let this
happen".
Index: A good place to start is the Index,
an alphabetical listing of all information in
your manual.
You'll fi nd several WARNINGs,
CAUTIONs, and NOTEs in the manual.
WARNING
A WARNING indicates a situation in
which serious injury or death could
result if the warning is ignored.
CAUTION
A CAUTION indicates a situation in
which bodily injury or damage to your
vehicle, or both, could result if the
caution is ignored.
NOTE
A NOTE provides information and
sometimes suggests how to make better
use of your vehicle.
The symbol below, located on some parts
of the vehicle, indicates that this manual
contains information related to the part.
Please refer to the manual for a detailed
explanation.
Table of Contents
Pictorial Index
Interior, exterior views and part identification of your Mazda.
1
Essential Safety Equipment
Important information about safety equipment, including seats, seat belt
system, child-restraint systems and SRS air bags.
2
Before Driving
Use of various features, including keys, doors, mirrors and windows.
3
When Driving
Information concerning safe driving and stopping.
4
Interior Features
Use of various features for ride comfort, including air-conditioning and audio
system.
5
Maintenance and Care
How to keep your Mazda in top condition.
6
If Trouble Arises
Helpful information on what to do if a problem arises with the vehicle.
7
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Important consumer information including warranties and add-on equipment.
8
Specifications
Technical information about your Mazda.
9
Index 10
1–1
1 Pictorial Index
Interior, exterior views and part identifi cation of your Mazda.
Interior Overview ............................................................................... 1-2
Interior Equipment (View A) ........................................................ 1-2
Interior Equipment (View B) ........................................................ 1-3
Interior Equipment (View C) ........................................................ 1-4
Exterior Overview .............................................................................. 1-5
(4-Door) ........................................................................................ 1-5
(5-Door) ........................................................................................ 1-6
1–2
Pictorial Index
Interior Overview
Interior Equipment (View A)
Door-lock knob ..................................................................................................... page 3-19
DSC OFF switch ................................................................................................... page 4-82
Tire pressure monitoring system set switch ........................................................ page 4-107
Turn and lane-change signal ................................................................................. page 4-51
Lighting control..................................................................................................... page 4-41
Instrument cluster .................................................................................................. page 4-12
Active driving display ........................................................................................... page 4-19
Dashboard illumination knob ................................................................................ page 4-16
Wiper and washer lever ......................................................................................... page 4-52
Push button start ...................................................................................................... page 4-4
LDWS switch ...................................................................................................... page 4-122
AFS OFF switch.................................................................................................... page 4-46
BSM OFF switch ................................................................................................ page 4-114
Outside mirror switch............................................................................................ page 3-33
Door-lock switch ................................................................................................... page 3-16
Power window lock switch ................................................................................... page 3-38
Power window switches ........................................................................................ page 3-36
The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle
1–3
Pictorial Index
Interior Overview
Interior Equipment (View B)
Audio control switches.......................................................................................... page 5-58
SRS air bags .......................................................................................................... page 2-40
Cruise control switches ..............................................................................page 4-100 , 4-95
Steering shift switches .......................................................................................... page 4-33
Climate control system............................................................................................ page 5-2
Audio system......................................................................................................... page 5-16
Navigation system (if equipped) ............................................. Refer to the separate manual
Seat warmer switches .............................................................................................. page 2-7
Rear window defroster switch............................................................................... page 4-56
CD player .............................................................................................................. page 5-54
Manual transaxle shift lever .................................................................................. page 4-27
Automatic transaxle selector lever ........................................................................ page 4-30
Drive selection switch ........................................................................................... page 4-89
Lock release lever ................................................................................................. page 3-32
Hood release handle .............................................................................................. page 6-24
Remote fuel-fi ller lid release ................................................................................. page 3-30
Trunk release button .............................................................................................. page 3-22
The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle
1–4
Pictorial Index
Interior Overview
Interior Equipment (View C)
Seat belts ............................................................................................................... page 2-12
SRS air bag............................................................................................................ page 2-40
Bottle holder ........................................................................................................ page 5-138
Vanity mirror ....................................................................................................... page 5-133
Moonroof switch ................................................................................................... page 3-39
Overhead lights ................................................................................................... page 5-134
Rearview mirror .................................................................................................... page 3-34
Sunvisor .............................................................................................................. page 5-133
Glove compartment ............................................................................................. page 5-139
Hazard warning fl asher switch .............................................................................. page 4-58
Parking brake ........................................................................................................ page 4-69
Commander switch ............................................................................................... page 5-38
Cup holders ......................................................................................................... page 5-137
Front seat ................................................................................................................. page 2-5
Center console ..................................................................................................... page 5-140
Rear seat .................................................................................................................. page 2-8
The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle
1–5
Pictorial Index
Exterior Overview
(4-Door)
Hood ...................................................................................................................... page 6-24
Windshield wiper blades ....................................................................................... page 6-33
Moonroof .............................................................................................................. page 3-39
Doors and keys ...................................................................................................... page 3-12
Fuel-fi ller lid ......................................................................................................... page 3-30
Wheels and Tires ................................................................................................... page 6-41
Exterior lights ........................................................................................................ page 6-45
Trunk lid ................................................................................................................ page 3-22
Antenna ................................................................................................................. page 5-16
Child safety locks .................................................................................................. page 3-20
Outside mirror ....................................................................................................... page 3-33
The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle
1–6
Pictorial Index
Exterior Overview
(5-Door)
Hood ...................................................................................................................... page 6-24
Windshield wiper blades ....................................................................................... page 6-33
Moonroof .............................................................................................................. page 3-39
Doors and keys ...................................................................................................... page 3-12
Fuel-fi ller lid ......................................................................................................... page 3-30
Wheels and Tires ................................................................................................... page 6-41
Exterior lights ........................................................................................................ page 6-45
Rear window wiper blade ..................................................................................... page 6-35
Liftgate .................................................................................................................. page 3-22
Antenna ................................................................................................................. page 5-16
Child safety locks .................................................................................................. page 3-20
Outside mirror ....................................................................................................... page 3-33
The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle
*Some models. 2–1
2 Essential Safety Equipment
Use of safety equipment, including seats, seat belt system, childrestraint systems and SRS air bags.
Seats ..................................................................................................... 2-2
Seat Precautions ............................................................................ 2-2
Front Seat ...................................................................................... 2-5
Rear Seat ....................................................................................... 2-8
Head Restraints ........................................................................... 2-10
Seat Belt Systems .............................................................................. 2-12
Seat Belt Precautions .................................................................. 2-12
3-Point Type Seat Belt ................................................................ 2-15
Seat Belt Warning Systems ......................................................... 2-16
Front Seat Belt Pretensioner and Load Limiting Systems .......... 2-16
Center-Rear Position 2-Point Type Seat Belt* ............................. 2-18
Seat Belt Extender ....................................................................... 2-20
Child-Restraint ................................................................................. 2-22
Child-Restraint Precautions ........................................................ 2-22
Child-Restraint System Installation ............................................ 2-27
Installing Child-Restraint Systems ............................................. 2-28
SRS Air Bags .................................................................................... 2-40
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Precautions .................... 2-40
Supplemental Restraint System Components ............................. 2-47
How the SRS Air Bags Work ...................................................... 2-49
SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria .............................................. 2-53
Limitations to SRS Air Bag ........................................................ 2-54
Front Passenger Occupant Classifi cation System* ...................... 2-56
Constant Monitoring ................................................................... 2-61
2–2
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
Seat Precautions
WARNING
Make sure the adjustable components of a seat are locked in place:
Adjustable seats and seatbacks that are not securely locked are dangerous. In a
sudden stop or collision, the seat or seatback could move, causing injury. Make sure the
adjustable components of the seat are locked in place by attempting to slide the seat
forward and backward and rocking the seatback.
Never allow children to adjust a seat:
Allowing children to adjust a seat is dangerous as it could result in serious injury if a
child's hands or feet become caught in the seat.
Do not drive with the seatback unlocked:
All of the seatbacks play an important role in your protection in a vehicle. Leaving the
seatback unlocked is dangerous as it can allow passengers to be ejected or thrown
around and baggage to strike occupants in a sudden stop or collision, resulting in severe
injury. After adjusting the seatback at any time, even when there are no other passengers,
rock the seatback to make sure it is locked in place.
Adjust the driver's seat only when the vehicle is stopped:
Adjusting the driver's seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. The driver could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Do not modify or replace the front seats:
Modifying or replacing the front seats such as replacing the upholstery or loosening
any bolts is dangerous. The front seats contain air bag components essential to the
supplemental restraint system. Such modifi cations could damage the supplemental
restraint system and result in serious injury. Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer if there
is any need to remove or reinstall the front seats.
Do not drive with damaged front seats:
Driving with damaged front seats is dangerous. A collision, even one not strong enough
to infl ate the air bags, could damage the front seats which contain essential air bag
components. If there was a subsequent collision, an air bag may not deploy which could
lead to injuries. Always have an Authorized Mazda Dealer inspect the front seats, front
seat belt pretensioners and air bags after a collision.
Do not drive with either front seats reclined:
Sitting in a reclined position while the vehicle is moving is dangerous because you do not
get the full protection from seat belts. During sudden braking or a collision, you can slide
under the lap belt and suff er serious internal injuries. For maximum protection, sit well
back and upright.
2–3
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
Do not place an object such as a cushion between the seatback and your back:
Putting an object such as a cushion between the seatback and your back is dangerous
because you will be unable to maintain a safe driving posture and the seat belt cannot
function at its full capacity in a collision, which could result in a serious accident, injury or
death.
Do not place objects under the seat:
The object could get stuck and cause the seat to not be fi xed securely, and result in an
accident.
Do not stack cargo higher than the seatbacks:
Stacking luggage or other cargo higher than the seatbacks is dangerous. During sudden
braking or a collision, objects can fl y around and become projectiles that may hit and
injure passengers.
Make sure luggage and cargo is secured before driving:
Not securing cargo while driving is dangerous as it could move or be crushed during
sudden braking or a collision and cause injury.
Never allow a passenger to sit or stand on the folded seatback while the vehicle is
moving:
Driving with a passenger on the folded seatback is dangerous. Allowing a child to sit up
on the folded seatback while the vehicle is moving is particularly dangerous. In a sudden
stop or even a minor collision, a child not in a proper seat or child-restraint system and
seat belt could be thrown forward, back or even out of the vehicle resulting in serious
injuries or death. The child in the baggage area could be thrown into other occupants
and cause serious injury.
Never give the car keys to children and do not allow them to play in the vehicle (4–
Door):
Playing with the folding rear seats is dangerous. Once the seatbacks are back up, a child
in the trunk would not be able to get out the way they had entered. If you have small
children, keep the seatbacks locked.
Always leave your car locked and keep the car keys safely away from children (4–
Door):
Leaving your car unlocked or the keys in reach of children is dangerous. Children who fi nd
their way into the trunk through an unlocked rear seatback or an open trunk can become
accidentally locked in the trunk. This could result in death or brain damage from heat
prostration, particularly in the summer. Always lock the doors and the trunk, and as an
added measure, keep the rear seatbacks locked, whether you have children in your home
or not.
2–4
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
CAUTION
When operating a seat, be careful not to put your hands or fi ngers near the moving parts of
the seat or on the side trim to prevent injury.
When moving the seats, make sure there is no cargo in the surrounding area. If the cargo
gets caught it could damage the cargo.
(Manual Seat)
When returning a rear-reclined seatback to its upright position, make sure you hold
onto the seatback with your other hand while operating the lever. If the seatback is not
supported, it will fl ip forward suddenly and could cause injury.
(Power Seat)
The seat-bottom power adjustment is operated by motors. Avoid extended operation
because excessive use can damage the motors.
To prevent the battery from running down, avoid using the power adjustment when the
engine is stopped. The adjuster uses a large amount of electrical power.
Do not use the switch to make more than one adjustment at a time.
NOTE
When returning a rear seat to its original position, also replace the seat belt to its normal
position. Verify that the seat belt pulls out and retracts.
2–5
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
Front Seat
Seat Operation
*1: With power operation seat only
Power operation *1
Seat Slide
(Manual Seat)
To move a seat forward or backward, raise the lever and slide the seat to the desired position
and release the lever.
Make sure the lever returns to its original position and the seat is locked in place by
attempting to push it forward and backward.
(Power Seat)
To slide the seat, move the slide lifter switch on the outside of the seat to the front or back
and hold it. Release the switch at the desired position.
Height Adjustment (Driver's Seat)
(Manual Seat)
To adjust the seat height, move the lever up or down.
(Power Seat)
To adjust the seat height, move the switch up or down.
*Some models.2–6
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
Seat Recline
(Manual Seat)
To change the seatback angle, lean forward slightly while raising the lever. Then lean back
to the desired position and release the lever.
Make sure the lever returns to its original position and the seatback is locked in place by
attempting to push it forward and backward.
(Power Seat)
To change the seatback angle, press the front or rear side of the reclining switch. Release the
switch at the desired position.
Lumbar Support Adjustment (Driver's Seat) *
To increase the seat fi rmness, move the lever forward. Move the lever backward to decrease
fi rmness.
*Some models. 2–7
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
Seat Warmer *
The front seats are electrically heated. The
ignition must be switched ON.
Press the seat warmer switch to illuminate
the indicator light while the ignition
is switched ON. The mode changes as
follow each time the seat warmer switch is
pressed.
OFF
High
Mid
Low
WARNING
Be careful when using the seat warmer:
The heat from the seat warmer may be
too hot for some people, as indicated
below, and could cause a lowtemperature burn.
Infants, small babies, elderly
people, and physically challenged
people
People with delicate skin
People who are excessively fatigued
People who are intoxicated
People who have taken sleepinducing medicine such as sleeping
pills or cold medicine
Do not use the seat warmer with
anything having high moistureretention ability such as a blanket or
cushion on the seat:
The seat may be heated excessively
and cause a low-temperature burn.
Do not use the seat warmer even when
taking a short nap in the vehicle:
The seat may be heated excessively
and cause a low-temperature burn.
Do not place heavy objects with sharp
projections on the seat, or insert
needles or pins into it:
This could cause the seat to become
excessively heated and result in injury
from a minor burn.
CAUTION
Do not use organic solvents to clean
the seat. It may damage the seat
surface and the heater.
NOTE
If the ignition is switched off while the
seat warmer is operating (High, Mid or
Low) and then switched ON again, the
seat warmer will automatically operate
at the temperature set before switching
off the ignition.
Use the seat warmer when the engine
is running. Leaving the seat warmer
on for long periods with the engine not
running could cause the battery power
to be depleted.
The temperature of the seat warmer
cannot be adjusted beyond High, Mid
and Low because the seat warmer is
controlled by a thermostat.
2–8
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
Rear Seat
Split/One-piece Folding the
Seatback
By lowering the rear seatback(s) the
luggage compartment space can be
expanded.
WARNING
Do not drive the vehicle with occupants
on folded down seatback(s) or in the
luggage compartment.
Putting occupants in the luggage
compartment is dangerous because
seat belts cannot be fastened which
could lead to serious injury or death
during sudden braking or a collision.
Do not allow children to play inside the
vehicle with the seatback(s) lowered.
Allowing children to play in the
vehicle with the seatback(s) folded
down is dangerous, If a child enters
the luggage compartment and the
seatback(s) were raised back up, the
child may become trapped in the
luggage compartment which could
lead to an accident.
Tightly secure cargo in the luggage
compartment when it is transported
with the seatback(s) folded down.
Driving without tightly securing cargo
and luggage is dangerous as it could
move and become an obstruction to
driving during emergency braking or
a collision resulting in an unexpected
accident.
When transporting cargo, do not allow
the cargo to exceed the height of the
seatback(s).
Transporting cargo stacked higher
than the seatback(s) is dangerous as
visibility to the rear and sides of the
vehicle is reduced which could interfere
with driving operations and lead to an
accident.
Lowering the seatback(s)
CAUTION
Check the position of a front seat
before folding a rear seatback.
Depending on the position of a front
seat, it may not be possible to fold
a rear seatback all the way down
because it may hit the seatback of
the front seat which could scratch or
damage the front seat or its pocket.
Remove the head restraint on the rear
outboard seat if necessary.
(4–Door)
1. Open the trunk lid and pull the lever for
the seatback you want to fold down.
*1: With split-folding
type seat only
*1
2. Open a rear door and fold the rear seat
forward.
2–9
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
(5–Door)
Press the push knob to fold down the
seatback.
To return the seatback to its upright
position:
WARNING
When returning a seatback to its
upright position, make sure the 3-point
seat belt is not caught in the seatback
and the 3-point seat belt is not twisted.
If the seat belt is used while it is twisted
and caught in the seatback, the seat
belt cannot function at its full capacity,
which could cause serious injury or
death.
When returning a seatback to its
upright position, make sure that it is
fi rmly locked and the red indication is
not visible (5–Door).
If the red indication is visible behind
the push knob, it means the seatback
is not locked. If the vehicle is driven
without the seatback locked, it could
fold down suddenly and cause an
accident.
Locked position
Unlocked position
Red indication
1. Make sure that the seat belt passes
through the seat belt guide correctly
and it is not twisted, then raise the
seatback while preventing the seat belt
from being caught in the seatback.
(4–Door)
Seat belt guides
*Some models.2–10
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
(5–Door)
Red indication
Seat belt guide
2. Press the seatback rearward and lock it
in place. After returning the seatback
to its upright position, make sure it is
securely locked.
Armrest *
The rear armrest in the center of the rear
seatback can be used (no occupant in the
center seat) or placed upright.
WARNING
Never put your hands and fi ngers
around the moving parts of the seat and
armrest:
Putting your hands and fi ngers around
the moving parts of the seat and
armrest is dangerous as they could get
injured.
Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with head
restraints on all outboard seats and the
rear center seat. The head restraints are
intended to help protect you and the
passengers from neck injury.
WARNING
Always drive with the head restraints
installed when seats are being used and
make sure they are properly adjusted:
Driving with the head restraints
adjusted too low or removed is
dangerous. With no support behind
your head, your neck could be seriously
injured in a collision.
Height adjustment
To raise a head restraint, pull it up to the
desired position.
To lower the head restraint, press the stopcatch release, then push the head restraint
down.
Adjust the head restraint so that the center
is even with the top of the passenger's ears.
*Some models. 2–11
Essential Safety Equipment
Seats
Front outboard seat
Rear outboard seat
Rear center seat*
Removal/Installation
To remove the head restraint, pull it up
while pressing the stop-catch.
To install the head restraint, insert the legs
into the holes while pressing the stopcatch.
WARNING
Always drive with the head restraints
installed when seats are being used and
make sure they are properly installed:
Driving with the head restraints not
installed is dangerous. With no support
behind your head, your neck could be
seriously injured in a collision.
2–12
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
Seat Belt Precautions
Seat belts help to decrease the possibility of severe injury during accidents and sudden
stops. Mazda recommends that the driver and all passengers always wear seat belts.
(U.S.A. and Canada)
All of the seat belt retractors are designed to keep the lap/shoulder belts out of the way when
not in use.
The driver's seat belt has no provisions for child-restraint systems and has only an
emergency locking mode. The driver may wear it comfortably, and it will lock during a
collision.
However, the front passenger's seat and all rear lap/shoulder belt retractors operate in
two modes: emergency locking mode, and for child-restraint systems, automatic locking
mode. While we recommend you put all children in the rear seats, if you must use the front
passenger seat for a child, slide the front passenger seat as far back as possible and make
sure any child-restraint system is secured properly.
(Mexico)
The front seats and rear outboard seats have lap/shoulder belts. These belts have retractors
with inertia locks that keep them out of the way when not in use. The locks allow the belts
to remain comfortable on users, but they will lock in position during a collision.
The rear center seat has a lap belt with manual adjustment.
WARNING
Always wear your seat belt and make sure all occupants are properly restrained:
Not wearing a seat belt is extremely dangerous. During a collision, occupants not
wearing seat belts could hit someone or things inside the vehicle or even be thrown out of
the vehicle. They could be seriously injured or even killed. In the same collision, occupants
wearing seat belts would be much safer.
Do not wear twisted seat belts:
Twisted seat belts are dangerous. In a collision, the full width of the belt is not available to
absorb the impact. This puts more force on the bones beneath the belt, which could cause
serious injury or death. So, if your seat belt is twisted, you must straighten the seat belt to
remove any twists and to allow the full width of the belt to be used.
Never use one seat belt on more than one person at a time:
Using one seat belt for more than one person at a time is dangerous. A seat belt used
in this way cannot spread the impact forces properly and the two passengers could
be crushed together and seriously injured or even killed. Never use one belt for more
than one person at a time and always operate the vehicle with each occupant properly
restrained.
2–13
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
Do not operate a vehicle with a damaged seat belt:
Using a damaged seat belt is dangerous. An accident could damage the belt webbing
of the seat belt in use. A damaged seat belt cannot provide adequate protection in a
collision. Have an Authorized Mazda Dealer inspect all seat belt systems in use during an
accident before they are used again.
Have your seat belts changed immediately if the pretensioner or load limiter has been
expended:
Always have an Authorized Mazda Dealer immediately inspect the front seat belt
pretensioners and air bags after any collision. Like the air bags, the front seat belt
pretensioners and load limiters will only function once and must be replaced after
any collision that caused them to deploy. A seat belt with an expended pretensioner
or load limiter is still better than wearing no seat belt at all; however, if the front seat
belt pretensioners and load limiters are not replaced, the risk of injury in a collision will
increase.
Positioning the Shoulder Portion of the Seat Belt:
Improper positioning of the shoulder portion of the seat belt is dangerous. Always make
sure the shoulder portion of the seat belt is positioned across your shoulder and near your
neck, but never under your arm, on your neck, or on your upper arm.
Positioning the Lap Portion of the Seat Belt:
The lap portion of the seat belt worn too high is dangerous. In a collision, this would
concentrate the impact force directly on the abdominal area, causing serious injury. Wear
the lap portion of the belt snugly and as low as possible.
CAUTION
Belt retraction may become diffi cult if the belts and rings are soiled, so try to keep them
clean. For more details about cleaning the seat belts, refer to "Cleaning the Lap/Shoulder
Belt Webbing" (page 6-71 ).
Ring
*Some models.2–14
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
Pregnant Women and Persons with Serious Medical Conditions
Pregnant women should always wear seat belts. Ask your doctor for specifi c
recommendations.
The lap belt should be worn SNUGLY AND AS LOW AS POSSIBLE OVER THE HIPS.
The shoulder belt should be worn across your shoulder properly, but never across the
stomach area.
Persons with serious medical conditions also should wear seat belts. Check with your doctor
for any special instructions regarding specifi c medical conditions.
Emergency Locking Mode
When the seat belt is fastened, it will always be in the emergency locking mode.
In the emergency locking mode, the belt remains comfortable on the occupant and the
retractor will lock in position during a collision.
If the belt is locked and cannot be pulled out, retract the belt once, and then try pulling it out
slowly. If this fails, pull the belt strongly one time and loosen, then pull it out again slowly.
(Seat Belt with Automatic Locking Mode)
When the seat belt is fastened, it will always be in the emergency locking mode until it is
switched to automatic locking mode by pulling it all the way out to its full length. If the belt
feels tight and hinders comfortable movement while the vehicle is stopped or in motion, it
may be in the automatic locking mode because the belt has been pulled too far out. To return
the belt to the more comfortable emergency locking mode, wait until the vehicle has stopped
in a safe, level area, retract the belt fully to convert it back to emergency locking mode and
then extend it around you again.
Automatic Locking Mode *
Always use the automatic locking mode to keep the child-restraint system from shifting to
an unsafe position in the event of an accident. To enable seat belt automatic locking mode,
pull it all the way out and connect it as instructed on the child-restraint system. It will retract
down to the child-restraint system and stay locked on it. See the section on child restraint
(page 2-22 ).
2–15
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
3-Point Type Seat Belt
Fastening the Seat Belt
Seat belt
buckle
Seat belt tongue
Position the lap belt as low as possible,
not on the abdominal area, then adjust the
shoulder belt so that it fi ts snugly against
your body.
Keep low on
hip bone
Too high
Take up slack
Unfastening the Seat Belt
Depress the button on the seat belt buckle.
If the belt does not fully retract, pull it out
and check for kinks or twists. Then make
sure it remains untwisted as it retracts.
Button
NOTE
If a belt does not fully retract, inspect
it for kinks and twists. If it is still not
retracting properly, have it inspected at an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Front Shoulder Belt Adjuster
To raise To lower
Make sure the adjuster is locked.
2–16
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
Seat Belt Warning Systems
If it detects that the driver's seat belt is
unfastened, the warning light or beep
alerts the driver.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page
4-21 .
Front Seat Belt Pretensioner
and Load Limiting Systems
For optimum protection, the driver and
front passenger seat belts are equipped
with pretensioner and load limiting
systems. For both these systems to work
properly you must wear the seat belt
properly.
Pretensioners:
When a collision is detected, the
pretensioners deploy simultaneously with
the air bags.
For vehicles with the front passenger
occupant classifi cation system, the
pretensioners deploy simultaneously
with the air bags when a roll-over is also
detected.
For deployment details, refer to the SRS
Air Bag Deployment Criteria (page 2-53 ).
The front seat belt retractors remove slack
quickly as the air bags are expanding.
Any time the air bags and seat belt
pretensioners have fi red they must be
replaced.
A system malfunction or operation
conditions are indicated by a warning.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page
4-21 .
Refer to Air Bag/Front Seat Belt
Pretensioner System Warning Beep on
page 7-36 .
(With Front Passenger Occupant
Classifi cation System)
In addition, the pretensioner system for
the front passenger, like the front and side
passenger air bag, is designed to only
deploy in accordance with the total seated
weight on the front passenger seat.
For details, refer to the front passenger
seat weight sensors (page 2-56 ).
2–17
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
Load limiter:
The load limiting system releases belt
webbing in a controlled manner to reduce
belt force on the occupant's chest. While
the most severe load on a seat belt occurs
in frontal collisions, the load limiter has
an automatic mechanical function and
can activate in any accident mode with
suffi cient occupant movement.
Even if the pretensioners have not fi red,
the load limiting function must be checked
by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
WARNING
Wear seat belts only as recommended in
this owner's manual:
Incorrect positioning of the driver
and front passenger seat belts
is dangerous. Without proper
positioning, the pretensioner and
load limiting systems cannot provide
adequate protection in an accident
and this could result in serious injury.
For more details about wearing seat
belts, refer to "Fastening the seat belts"
(page 2-15 ).
Have your seat belts changed
immediately if the pretensioner or load
limiter has been expended:
Always have an Authorized Mazda
Dealer immediately inspect the front
seat belt pretensioners and air bags
after any collision. Like the air bags, the
front seat belt pretensioners and load
limiters will only function once and
must be replaced after any collision
that caused them to deploy. A seat
belt with an expended pretensioner or
load limiter is still better than wearing
no seat belt at all; however, if the
front seat belt pretensioners and load
limiters are not replaced, the risk of
injury in a collision will increase.
Do not modify the components or
wiring, or use electronic testing devices
on the pretensioner system:
Modifying the components or wiring
of the pretensioner system, including
the use of electronic testing devices
is dangerous. You could accidentally
activate it or make it inoperable which
would prevent it from activating in an
accident. The occupants or repairers
could be seriously injured.
Properly dispose of the pretensioner
system:
Improper disposal of the pretensioner
system or a vehicle with nondeactivated pretensioners is
dangerous. Unless all safety
procedures are followed, injury
could result. Have an Authorized
Mazda Dealer safely dispose of
the pretensioner system or scrap a
pretensioner system equipped vehicle.
*Some models.2–18
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
NOTE
(With Front Passenger Occupant
Classifi cation System)
The pretensioner system will not
activate in rear impacts.
(Without Front Passenger Occupant
Classifi cation System)
The pretensioner system will not
activate in most roll-overs and rear
impacts.
Some smoke (non-toxic gas) will
be released when the air bags and
pretensioners deploy. This does not
indicate a fi re. This gas normally has
no effect on occupants, however, those
with sensitive skin may experience
light skin irritation. If residue from the
deployment of the air bags or the front
pretensioner system gets on the skin
or in the eyes, wash it off as soon as
possible.
Center-Rear Position
2-Point Type Seat Belt *
Fastening the Seat Belt
1. Pull the seat belt tongue to the desired
length.
2. Insert it into the seat belt buckle until
you hear a click sound.
Seat belt tongue
Seat belt
buckle
3. Adjust the belt length.
To lengthen the belt, hold the seat belt
tongue at a right angle to the webbing
and pull. To shorten, pull the loose end
of the webbing.
Lengthen
2–19
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
Shorten
4. Make sure the lap belt is snugly fi tted
against your body.
WARNING
Wearing the Lap Belt:
A lap belt worn too high is dangerous.
In a collision, this would concentrate
the impact force directly on the
abdominal area, causing serious
injury. Wear the lap belt snugly and as
low as possible.
Unfastening the Seat Belt
Depress the button on the seat belt buckle.
Button
2–20
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
Seat Belt Extender
If your seat belt is not long enough, even
when fully extended, a seat belt extender
may be available to you at no charge from
your Authorized Mazda Dealer.
This extender will be only for you and for
the particular vehicle and seat. Even if it
plugs into other seat belts, it may not hold
in the critical moment of a crash.
When ordering an extender, only order
one that provides the necessary additional
length to fasten the seat belt properly.
Please contact your Authorized Mazda
Dealer for more information.
WARNING
Do not use a seat belt extender unless it
is necessary:
Using a seat belt extender when not
necessary is dangerous. The seat belt
will be too long and not fi t properly.
In an accident, the seat belt will not
provide adequate protection and you
could be seriously injured. Only use the
extender when it is required to fasten
the seat belt properly.
Do not use an improper extender:
Using a seat belt extender that is for
another person or a diff erent vehicle
or seat is dangerous. The seat belt will
not provide adequate protection and
the user could be seriously injured in
an accident. Only use the extender
provided for you and for the particular
vehicle and seat. NEVER use the
extender in a diff erent vehicle or seat.
If you sell your Mazda, do not leave
your seat belt extender in the vehicle. It
could be used accidentally by the new
owner of the vehicle. After removing
the seat belt extender, discard it. Never
use the seat belt extender in any other
vehicle you may own in the future.
Do not use an extender that is too long:
Using an extender that is too long is
dangerous. The seat belt will not fi t
properly. In an accident, the seat belt
will not provide adequate protection
and you could be seriously injured.
Do not use the extender or choose
one shorter in length if the distance
between the extender's buckle and the
center of the user's body is less than 15
cm (6 in).
2–21
Essential Safety Equipment
Seat Belt Systems
Do not leave a seat belt extender
connected to the buckle:
Leaving a seat belt extender connected
to the buckle without using the seat
belt is dangerous. When the seat
belt extender is connected to the
driver's seat belt buckle (or front
passenger) seat, the SRS driver's (or
front passenger's) air bag system will
determine that the driver (or front
passenger) is wearing the seat belt
even if the driver (or front passenger)
is not wearing it. This condition could
cause the driver's (or front passenger's)
air bag to not activate correctly and
result in death or serious injury in the
event of collision. Always wear the seat
belt with the seat belt extender.
Do not use the seat belt extender when
installing a child-restraint system on the
front or rear passenger seat:
Using a seat belt extender to fasten
a child-restraint system on any seat
is dangerous. Always follow the
child-restraint system manufacturer's
installation instructions and never use
a seat belt extender.
NOTE
When not in use, remove the seat belt
extender and store it in the vehicle. If the
seat belt extender is left connected, the
seat belt extender might get damaged
as it will not retract with the rest of the
seat belt and can easily fall out of the
door when not in use and be damaged. In
addition, the seat belt warning light will
not illuminate and function properly.
2–22
Essential Safety Equipment
Child-Restraint
Child-Restraint Precautions
Mazda strongly urges the use of child-restraint systems for children small enough to use
them.
You are required by law to use a child-restraint system for children in the U.S. and Canada.
Check your local and state or provincial laws for specifi c requirements regarding the safety
of children riding in your vehicle.
Whatever child-restraint system you consider, please pick the appropriate one for the age
and size of the child, obey the law and follow the instructions that come with the individual
child-restraint system.
A child who has outgrown child-restraint systems should sit in the rear and use seat belts,
both lap and shoulder. If the shoulder belt crosses the neck or face, move the child closer
to the center of the vehicle in the outboard seats, and towards the buckle on the right if the
child is seated on the center seat.
Statistics confi rm that the rear seat is the best place for all children up to 12 years of age,
and more so with a supplemental restraint system (air bags).
A rear-facing child-restraint system should NEVER be used on the front seat with the air
bag system activated. The front passenger's seat is also the least preferred seat for other
child-restraint systems.
(With Front Passenger Occupant Classifi cation System)
To reduce the chance of injuries caused by deployment of the front passenger air bag, the
front passenger seat weight sensors work as a part of the supplemental restraint system. This
system deactivates the front passenger front and side air bags and also the front passenger
seat belt pretensioner system when the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light
illuminates.
When an infant or small child sits on the front passenger seat, the system shuts off the front
passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner system, so make sure the front
passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates.
Even if the front passenger air bag is shut off, Mazda strongly recommends that children be
properly restrained and child-restraint systems of all kinds are properly secured on the rear
seats which are the best place for children.
For more details, refer to "Front passenger seat weight sensors" (page 2-56 ).
2–23
Essential Safety Equipment
Child-Restraint
WARNING
Use the correct size child-restraint system:
For eff ective protection in vehicle accidents and sudden stops, a child must be properly
restrained using a seat belt or child-restraint system depending on age and size. If not, the
child could be seriously injured or even killed in an accident.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions and always keep the child-restraint system
buckled down:
An unsecured child-restraint system is dangerous. In a sudden stop or a collision it could
move causing serious injury or death to the child or other occupants. Make sure any
child-restraint system is properly secured in place according to the child-restraint system
manufacturer's instructions. When not in use, remove it from the vehicle or fasten it
with a seat belt, or latch it down to BOTH LATCH lower anchors for LATCH child-restraint
systems and the corresponding tether anchor.
Always secure a child in a proper child-restraint system:
Holding a child in your arms while the vehicle is moving is extremely dangerous. No
matter how strong the person may be, he or she cannot hold onto a child in a sudden
stop or collision and it could result in serious injury or death to the child or other
occupants. Even in a moderate accident, the child may be exposed to air bag forces that
could result in serious injury or death to the child, or the child may be slammed into an
adult, causing injury to both child and adult.
Never use a rear-facing child-restraint system in the front seat with an air bag that
could deploy:
Rear-facing child-restraint systems on the front seat are particularly dangerous even
though you may feel assured that a front passenger air bag will not deploy based on
the fact that the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates. The
child-restraint system can be hit by a deploying air bag and moved violently backward
resulting in serious injury or death to the child.
2–24
Essential Safety Equipment
Child-Restraint
(U.S.A. and Canada)
Vehicles with a front passenger air bag have a warning label attached as shown below.
The warning label reminds you not to put a rear-facing child-restraint system on the front
passenger seat at any time.
(Mexico)
NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in
front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
Vehicles with a front passenger air bag have a warning label attached as shown below.
The warning label reminds you not to put a rear-facing child-restraint system on the front
passenger seat at any time.
Do not install a front-facing child-restraint system on the front passenger seat unless it
is unavoidable:
In a collision, the force of a deploying air bag could cause serious injury or death to the
child. If installing a front-facing child-restraint system on the front passenger seat is
unavoidable, move the front passenger seat as far back as possible.
2–25
Essential Safety Equipment
Child-Restraint
Seating a child in a child-restraint system on the front passenger seat is dangerous
under certain conditions (With Front Passenger Occupant Classifi cation System) :
Your vehicle is equipped with front passenger seat weight sensors. Even with the front
passenger seat weight sensors, if you must use the front passenger seat to seat a child,
using a child-restraint system on the front passenger seat under the following conditions
increases the danger of the front passenger air bag deploying and could result in serious
injury or death to the child.
The front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light does not illuminate when
seating a child in the child-restraint system.
Luggage or other items are placed on the seat with the child in the child-restraint
system.
A rear passenger or luggage pushing or pulling down on the front passenger
seatback.
A rear passenger puts their feet on the front seat rails.
Luggage or other items are placed on the seatback or hung on the head restraint.
Heavy items are placed in the seatback map pocket.
The seat is washed.
Liquids are spilled on the seat.
The front passenger seat is moved backward, pushing into luggage or other items
placed behind it.
The front passenger seatback contacts the rear seat.
Luggage or other items are placed between the front passenger seat and driver seat.
Any accessories, which might increase the total seated weight on the front passenger
seat, are attached to the front passenger seat.
The designated positions with seat belts on the rear seats are the safest places for
children. Always use seat belts and child restraints.
Do not allow a child or anyone to lean over or against the side window of a vehicle with
side and curtain air bags:
It is dangerous to allow anyone to lean over or against the side window, the area of the
front passenger seat, the front and rear window pillars and the roof edge along both
sides from which the side and curtain air bags deploy, even if a child-restraint system
is used. The impact of infl ation from a side or curtain air bag could cause serious injury
or death to an out of position child. Furthermore, leaning over or against the front door
could block the side and curtain air bags and eliminate the advantages of supplemental
protection. With the front air bag and the additional side air bag that comes out of the
front seat, the rear seat is always a better location for children. Take special care not to
allow a child to lean over or against the side window, even if the child is seated in a childrestraint system.
2–26
Essential Safety Equipment
Child-Restraint
Never use one seat belt on more than one person at a time:
Using one seat belt for more than one person at a time is dangerous. A seat belt used
in this way cannot spread the impact forces properly and the two passengers could
be crushed together and seriously injured or even killed. Never use one belt for more
than one person at a time and always operate the vehicle with each occupant properly
restrained.
CAUTION
A seat belt or child-restraint system can become very hot in a closed vehicle during warm
weather. To avoid burning yourself or a child, check them before you or your child touches
them.
NOTE
Your Mazda is equipped with LATCH lower anchors for attachment of specially designed
LATCH child-restraint systems in the rear seats. When using these anchors to secure a
child-restraint system, refer to "Using LATCH Lower Anchor" (page 2-36 ).
2–27
Essential Safety Equipment
Child-Restraint
Child-Restraint System
Installation
Child-Restraint System Types
In this owner's manual, explanation of
child-restraint systems is provided for the
following three types of popular childrestraint systems: infant seat, child seat,
booster seat.
NOTE
Installation position is determined
by the type of child-restraint system.
Always read the manufacturer's
instructions and this owner's manual
carefully.
Due to variations in the design of childrestraint systems, vehicle seats and
seat belts, all child-restraint systems
may not fi t all seating positions. Before
purchasing a child-restraint system, it
should be tested in the specifi c vehicle
seating position (or positions) where it
is intended to be used. If a previously
purchased child-restraint system does
not fi t, you may need to purchase a
different one that will.
Infant seat
An infant seat provides restraint by
bracing the infant's head, neck and back
against the seating surface.
Child seat
A child seat restrains a child's body using
the harness.
Booster seat
A booster seat is a child restraint accessory
designed to improve the fi t of the seat belt
system around the child's body.
2–28
Essential Safety Equipment
Child-Restraint
Installing Child-Restraint
Systems
Accident statistics reveal that a child is
safer in the rear seat. The front passenger's
seat is clearly the worst choice for any
child under 12, and with rear-facing childrestraint systems it is clearly unsafe due to
air bags.
NOTE
Even if your vehicle is equipped with front
passenger seat weight sensors (page 256), which automatically deactivates the
front passenger air bag, a rear seat is the
safest place for a child of any age or size.
Some child-restraint systems now come
with tethers and therefore must be
installed on the seats that take tethers
to be effective. In your Mazda, tethered
child-restraint systems can only be
accommodated in the three positions on
the rear seat.
Some child-restraint systems also employ
specially designed LATCH attachments;
refer to "Using LATCH Lower Anchor"
(page 2-36 ).
WARNING
Tethered Child-Restraint Systems Work
Only on Tether-Equipped Rear Seats:
Installation of a tether equipped
child-restraint system in the front
passenger's seat defeats the safety
design of the system and will result in
an increased chance of serious injury if
the child-restraint system goes forward
without benefi t of being tethered.
Place tether equipped child-restraint
systems where there are tether
anchors.
Anchor Bracket
Anchor brackets for securing childrestraint systems are equipped in the
vehicle. Locate each anchor position using
the illustration.
To install a child-restraint system,
always follow the instruction manual
accompanying the child-restraint system.
Anchor bracket location
Use the indicated anchor bracket locations
when installing a child-restraint system
equipped with a tether.
Anchor bracket
For right
For left
For center(4-Door)
2–29
Essential Safety Equipment
Child-Restraint
(5-Door)
For left
For center For right Some models.
WARNING
Always attach the tether strap to the
correct tether anchor position:
Attaching the tether strap to the
incorrect tether anchor position is
dangerous. In a collision, the tether
strap could come off and loosen the
child-restraint system. If the childrestraint system moves it could result
in death or injury to the child.
Always route the tether strap between
the head restraint and the seatback:
Routing the tether strap on top of
the head restraint is dangerous. In a
collision the tether strap could slide off
the head restraint and loosen the childrestraint system. The child-restraint
system could move which may result in
death or injury to the child.
Anchor bracket
Tether strap(4-Door)
Anchor bracket
Tether strap
*Some models.2–30
Essential Safety Equipment
Child-Restraint
Tether strap
Forward
(5-Door)
Tether strap
Forward
Using Automatic Locking Mode *
Follow these instructions when using
a child-restraint system, unless you are
attaching a LATCH-equipped childrestraint system to the rear LATCH lower
anchors. Refer to “Using LATCH Lower
Anchor” (page 2-36 ).
NOTE
Follow the child-restraint system
manufacturer's instructions carefully.
If you are not sure whether you have a
LATCH system or tether, check in the
child-restraint system manufacturer's
instructions and follow them accordingly.
Depending on the type of child-restraint
system, it may use LATCH system instead
of seat belts or if the belt goes across the
child's chest, may recommend against
using automatic locking mode.
1. Make sure the seatback is securely
latched by pushing it back until it is
fully locked.
2. Raise the head restraint to the top
locked position.
Refer to Head Restraints on page 2-10 .
3. Secure the child-restraint system with
the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.
See the manufacturer's instructions
on the child-restraint system for belt
routing instructions.
2–31
Essential Safety Equipment
Child-Restraint
4. To get the retractor into the automatic
locking mode, pull the shoulder belt
portion of the seat belt until the entire
length of the belt is out of the retractor.
5. Push the child-restraint system fi rmly
into the vehicle seat. Be sure the
belt retracts as snugly as possible. A
clicking noise from the retractor will be
heard during retraction if the system is
in the automatic locking mode. If the
belt does not lock the seat down tight,
repeat this step.
NOTE
Inspect this function before each use of
the child-restraint system. You should
not be able to pull the shoulder belt out
of the retractor while the system is in the
automatic locking mode. When you remove
the child-restraint system, be sure the
belt fully retracts to return the system to
emergency locking mode before occupants
use the seat belts.
6. If your child-restraint system requires
the use of a tether strap, refer to the
manufacturer's instructions to hook and
tighten the tether strap.
WARNING
Use the tether and tether anchor only
for a child-restraint system:
Using the tether or tether anchor to
secure anything but a child-restraint
system is dangerous. This could
weaken or damage the tether or tether
anchor and result in injury.
2–32
Essential Safety Equipment
Child-Restraint
Always route the tether strap between
the head restraint and the seatback:
Routing the tether strap on top of
the head restraint is dangerous. In a
collision the tether strap could slide off
the head restraint and loosen the childrestraint system. The child-restraint
system could move which may result in
death or injury to the child.
Anchor bracket
Tether strap(4-Door)
Anchor bracket
Tether strap
Tether strap
Forward
(5-Door)
Tether strap
Forward
Always attach the tether strap to the
correct tether anchor position:
Attaching the tether strap to the
incorrect tether anchor position is
dangerous. In a collision, the tether
strap could come off and loosen the
child-restraint system. If the childrestraint system moves it could result
in death or injury to the child.
2–33
Essential Safety Equipment
Child-Restraint
If You Must Use the Front Seat for
Children
If you cannot put all children in the rear
seat, at least put the smallest children
in the rear and be sure the largest child
up front uses the shoulder belt over the
shoulder.
NEVER put a rear-facing child-restraint
system on the front passenger seat whether
your vehicle is equipped with a seat
weight sensor or not.
This seat is also not set up for tethered
child-restraint systems, put them in one of
the rear seat positions set up with tether
anchors.
Likewise the LATCH child-restraint
system cannot be secured in the front
passenger's seat and should be used in the
rear seat.
Do not allow anyone to sleep against the
side window since your vehicle has side
and curtain air bags, it could cause serious
injuries to an out of position occupant.
As children more often sleep in cars,
it is better to put them in the rear seat.
If installing the child-restraint system
on the front seat is unavoidable, follow
these instructions when using a frontfacing child-restraint system in the front
passenger's seat.
NOTE
To check if your front seats have side
air bags:
Mazda vehicles equipped with side air
bag will have a "SRS AIRBAG" tag on
the outboard shoulder of the front seats.
To check if your vehicle has curtain air
bags:
Mazda vehicles equipped with curtain
air bag will have an "SRS AIRBAG"
marking on the window pillars along
the roof edge.
WARNING
Always move the front passenger seat
as far back as possible if installing a
front-facing child-restraint system on it
is unavoidable:
As your vehicle has front air bags and
doubly so because your vehicle has
side air bags, a front-facing childrestraint system should be put on the
front passenger seat only when it is
unavoidable.
Even if the front passenger air
bag deactivation indicator light
illuminates, always move the seat as
far back as possible, because the force
of a deploying air bag could cause
serious injury or death to the child.
Never use a rear-facing child-restraint
system in the front seat with an air bag
that could deploy:
Rear-facing child-restraint systems
on the front seat are particularly
dangerous.
Even in a moderate collision, the
child-restraint system can be hit
by a deploying air bag and moved
violently backward resulting in
serious injury or death to the child.
Even though you may feel assured
that the front passenger air bag will
not deploy based on the fact that the
front passenger air bag deactivation
indicator light illuminates, you should
not use a rear-facing child-restraint
system in the front seat.
2–34
Essential Safety Equipment
Child-Restraint
Do not allow a child or anyone to lean
over or against the side window of a
vehicle with side and curtain air bags:
It is dangerous to allow anyone to lean
over or against the side window, the
area of the front passenger seat, the
front and rear window pillars and the
roof edge along both sides from which
the side and curtain air bags deploy,
even if a child-restraint system is used.
The impact of infl ation from a side or
curtain air bag could cause serious
injury or death to an out of position
child. Furthermore, leaning over or
against the front door could block the
side and curtain air bags and eliminate
the advantages of supplemental
protection. With the front air bag and
the additional side air bag that comes
out of the front seat, the rear seat is
always a better location for children.
Take special care not to allow a child to
lean over or against the side window,
even if the child is seated in a childrestraint system.
Front Passenger's Seat Child-Restraint
System Installation (With Front
Passenger Occupant Classifi cation
System)
1. Switch the ignition ON.
2. Slide the seat as far back as possible.
3. Place the child-restraint system on the
seat without putting your weight on
the seat and fasten the seat belt. See
the manufacturer's instructions on the
child-restraint system for belt routing
instructions.
4. To get the retractor into the automatic
locking mode, pull the shoulder belt
portion of the seat belt until the entire
length of the belt is out of the retractor.
5. Push the child-restraint system fi rmly
into the vehicle seat. Be sure the
belt retracts as snugly as possible. A
clicking noise from the retractor will
be heard during retraction if the system
is in automatic locking mode. If the
belt does not lock the seat down tight,
repeat the previous step and also this
one.
2–35
Essential Safety Equipment
Child-Restraint
NOTE
Inspect this function before each use of
the child-restraint system. You should
not be able to pull the shoulder belt
out of the retractor while the system is
in the automatic locking mode. When
you remove the child-restraint system,
be sure the belt fully retracts to return
the system to emergency locking mode
before occupants use the seat belts.
Follow the child-restraint system
manufacturer's instructions carefully.
Depending on the type of child-restraint
system, it may not employ seat belts
which are in automatic locking mode.
6. Seat your child safely in the childrestraint system and secure the child
according to the instructions from the
child-restraint system manufacturer.
7. Make sure the front passenger air bag
deactivation indicator light illuminates
after installing a child-restraint system
on the front passenger seat.
If the front passenger air bag
deactivation indicator light does not
illuminate, remove the child-restraint
system, switch the ignition to OFF, and
then re-install the child-restraint system
(page 2-56 ).
WARNING
Do not seat a child in a child-restraint
system on the front passenger seat if the
front passenger air bag deactivation
indicator light does not illuminate (With
Front Passenger Occupant Classifi cation
System):
While it is always better to install any
child-restraint system on the rear seat,
it is imperative that a child-restraint
system ONLY be used on the front
passenger seat if the deactivation
indicator light illuminates when the
child is seated in the child-restraint
system (page 2-56 ). Seating a child
in a child-restraint system installed
on the front passenger seat with the
front passenger air bag deactivation
indicator light not illuminated is
dangerous. If this indicator light does
not illuminate, this means that the
front passenger front and side air
bags, and seat belt pretensioner are
ready for deployment. If an accident
were to deploy an air bag, a child in
a child-restraint system sitting in the
front passenger seat could be seriously
injured or killed. If the indicator light
does not illuminate after seating a
child in a child-restraint system on
the front passenger seat, seat a child
in a child-restraint system on the rear
seat and consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer as soon as possible.
2–36
Essential Safety Equipment
Child-Restraint
Using LATCH Lower Anchor
Your Mazda is equipped with LATCH lower anchors for attachment of specially designed
LATCH child-restraint systems in the rear seats. Both anchors must be used, otherwise the
seat will bounce around and put the child in danger. Most LATCH child-restraint systems
must also be used in conjunction with a tether to be effective. If they have a tether you must
use it to better assure your child's safety.
WARNING
Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the use of the child-restraint system:
An unsecured child-restraint system is dangerous. In a sudden stop or a collision it could
move causing serious injury or death to the child or other occupants. Make sure the
child-restraint system is properly secured in place according to the child-restraint system
manufacturer's instructions.
Never attach two child-restraint systems to the same LATCH lower anchor:
Attaching two child-restraint systems to the same LATCH lower anchor is dangerous.
In a collision, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child-restraint system
attachments, and it may break, causing serious injury or death. If you use the seat
position for another child-restraint system when an outboard LATCH position is occupied,
use the center seat belts instead, and the tether if tether-equipped.
Make sure the child-restraint system is properly secured:
An unsecured child-restraint system is dangerous. In a sudden stop or a collision it could
move causing serious injury or death to the child or other occupants. Follow the childrestraint system manufacturer's instructions on belt routing to secure the seat just as you
would with a child in it so that nobody is tempted to put a child in an improperly secured
seat later on. When not in use, remove it from the vehicle or fasten it with a seat belt, or
latch it down to BOTH LATCH lower anchors for LATCH child-restraint systems.
Make sure there are no seat belts or foreign objects near or around the LATCH childrestraint system:
Not following the child-restraint system manufacturer's instructions when installing
the child-restraint system is dangerous. If seat belts or a foreign object prevent the
child-restraint system from being securely attached to the LATCH lower anchors and the
child-restraint system is installed improperly, the child-restraint system could move in a
sudden stop or collision causing serious injury or death to the child or other occupants.
When installing the child-restraint system, make sure there are no seat belts or foreign
objects near or around the LATCH lower anchors. Always follow the child-restraint system
manufacturer's instructions.
2–37
Essential Safety Equipment
Child-Restraint
Installation on rear outboard seats
1. First, adjust the front seat to allow
clearance between the child-restraint
system and the front seat (page 2-5 ).
2. Make sure the seatback is securely
latched by pushing it back until it is
fully locked.
3. Expand the area between the seat
bottom and the seatback slightly to
verify the locations of the LATCH
lower anchors.
NOTE
The markings above the LATCH lower
anchors indicate the locations of the
LATCH lower anchors for the attachment
of a child-restraint system.
4. Raise the head restraint to the top
locked position.
Refer to Head Restraints on page 2-10 .
5. Secure the child-restraint system
using BOTH LATCH lower anchors,
following the child-restraint system
manufacturer's instruction. Pull on the
child-restraint to be sure both anchors
are engaged.
6. If your child-restraint system came
equipped with a tether, that means it is
very important to properly secure the
tether for child safety. Please carefully
follow the child-restraint system
manufacturer's instructions when
installing tethers.
WARNING
Use the tether and tether anchor only
for a child-restraint system:
Using the tether or tether anchor to
secure anything but a child-restraint
system is dangerous. This could
weaken or damage the tether or tether
anchor and result in injury.
Always route the tether strap between
the head restraint and the seatback:
Routing the tether strap on top of
the head restraint is dangerous. In a
collision the tether strap could slide off
the head restraint and loosen the childrestraint system. The child-restraint
system could move which may result in
death or injury to the child.
Anchor bracket
Tether strap(4-Door)
2–38
Essential Safety Equipment
Child-Restraint
Tether strap
Forward
(5-Door)
Always attach the tether strap to the
correct tether anchor position:
Attaching the tether strap to the
incorrect tether anchor position is
dangerous. In a collision, the tether
strap could come off and loosen the
child-restraint system. If the childrestraint system moves it could result
in death or injury to the child.
Installation on rear center seat
The LATCH lower anchors at the center
of the rear seat are much further apart
than the sets of LATCH lower anchors
for child-restraint system installation at
other seating positions. Child-restraint
systems with rigid LATCH attachments
cannot be installed on the center seating
position. Some LATCH equipped childrestraint systems can be placed in the
center position and will reach the nearest
LATCH lower anchors which are 443 mm
(17.4 in) apart. LATCH compatible childrestraint systems (with attachments on
belt webbing) can be used at this seating
position only if the child-restraint system
manufacturer's instructions state that the
child-restraint system can be installed to
LATCH lower anchors that are 443 mm
(17.4 in) apart. Do not attach two childrestraint systems to the same LATCH
lower anchor. If your child-restraint
system has a tether, it must also be used
for your child's optimum safety.
The procedure for installation on the rear
outboards seats is the same.
LATCH lower anchor location
2–39
Essential Safety Equipment
Child-Restraint
WARNING
Always route the tether strap between
the head restraint and the seatback:
Routing the tether strap on top of
the head restraint is dangerous. In a
collision the tether strap could slide off
the head restraint and loosen the childrestraint system. The child-restraint
system could move which may result in
death or injury to the child.
Anchor bracket
Tether strap
(4-Door)
Tether strap
Forward
(5-Door)
Always attach the tether strap to the
correct tether anchor position:
Attaching the tether strap to the
incorrect tether anchor position is
dangerous. In a collision, the tether
strap could come off and loosen the
child-restraint system. If the childrestraint system moves it could result
in death or injury to the child.
*Some models.2–40
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Precautions
The front and side supplemental restraint systems (SRS) include up to 6 air bags. Please
verify which kinds of air bags are equipped on your vehicle by locating the “SRS
AIRBAG” location indicators. These indicators are visible in the area where the air bags
are installed.
The air bags are installed in the following locations:
The steering wheel hub (driver air bag)
The front passenger dashboard (front passenger air bag)
The outboard sides of the front seatbacks (side air bags) *
The front and rear window pillars, and the roof edge along both sides (curtain air bags) *
Vehicles with the Front Passenger Occupant Classifi cation System have a sensor which
detects an impending roll-over accident.
The air bag supplemental restraint systems are designed to provide supplemental protection
in certain situations so seat belts are always important in the following ways:
Without seat belt usage, the air bags cannot provide adequate protection during an accident.
Seat belt usage is necessary to:
Keep the occupant from being thrown into an infl ating air bag.
Reduce the possibility of injuries during an accident that is not designed for air bag
infl ation, such as rear impact.
Reduce the possibility of injuries in frontal, near frontal or side collisions or roll-over
accidents that are not severe enough to activate the air bags.
Reduce the possibility of being thrown from your vehicle.
Reduce the possibility of injuries to lower body and legs during an accident because the
air bags provide no protection to these parts of the body.
Hold the driver in a position which allows better control of the vehicle.
2–41
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
If your vehicle is also equipped with a front passenger occupant classifi cation system,
refer to the Front Passenger Occupant Classifi cation System (page 2-56 ) for details.
If your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classifi cation system, the front
passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates for a specifi ed time after the
ignition is switched ON.
Small children must be protected by a child-restraint system as stipulated by law in every
state and province. In certain states and provinces, larger children must use a child-restraint
system (page 2-22 ).
Carefully consider which child-restraint system is necessary for your child and follow
the installation directions in this Owner's Manual as well as the child-restraint system
manufacturer's instructions.
WARNING
Seat belts must be worn in air bag equipped vehicles:
Depending only on the air bags for protection during an accident is dangerous. Alone,
air bags may not prevent serious injuries. The appropriate air bags can be expected to
infl ate only in the fi rst accident, such as frontal, near frontal or side collisions or roll-over
accidents that are at least moderate. Vehicle occupants should always wear seat belts.
Children should not ride in the front passenger seat:
Placing a child, 12 years or under, in the front seat is dangerous. The child could be hit
by a deploying air bag and be seriously injured or even killed. A sleeping child is more
likely to lean against the door and be hit by the side air bag in moderate collision to the
front-passenger side of the vehicle. Whenever possible, always secure a child 12 years and
under on the rear seats with an appropriate child-restraint system for the child's age and
size.
2–42
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Never use a rear-facing child-restraint system in the front seat with an air bag that
could deploy:
Rear-facing child-restraint systems on the front seat are particularly dangerous even
though you may feel assured that a front passenger air bag will not deploy based on
the fact that the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates. The
child-restraint system can be hit by a deploying air bag and moved violently backward
resulting in serious injury or death to the child.
Do not sit too close to the driver and front passenger air bags:
Sitting too close to the driver and front passenger air bag modules or placing hands or
feet on them is extremely dangerous. The driver and front passenger air bags infl ate with
great force and speed. Serious injuries could occur if someone is too close. The driver
should always hold onto only the rim of the steering wheel. The front seat passenger
should keep both feet on the fl oor. Front seat occupants should adjust their seats as
far back as possible and always sit upright against the seatbacks with seat belts worn
properly.
Sit in the center of the seat and wear seat belts properly:
Sitting too close to the side air bag modules or placing hands on them, or sleeping up
against the door or hanging out the windows is extremely dangerous. The side and
curtain air bags infl ate with great force and speed directly expanding along the door
on the side the car is hit. Serious injury could occur if someone is sitting too close to the
door or leaning against a window, or if rear seat occupants grab the sides of the front
seatbacks. Give the side and curtain air bags room to work by sitting in the center of the
seat while the vehicle is moving with seat belts worn properly.
Do not attach objects on or around the area where driver and front passenger air bags
deploy:
Attaching an object to the driver and front passenger air bag modules or placing
something in front of them is dangerous. In an accident, an object could interfere with air
bag infl ation and injure the occupants.
2–43
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Do not attach objects on or around the area where a side air bag deploys:
Attaching objects to the front seat in such a way as to cover the outboard side of the
seat in any way is dangerous. In an accident the object could interfere with the side
air bag, which infl ates from the outboard side of the front seats, impeding the added
protection of the side air bag system or redirecting the air bag in a way that is dangerous.
Furthermore, the bag could be cut open releasing the gas.
Do not hang net bags, map pouches or backpacks with side straps on the front seats.
Never use seat covers on the front seats. Always keep the side air bag modules in your
front seats free to deploy in the event of a side collision.
Do not attach objects on or around the area where a curtain air bag deploys:
Attaching objects to the areas where the curtain air bag activates such as on the
windshield glass, side door glass, front and rear window pillars and along the roof edge
and assist grips is dangerous. In an accident the object could interfere with the curtain
air bag, which infl ates from the front and rear window pillars and along the roof edge,
impeding the added protection of the curtain air bag system or redirecting the air bag in
a way that is dangerous. Furthermore, the bag could be cut open releasing the gas.
Do not place hangers or any other objects on the assist grips. When hanging clothes,
hang them on the coat hook directly. Always keep the curtain air bag modules free to
deploy in the event of a side collision or roll-over accident.
Do not touch the components of the supplemental restraint system after the air bags
have infl ated:
Touching the components of the supplemental restraint system after the air bags have
infl ated is dangerous. Immediately after infl ation, they are very hot. You could get burned.
Never install any front-end equipment to your vehicle:
Installation of front-end equipment, such as frontal protection bar (kangaroo bar, bull
bar, push bar, or other similar devices), snowplow, or winches, is dangerous. The air bag
crash sensor system could be aff ected. This could cause air bags to infl ate unexpectedly,
or it could prevent the air bags from infl ating during an accident. Front occupants could
be seriously injured.
Do not modify the suspension:
Modifying the vehicle suspension is dangerous. If the vehicle's height or the suspension is
modifi ed, the vehicle will be unable to accurately detect a collision or roll-over accident
resulting in incorrect or unexpected air bag deployment and the possibility of serious
injuries.
2–44
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
To prevent false detection by the air bag sensor system, heed the following:
Do not use tires or wheels other than those specifi ed for your Mazda:
Use of any tire or wheel other than those specifi ed for your Mazda (page 9-10 ) is
dangerous. Use of such wheels will prevent the vehicle's accident detections system
from accurately detecting a collision or roll-over accident resulting in incorrect or
unexpected air bag deployment and the possibility of serious injuries.
Do not overload your vehicle:
Overloading your vehicle is dangerous as it could prevent the air bag crash sensor
system from accurately detecting a collision or roll-over accident resulting in incorrect
or unexpected air bag deployment and the possibility of serious injuries. The gross axle
weight rating (GAWR) and the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) for your vehicle are
on the Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Label on the Mazda Dealer. Do not exceed these
ratings.
Do not drive the vehicle off -road:
Driving your Mazda off -road is dangerous because the vehicle has not been designed
to do so. Driving the vehicle off -road could prevent the air bag crash sensor system
from accurately detecting a collision or roll-over accident resulting in incorrect or
unexpected air bag deployment and the possibility of serious injuries.
Do not modify a front door or leave any damage unrepaired. Always have an
Authorized Mazda Dealer inspect a damaged front door:
Modifying a front door or leaving any damage unrepaired is dangerous. Each front
door has a side crash sensor as a component of the supplemental restraint system. If
holes are drilled in a front door, a door speaker is left removed, or a damaged door is left
unrepaired, the sensor could be adversely aff ected causing it to not detect the pressure
of an impact correctly during a side collision. If a sensor does not detect a side impact
correctly, the side and curtain air bags and the front seat belt pretensioner may not
operate normally which could result in serious injury to occupants.
Do not modify the supplemental restraint system:
Modifying the components or wiring of the supplemental restraint system is dangerous.
You could accidentally activate it or make it inoperable. Do not make any modifi cations
to the supplemental restraint system. This includes installing trim, badges, or anything
else over the air bag modules. It also includes installing extra electrical equipment on or
near system components or wiring. An Authorized Mazda Dealer can provide the special
care needed in the removal and installation of front seats. It is important to protect the air
bag wiring and connections to assure that the bags do not accidentally deploy and that
the seats retain an undamaged air bag connection.
2–45
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Do not place luggage or other objects under the front seats:
Placing luggage or other objects under the front seats is dangerous. The components
essential to the supplemental restraint system could be damaged, and in the event of
a side collision, the appropriate air bags may not deploy, which could result in death
or serious injury. To prevent damage to the components essential to the supplemental
restraint system, do not place luggage or other objects under the front seats.
Do not operate a vehicle with damaged air bag/seat belt pretensioner system
components:
Expended or damaged air bag/seat belt pretensioner system components must be
replaced after any collision which caused them to deploy or damage them. Only a trained
Authorized Mazda Dealer can fully evaluate these systems to see that they will work in
any subsequent accident. Driving with an expended or damaged air bag or pretensioner
unit will not aff ord you the necessary protection in the event of any subsequent accident
which could result in serious injury or death.
Do not remove interior air bag parts:
Removing any components such as the front seats, front dashboard, the steering wheel
or parts on the front and rear window pillars and along the roof edge, containing air bag
parts or sensors is dangerous. These parts contain essential air bag components. The air
bag could accidentally activate and cause serious injuries. Always have an Authorized
Mazda Dealer remove these parts.
Properly dispose of the air bag system:
Improper disposal of an air bag or a vehicle with live air bags in it can be extremely
dangerous. Unless all safety procedures are followed, injury could result. Have an
Authorized Mazda Dealer safely dispose of the air bag system or scrap an air bag
equipped vehicle.
2–46
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
NOTE
If it becomes necessary to have the components or wiring system for the supplementary
restraint system modifi ed to accommodate a person with certain medical conditions in
accordance with a certifi ed physician, contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer, refer to
“Customer Assistance (U.S.A.)” (page 8-2 ).
When an air bag deploys, a loud infl ation noise can be heard and some smoke will be
released. Neither is likely to cause injury, however, the texture of the air bags may cause
light skin injuries on body parts not covered with clothing through friction.
Should you sell your Mazda, we urge you to tell the new owner of its air bag systems
and that familiarization with all instructions about them, from the Owner's Manual, is
important.
This highly-visible label is displayed which warns against the use of rear-facing childrestraint systems on the front passenger seat.
(U.S.A. and Canada)
(Mexico)
2–47
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Supplemental Restraint System Components
(With Front Passenger Occupant Classifi cation System)
*Some models.2–48
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
(Without Front Passenger Occupant Classifi cation System)
Driver/Front passenger infl ators and air bags
Roll-over sensor * , crash sensors, and diagnostic module (SAS unit)
Front seat belt pretensioners (page 2-16 )
Front air bag sensors
Side crash sensors
Air bag/front seat belt pretensioner system warning light (page 4-21 )
Side and curtain infl ators and air bags
Front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light (page 2-56 )
Front passenger seat weight sensors (page 2-56 )
Front passenger seat weight sensor control module
Driver and front passenger seat belt buckle switches (page 2-60 )
NOTE
- are equipped only on models with the front passenger occupant classifi cation system.
2–49
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
How the SRS Air Bags Work
Your Mazda is equipped with the following types of SRS air bags. SRS air bags are
designed to work together with the seat belts to help to reduce injuries during an accident.
The SRS air bags are designed to provide further protection for passengers in addition to the
seat belt functions. Be sure to wear seat belts properly.
Front Seat Belt Pretensioners
The front seat belt pretensioners are designed to deploy in moderate or severe frontal, near
frontal collisions. In addition, during a side collision, the pretensioner operates on the side in
which the collision occurs.
(With Front Passenger Occupant Classifi cation System)
The front seat belt pretensioners are also designed to deploy in a roll-over accident.
Driver Air Bag
The driver's air bag is mounted in the steering wheel.
When air bag crash sensors detect a frontal impact of greater than moderate force, the
driver's air bag infl ates quickly helping to reduce injury mainly to the driver's head or chest
caused by directly hitting the steering wheel.
For more details about air bag deployment, refer to "SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria"
(page 2-53 ).
(With Front Passenger Occupant Classifi cation System)
The driver's dual-stage air bag controls air bag infl ation in two energy stages. During an
impact of moderate severity the driver's air bag deploys with lesser energy, whereas during
more severe impacts, it deploys with more energy.
*Some models.2–50
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Front Passenger Air Bag
The front passenger air bag is mounted in the front passenger dashboard.
The infl ation mechanism for the front passenger air bag is the same as the driver's air bag, as
mentioned above.
For more details about air bag deployment, refer to "SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria"
(page 2-53 ).
(With Front Passenger Occupant Classifi cation System)
In addition, the front passenger air bag is designed to only deploy in accordance with the
total seated weight on the front passenger seat. For details, refer to the front passenger
occupant classifi cation system (page 2-56 ).
Side Air Bags *
The side air bags are mounted in the outboard sides of the front seatbacks.
When the air bag crash sensors detect a side impact of greater than moderate force, the
system infl ates the side air bag only on the side in which the vehicle was hit. The side
air bag infl ates quickly to reduce injury to the driver or front passenger's chest caused by
directly hitting interior parts such as a door or window.
For more details about air bag deployment, refer to "SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria"
(page 2-53 ).
*Some models. 2–51
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
(With Front Passenger Occupant Classifi cation System)
In addition, the front passenger side air bag is designed to only deploy in accordance with
the total seated weight on the front passenger seat. For details, refer to the front passenger
occupant classifi cation system (page 2-56 ).
Curtain Air Bags *
The curtain air bags are mounted in the front and rear window pillars, and the roof edge
along both sides.
When the air bag crash sensors detect a side impact of greater than moderate force, the
curtain air bag infl ates quickly and helps to reduce injury mainly to the rear outboard
passenger's head caused by directly hitting interior parts such as a door or window.
For more details about air bag deployment, refer to "SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria"
(page 2-53 ).
In a side impact:
Greater than moderate impact to one side of the vehicle will cause the curtain air bag on that
side only to infl ate.
Only one side curtain air bag will deploy on the
side of the vehicle that receives the force of an
impact.
2–52
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
(With Front Passenger Occupant Classifi cation System)
In a roll-over:
In response to a vehicle roll-over, both curtain air bags infl ate.
Both curtain air bags will deploy after
the roll-over accident is detected.
(With Front Passenger Occupant Classifi cation System)
In an angled collision:
During a collision, the driver and front passenger's air bags will deploy. Depending on the
nature of the impact, the side air bag and the curtain air bag may deploy.
Warning Light/Beep
A system malfunction or operation conditions are indicated by a warning.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page 4-21 .
Refer to Warning Sound is Activated on page 7-36 .
2–53
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria
This chart indicates the applicable SRS equipment that will deploy depending on the type of
collision.
(The illustrations are the representative cases of collisions.)
SRS
equipment
Types of collision
A severe frontal/near frontal
collision
A severe side
collision
A roll-over/near
roll-over*3 A rear collision
Front
seat belt
pretensioner
X *1 (both sides) X
*1 (impact side
only) X
*1 (both sides)
No air bag and
front seat belt
pretensioner will be
activated in a rear
collision.
Driver air
bag X
Front
passenger
air bag
X *1
Side air bag X *2 X
*1 (impact side
only)
Curtain air
bag X
*2 X (impact side
only) X (both sides)
X: The SRS air bag equipment is designed to deploy in a collision.
*1 (With Front Passenger Occupant Classifi cation System)
The front passenger front and side air bags and the seat belt pretensioner are designed to
deploy depending on the condition of the total seated weight on the front passenger seat.
*2 (With Front Passenger Occupant Classifi cation System)
In an angled collision, the side air bag and curtain air bag may deploy.
*3 (With Front Passenger Occupant Classifi cation System)
In a roll-over accident, the seat belt pretensioners and the curtain air bags deploy.
2–54
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Limitations to SRS Air Bag
In severe collisions such as those described previously in "SRS Air Bag Deployment
Criteria", the applicable SRS air bag equipment will deploy. However, in some accidents,
the equipment may not deploy depending on the type of collision and its severity.
Limitations to front/near front collision detection:
The following illustrations are examples of front/near front collisions that may not be
detected as severe enough to deploy the SRS air bag equipment.
Impacts involving trees or poles Frontal offset impact to the vehicle
Rear-ending or running under a truck's tail gate
2–55
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Limitations to side collision detection:
The following illustrations are examples of side collisions that may not be detected as severe
enough to deploy the SRS air bag equipment.
Side impacts involving trees or poles Side impacts with two-wheeled vehicles
Roll-over (Without Front Passenger Occupant Classification System)
(With Front Passenger Occupant Classifi cation System)
Limitations to roll-over detection:
The following illustration is an example of an accident that may not be detected as a rollover accident. Therefore, the front seat belt pretensioners and curtain air bags may not
deploy.
Pitch end over end
*Some models.2–56
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Front Passenger Occupant Classifi cation System *
First, please read "Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Precautions" (page 2-40 ) carefully.
Front Passenger Seat Weight Sensor
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger seat weight sensors as a part of the
supplemental restraint system. These sensors are located under both of the front passenger
seat rails. These sensors determine the total seated weight on the front passenger seat and
monitor the seat belt buckle for the front passenger seat. The SAS unit is designed to prevent
the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner system from deploying
if the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates.
To reduce the chance of injuries caused by deployment of the front passenger air bag,
the system deactivates the front passenger front and side air bags and also the seat
belt pretensioner system when the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light
illuminates. Refer to the following table for the front passenger air bag deactivation
indicator light illumination conditions.
This system shuts off the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner
system, so make sure the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates
according to the following table.
The air bag/front seat belt pretensioner system warning light fl ashes and the front passenger
air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates if the sensors have a possible malfunction.
If this happens, the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner system
will not deploy.
Front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light
This indicator light illuminates to remind you that the front passenger front and side air bags
and seat belt pretensioner will not deploy during a collision.
2–57
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
If the front passenger weight sensors are normal, the indicator light illuminates when the
ignition is switched ON. The light turns off after a few seconds.
The front/passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates or is off under the
following conditions:
Condition detected by
the front passenger
occupant classifi cation
system
Front passenger air bag
deactivation indicator light
Front passenger front
and side air bags
Front passenger seat
belt pretensioner
system
Empty (Not occupied) On Deactivated Deactivated
Child or child-restraint
system*1 On Deactivated Deactivated
Adult *2 Off Ready Ready
*1 If a larger child sits on the front passenger seat, the sensors might detect the child as being an adult depending
on the child's physique.
*2 If a smaller adult sits on the front passenger seat, the sensors might detect the person as being a child depending
on the person's physique.
The curtain air bag is ready for infl ating regardless of the chart above.
If the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light does not illuminate when the
ignition is switched ON and does not illuminate as indicated in the above chart, do not allow
a child to sit in the front passenger seat and consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as
possible. The system may not work properly in an accident.
WARNING
Do not decrease the total seated weight on the front passenger seat:
When an adult or large child sits on the front passenger seat, decreasing the total seated
weight on the front passenger seat required for air bag deployment is dangerous. The
front passenger seat weight sensors will detect the reduced total seated weight condition
and the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner system will
not deploy during an accident. The front passenger will not have the supplementary
protection of the air bag, which could result in serious injury. Decreasing the total seated
weight on the front passenger seat could result in an air bag not deploying under the
following conditions, for example:
2–58
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
A front passenger is seated as shown in the following fi gure:
A rear passenger pushes up on the front passenger seat with their feet.
Luggage or other items placed under the front passenger seat or between the front
passenger seat and driver seat that push up the front passenger seat bottom.
Any accessories which might decrease the total seated weight on the front passenger
seat are attached to the front passenger seat.
The front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner systems will
deactivate if the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates.
2–59
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Do not increase the total seated weight on the front passenger seat:
When an infant or small child sits on the front passenger seat, increasing the total seated
weight on the front passenger seat is dangerous. The front passenger seat weight sensors
will detect the increased total seated weight, which could result in the unexpected
deployment of the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner
system in an accident and may cause serious injury. Increasing the total seated weight on
the front passenger seat could result in the front passenger front and side air bags and
seat belt pretensioner system deployment in an accident under the following conditions,
for example:
Luggage or other items are placed on the seat with the child in the child-restraint
system.
A rear passenger or luggage push or pull down on the front passenger seatback.
A rear passenger steps on the front passenger seat rails with their feet.
Luggage or other items are placed on the seatback or hung on the head restraint.
Heavy items are placed in the seatback map pocket.
The seat is washed.
Liquids are spilled on the seat.
The front passenger seat is moved backward, pushing into luggage or other items
placed behind it.
The front passenger seatback contacts the rear seat.
Luggage or other items are placed between the front passenger seat and driver seat.
Any accessories which might increase the total seated weight on the front passenger
seat are attached to the front passenger seat.
CAUTION
To assure proper deployment of the front air bag and to prevent damage to the sensors in
the front seat bottoms:
Do not place sharp objects on the front seat bottoms or leave heavy luggage on them.
Do not spill any liquids on the front seats or under the front seats.
To allow the sensors to function properly, always perform the following:
Adjust the front seats as far back as possible and always sit upright against the
seatbacks with seat belts worn properly.
If you place your child on the front passenger seat, secure the child-restraint system
properly and slide the front passenger seat as far back as possible (page 2-30 ).
2–60
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
NOTE
The system requires about 10 seconds to alternate between turning the front passenger
front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner system on or off.
The front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light may illuminate repeatedly if
luggage or other items are put on the front passenger seat, or if the temperature of the
vehicle's interior changes suddenly.
The front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light may illuminate for 10 seconds if
the total seated weight on the front passenger seat changes.
The air bag/front seat belt pretensioner system warning light might illuminate if the front
passenger seat receives a severe impact.
If the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light does not illuminate after
installing a child-restraint system on the front passenger seat, fi rst, re-install your childrestraint system according to the procedure in this owner's manual. Then, if the front
passenger air bag deactivation indicator light still does not illuminate, install the childrestraint system on the rear seat and consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as
possible.
If the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates when an adult is
seated in the front passenger seat, have the passenger re-adjust their posture by sitting
with their feet on the fl oor, and then re-fastening the seat belt. If the front passenger air
bag deactivation indicator light still illuminates, move the passenger to the rear seat.
If sitting in the rear seat is not possible, slide the front passenger seat as far back as
possible. Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
Driver and Front Passenger Buckle Switches
The buckle switches on the front seat belts detect whether or not the front seat belts are
securely fastened and further control the deployment of the air bags.
2–61
Essential Safety Equipment
SRS Air Bags
Constant Monitoring
The following components of the air bag systems are monitored by a diagnostic system:
Crash sensors, and diagnostic module (SAS unit)
Front air bag sensors
Air bag modules
Side crash sensors
Air bag/Front seat belt pretensioner system warning light
Front seat belt pretensioners
Related wiring
(With Front Passenger Occupant Classifi cation System)
Front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light
Front passenger seat weight sensors
Front passenger seat weight sensor control module
Front passenger seat belt buckle switches
The diagnostic module continuously monitors the system's readiness. This begins when the
ignition is switched ON and continues while the vehicle is being driven.
2–62
MEMO
*Some models. 3–1
3 Before Driving
Use of various features, including keys, doors, mirrors and windows.
Keys ...................................................... 3-2
Keys ............................................... 3-2
Keyless Entry System .................... 3-3
Advanced Keyless Entry System ........ 3-9
Advanced Keyless Entry
System* ........................................... 3-9
Operational Range ....................... 3-10
Doors and Locks ................................ 3-11
Door Locks ................................... 3-11
Liftgate/Trunk Lid ........................ 3-21
Inside Trunk Release Lever
(4-Door)* ...................................... 3-25
Fuel and Emission ............................. 3-27
Fuel and Engine Exhaust
Precautions ................................... 3-27
Fuel-Filler Lid and Cap ................ 3-30
Steering Wheel................................... 3-32
Steering Wheel ............................. 3-32
Mirrors ............................................... 3-33
Mirrors ......................................... 3-33
Windows ............................................. 3-36
Power Windows ........................... 3-36
Moonroof * ................................... 3-39
Security System ................................. 3-41
Modifi cation and Add-On
Equipment .................................... 3-41
Immobilizer System ..................... 3-41
Theft-Deterrent System* .............. 3-43
Driving Tips ....................................... 3-45
Break-In Period ............................ 3-45
Money-Saving Suggestions ......... 3-45
Hazardous Driving ....................... 3-46
Floor Mat ..................................... 3-46
Rocking the Vehicle ..................... 3-47
Winter Driving ............................. 3-47
Driving In Flooded Area .............. 3-49
Overloading .................................. 3-50
Driving on Uneven Road ............. 3-51
Towing ................................................ 3-52
Trailer Towing .............................. 3-52
Recreational Towing .................... 3-52
3–2
Before Driving
Keys
Keys
WARNING
Do not leave the key in your vehicle with
children and keep them in a place where
your children will not fi nd or play with
them:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the
key is dangerous. This could result in
someone being badly injured or even
killed. Children may fi nd these keys to
be an interesting toy to play with and
could cause the power windows or
other controls to operate, or even make
the vehicle move.
CAUTION
Because the key (transmitter) uses
low-intensity radio waves, it may not
function correctly under the following
conditions:
The key is carried with
communication devices such as
cellular phones.
The key contacts or is covered by a
metal object.
The key is near electronic devices such
as personal computers.
Non-Mazda genuine electronic
equipment is installed in the vehicle.
There is equipment which discharges
radio waves near the vehicle.
The key (transmitter) may consume
battery power excessively if it receives
high-intensity radio waves. Do not place
the key near electronic devices such as
televisions or personal computers.
To avoid damage to the key
(transmitter), DO NOT:
Drop the key.
Get the key wet.
Disassemble the key.
Expose the key to high temperatures
on places such as the dashboard or
hood, under direct sunlight.
Expose the key to any kind of
magnetic fi eld.
Place heavy objects on the key.
Put the key in an ultrasonic cleaner.
Put any magnetized objects close to
the key.
3–3
Before Driving
Keys
A code number is stamped on the plate
attached to the key set; detach this plate
and store it in a safe place (not in the
vehicle) for use if you need to make a
replacement key (auxiliary key).
Also write down the code number and
keep it in a separate safe and convenient
place, but not in the vehicle.
If your key (auxiliary key) is lost, consult
your Authorized Mazda Dealer and have
your code number ready.
NOTE
The driver must carry the key to ensure the
system functions properly.
Operation indicator light
Auxiliary keyTransmitter
Key code number plate
Pull out the auxiliary key from the key
(transmitter).
Keyless Entry System
This system uses the key buttons to
remotely lock and unlock the doors and
the liftgate/trunk lid, and opens the trunk
lid.
The system can start the engine without
having to take the key out of your purse or
pocket.
It can also help you signal for attention.
Operating the theft-deterrent system is
also possible on theft-deterrent systemequipped vehicles.
Press the buttons slowly and carefully.
System malfunctions or warnings are
indicated by the following warning lights
or beeps.
KEY Warning Light (Red)
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on
page 4-21 .
Ignition Not Switched Off (STOP)
Warning Beep
Refer to Ignition Not Switched Off
(STOP) Warning Beep on page 7-37 .
Key Removed from Vehicle Warning
Beep
Refer to Key Removed from Vehicle
Warning Beep on page 7-37 .
If you have a problem with the key,
consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
If your key is lost or stolen, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as
possible for a replacement and to make the
lost or stolen key inoperative.
3–4
Before Driving
Keys
CAUTION
Radio equipment like this is governed
by laws in the United States.
Changes or modifi cations not expressly
approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's
authority to operate the equipment.
NOTE
The keyless entry system operation may
vary due to local conditions.
The keyless entry system is fully
operational (door/liftgate/trunk lid
lock/unlock) when the push button
start is switched off. The system does
not operate if the push button start is
switched to any position other than off.
If the key does not operate when
pressing a button or the operational
range becomes too small, the battery
may be dead. To install a new battery,
refer to Replace Electrical Battery
(page 6-39 ).
Additional keys can be obtained at
an Authorized Mazda Dealer. Up to
6 keys can be used with the keyless
functions per vehicle. Bring all keys
to an Authorized Mazda Dealer when
additional keys are required.
Transmitter
NOTE
(With theft-deterrent system)
The hazard warning lights fl ash when
the theft-deterrent system is armed or
turned off.
Refer to Theft-Deterrent System on
page 3-43
(With the advanced keyless function)
A beep sound can be heard for
confi rmation when the doors and
liftgate/trunk lid are locked/unlocked
using the key. If you prefer, the beep
sound can be turned off.
The volume of the beep sound can also
be changed.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-12
Use the following procedure to change
the setting.
1. Switch the ignition off and close all
of the doors and the liftgate/trunk
lid.
2. Open the driver's door.
3. Within 30 seconds of opening the
driver's door, press and hold the
LOCK button on the key for 5
seconds or longer.
All of the doors and the liftgate/
trunk lid lock and the beep sound
activates at the currently set volume.
(If the beep sound is currently set
to not activate, it will not activate.)
The setting changes each time the
LOCK button on the key is pressed
and the beep sound activates at the
set volume. (If the beep sound has
been set to not activate, it will not
activate.)
3–5
Before Driving
Keys
4. The setting change is completed by
doing any one of the following:
Switching the ignition to ACC or
ON.
Closing the driver's door.
Opening the liftgate/trunk lid.
Not operating the key for 10
seconds.
Pressing any button except the
LOCK button on the key.
Pressing a request switch.
The operation indicator light fl ashes when
the buttons are pressed.
Lock button
To lock the doors and the liftgate/trunk
lid, press the lock button and the hazard
warning lights will fl ash once.
(With the advanced keyless function)
A beep sound will be heard once.
To confi rm that all doors and the liftgate/
trunk lid have been locked, press the lock
button again within 5 seconds. If they are
closed and locked, the horn will sound.
NOTE
The doors and the liftgate/trunk lid can
be locked by pressing the lock button
while any other door or the liftgate/
trunk lid is open. The hazard warning
lights will not fl ash.
When the lock button is pressed while
any door is open and then the door is
closed, all the doors and the liftgate/
trunk lid are locked.
Confi rm that all doors and the liftgate/
trunk lid are locked visually or audibly
by use of the double click.
Make sure all doors and the liftgate/
trunk lid are locked after pressing the
button.
(With theft-deterrent system)
When the doors are locked by pressing
the lock button on the key while the
theft-deterrent system is armed, the
hazard warning lights will fl ash once to
indicate that the system is armed.
Unlock button
To unlock the driver's door, press the
unlock button and the hazard warning
lights will fl ash twice.
(With the advanced keyless function)
A beep sound will be heard twice.
To unlock all doors and the liftgate/trunk
lid, press the unlock button again within
3 seconds and two more beep sounds will
be heard.
3–6
Before Driving
Keys
NOTE
The system can be set to unlock all
doors by performing a single operation.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-12 .
Use the following procedure to change
the setting.
1. Switch the ignition off and close all
of the doors and the liftgate/trunk
lid.
2. Open the driver's door.
3. Within 30 seconds of opening the
driver's door, press and hold the
UNLOCK button on the key for 5
seconds or longer. The sound of
the doors locking/unlocking can be
heard.
After this, the system switches the
setting each time the UNLOCK
button is pressed (the sound of the
doors locking/unlocking can be
heard).
4. The setting change is completed by
doing any one of the following:
Switching the ignition to ACC or
ON.
Closing the driver's door.
Opening the liftgate/trunk lid.
Not operating the key for 10
seconds.
Pressing any button except the
UNLOCK button on the key.
Pressing a request switch.
(Auto re-lock function)
After unlocking with the key, all
doors and the liftgate/trunk lid will
automatically lock if any of the
following operations are not performed
within about 60 seconds. If your
vehicle has a theft-deterrent system,
the hazard warning lights will fl ash for
confi rmation.
The time required for the doors to lock
automatically can be changed.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-12 .
A door or the liftgate/trunk lid is
opened.
The push button start is switched to
any position other than off.
(With theft-deterrent system)
When the doors are unlocked by
pressing the unlock button on the key
while the theft-deterrent system is
turned off, the hazard warning lights
will fl ash twice to indicate that the
system is turned off.
Trunk button (4–door)
To open the trunk lid, press and hold the
trunk button until the trunk lid opens.
3–7
Before Driving
Keys
Panic button
If you witness from a distance someone
attempting to break into or damage your
vehicle, press and hold the panic button to
activate the vehicle's alarm.
NOTE
The panic button will work whether any
door or the liftgate/trunk lid is open or
closed.
(Turning on the alarm)
Pressing the panic button for 1 second or
more will trigger the alarm for about 2
minutes and 30 seconds, and the following
will occur:
The horn sounds intermittently.
The hazard warning lights fl ash.
(Turning off the alarm)
The alarm stops by pressing any button on
the key.
Operational Range
The system operates only when the driver
is in the vehicle or within operational
range while the key is being carried.
Starting the Engine
NOTE
Starting the engine may be possible
even if the key is outside of the vehicle
and extremely close to a door and
window, however, always start the
engine from the driver's seat.
If the vehicle is started and the key is
not in the vehicle, the vehicle will not
restart after it is shut off and the push
button start is switched to off.
The luggage compartment/trunk is
out of the assured operational range,
however, if the key (transmitter) is
operable the engine will start.
With the advanced keyless function
Interior antenna
Operational range
3–8
Before Driving
Keys
Without the advanced keyless function
Operational range
Interior antenna
NOTE
The engine may not start if the key is
placed in the following areas:
Around the dashboard
In the storage compartments such as
the glove compartment
On the rear parcel shelf (4–door)
Key Suspend Function
If a key is left in the vehicle, the
functions of the key left in the vehicle are
temporarily suspended to prevent theft of
the vehicle.
The following are inoperable:
Starting the engine using the push button
start.
(With the advanced keyless function)
Operating the request switches.
To restore these functions, perform any
one of the following:
Press a button on the key which has had
its functions temporarily suspended.
(Manual transaxle)
When carrying another key, depress the
clutch pedal until the KEY indicator
light (green) illuminates.
(Automatic transaxle)
When carrying another key, depress the
brake pedal until the KEY indicator light
(green) illuminates.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on
page 4-21 .
*Some models. 3–9
Before Driving
Advanced Keyless Entry System
Advanced Keyless Entry
System*
WARNING
Radio waves from the key may aff ect
medical devices such as pacemakers:
Before using the key near people who
use medical devices, ask the medical
device manufacturer or your physician
if radio waves from the key will aff ect
the device.
The advanced keyless function allows you
to lock/unlock the doors and liftgate/trunk
lid, or open the liftgate/trunk lid while
carrying the key without using the key.
System malfunctions or warnings are
indicated by the following warning beeps.
Request switch Inoperable Warning
Beep
Refer to Request Switch Inoperable
Warning Beep (With the advanced
keyless function) on page 7-37 .
Key Left-in-luggage Compartment/
Trunk Warning Beep
Refer to Key Left-in-luggage
Compartment Warning Beep (With the
advanced keyless function) on page
7-37 .
Key Left-in-vehicle Warning Beep
Refer to Key Left-in-vehicle Warning
Beep (With the advanced keyless
function) on page 7-38 .
NOTE
The advanced keyless entry system
functions can be deactivated to prevent
any possible adverse effect on a user
wearing a pacemaker or other medical
device. If the system is deactivated, you
will be unable to start the engine by
carrying the key. Consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer for details. If the advanced
keyless entry system has been deactivated,
you can start the engine by following the
procedure indicated when the key battery
goes dead.
Refer to Engine Start Function When Key
Battery is Dead on page 4-8 .
3–10
Before Driving
Advanced Keyless Entry System
Operational Range
The system operates only when the driver
is in the vehicle or within operational
range while the key is being carried.
NOTE
When the battery power is low, or in
places where there are high-intensity radio
waves or noise, the operational range may
become narrower or the system may not
operate.
Locking, Unlocking the Doors and
the Liftgate/Trunk Lid
Exterior antenna
Locking only
(5-door)
Operational range
80cm (31in)
80cm (31in)
NOTE
The system may not operate if you are too
close to the windows or door handles, or
liftgate/trunk lid.
Opening the Liftgate/Trunk Lid
Exterior antenna
Operational range
80cm (31in)
3–11
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
WARNING
Always take all children and pets with
you or leave a responsible person with
them:
Leaving a child or a pet unattended in
a parked vehicle is dangerous. In hot
weather, temperatures inside a vehicle
can become high enough to cause
brain damage or even death.
Do not leave the key in your vehicle with
children and keep them in a place where
your children will not fi nd or play with
them:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the
key is dangerous. This could result in
someone being badly injured or even
killed.
Keep all doors locked when driving:
Unlocked doors in a moving vehicle
are dangerous. Passengers can fall out
if a door is accidentally opened and
can more easily be thrown out in an
accident.
Always close all the windows and
moonroof, lock the doors and take the
key with you when leaving your vehicle
unattended:
Leaving your vehicle unlocked is
dangerous as children could lock
themselves in a hot vehicle, which
could result in death. Also, a vehicle left
unlocked becomes an easy target for
thieves and intruders.
After closing the doors, always verify
that they are securely closed:
Doors not securely closed are
dangerous, if the vehicle is driven with
a door not securely closed, the door
could open unexpectedly resulting in
an accident.
Always confi rm the safety around the
vehicle before opening a door:
Suddenly opening a door is dangerous.
A passing vehicle or a pedestrian could
be hit and cause an accident.
3–12
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
NOTE
When the ignition is switched to ACC
or ON, the vehicle lock-out prevention
feature prevents you from locking
yourself out of the vehicle.
All doors and the liftgate/trunk lid will
automatically unlock if they are locked
using the power door locks with any
door open.
The vehicle lock-out prevention feature
does not operate while the ignition is
switched off.
When any door is opened from the
outside while the key is inside the
vehicle, the closed doors are locked. All
the doors are automatically unlocked by
closing the open door.
(With the advanced keyless function)
The beep sound is heard for about 10
seconds to notify the driver that the key
has been left in the vehicle.
(Without the advanced keyless
function)
The horn sound is heard twice to notify
the driver that the key has been left in
the vehicle.
(Door unlock (control) system with
collision detection)
This system automatically unlocks
the doors in the event the vehicle
is involved in an accident to allow
passengers to get out of the vehicle
immediately and prevent being trapped
inside. While the ignition is switched
ON and in the event the vehicle
receives an impact strong enough to
infl ate the air bags, all the doors are
automatically unlocked after about 6
seconds have elapsed from the time of
the accident.
The doors may not unlock depending on
how an impact is applied, the force of
the impact, and other conditions of the
accident.
If door-related systems or the battery
is malfunctioning, the doors will not
unlock.
Locking, Unlocking with Key
All doors and the liftgate/trunk lid lock
automatically when the driver's door is
locked with the key.
All doors and the liftgate/trunk lid unlock
when the driver's door is unlocked and the
key is held in the unlock position for one
second or longer.
Turn the key toward the front to lock,
toward the back to unlock.
Lock Unlock
3–13
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
NOTE
Holding the key in the unlocked position in
the driver's door lock for about a second
unlocks all doors and the liftgate/trunk lid.
To unlock only the driver's door, insert the
key into the driver's door lock and turn
the key briefl y to the unlock position and
then immediately return it to the center
position.
Locking, Unlocking with Request
Switch (With the advanced keyless
function)
All doors and the liftgate/trunk lid can be
locked/unlocked by pressing the request
switch on the front doors while the key is
being carried.
(5–door)
The request switch on the liftgate can only
be used to lock all doors and the liftgate.
Front doors
Request switch
Liftgate (5–door Lock only)
Request switch
To lock
To lock the doors and the liftgate/trunk lid,
press the request switch and the hazard
warning lights will fl ash once.
A beep sound will be heard once.
To unlock
Driver's door request switch
To unlock the driver's door, press the
request switch. A beep sound will be heard
twice and the hazard warning lights will
fl ash twice.
To unlock all doors and the liftgate, press
the request switch again within 3 seconds
and two more beep sounds will be heard.
Front passenger door request switch
To unlock all doors and the liftgate, press
the request switch. A beep sound will be
heard twice and the hazard warning lights
will fl ash twice.
3–14
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
NOTE
The system can be set to unlock all
doors by performing a single operation.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-12 .
Use the following procedure to change
the setting.
1. Switch the ignition off and close all
of the doors and the liftgate/trunk
lid.
2. Open the driver's door.
3. Within 30 seconds of opening the
driver's door, press and hold the
UNLOCK button on the key for 5
seconds or longer. The sound of
the doors locking/unlocking can be
heard.
After this, the system switches the
setting of pressing the driver's
request switch once or twice to
unlock all doors and the liftgate/
trunk lid each time the UNLOCK
button is pressed (the sound of the
doors locking/unlocking can be
heard).
4. The setting change is completed by
doing any one of the following:
Switching the ignition to ACC or
ON.
Closing the driver's door.
Opening the liftgate/trunk lid.
Not operating the key for 10
seconds.
Pressing any button except the
UNLOCK button on the key.
Pressing a request switch.
Confi rm that all doors and the liftgate/
trunk lid are securely locked.
For the liftgate/trunk lid, move it
without pressing the electric liftgate/
trunk lid opener to verify that the
liftgate/trunk lid has not been left ajar.
All doors and the liftgate/trunk lid
cannot be locked when any door or the
liftgate is open.
It may require a few seconds for the
doors to unlock after the request switch
is pressed.
A beep sound is heard for confi rmation
when the doors and the liftgate/trunk lid
are locked/unlocked using the request
switch. If you prefer, the beep sound can
be turned off. The volume of the beep
sound can also be changed. Refer to
Personalization Features on page 9-12 .
Use the following procedure to change
the setting.
1. Switch the ignition off and close all
of the doors and the liftgate/trunk
lid.
2. Open the driver's door.
3. Within 30 seconds of opening the
driver's door, press and hold the
LOCK button on the key for 5
seconds or longer.
All of the doors and the liftgate/
trunk lid lock and the beep sound
activates at the currently set volume.
(If the beep sound is currently set
to not activate, it will not activate.)
The setting changes each time the
LOCK button on the key is pressed
and the beep sound activates at the
set volume. (If the beep sound has
been set to not activate, it will not
activate.)
3–15
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
4. The setting change is completed by
doing any one of the following:
Switching the ignition to ACC or
ON.
Closing the driver's door.
Opening the liftgate/trunk lid.
Not operating the key for 10
seconds.
Pressing any button except the
LOCK button on the key.
Pressing a request switch.
(With theft-deterrent system)
The hazard warning lights fl ash when
the theft-deterrent system is armed or
turned off.
Refer to Theft-Deterrent System on
page 3-43 .
The setting can be changed so that
the doors and the liftgate/trunk lid are
locked automatically without pressing
the request switch.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-12 .
(Auto-lock function)
A beep sound is heard when all doors
and the liftgate are closed while the
advanced key is being carried. All
doors and the liftgate/trunk lid are
locked automatically after about three
seconds when the advanced key is
out of the operational range. Also,
the hazard warning lights fl ash once.
(Even if the driver is in the operational
range, all doors and the liftgate/trunk
lid are locked automatically after
about 30 seconds.) If you are out of
the operational range before the doors
and the liftgate/trunk lid are completely
closed or another key is left in the
vehicle, the auto-lock function will not
work. Always make sure that all doors
and the liftgate/trunk lid are closed and
locked before leaving the vehicle. The
auto-lock function does not close the
power windows.
3–16
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
Auto re-lock function
After unlocking with the request switch,
all doors and the liftgate/trunk lid
will automatically lock if any of the
following operations are not performed
within about 60 seconds. If your
vehicle has a theft-deterrent system,
the hazard warning lights will fl ash for
confi rmation.
The time required for the doors to lock
automatically can be changed.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-12 .
Opening a door or the liftgate/trunk
lid.
Switching the ignition to any position
other than off.
Locking, Unlocking with
Transmitter
All doors and the liftgate/trunk lid can be
locked/unlocked by operating the keyless
entry system transmitter, refer to Keyless
Entry System (page 3-3 ).
Locking, Unlocking with DoorLock Switch
All doors and the liftgate/trunk lid lock
automatically when the lock side is
pressed. They all unlock when the unlock
side is pressed.
Driver's door
Unlock
Lock
Front passenger's door
Unlock
Lock
To lock all the doors/liftgate/trunk lid from
an open front door, press the lock side of
the door lock switch and then close the
door.
NOTE
When locking the doors this way, be
careful not to leave the key inside the
vehicle.
3–17
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
Auto Lock/Unlock Function
WARNING
Do not pull the inner handle on a front
door:
Pulling an inner handle on a front
door while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. Passengers can fall out of
the vehicle if a front door accidentally
opens, which could result in death or
serious injury.
When the vehicle speed exceeds 20
km/h (12 mph), all doors and the
liftgate/trunk lid lock automatically.
When the ignition is switched off, all
doors and the liftgate/trunk lid unlock
automatically.
These functions can also be disabled so
that they do not operate.
Auto lock/unlock function setting
change using door-lock switch
The doors and the liftgate/trunk lid can
set to lock or unlock automatically by
selecting any one of the functions from the
following table and using the driver's doorlock switch on the interior door panel.
NOTE
Function number 3 is the factory setting
for your vehicle.
There are only a total of fi ve auto lock/
unlock settings available for automatic
transaxle vehicles, and three for
manual transaxle vehicles. Be sure to
press the unlock side of the driver's
door-lock switch the correct number of
times according to the selected function
number. If the switch is mistakenly
pressed six times on an automatic
transaxle vehicle or four times on a
manual transaxle, the procedure will
be cancelled. If this occurs, start the
procedure from the beginning.
3–18
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
Function
number Function
*1
1 The auto door-lock function is disabled.
2
All the doors and the liftgate/trunk lid
lock automatically when the vehicle
speed is about 20 km/h (12 mph) or
more.
3
All the doors and the liftgate/trunk lid
lock automatically when the vehicle
speed is about 20 km/h (12 mph) or
more. All the doors and theliftgate/
trunk lid unlock when the ignition is
switched from ON to Off.
4
(Automatic transaxle vehicles only)
When the ignition is switched ON
and the shift lever is shifted from park
(P) to any other gear position, all the
doors and the liftgate/trunk lid lock
automatically.
5
(Automatic transaxle vehicles only)
When the ignition is switched ON
and the shift lever is shifted from park
(P) to any other gear position, all the
doors and the liftgate/trunk lid lock
automatically.
When the shift lever is shifted to park
(P) while the ignition is switched ON,
all the doorsliftgate/trunk lid unlock
automatically.
*1 Other settings for the auto door lock function are
available at an Authorized Mazda Dealer. For
details consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer. Refer
to Personalization Features on page 9-12 .
Settings can be changed using the
following procedure.
1. Safely park the vehicle. All doors must
remain closed.
2. Switch the ignition ON.
3. Press and hold the lock side of the
driver's door-lock switch within 20
seconds of switching the ignition ON,
and make sure a beep sound is heard
about eight seconds afterwards.
4. Refer to the auto lock/unlock function
setting table, determine the function
number for the desired setting. Press
the unlock side of the driver's door-lock
switch the same number of times as the
selected function number (Ex. If you
select function 2, press the unlock side
of the switch only 2 times).
5. Three seconds after the function setting
has been changed, a beep sound will
beep in the amount of the selected
function number. (Ex. Function number
3 = 3 beep sounds)
(Manual transaxle vehicles)
Press 2 times
Press 3 times
Current Function Number
Function Number 1
Function Number 2
Function Number 3
Press 4 times
Press unlock side of
lock switch once
Cancel setting
Cancel setting
Function set (The
number of beeps
heard is the same as
the selected function
number)
Press lock side of
lock switch
Wait for 3 second
3–19
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
(Automatic transaxle vehicles)
Press unlock side of
lock switch once
Press 2 times
Press 3 times
Current Function Number
Function Number 1
Function Number 2
Press 4 times
Function Number 3
Press 5 times
Function Number 4
Press 6 times
Function Number 5
Cancel setting
Cancel setting
Function set (The
number of beeps
heard is the same as
the selected function
number)
Press lock side of
lock switch
Wait for 3 second
NOTE
The doors cannot be locked or unlocked
while the setting function is being
performed.
The procedure can be cancelled by
pressing the lock side of the driver's
door-lock switch.
Locking, Unlocking with DoorLock Knob
To lock any door from the inside, press the
door-lock knob.
To unlock, pull it outward.
This does not operate the other door locks.
Lock
Unlock
NOTE
The red indication can be seen when the
door-lock knob is unlocked.
Red indication
3–20
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
To lock the front passenger door with the
door-lock knob from the outside, press the
door-lock knob to the lock position and
close the door (holding the door handle
pulled is not required).
This does not operate the other door locks.
Door-lock knob
NOTE
When locking the door this way:
Be careful not to leave the key inside
the vehicle.
The driver's door lock knob cannot be
used while the driver's door is open.
Rear Door Child Safety Locks
These locks are intended to help prevent
children from accidentally opening the
rear doors. Use them on both rear doors
whenever a child rides in the rear seat of
the vehicle.
If you slide the child safety lock to the
lock position before closing that door, the
door cannot be opened from the inside.
The door can only be opened by pulling
the outside handle.
Lock
Unlock
3–21
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
Liftgate/Trunk Lid
WARNING
Never allow a person to ride in the
luggage compartment/trunk:
Allowing a person to ride in the
luggage compartment/trunk is
dangerous. The person in the luggage
compartment/trunk could be seriously
injured or killed during sudden braking
or a collision.
Do not drive with the liftgate/trunk lid
open:
Exhaust gas in the cabin of a vehicle is
dangerous. An open liftgate/trunk lid
in a moving vehicle will cause exhaust
gas to be drawn into the cabin. This
gas contains CO (carbon monoxide),
which is colorless, odorless, and highly
poisonous, and it can cause loss of
consciousness and death. Moreover,
an open liftgate/trunk lid could cause
occupants to fall out in an accident.
Do not stack or leave loaded luggage
unsecured in the luggage compartment:
Otherwise, the luggage may move
or collapse, resulting in injury or an
accident. In addition, do not load
luggage higher than the seatbacks. It
may aff ect the side or rear fi eld of view.
CAUTION
When loading or unloading luggage in
the luggage compartment/trunk, turn
off the engine. Otherwise, you could get
burned by the heat of the exhaust gas.
Fully open the trunk lid when opening it.
If the trunk lid is only opened partially,
it could slam shut by vibration or wind
gusts resulting in injury.
Be careful not to apply excessive force
to the damper stay on the liftgate such
as by putting your hand on the stay.
Otherwise, the damper stay may bend
and aff ect the liftgate operation.
Damper stay
3–22
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
Opening and Closing the Liftgate/
Trunk Lid
Opening the liftgate (5–door)
Using the electric liftgate opener
Unlock the doors and liftgate, then press
the electric liftgate opener on the liftgate
and raise it when the latch releases.
Electric liftgate
opener
While the ignition is switched ON, the
liftgate can only be opened when the
vehicle is stopped.
NOTE
(With the advanced keyless function)
A locked liftgate can also be opened
while the key is being carried.
When opening the liftgate with the
doors and the liftgate locked, it may
require a few seconds for the liftgate
latch to release after the electric liftgate
opener is pressed.
The liftgate can be closed when the
doors are locked with the key left in the
vehicle. However, to prevent locking the
key in the vehicle, the liftgate can be
opened by pressing the electric liftgate
opener.
When the liftgate latch is released by
pressing the electric liftgate opener,
the liftgate raises slightly to allow
it to be opened. If the liftgate is not
operated for a certain period of time
after the electric liftgate opener has
been pressed, the liftgate cannot be
raised any more from its slightly raised
position. Press the electric liftgate
opener again to fully open the liftgate.
To close the liftgate from its slightly
raised position, open it fi rst by pressing
the electric liftgate opener, then close it
after waiting at least 1 second.
If the liftgate is not fully closed, the
driver is notifi ed by a warning indicated
in the instrument cluster.
The sound of the latch may be heard for
a few seconds after the electric liftgate
opener has been pressed, however, this
does not indicate a malfunction.
Opening the trunk lid (4–door)
Using the remote release button
Push the release button.
While the ignition is switched ON, the
trunk lid can only be opened when the
vehicle is stopped.
3–23
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
Using the electric trunk lid opener
(With the advanced keyless function)
A locked trunk lid can also be opened
while the key is being carried.
Press the electric trunk lid opener on the
trunk lid, then raise the trunk lid when the
latch releases.
Electric trunk lid
opener
While the ignition is switched ON, the
trunk lid can only be opened when the
vehicle is stopped.
NOTE
When opening the trunk lid with the
doors and the trunk lid locked, it may
require a few seconds for the trunk lid
latch to release after the electric trunk
lid opener is pressed.
The trunk lid can be closed when the
doors are locked with the key left in the
vehicle. However, to prevent locking the
key in the vehicle, the trunk lid can be
opened by pressing the electric trunk lid
opener.
Closing the liftgate/trunk lid
Lower the liftgate/trunk lid slowly using
the liftgate/trunk lid grip recess, then push
the liftgate/trunk lid closed using both
hands.
Do not slam it. Pull up on the liftgate/trunk
lid to make sure it is secure.
(5–door)
Liftgate grip
recess
(4–door)
Trunk lid grip recess
3–24
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
Luggage Compartment
Luggage compartment cover (5-door)
WARNING
Do not place anything on top of the
cover:
Placing luggage or other cargo on top
of the luggage compartment cover is
dangerous. During sudden braking or
a collision, the cargo could become
a projectile that could hit and injure
someone. The vehicle has a light
weight luggage compartment cover to
keep the contents of your luggage area
out of sight; it will not retain heavy
objects that are not tied down in an
accident such as a rollover. Tie down
all heavy objects, whether luggage or
cargo, using the tie down hooks.
Make sure luggage and cargo are
secured before driving:
Not securing cargo while driving is
dangerous as it could move or be
crushed during sudden braking or a
collision and cause injury.
CAUTION
Make sure the luggage compartment
cover is fi rmly secured. If it is not
fi rmly secured, it could unexpectedly
disengage resulting in injury.
The luggage compartment can be accessed
by opening the liftgate when the straps are
attached to the sides of the liftgate.
Strap
Removing the cover
This cover can be removed for more room.
To do this, just unfasten the straps; then
lift and pull it out.
*Some models. 3–25
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
Loading golf bags (only 4-door vehicle)
Up to two golf bags can be carried in the
trunk.
1. Place the bottom of the fi rst golf bag in
the trunk with its bottom pointed to the
left and fi t it into the front of the trunk.
2. Place the second golf bag in the trunk
with its bottom pointed to the left and
fi t it into the back of the trunk.
NOTE
Some golf bags cannot fi t depending on
their size.
Inside Trunk Release
Lever (4-Door) *
Your vehicle is equipped with an inside
trunk release lever that provides a means
of escape for children and adults in the
event they become locked inside the trunk.
No matter how careful adults might be
with keys and locking their cars, parents
should be aware that children may be
tempted to play around vehicles and use
the trunk as a hiding place.
Adults are advised to familiarize
themselves with the operation and location
of the inside trunk release lever so that
all children can be told about it in an
appropriate way, keeping in mind that
most vehicles do not have such levers.
WARNING
Close the trunk lid, be sure the seat
backs are latched and do not allow
children to play inside the vehicle:
Leaving the trunk lid open or leaving
children in the vehicle with the keys is
dangerous. Children could open the
trunk lid and climb inside resulting
in possible injury or death from heat
exposure.
3–26
Before Driving
Doors and Locks
Always keep the car from being a
tempting place to play by latching the
rear seats, doors and the trunk, and
keeping the keys where children can not
play with them:
Leaving children or animals
unattended in a parked vehicle is
dangerous. Babies left sleeping and
children who lock themselves in cars or
trunks can die very quickly from heat
prostration. Do not leave your children
or pets alone in a car at any time. Do
not leave the car, the rear folding seats
or the trunk unlocked.
Opening the Trunk Lid from the
Inside
Slide the inside trunk release lever in the
direction of the arrow. The lever is made
of material that will glow for hours in the
darkness of the trunk following a brief
exposure to ambient light.
The inside trunk release lever is located on
the inside of the trunk lid.
3–27
Before Driving
Fuel and Emission
Fuel and Engine Exhaust Precautions
Fuel Requirements
Vehicles with catalytic converters or oxygen sensors must use ONLY UNLEADED FUEL,
which will reduce exhaust emissions and keep spark plug fouling to a minimum.
This vehicle will perform best with fuel listed in the table.
Fuel Octane Rating * (Anti-knock index)
Regular unleaded fuel 87 [(R M)/2 method] or above (91 RON or above)
* U.S. federal law requires that octane ratings be posted on gasoline station pumps.
Fuel with a rating lower than 87 octane (91 RON) could cause the emission control system
to lose effectiveness. It could also cause engine knocking and serious engine damage.
CAUTION
USE ONLY UNLEADED FUEL.
Leaded fuel is harmful to the catalytic converter and oxygen sensors and will lead to
deterioration of the emission control system and or failures.
This vehicle can only use oxygenated fuels containing no more than 10 % ethanol by
volume. Damage to the vehicle may occur when ethanol exceeds this recommendation,
or if the gasoline contains any methanol. Stop using gasohol of any kind if your vehicle
engine is performing poorly.
Never add fuel system additives, otherwise the emission control system could be damaged.
Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer for details.
Gasoline blended with oxygenates such as alcohol or ether compounds are generally
referred to as oxygenated fuels. The common gasoline blend that can be used with your
vehicle is ethanol blended at no more than 10 %. Gasoline containing alcohol, such as
ethanol or methanol, may be marketed under the name "Gasohol".
Vehicle damage and drivability problems resulting from the use of the following may not be
covered by the warranty.
Gasohol containing more than 10 % ethanol.
Gasoline or gasohol containing methanol.
Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.
3–28
Before Driving
Fuel and Emission
Emission Control System
This vehicle is equipped with an emission control system (the catalytic converter is
part of this system) that enables the vehicle to comply with existing exhaust emissions
requirements.
WARNING
Never park over or near anything fl ammable:
Parking over or near anything fl ammable, such as dry grass, is dangerous. Even with the
engine turned off , the exhaust system remains very hot after normal use and could ignite
anything fl ammable. A resulting fi re could cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION
Ignoring the following precautions could cause lead to accumulate on the catalyst inside
the converter or cause the converter to get very hot. Either condition will damage the
converter and cause poor performance.
USE ONLY UNLEADED FUEL.
Do not drive your Mazda with any sign of engine malfunction.
Do not coast with the ignition switched off .
Do not descend steep grades in gear with the ignition switched off .
Do not operate the engine at high idle for more than 2 minutes.
Do not tamper with the emission control system. All inspections and adjustments
must be made by a qualifi ed technician.
Do not push-start or pull-start your vehicle.
NOTE
Under U.S. federal law, any modifi cation to the original-equipment emission control
system before the fi rst sale and registration of a vehicle is subject to penalties. In some
states, such modifi cation made on a used vehicle is also subject to penalties.
While the engine is off, the sound of a valve opening and closing can be heard at the rear
of the right side of the vehicle, however this does not indicate an abnormality. The vehicle
has a self-checking device and it operates while the engine is off.
3–29
Before Driving
Fuel and Emission
Engine Exhaust (Carbon monoxide)
WARNING
Do not drive your vehicle if you smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle:
Engine exhaust gas is dangerous. This gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), which is
colorless, odorless, and poisonous. When inhaled, it can cause loss of consciousness and
death. If you smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, keep all windows fully open and contact
an Authorized Mazda Dealer immediately.
Do not run the engine when inside an enclosed area:
Running the engine inside an enclosed area, such as a garage, is dangerous. Exhaust
gas, which contains poisonous carbon monoxide, could easily enter the cabin. Loss of
consciousness or even death could occur.
Open the windows or adjust the heating or cooling system to draw fresh air when
idling the engine:
Exhaust gas is dangerous. When the vehicle is stopped with the windows closed and
the engine running for a long time even in an open area, exhaust gas, which contains
poisonous carbon monoxide, could enter the cabin. Loss of consciousness or even death
could occur.
Clear snow from underneath and around your vehicle, particularly the tail pipe, before
starting the engine:
Running the engine when a vehicle is stopped in deep snow is dangerous. The exhaust
pipe could be blocked by the snow, allowing exhaust gas to enter the cabin. Because
exhaust gas contains poisonous carbon monoxide, it could cause loss of consciousness or
even death to occupants in the cabin.
3–30
Before Driving
Fuel and Emission
Fuel-Filler Lid and Cap
WARNING
When removing the fuel-fi ller cap,
loosen the cap slightly and wait for any
hissing to stop, then remove it:
Fuel spray is dangerous. Fuel can
burn skin and eyes and cause illness
if ingested. Fuel spray is released
when there is pressure in the fuel tank
and the fuel-fi ller cap is removed too
quickly.
Before refueling, stop the engine, and
always keep sparks and fl ames away
from the fi ller neck:
Fuel vapor is dangerous. It could be
ignited by sparks or fl ames causing
serious burns and injuries.
Additionally, use of the incorrect fuelfi ller cap or not using a fuel-fi ller cap
may result in a fuel leak, which could
result in serious burns or death in an
accident.
CAUTION
Always use only a genuine Mazda fuelfi ller cap or an approved equivalent,
available at an Authorized Mazda
Dealer. The wrong cap can result in
a serious malfunction of the fuel and
emission control systems. It may also
cause the check engine light in the
instrument cluster to illuminate.
Fuel-Filler Lid
To open, pull the remote fuel-fi ller lid
release.
Remote fuel-filler
lid release
Fuel-Filler Cap
To remove the fuel-fi ller cap, turn it
counterclockwise.
Attach the removed cap to the inner side
of the fuel lid.
To close the fuel-fi ller cap, turn it
clockwise until a click is heard.
Open
Close
3–31
Before Driving
Fuel and Emission
CAUTION
If the check fuel cap warning light
illuminates, the fuel-fi ller cap may not
be properly installed. If the warning
light illuminates, park your vehicle
safely off the right-of-way, remove the
fuel-fi ller cap and reinstall it correctly.
After the cap has been correctly
installed, the fuel cap warning light
may continue to illuminate until a
number of driving cycles have been
completed. A drive cycle consists of
starting the engine (after four or more
hours with the engine off ) and driving
the vehicle on city and highway roads.
Continuing to drive with the check
fuel cap warning light illuminated
could cause the check engine light to
illuminate as well.
3–32
Before Driving
Steering Wheel
Steering Wheel
WARNING
Never adjust the steering wheel while
the vehicle is moving:
Adjusting the steering wheel while
the vehicle is moving is dangerous.
Moving it can very easily cause the
driver to abruptly turn to the left or
right. This can lead to loss of control or
an accident.
Steering Wheel Adjustment
To change the angle or length of the
steering wheel:
1. Stop the vehicle, and then pull down
the lock release lever under the steering
column.
Lock release lever
2. Tilt the steering wheel and/or adjust the
steering column length to the desired
positions, then push the lever up to lock
the column.
3. Attempt to push the steering wheel
up and down to make sure it's locked
before driving.
3–33
Before Driving
Mirrors
Mirrors
Before driving, adjust the inside and
outside mirrors.
Outside Mirrors
WARNING
Be sure to look over your shoulder
before changing lanes:
Changing lanes without taking
into account the actual distance of
the vehicle in the convex mirror is
dangerous. You could have a serious
accident. What you see in the convex
mirror is closer than it appears.
Mirror type
Flat type (driver's side)
Flat surface mirror.
Convex type (front passenger side)
The mirror has single curvature on its
surface.
Power mirror adjustment
The ignition must be switched to ACC or
ON position.
To adjust:
1. Rotate the mirror switch to the left ( )
or right ( ) to choose the left or right
side mirror.
2. Press the mirror switch in the
appropriate direction.
Mirror switch
Center position
After adjusting the mirror, lock the
control by rotating the switch in the center
position.
Folding mirror
WARNING
Always return the outside mirrors to
the driving position before you start
driving:
Driving with the outside mirrors folded
in is dangerous. Your rear view will
be restricted, and you could have an
accident.
Fold the outside mirror rearward until it is
fl ush with the vehicle.
3–34
Before Driving
Mirrors
Rearview Mirror
WARNING
Do not stack cargo or objects higher
than the seatbacks:
Cargo stacked higher than the
seatbacks is dangerous. It can block
your view in the rearview mirror, which
might cause you to hit another car
when changing lanes.
Rearview mirror adjustment
Before driving, adjust the rearview mirror
to center on the scene through the rear
window.
NOTE
For the manual day/night mirror, perform
the adjustment with the day/night lever in
the day position.
Reducing glare from headlights
Manual day/night mirror
Push the day/night lever forward for day
driving. Pull it back to reduce glare of
headlights from vehicles at the rear.
Night
Day
Day/Night lever
Auto-dimming mirror
The auto-dimming mirror automatically
reduces glare of headlights from vehicles
at the rear when the ignition is switched
ON.
(With Homelink wireless control
system)
Press the OFF button ( ) to cancel the
automatic dimming function. The indicator
light will turn off.
To reactivate the automatic dimming
function, press the ON button ( ). The
indicator light will illuminate.
Indicator light OFF button
ON button
3–35
Before Driving
Mirrors
(Without Homelink wireless control
system)
Press the ON/OFF button to cancel the
automatic dimming function. The indicator
light will turn off.
To reactivate the automatic dimming
function, press the ON/OFF button . The
indicator light will illuminate.
ON/OFF buttonIndicator light
NOTE
Do not use glass cleaner or suspend
objects on or around the light sensor.
Otherwise, light sensor sensitivity
will be affected and may not operate
normally.
(With Homelink wireless control
system)
Light sensor
(Without Homelink wireless control
system)
Light sensor
(With Homelink wireless control
system)
For information regarding the 3 buttons
( , , ) on the auto-dimming
mirror.
Refer to HomeLink Wireless Control
System on page 4-59 .
The auto-dimmer function is canceled
when the ignition is switched ON and
the shift lever is in reverse (R).
3–36
Before Driving
Windows
Power Windows
The ignition must be switched ON for the
power windows to operate.
WARNING
Make sure the opening is clear before
closing a window:
Closing a power window is dangerous.
A person's hands, head, or even neck
could be caught by the window and
result in serious injury or even death.
This warning applies especially to
children.
Never allow children to play with power
window switches:
Power window switches that are not
locked with the power window lock
switch would allow children to operate
power windows unintentionally, which
could result in serious injury if a child's
hands, head or neck becomes caught
by the window.
CAUTION
To prevent burning out the fuse and
damaging the power window system,
do not open or close more than three
windows at once.
Operating the Driver's Power
Window
Normal opening/closing
To open the window to the desired
position, lightly hold down the switch.
To close the window to the desired
position, lightly pull up the switch.
Driver's window
Open
Close
Master control switches
Auto-opening/closing
To fully open the window automatically,
press the switch completely down, then
release. The window will fully open
automatically.
To fully close the window automatically,
pull the switch completely up, then
release. The window will fully close
automatically.
To stop the window partway, pull or press
the switch in the opposite direction and
then release it.
Power window system initialization
procedure
If the battery was disconnected during
vehicle maintenance, or for other reasons
(such as a switch continues to be operated
after the window is fully open/closed),
the window will not fully open and close
automatically.
3–37
Before Driving
Windows
The power window auto function will only
resume on a power window that has been
reset.
1. Switch the ignition ON.
2. Make sure that the power window lock
switch located on the driver's door is
not depressed.
3. Press the switch and fully open the
window.
4. Pull up the switch to fully close the
window and continue holding the
switch for about 2 seconds after the
window fully closed.
Jam-safe window
If a person's hands, head or an object
blocks the window during the auto-closing
operation, the window will stop and open
halfway.
WARNING
Make sure nothing blocks the window
just before it reaches the fully closed
position or while holding up the power
window switch:
Blocking the power window just before
it reaches the fully closed position or
while holding up the power window
switch is dangerous.
In this case, the jam-safe function
cannot prevent the window from
closing all the way. If fi ngers are
caught, serious injuries could occur.
NOTE
Depending on driving conditions, a
closing power window could stop and
start opening when the window feels
a shock that is similar to something
blocking it.
In the event the jam-safe function
activates and the power window cannot
be closed automatically, pull and hold
the switch and the window will close.
The jam-safe window function does not
operate until the system has been reset.
Engine-off power window operation
The power window can be operated for
about 40 seconds after the ignition is
switched from ON to off with all doors
closed. If any door is opened, the power
window will stop operating.
NOTE
For engine-off operation of the power
window, the switch must be held up fi rmly
throughout window closure because the
auto-closing function will be inoperable.
3–38
Before Driving
Windows
Operating the Passenger Power
Windows
To open the window to the desired
position, hold down the switch.
To close the window to the desired
position, pull up the switch.
Close
Open
NOTE
The power windows may be operated
when the power window lock switch
on the driver's door is in the unlocked
position.
The passenger windows may be opened
or closed using the master control
switches on the driver's door.
Left rear window
Right rear window
Front
passenger's
window
Driver's window
Master control switches
Power Window Lock Switch
This feature prevents all power windows
from operating, except the driver's power
window. Keep this switch in the locked
position while children are in the vehicle.
Locked position (button depressed):
Only the driver's power window can be
operated.
Unlocked position (button not
depressed):
All power windows on each door can be
operated.
Locked position
Unlocked position
*Some models. 3–39
Before Driving
Windows
Moonroof *
The moonroof can be opened or closed
electrically only when the ignition is
switched ON.
Tilt/Slide switch
WARNING
Do not let passengers stand up or
extend part of the body through the
open moonroof while the vehicle is
moving:
Extending the head, arms, or other
parts of the body through the
moonroof is dangerous. The head or
arms could hit something while the
vehicle is moving. This could cause
serious injury or death.
Make sure the opening is clear before
closing the moonroof:
A closing moonroof is dangerous. The
hands, head, or even neck of a person,
especially a child, could be caught in
it as it closes, causing serious injury or
even death.
NOTE
Before washing your Mazda, make sure
the moonroof is completely closed so that
water does not get inside the cabin area.
After washing your Mazda or after it rains,
wipe the water off the moonroof before
operating it to avoid water penetration
which could cause rust and water damage
to your headliner.
Tilt Operation
The rear of the moonroof can be tilted
open to provide more ventilation.
To fully tilt automatically, momentarily
press the tilt/slide switch.
To stop tilting partway, press the tilt/slide
switch.
To close to the desired position, press the
tilt/slide switch in the forward direction.
Close (Tilt down)
Tilt up
3–40
Before Driving
Windows
Slide Operation
To fully open automatically, momentarily
press the tilt/slide switch in the backward
direction.
To stop sliding partway, press the tilt/slide
switch.
To close to the desired position, press the
tilt/slide switch in the forward direction.
Close
Open
Power Moonroof Reset Procedure
If the battery is disconnected, the
moonroof will not operate. The moonroof
will not operate correctly until it is reset.
Carry out the following procedure to reset
the moonroof and resume operation:
1. Switch the ignition ON.
2. Press the tilt switch, to partially tilt
open the rear of the moonroof.
3. Repeat Step 2. The rear of the
moonroof tilts open to the fully open
position, then closes a little.
NOTE
If the reset procedure is performed while
the moonroof is in the slide position
(partially open) it will close before the
rear tilt opens.
Sunshade
The sunshade can be opened and closed
by hand.
The sunshade opens automatically when
the moonroof is opened, but must be
closed by hand.
Sunshade
CAUTION
The sunshade does not tilt. To avoid
damaging the sunshade, do not push up
on it.
Do not close the sunshade while the
moonroof is opening. Trying to force the
sunshade closed could damage it.
3–41
Before Driving
Security System
Modifi cation and Add-On
Equipment
Mazda cannot guarantee the immobilizer
and the theft-deterrent systems' operation
if the system has been modifi ed or if any
add-on equipment has been installed.
CAUTION
To avoid damage to the vehicle, do
not modify the system or install any
add-on equipment to the immobilizer
and the theft-deterrent systems or the
vehicle.
Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system allows the
engine to start only with a key the system
recognizes.
If someone attempts to start the engine
with an unrecognized key, the engine will
not start, thereby helping to prevent the
theft of the vehicle.
If you have a problem with the
immobilizer system or the key, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
CAUTION
Radio equipment like this is governed by
laws in the United States.
Changes or modifi cations not expressly
approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's
authority to operate the equipment.
To avoid damage to the key, do not:
Drop the key.
Get the key wet.
Expose the key to any kind of
magnetic fi eld.
Expose the key to high temperatures
on places such as the dashboard or
hood, under direct sunlight.
If the engine does not start with the
correct key, and the security indicator
light keeps illuminating or fl ashing, the
system may have a malfunction. Consult
an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
3–42
Before Driving
Security System
NOTE
The keys carry a unique electronic
code. For this reason, and to assure
your safety, obtaining a replacement
key requires some waiting time.
They are only available through an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Always keep a spare key in case one
is lost. If a key is lost, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as
possible.
If you lose a key, an Authorized Mazda
Dealer will reset the electronic codes of
your remaining keys and immobilizer
system. Bring all the remaining keys to
an Authorized Mazda Dealer to reset.
Starting the vehicle with a key that has
not been reset is not possible.
Operation
NOTE
The engine may not start and security
indicator light may illuminate or fl ash
if the key is placed in an area where it
is diffi cult for the system to detect the
signal, such as on the dashboard or in
the glove compartment. Move the key
to a location within the signal range,
switch the ignition off, and then restart
the engine.
Signals from a TV or radio station, or
from a transceiver or mobile telephone
could interfere with your immobilizer
system. If you are using the proper key
and the engine fails to start, check the
security indicator light.
Arming
The system is armed when the push button
start is pressed from ON to off.
The security indicator light in the
instrument cluster fl ashes every 2 seconds
until the system is disarmed.
Disarming
The system is disarmed when the
ignition is switched ON with the correct
programmed key. The security indicator
light illuminates for about 3 seconds and
then turns off. If the engine does not start
with the correct key, and the security
indicator light remains illuminated or
fl ashing, try the following:
Make sure the key is within the
operational range for signal transmission.
Switch the ignition off, and then restart the
engine. If the engine does not start after
3 or more tries, contact an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
NOTE
If the security indicator light fl ashes
continuously while you are driving,
do not shut off the engine. Go to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer and have it
checked. If the engine is shut off while
the indicator light is fl ashing, you will
not be able to restart it.
Because the electronic codes are
reset when the immobilizer system
is repaired, the keys are needed.
Make sure to bring all the keys to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer so that they
can be programmed.
*Some models. 3–43
Before Driving
Security System
Theft-Deterrent System *
If the theft deterrent system detects an
inappropriate entry into the vehicle,
which could result in the vehicle or its
contents being stolen, the alarm alerts the
surrounding area of an abnormality by
sounding the horn and fl ashing the hazard
warning lights.
The system will not function unless it's
properly armed. So when you leave the
vehicle, follow the arming procedure
correctly.
Operation
System triggering conditions
The horn sounds intermittently and the
hazard warning lights fl ash for about 30
seconds when the system is triggered by
any one of the following:
Unlocking a door with the key, door
lock switch, or an inside door-lock knob.
Forcing open a door, the hood or the
liftgate/trunk lid.
Opening the hood by operating the hood
release handle.
Switching the ignition ON without using
the push button start.
If the system is triggered again, the lights
and horn will activate until the driver's
door or the liftgate/trunk lid is unlocked
with the transmitter.
(With advanced key)
The lights and horn can also be
deactivated by pressing the request switch
on a door.
NOTE
If the battery goes dead while the theftdeterrent system is armed, the horn will
activate and the hazard warning lights
will fl ash when the battery is charged or
replaced.
How to Arm the System
1. Close the windows and the moonroof *
securely.
2. Press the push button start off.
3. Make sure the hood, the doors, and the
liftgate/trunk lid are closed.
4. Press the lock button on the transmitter
or lock the driver's door from the
outside with the auxiliary key.
The hazard warning lights will fl ash
once.
The following method will also arm the
theft-deterrent system:
Press the door-lock switch “ ” while
any door is open and then close all of
the doors.
(With the advanced keyless function)
Press a request switch.
The security indicator light in the
instrument panel fl ashes twice per
second for 20 seconds.
5. After 20 seconds, the system is fully
armed.
3–44
Before Driving
Security System
NOTE
The theft deterrent system can also be
armed by activating the auto relock
function with all the doors, the liftgate/
trunk lid and the hood closed.
Refer to Transmitter on page 3-4 .
The system will disarm if one of the
following operations takes place within
20 seconds after pressing the lock
button:
Unlocking any door.
Opening any door or the liftgate/
trunk lid.
Opening the hood.
Switching the ignition on.
(With the advanced keyless
function)
Pressing the electric liftgate/trunk lid
opener while the key is being carried.
To rearm the system, do the arming
procedure again.
When the doors are locked by pressing
the lock button on the transmitter
or using the auxiliary key while the
theft-deterrent system is armed, the
hazard warning lights will fl ash once to
indicate that the system is armed.
To Turn Off an Armed System
An armed system can be turned off using
any one of the following methods:
Pressing the unlock button on the
transmitter.
Switching the ignition ON.
(With the advanced keyless function)
Pressing a request switch on the doors.
The hazard warning lights will fl ash twice.
NOTE
When the doors are unlocked by pressing
the unlock button on the transmitter while
the theft-deterrent system is turned off, the
hazard warning lights will fl ash twice to
indicate that the system is turned off.
To Stop the Alarm
A triggered alarm can be turned off using
any one of the following methods:
Pressing the unlock button on the
transmitter.
Starting the engine with the push button
start.
(With the advanced keyless function)
Pressing a request switch on the doors.
Pressing the electric liftgate/trunk lid
opener while the key is being carried.
The hazard warning lights will fl ash twice.
Theft-Deterrent Labels
A label indicating that your vehicle is
equipped with a Theft-Deterrent System is
in the glove compartment.
Mazda recommends that you affi x it to the
lower rear corner of a front door window.
3–45
Before Driving
Driving Tips
Break-In Period
No special break-in is necessary, but a
few precautions in the fi rst 1,000 km
(600 miles) may add to the performance,
economy, and life of the vehicle.
Do not race the engine.
Do not maintain one constant speed,
either slow or fast, for a long period of
time.
Do not drive constantly at full-throttle or
high engine rpm for extended periods of
time.
Avoid unnecessary hard stops.
Avoid full-throttle starts.
Money-Saving Suggestions
How you operate your Mazda determines
how far it will travel on a tank of fuel. Use
these suggestions to help save money on
fuel and repairs.
Avoid long warm-ups. Once the engine
runs smoothly, begin driving.
Avoid fast starts.
Follow the maintenance schedule
(page 6-4 ) and have an Authorized
Mazda Dealer perform inspections and
servicing.
Use the air conditioner only when
necessary.
Slow down on rough roads.
Keep the tires properly infl ated.
Do not carry unnecessary weight.
Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal
while driving.
Keep the wheels in correct alignment.
Keep windows closed at high speeds.
Slow down when driving in crosswinds
and headwinds.
WARNING
Never stop the engine when going down
a hill:
Stopping the engine when going
down a hill is dangerous. This causes
the loss of power steering and power
brake control, and may cause damage
to the drivetrain. Any loss of steering
or braking control could cause an
accident.
3–46
Before Driving
Driving Tips
Hazardous Driving
WARNING
Be extremely careful if it is necessary to
downshift on slippery surfaces:
Downshifting into lower gear
while driving on slippery surfaces is
dangerous. The sudden change in tire
speed could cause the tires to skid. This
could lead to loss of vehicle control
and an accident.
When driving on ice or in water, snow,
mud, sand, or similar hazards:
Be cautious and allow extra distance for
braking.
Avoid sudden braking and sudden
maneuvering.
Do not pump the brakes. Continue to
press down on the brake pedal.
Refer to Antilock Brake System (ABS)
on page 4-79 .
If you get stuck, select a lower gear and
accelerate slowly. Do not spin the front
wheels.
For more traction in starting on slippery
surfaces such as ice or packed snow,
use sand, rock salt, chains, carpeting, or
other nonslip material under the front
wheels.
NOTE
Use snow chains only on the front wheels.
Floor Mat
WARNING
Make sure the fl oor mats are hooked on
the retention pins to prevent them from
bunching up under the foot pedals:
Using a fl oor mat that is not secured is
dangerous as it will interfere with the
accelerator and brake pedal operation,
which could result in an accident.
Do not install two fl oor mats, one on top
of the other, on the driver's side:
Installing two fl oor mats, one on top
of the other, on the driver's side is
dangerous as the retention pins can
only keep one fl oor mat from sliding
forward.
In using a heavy duty fl oor mat for
winter use always remove the original
fl oor mat.
Loose fl oor mat(s) will interfere with
the foot pedal and could result in an
accident.
When setting a fl oor mat, position the fl oor
mat so that its grommets are inserted over
the pointed end of the retention posts.
3–47
Before Driving
Driving Tips
Rocking the Vehicle
WARNING
Do not spin the wheels at more than
56 km/h (35 mph), and do not allow
anyone to stand behind a wheel when
pushing the vehicle:
When the vehicle is stuck, spinning the
wheels at high speed is dangerous.
The spinning tire could overheat and
explode. This could cause serious
injuries.
CAUTION
Too much rocking may cause engine
overheating, transaxle failure, and tire
damage.
If you must rock the vehicle to free it from
snow, sand or mud, depress the accelerator
slightly and slowly move the shift lever
from 1 (D) to R.
Winter Driving
Carry emergency gear, including tire
chains, window scraper, fl ares, a small
shovel, jumper cables, and a small bag of
sand or salt.
Ask an Authorized Mazda Dealer to check
the following:
Have the proper ratio of antifreeze in the
radiator.
Refer to Engine Coolant on page 6-29 .
Inspect the battery and its cables. Cold
reduces battery capacity.
Use an engine oil appropriate for the
lowest ambient temperatures that the
vehicle will be driven in (page 6-27 ).
Inspect the ignition system for damage
and loose connections.
Use washer fl uid made with antifreeze—
but do not use engine coolant antifreeze
for washer fl uid (page 6-31 ).
3–48
Before Driving
Driving Tips
NOTE
Do not use the parking brake in
freezing weather as it may freeze.
Instead, shift to P with an automatic
transaxle and to 1 or R with a manual
transaxle. Block the rear wheels.
Remove snow before driving. Snow left
on the windshield is dangerous as it
could obstruct vision.
Do not apply excessive force to a
window scraper when removing ice or
frozen snow on the mirror glass and
windshield.
Never use warm or hot water for
removing snow or ice from windows
and mirrors as it could result in the
glass cracking.
Drive slowly. Braking performance
can be adversely affected if snow or
ice adheres to the brake components. If
this situation occurs, drive the vehicle
slowly, releasing the accelerator pedal
and lightly applying the brakes several
times until the brake performance
returns to normal.
Snow Tires
Use snow tires on all four wheels
Do not go faster than 120 km/h (75 mph)
while driving with snow tires. Infl ate snow
tires 30 kPa (0.3 kgf/cm 2 , 4.3 psi) more
than recommended on the tire pressure
label (driver's door frame), but never
more than the maximum cold-tire pressure
shown on the tires.
The vehicle is originally equipped with
all season radials designed to be used all
year around. In some extreme climates you
may fi nd it necessary to replace them with
snow tires during the winter months to
further improve traction on snow and ice
covered roads.
WARNING
Use only the same size and type tires
(snow, radial, or non-radial) on all four
wheels:
Using tires diff erent in size or type is
dangerous. Your vehicle's handling
could be greatly aff ected and result in
an accident.
CAUTION
Check local regulations before using
studded tires.
Tire Chains
Check local regulations before using tire
chains.
CAUTION
Chains may aff ect handling.
Do not go faster than 50 km/h (30
mph) or the chain manufacturer's
recommended limit, whichever is lower.
Drive carefully and avoid bumps, holes,
and sharp turns.
Avoid locked-wheel braking.
Do not use chains on a temporary spare
tire; it may result in damage to the
vehicle and to the tire.
Do not use chains on roads that are free
of snow or ice. The tires and chains could
be damaged.
Chains may scratch or chip aluminum
wheels.
NOTE
The tire pressure monitoring system may
not function correctly when using tire
chains.
3–49
Before Driving
Driving Tips
Install the chains on the front tires only.
Do not use chains on the rear tires.
Please consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
Installing the chains
1. Secure the chains on the front tires as
tightly as possible.
Always follow the chain manufacturer's
instructions.
2. Retighten the chains after driving
1/2—1 km (1/4—1/2 mile).
Driving In Flooded Area
WARNING
Dry off brakes that have become
wet by driving slowly, releasing the
accelerator pedal and lightly applying
the brakes several times until the brake
performance returns to normal:
Driving with wet brakes is dangerous.
Increased stopping distance or the
vehicle pulling to one side when
braking could result in a serious
accident. Light braking will indicate
whether the brakes have been aff ected.
CAUTION
Do not drive the vehicle on fl ooded
roads as it could cause short circuiting
of electrical/electronic parts, or
engine damage or stalling from
water absorption. If the vehicle has
been immersed in water, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
3–50
Before Driving
Driving Tips
Overloading
WARNING
Be careful not to overload your vehicle:
The gross axle weight rating (GAWR)
and the gross vehicle weight rating
(GVWR) of the vehicle are on the
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard Label
on the driver's door frame. Exceeding
these ratings can cause an accident
or vehicle damage. You can estimate
the weight of the load by weighing the
items (or people) before putting them
in the vehicle.
3–51
Before Driving
Driving Tips
Driving on Uneven Road
Your vehicle's suspension and underbody can be damaged if driven on rough/uneven roads
or over speed bumps at excessive speeds. Use care and reduce speed when traveling on
rough/uneven roads or over speed bumps.
Use care not to damage the vehicle's underbody, bumpers or muffl er(s) when driving under
the following conditions:
Ascending or descending a slope with a sharp transition angle
Ascending or descending a driveway or trailer ramp with a sharp transition angle
This vehicle is equipped with low profi le tires allowing class-leading performance and
handling. As a result, the sidewall of the tires are very thin and the tires and wheels can be
damaged if driven through potholes or on rough/uneven roads at excessive speeds. Use care
and reduce speed when traveling on rough/uneven roads or through potholes.
3–52
Before Driving
Towing
Trailer Towing
The Mazda3 is not designed for towing.
Never tow a trailer with your Mazda3.
Recreational Towing
An example of "recreational towing" is
towing your vehicle behind a motorhome.
The transaxle is not designed for towing
this vehicle on all 4 wheels.
When doing recreational towing refer
to "Towing Description" (page 7-21 )
and "Tiedown Hooks" (page 7-22 ) and
carefully follow the instructions.
*Some models. 4–1
4 When Driving
Information concerning safe driving and stopping.
Start/Stop Engine ................................ 4-4
Ignition Switch ............................... 4-4
Starting the Engine ......................... 4-5
Turning the Engine Off ................ 4-10
Instrument Cluster and Display ...... 4-12
Meters and Gauges ....................... 4-12
Active Driving Display* ............... 4-19
Warning/Indicator Lights ............. 4-21
Transaxle ............................................ 4-27
Manual Transaxle Operation ........ 4-27
Automatic Transaxle Controls ...... 4-30
Switches and Controls ...................... 4-41
Lighting Control ........................... 4-41
High Beam Control System
(HBC)* ......................................... 4-48
Fog Lights* ................................... 4-51
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ...... 4-51
Windshield Wipers and Washer ...... 4-52
Rear Window Wiper and
Washer* ........................................ 4-56
Rear Window Defroster ............... 4-56
Horn ............................................. 4-58
Hazard Warning Flasher ............... 4-58
HomeLink Wireless Control
System* ......................................... 4-59
Forward Sensing Camera ................. 4-63
Forward Sensing Camera* ............ 4-63
Radar Sensor ..................................... 4-65
Radar Sensor ................................ 4-65
Brake .................................................. 4-68
Brake System ............................... 4-68
Hill Launch Assist (HLA) ............ 4-70
Smart City Brake Support
(SCBS)* ........................................ 4-72
ABS/TCS/DSC ................................... 4-79
Antilock Brake System (ABS) ...... 4-79
Traction Control System (TCS) ...... 4-80
Dynamic Stability Control
(DSC) ........................................... 4-81
i-ELOOP ............................................ 4-83
i-ELOOP* ..................................... 4-83
Fuel Economy Monitor ..................... 4-86
Fuel Economy Monitor* ............... 4-86
Drive Selection ................................... 4-88
Drive Selection* ........................... 4-88
Power Steering................................... 4-90
Power Steering ............................. 4-90
Mazda Radar Cruise Control
(MRCC) ............................................. 4-91
Mazda Radar Cruise Control
(MRCC) ....................................... 4-91
Cruise Control ................................. 4-100
Cruise Control* ........................... 4-100
*Some models.4–2
Tire Pressure Monitoring System .... 4-104
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System* ....................................... 4-104
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)
System .............................................. 4-108
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)
System ........................................ 4-108
Forward Obstruction Warning
(FOW) .............................................. 4-116
Forward Obstruction Warning
(FOW) ........................................ 4-116
Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS) ............................................ 4-119
Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS)* .................................... 4-119
Rear View Monitor .......................... 4-125
Rear View Monitor* ................... 4-125
4–3
MEMO
4–4
When Driving
Start/Stop Engine
Ignition Switch
Push Button Start Positions
The system operates only when the driver
is in the vehicle or within operational
range while the key is being carried.
Each time the push button start is pressed,
the ignition switches in the order of off,
ACC, and ON. Pressing the push button
start again from ON switches the ignition
off.
Indicator light
NOTE
The engine starts by pressing the push
button start while depressing the clutch
pedal (manual transaxle) or the brake
pedal (automatic transaxle). To switch
the ignition position, press the push
button start without depressing the
pedal.
Do not leave the ignition switched ON
while the engine is not running. Doing
so could result in the battery going
dead. If the ignition is left in ACC (For
automatic transaxle, the selector lever
is in the P position, and the ignition
is in ACC), the ignition switches off
automatically after about 25 minutes.
off
The power supply to electrical devices
turns off and the push button start indicator
light (amber) also turns off.
This position is in which the steering
wheel is locked.
WARNING
Before leaving the driver's seat, always
switch the ignition off , set the parking
brake, and make sure the selector lever
is in P (automatic transaxle) or in 1st
gear or R (manual transaxle):
Leaving the driver's seat without
switching the ignition off , setting the
parking brake, and shifting the selector
lever to P (automatic transaxle) or
to 1st gear or R (manual transaxle)
is dangerous. Unexpected vehicle
movement could occur which could
result in an accident.
In addition, if your intention is to leave
the vehicle for even a short period, it
is important to switch the ignition off ,
as leaving it in another position will
disable some of the vehicle's security
systems and run the battery down.
ACC (Accessory)
Some electrical accessories will operate
and the indicator light (amber) illuminates.
NOTE
The keyless entry system does not function
while the push button start has been
pressed to ACC, and the doors will not
lock/unlock even if they have been locked
manually.
4–5
When Driving
Start/Stop Engine
ON
This is the normal running position after
the engine is started. The indicator light
(amber) turns off. (The indicator light
(amber) illuminates when the ignition
is switched ON and the engine is not
running.)
Some indicator lights/warning lights
should be inspected before the engine is
started (page 4-21 ).
NOTE
When the push button start is pressed to
ON, the sound of the fuel pump motor
operating near the fuel tank can be heard.
This does not indicate an abnormality.
Starting the Engine
WARNING
Radio waves from the key may aff ect
medical devices such as pacemakers:
Before using the key near people who
use medical devices, ask the medical
device manufacturer or your physician
if radio waves from the key will aff ect
the device.
4–6
When Driving
Start/Stop Engine
NOTE
The key must be carried because the
key carries an immobilizer chip that
must communicate with the engine
controls at short range.
The engine can be started when the
push button start is pressed from off,
ACC, or ON.
The push button start system functions
(function which can start the engine
by only carrying the key) can be
deactivated to prevent any possible
adverse effect on a user wearing a
pacemaker or other medical device. If
the system is deactivated, you will be
unable to start the engine by carrying
the key. Consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer for details. If the push button
start system functions have been
deactivated, you can start the engine by
following the procedure indicated when
the key battery goes dead.
Refer to Engine Start Function When
Key Battery is Dead on page 4-8 .
After starting a cold engine, the engine
speed increases and a whining sound
from the engine compartment can be
heard.
This is for improved exhaust gas
purifi cation and does not indicate
defect of the parts.
Engine-starting is controlled by the
spark ignition system.
This system meets all Canadian
Interference-Causing Equipment
Standard requirements regulating the
impulse electrical fi eld strength of radio
noise.
1. Make sure you are carrying the key.
2. Occupants should fasten their seat
belts.
3. Make sure the parking brake is on.
4. Continue to press the brake pedal
fi rmly until the engine has completely
started.
5. (Manual transaxle)
Continue to press the clutch pedal
fi rmly until the engine has completely
started.
(Automatic transaxle)
Put the vehicle in park (P). If you must
restart the engine while the vehicle is
moving, shift into neutral (N).
NOTE
(Manual transaxle)
The starter will not operate if the clutch
pedal is not depressed suffi ciently.
(Automatic transaxle)
The starter will not operate if the selector
lever is not in P or N and the brake pedal
is not depressed suffi ciently.
6. Verify that the KEY indicator light
(green) in the instrument cluster and the
push button start indicator light (green)
illuminate.
Indicator light
4–7
When Driving
Start/Stop Engine
NOTE
If the push button start indicator light
(green) fl ashes, make sure that the key
is being carried.
If the push button start indicator light
(green) fl ashes with the key being
carried, touch the key to the push
button start and start the engine. Refer
to Engine Start Function When Key
Battery is Dead on page 4-8 .
CAUTION
If the KEY warning light (red)
illuminates, or the push button
start indicator light (amber) fl ashes,
this could indicate a problem with
the engine starting system and the
inability to start the engine or switch
the ignition to ACC or ON. Have your
vehicle inspected at an Authorized
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
NOTE
Under the following conditions, the
KEY warning light (red) fl ashes after
the push button start is pressed to
inform the driver that the push button
start will not switch to ACC even if it is
pressed from off.
The key battery is dead.
The key is out of operational range.
The key is placed in areas where it is
diffi cult for the system to detect the
signal (page 3-7 ).
A key from another manufacturer
similar to the key is in the
operational range.
(Forced engine starting method)
If the KEY warning light (red)
illuminates, or the push button start
indicator light (amber) fl ashes, this
could indicate that the engine may not
start using the usual starting method.
Have your vehicle inspected at an
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as
possible. If this occurs, the engine can
be force-started. Press and hold the
push button start until the engine starts.
Other procedures necessary for starting
the engine such as having the key in the
cabin, and depressing the clutch pedal
(manual transaxle) or the brake pedal
(automatic transaxle) are required.
When the engine is force-started,
the KEY warning light (red) remains
illuminated and the push button
start indicator light (amber) remains
fl ashing.
(Automatic transaxle)
When the selector lever is in the
neutral (N) position, the KEY indicator
light (green) and the push button
start indicator light (green) do not
illuminate.
7. Press the push button start after both
the KEY indicator light (green) in the
instrument cluster and the push button
start indicator light (green) illuminate.
NOTE
After starting the engine, the push
button start indicator light (amber)
turns off and the ignition switches to the
ON position.
After pressing the push button start and
before the engine starts, the operation
sound of the fuel pump motor from near
the fuel tank can be heard, however, this
does not indicate a malfunction.
4–8
When Driving
Start/Stop Engine
8. After starting the engine, let it idle for
about ten seconds.
NOTE
Whether the engine is cold or warm, it
should be started without the use of the
accelerator.
If the engine does not start the fi rst
time, refer to Starting a Flooded Engine
under Emergency Starting. If the engine
still does not start, have your vehicle
inspected by an Authorized Mazda
Dealer (page 7-18 ).
Engine Start Function When Key
Battery is Dead
CAUTION
When starting the engine by holding
the transmitter over the push button
start due to a dead key battery or a
malfunctioning key, be careful not
to allow the following, otherwise the
signal from the key will not be received
correctly and the engine may not start.
Metal parts of other keys or metal
objects touch the key.
Spare keys or keys for other vehicles
equipped with an immobilizer system
touch or come near the key.
Devices for electronic purchases, or
security passage touch or come near
the key.
If the engine cannot be started due to a
dead key battery, the engine can be started
using the following procedure:
1. Depress the brake pedal fi rmly.
2. (Manual transaxle)
Continue to depress the clutch pedal
fi rmly until the engine has completely
started.
4–9
When Driving
Start/Stop Engine
3. Verify that the push button start
indication light (green) fl ashes.
NOTE
The push button start indicator light
(green) will fl ash even if the push button
start is pressed before depressing the
brake pedal (automatic transaxle) or
the clutch pedal (manual transaxle). If
the clutch pedal is depressed (manual
transaxle) or the brake pedal is depressed
(automatic transaxle) under this condition,
the engine can be started by resuming the
procedure following this.
4. Touch the push button start using the
backside of the key (as shown) while
the push button start indicator light
(green) fl ashes.
Transmitter
NOTE
When touching the push button start using
the backside of the key as shown in the
illustration, touch the push button start
with the lock switch side of the key facing
up.
5. Verify that the push button start
indicator light (green) turns on.
6. Press the push button start to start the
engine.
NOTE
The engine cannot be started unless the
clutch pedal is fully depressed (manual
transaxle) or the brake pedal is fully
depressed (automatic transaxle).
If there is a malfunction with the push
button start function, the push button
start indicator light (amber) fl ashes.
In this case, the engine may start,
however, have the vehicle checked at an
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as
possible.
If the push button start indicator light
(green) does not illuminate, perform the
operation from the beginning again. If
it does not illuminate, have the vehicle
checked at an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
To switch the ignition position without
starting the engine, perform the
following operations after the push
button start indicator light (green) turns
on.
1. Release the clutch pedal (manual
transaxle) or brake pedal (automatic
transaxle).
2. Press the push button start to switch
the ignition position. The ignition
switches in the order of ACC, ON,
and off each time the push button
start is pressed. To switch the
ignition position again, perform the
operation from the beginning.
4–10
When Driving
Start/Stop Engine
Emergency Operation for Starting
the Engine
If the KEY warning light (red) illuminates,
or the push button start indicator light
(amber) fl ashes, this could indicate that
the engine may not start using the usual
starting method. Have your vehicle
inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer
as soon as possible. If this occurs, the
engine can be force-started. Press and hold
the push button start until the engine starts.
Other procedures necessary for starting the
engine such as having the key in the cabin,
and depressing the clutch pedal (manual
transaxle) or the brake pedal (automatic
transaxle) are required.
Turning the Engine Off
WARNING
Do not stop the engine while the vehicle
is moving:
Stopping the engine while the vehicle
is moving for any reason other than in
an emergency is dangerous. Stopping
the engine while the vehicle is moving
will result in reduced braking ability
due to the loss of power braking, which
could cause an accident and serious
injury.
1. Stop the vehicle completely.
2. (Manual transaxle)
Shift into neutral and set the parking
brake.
(Automatic transaxle)
Shift the selector lever to the P position
and set the parking brake.
3. Press the push button start to turn off
the engine. The ignition position is off.
CAUTION
When leaving the vehicle, make sure
the push button start is off .
4–11
When Driving
Start/Stop Engine
NOTE
The cooling fan in the engine
compartment could turn on for a few
minutes after the ignition is switched
from ON to OFF, whether or not the
A/C is on or off, to cool the engine
compartment quickly.
When the push button start is pressed
from ON to ACC or OFF, the KEY
indicator light (green) may fl ash for
approximately 30 seconds indicating
that the remaining battery power of the
key is low.
Replace with a new battery before the
key becomes unusable.
Refer to Battery Replacement on page
6-39 .
(Automatic transaxle)
If the engine is turned off while the
selector lever is in a position other than
P, the ignition switches to ACC.
Emergency Engine Stop
Continuously pressing the push button
start or quickly pressing it any number of
times while the engine is running or the
vehicle is being driven will turn the engine
off immediately. The ignition switches to
ACC.
4–12
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
Meters and Gauges
Type A
Type B
Type C
Steering Switch
(Digital Speed Meter Type)
(Analog Speed Meter Type (With Tachometer))
(Analog Speed Meter Type (Without Tachometer))
Some models.
Instrument Cluster
Speedometer .......................................................................................................... page 4-13
Odometer, Trip Meter and Trip Meter Selector .................................................... page 4-13
Tachometer ............................................................................................................ page 4-14
Fuel Gauge ............................................................................................................ page 4-15
Dashboard Illumination......................................................................................... page 4-16
Outside Temperature Display ................................................................................ page 4-16
Cruise Control Set Vehicle Speed Display ............................................................ page 4-17
Active Driving Display ......................................................................................... page 4-19
4–13
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
Trip Computer and INFO Switch .......................................................................... page 4-17
Speed Unit Selector ............................................................................................... page 4-13
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the speed of the
vehicle.
Speed Unit Selector (Type A
Instrument Cluster)
In some countries, you may have to
change the speed units between km/h and
mph.
Press the speed unit selector for 1.5
seconds or more.
The speed units for the speedometer will
change between km/h and mph.
Speedometer
Speed unit selector
Odometer, Trip Meter and Trip
Meter Selector
The display mode can be changed from
odometer to trip meter A to trip meter B
and then back to odometer by pressing the
selector while one of them is displayed.
The selected mode will be displayed.
Type A/Type B
Press the selector
Press the selector
Press the selector
Odometer
Trip meter A
Trip meter B
Type C
Press the selector
Press the selector
Press the selector
Odometer
Trip meter A
Trip meter B
*Some models.4–14
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
NOTE
When the ignition is switched to ACC or
off, the odometer or trip meters cannot be
displayed, however, pressing the selector
can inadvertently switch the trip meters or
reset them during an approximate tenminute period in the following cases:
After the ignition is switched to off from
ON.
After the driver's door is opened.
Odometer
The odometer records the total distance
the vehicle has been driven.
Trip meter
The trip meter can record the total distance
of two trips. One is recorded in trip meter
A, and the other is recorded in trip meter
B.
For instance, trip meter A can record the
distance from the point of origin, and
trip meter B can record the distance from
where the fuel tank is fi lled.
When trip meter A is selected, pressing
the selector again within one second will
change to trip meter B mode.
When trip meter A is selected, TRIP A
will be displayed. When trip meter B is
selected, TRIP B will be displayed.
The trip meter records the total distance
the vehicle is driven until the meter
is again reset. Return it to “0.0” by
depressing and holding the selector for
one second or more. Use this meter to
measure trip distances and to compute fuel
consumption.
NOTE
(Vehicles with type B audio)
If the fuel economy data is reset using
the fuel economy monitor, or trip A
is reset using the trip meter when the
function which synchronizes the fuel
economy monitor and the trip meter is
on, the fuel economy data and trip A
are reset simultaneously.
Refer to Fuel Economy Monitor on
page 4-86 .
Only the trip meters record tenths of
kilometers (miles).
The trip record will be erased when:
The power supply is interrupted
(blown fuse or the battery is
disconnected).
The vehicle is driven over 9999.9 km
(mile).
Tachometer *
The tachometer shows engine speed in
thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).
CAUTION
Do not run the engine with the
tachometer needle in the RED ZONE.
This may cause severe engine damage.
Type A
*1 The range varies depending on the type
of gauge.
*1 Striped zone
*1 Red zone
4–15
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
Type B
*1 The range varies depending on the type
of gauge.
*1 Striped zone
*1 Red zone
NOTE
When the tachometer needle enters the
STRIPED ZONE, this indicates to the
driver that the gears should be shifted
before entering the RED ZONE.
Fuel Gauge
The fuel gauge shows approximately
how much fuel is remaining in the tank
when the ignition is switched ON. We
recommend keeping the tank over 1/4 full.
Type A/Type B
Full
1/4 Full
Type C
Full
1/4 Full
If the low fuel warning light illuminates or
the fuel level is very low, refuel as soon as
possible.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page
4-21 .
NOTE
After refueling, it may require some
time for the indicator to stabilize. In
addition, the indicator may deviate
while driving on a slope or curve since
the fuel moves in the tank.
The display indicating a quarter or less
remaining fuel has more segments to
show the remaining fuel level in greater
detail.
The direction of the arrow ( )
indicates that the fuel-fi ller lid is on the
left side of the vehicle.
*Some models.4–16
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
Dashboard Illumination
Rotate the knob to adjust the brightness
of the instrument cluster and other
illuminations in the dashboard.
NOTE
The brightness of dashboard
illuminations can be adjusted when
the headlights and Parking lights are
turned on.
When the dashboard illumination
brightness cannot be adjusted any
more, a beep sound will be heard.
Dim
Bright
Canceling the illumination dimmer
When the headlight switch is in the or
position, the illumination of the
instrument cluster dims.
When driving on snowy or foggy roads,
or in other situations when the instrument
cluster's visibility is reduced due to glare
from surrounding brightness, cancel the
illumination dimmer and increase the
illumination intensity.
To cancel the illumination dimmer, rotate
the knob clockwise fully. You will hear a
beep sound and the illumination dimmer
will be canceled.
NOTE
This symbol ( ) indicates the knob to
adjust the brightness of the dashboard
illumination.
If the dashboard illumination knob is
kept at the illumination dimmer cancel
position, the instrument cluster will not
dim when the headlight switch is turned
to the or position again. Rotate
the dashboard illumination knob
counterclockwise to activate the
illumination dimmer.
Outside Temperature Display *
When the ignition is switched ON, the
outside temperature is displayed.
NOTE
Under the following conditions, the
outside temperature display may differ
from the actual outside temperature
depending on the surroundings and
vehicle conditions:
Signifi cantly cold or hot
temperatures.
Sudden changes in outside
temperature.
The vehicle is parked.
The vehicle is driven at low speeds.
The outside temperature unit can be
switched between Celsius and Fahrenheit
using the following procedure.
*Some models. 4–17
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
1. Press the INFO button with the ignition
switched off and continue pressing the
INFO button for 5 seconds or longer
while switching the ignition ON. The
outside temperature display fl ashes.
2. Press the up or down part of the
INFO switch to change the outside
temperature unit.
3. Press and hold the INFO button for 3
seconds or longer while the outside
temperature display is fl ashing. The
outside temperature display illuminates.
Cruise Control Set Vehicle Speed
Display*
The vehicle speed preset using the cruise
control is displayed.
Trip Computer and INFO Switch *
The following information can be selected
by pressing the up or down part of the
INFO switch with the ignition switched
ON.
Approximate distance you can travel on
the available fuel
Average fuel economy
Current fuel economy
Average vehicle speed
If you have any problems with your trip
computer, consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
Distance-to-empty mode
This mode displays the approximate
distance you can travel on the remaining
fuel based on the fuel economy.
The distance-to-empty will be calculated
and displayed every second.
NOTE
Even though the distance-to-empty
display may indicate a suffi cient
amount of remaining driving distance
before refueling is required, refuel
as soon as possible if the fuel level is
very low or the low fuel warning light
illuminates.
The display may not change unless you
add more than approximately 9 L (2.3
US gal, 1.9 Imp gal) of fuel.
The distance-to-empty is the
approximate remaining distance the
vehicle can be driven until all the
graduation marks in the fuel gauge
(indicating the remaining fuel supply)
disappear.
4–18
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
Average fuel economy mode
This mode displays the average fuel
economy by calculating the total fuel
consumption and the total traveled
distance since purchasing the vehicle, reconnecting the battery after disconnection,
or resetting the data. The average fuel
economy is calculated and displayed every
minute.
To clear the data being displayed, press the
INFO button for more than 1.5 seconds.
After pressing the INFO button, - - - L/100
km (- - - mpg) will be displayed for about
1 minute before the fuel economy is
recalculated and displayed.
Current fuel economy mode
This mode displays the current fuel
economy by calculating the amount of fuel
consumption and the distance traveled.
Current fuel economy will be calculated
and displayed every 2 seconds.
When you've slowed to about 5 km/h (3
mph), - - - L/100 km (- - - mpg) will be
displayed.
Average vehicle speed mode
This mode displays the average vehicle
speed by calculating the distance and the
time traveled since connecting the battery
or resetting the data.
Average vehicle speed will be calculated
and displayed every 10 seconds.
To clear the data being displayed, press the
INFO button for more than 1.5 seconds.
After pressing the INFO button, - - - km/h
(- - - mph) will be displayed for about
1 minute before the vehicle speed is
recalculated and displayed.
*Some models. 4–19
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
Active Driving Display *
Optical receiver
MirrorCombiner
WARNING
Adjust the brightness or the display position while paying attention to safe driving:
If you do not pay attention to your driving while trying to make the adjustments, it could
lead to an unexpected accident.
CAUTION
Do not try to adjust the angle or open/close the active driving display manually.
Fingerprints on the display will make it diffi cult to view and using excessive force when
operating it could cause damage.
Do not place objects in the vicinity of the active driving display. The active driving display
may not operate or any interference with its operation could cause damage.
Do not place beverages near the active driving display. If water or other liquids are
splashed on the active driving display, it could cause damage.
Do not place objects above the active driving display screen or apply stickers to the
combiner as they will cause interference.
A sensor is integrated to control the display's luminosity. If the optical receiver is covered,
the display's luminosity will lower making the display diffi cult to view.
Do not allow intense light to hit the optical receiver. Otherwise, it could cause damage.
NOTE
It may be diffi cult to view the display when wearing sunglasses. Take off your sunglasses
or adjust the luminosity.
If the battery has been removed and re-installed or the battery voltage is low, the adjusted
position may deviate.
The display may be diffi cult to view or temporarily affected by weather conditions such
as rain, snow, light, and temperature.
If the audio system is removed, the active driving display cannot be operated.
4–20
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
The active driving display indicates the following information:
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) Operation Conditions and Warnings
Refer to Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) on page 4-91 .
Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) Operation Conditions and Warnings
Refer to Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) on page 4-119 .
Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) Operation Conditions and Warnings
Refer to Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) on page 4-72 .
Forward Obstruction Warning (FOW) Operation Conditions and Warnings
Refer to Forward Obstruction Warning (FOW) on page 4-116 .
Vehicle Speed Setting Using Cruise Control
Refer to Cruise Control on page 4-100 .
Turn-by-Turn (TBT) (Direction and Distance) and Lane Guidance
Vehicle Speed
Each setting/adjustment for the active driving display can be performed on the Type B audio
display.
1. Select the ( ) icon on the home screen and display the Settings screen.
2. Select the AD-Disp tab.
3. Select the desired item and perform the setting/adjustment.
Height : Active driving display position
Brightness Control : Method for adjusting screen brightness (Automatically/Manually)
Calibration : Brightness initialization setting (when selecting automatic adjustment)
Brightness : Brightness adjustment (when selecting manual adjustment)
Navigation : On/Off
Active Driving Display : On/Off
Reset
4–21
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
Warning/Indicator Lights
Instrument Cluster varies depending on model and specifi cations.
Warning/Indicator lights will appear in any of the highlighted areas
Type A
Type B
Type C
Center of Dashboard
(Digital Speed Meter Type)
(Analog Speed Meter Type (With Tachometer))
(Analog Speed Meter Type (Without Tachometer))
Instrument Cluster
*Some models.4–22
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
Warning Lights
These lights turn on or fl ash to notify the user of the system operation status or a system
malfunction.
Signal Warning Lights Page
Master Warning Light *1 7-24
Brake System Warning Light *1*2 7-24
ABS Warning Light *1 7-24
Charging System Warning Light *1 7-24
Engine Oil Warning Light *1 7-24
Check Engine Light *1 7-24
(Red)
High Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light *1 7-24
* Automatic Transaxle Warning Light *1 7-24
Power Steering Malfunction Indicator Light *1 7-24
Air Bag/Front Seat Belt Pretensioner System Warning Light *1 7-24
Low Fuel Warning Light 7-24
Check Fuel Cap Warning Light *1 7-24
Seat Belt Warning Light 7-24
Door-Ajar Warning Light 7-24
*Some models. 4–23
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
Signal Warning Lights Page
Low Washer Fluid Level Warning Light 7-24
* Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light *1 7-24
(Red)
KEY Warning Light 7-24
(Red)
* Forward Obstruction Warning/Smart City Brake Support (FOW/SCBS)
Warning Light *1
4-78 ,
4-118
(Amber)
* Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) Warning Light *1*3 7-24
(Amber)
* High Beam Control System (HBC) Warning Light *1 7-24
(Amber)
* Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) Warning Light *1 7-24
*1 The light turns on when the ignition is switched on for an operation check, and turns off a few seconds later or
when the engine is started. If the light does not turn on or remains turned on, have the vehicle inspected at an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
*2 The light turns on continuously when the parking brake is applied.
*3 The light turns on when the system on stand-by. The light fl ashes when the system has a malfunction.
*Some models.4–24
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
Indicator Lights
These lights turn on or fl ash to notify the user of the system operation status or a system
malfunction.
Signal Indicator Lights Page
* BSM OFF Indicator Light 4-114
(Green)
* Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) Indicator Light 4-122
(Green)
KEY Indicator Light 3-9
(Green)
* High Beam Control System (HBC) Indicator Light 4-50
Wrench Warning Indicator Light *1 4-26
TCS/DSC Indicator Light *1 4-80 , 4-81
DSC OFF Indicator Light *1 4-82
* AFS OFF Indicator Light *1 4-46
(Amber)
* Forward Obstruction Warning/Smart City Brake Support (FOW/SCBS)
Indicator Light *1 4-78
* Forward Obstruction Warning/Smart City Brake Support (FOW/SCBS) OFF
Indicator Light *1 4-78
* i-ELOOP Indicator Light 4-85
(Blue)
Low Engine Coolant Temperature Indicator Light 4-26
*Some models. 4–25
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
Signal Indicator Lights Page
* Shift Position Indication 4-31
* SPORT Mode Indicator Light 4-89
Headlight High-Beam Indicator Light 4-45 , 4-45
Turn Signal/Hazard Warning Indicator Lights 4-51 , 4-58
Security Indicator Light *1 3-42
(Green)
* Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) Indicator Light 4-95
(Amber)
* Cruise Main Indicator Light 4-101
(Green)
* Cruise Set Indicator Light 4-101
Lights-On Indicator Light 4-41
*1 The light turns on when the ignition is switched on for an operation check, and turns off a few seconds later or
when the engine is started. If the light does not turn on or remains turned on, have the vehicle inspected at an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
4–26
When Driving
Instrument Cluster and Display
Wrench Warning Indicator Light
When the ignition is switched ON, the
warning light is illuminated and then turns
off after a few seconds.
The wrench warning indicator light is
illuminated when the preset maintenance
period arrives. Verify the content and
perform maintenance.
Refer to Maintenance Monitor on page
6-20 .
Low Engine Coolant Temperature
Indicator Light (Blue)
The light illuminates continuously when
the engine coolant temperature is low and
turns off after the engine is warm.
If the low engine coolant temperature
indicator light remains illuminated after
the engine has been suffi ciently warmed
up, the temperature sensor could have
a malfunction. Consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
4–27
When Driving
Transaxle
Manual Transaxle
Operation
Manual Transaxle Shift Pattern
Neutral position
The shift pattern of the transaxle is
conventional, as shown.
Depress the clutch pedal all the way down
while shifting; then release it slowly.
Your vehicle is equipped with a device to
prevent shifting to R (reverse) by mistake.
Push the shift lever downward and shift
to R.
WARNING
Do not use sudden engine braking on
slippery road surfaces or at high speeds:
Shifting down while driving on wet,
snowy, or frozen roads, or while driving
at high speeds causes sudden engine
braking, which is dangerous. The
sudden change in tire speed could
cause the tires to skid. This could
lead to loss of vehicle control and an
accident.
Always leave the shift lever in 1 or R
position and set the parking brake when
leaving the vehicle unattended:
Otherwise the vehicle could move and
cause an accident.
CAUTION
Keep your foot off the clutch pedal
except when shifting gears. Also, do not
use the clutch to hold the vehicle on an
upgrade. Riding the clutch will cause
needless clutch wear and damage.
Do not apply any excessive lateral force
to the shift lever when changing from
5th to 4th gear. This could lead to the
accidental selection of 2nd gear, which
could result in damage to the transaxle.
Make sure the vehicle comes to a
complete stop before shifting to R.
Shifting to R while the vehicle is still
moving may damage the transaxle.
*Some models.4–28
When Driving
Transaxle
NOTE
(For vehicles with type C instrument
cluster*1 )
If the engine speed is about to exceed
the permissible engine speed, the buzzer
sounds.
Refer to Over Rev. Buzzer on page
7-39 .
*1 To determine which instrument
cluster is equipped on your Mazda,
Refer to Meters and Gauges on page
4-12 .
If shifting to R is diffi cult, shift back
into neutral, release the clutch pedal,
and try again.
Gear Shift Indication *
The gear shift indication supports you to
obtain optimum fuel economy and smooth
driving. It displays the selected gear
position in the instrument cluster as well
as notifi es the driver to change to the most
suitable gear position corresponding to the
actual driving condition.
Selected gear position Suitable gear position
Indication Condition
Numeral The selected gear position is displayed.
and numeral
Shift up or down to the indicated
gear position is recommended.
CAUTION
Do not rely solely on the shift-up/
shift-down recommendations by
indications. The actual driving
situation might require shift operations
diff erent from indication. To avoid the
risk of accidents, the road and traffi c
conditions have to be judged correctly
by the driver before shifting.
NOTE
The gear shift indicator turns off when the
following operations are performed.
The vehicle is stopped.
The vehicle is put in neutral.
The vehicle is driven in reverse.
The clutch is not fully engaged when
accelerating from a stop.
The clutch pedal remains depressed for
2 seconds or longer while driving.
4–29
When Driving
Transaxle
Recommendations for Shifting (for
Vehicles without Gear Shift
Indication)
Upshifting
For normal acceleration, Mazda
recommends these shift points:
(U.S.A. and Canada)
Gear Vehicle speed
1 to 2 24 km/h (15 mph)
2 to 3 42 km/h (26 mph)
3 to 4 60 km/h (37 mph)
4 to 5 75 km/h (46 mph)
5 to 6 79 km/h (49 mph)
For cruising, Mazda recommends these shift points:
(U.S.A. and Canada)
Gear Vehicle speed
1 to 2 13 km/h (8 mph)
2 to 3 29 km/h (18 mph)
3 to 4 49 km/h (30 mph)
4 to 5 63 km/h (39 mph)
5 to 6 70 km/h (43 mph)
Downshifting
When you must slow down in heavy traffi c
or on a steep upgrade , downshift before
the engine starts to overwork. This reduces
the chance of stalling and gives better
acceleration when you need more speed.
On a steep downgrade , downshifting
helps maintain safe speed and prolongs
brake life.
4–30
When Driving
Transaxle
Automatic Transaxle Controls
Lock-release button
Indicates the shift lever can be shifted freely into any position.
Indicates that you must hold in the lock-release button to shift.
Indicates that you must depress the brake pedal and hold in the lock-release
button to shift (The ignition must be switched ON).
Various Lockouts:
NOTE
The Sport AT has an option that is not included in the traditional automatic transaxle that
gives the driver the option of selecting each gear instead of leaving it to the transaxle to
shift gears. Even if you intend to use the automatic transaxle functions as a traditional
automatic, you should also be aware that you can inadvertently shift into manual shift mode
and an inappropriate gear may be retained as the vehicle speed increases. If you notice the
engine speed going higher or hear the engine racing, confi rm you have not accidentally
slipped into manual shift mode (page 4-33 ).
4–31
When Driving
Transaxle
Shift Position Indication
This indicates the selected shift position.
Gear position indication
In manual shift mode, the “M” of the shift
position indication illuminates and the
numeral for the selected gear is displayed.
Warning Light
The warning light turns on when the
system has a malfunction.
Refer to Warning Lights on page 4-22 .
Transaxle Ranges
The shift position indicator light in the
instrument cluster illuminates. Refer to
Warning/Indicator Lights on page 4-21 .
The selector lever must be in P or N to
operate the starter.
P (Park)
P locks the transaxle and prevents the front
wheels from rotating.
WARNING
Always set the selector lever to P and set
the parking brake:
Only setting the selector lever to the
P position without using the parking
brake to hold the vehicle is dangerous.
If P fails to hold, the vehicle could move
and cause an accident.
CAUTION
Shifting into P, N or R while the vehicle is
moving can damage your transaxle.
Shifting into a driving gear or reverse
when the engine is running faster than
idle can damage the transaxle.
R (Reverse)
In position R, the vehicle moves only
backward. You must be at a complete
stop before shifting to or from R, except
under rare circumstances as explained in
Rocking the Vehicle (page 3-47 ).
N (Neutral)
In N, the wheels and transaxle are not
locked. The vehicle will roll freely even
on the slightest incline unless the parking
brake or brakes are on.
WARNING
If the engine is running faster than idle,
do not shift from N or P into a driving
gear:
It's dangerous to shift from N or P
into a driving gear when the engine
is running faster than idle. If this is
done, the vehicle could move suddenly,
causing an accident or serious injury.
Do not shift into N when driving the
vehicle:
Shifting into N while driving is
dangerous. Engine braking cannot
be applied when decelerating which
could lead to an accident or serious
injury.
4–32
When Driving
Transaxle
CAUTION
Do not shift into N when driving the
vehicle. Doing so can cause transaxle
damage.
NOTE
Apply the parking brake or depress the
brake pedal before moving the selector
lever from N to prevent the vehicle from
moving unexpectedly.
D (Drive)
D is the normal driving position. From a
stop, the transaxle will automatically shift
through a 6-gear sequence.
M (Manual)
M is the manual shift mode position. Gears
can be shifted up or down by operating the
selector lever. Refer to Manual Shift Mode
on page 4-33 .
Active Adaptive Shift (AAS)
Active Adaptive Shift (AAS)
automatically controls the transaxle shift
points to best suit the road conditions
and driver input. This improves driving
feel. The transaxle may switch to AAS
mode when driving up and down slopes,
cornering, or depressing the accelerator
pedal quickly while the selector lever is in
the D position. Depending on the driving
conditions and vehicle operations, the
transaxle may not shift gears, however,
this does not indicate a problem because
the AAS mode will maintain the optimum
gear position.
Shift-Lock System
The shift-lock system prevents shifting out
of P unless the brake pedal is depressed.
To shift from P:
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine.
3. Press and hold the lock-release button.
4. Move the selector lever.
NOTE
When the ignition is switched to ACC
or the ignition is switched off, the
selector lever cannot be shifted from P.
The ignition cannot be switched to OFF
if the selector lever is not in P.
Shift-Lock Override
If the selector lever will not move from P
using the proper shift procedure, continue
to hold down the pedal.
1. Remove the shift-lock override cover
using a cloth-wrapped fl at head
screwdriver.
2. Insert a screwdriver and push it down.
Cover
3. Press and hold the lock-release button.
4. Move the selector lever.
4–33
When Driving
Transaxle
5. Take the vehicle to an Authorized
Mazda Dealer to have the system
checked.
Manual Shift Mode
The manual shift mode gives you the feel
of driving a manual transaxle vehicle by
allowing you to operate the selector lever
manually. This allows you to control
engine rpm and torque to the drive wheels
much like a manual transaxle when more
control is desired.
To change to manual shift mode, shift the
lever from D to M.
NOTE
(For vehicles with type C instrument
cluster*1 )
If the engine speed is about to exceed
the permissible engine speed, the buzzer
sounds.
Refer to Over Rev. Buzzer on page
7-39 .
*1 To determine which instrument
cluster is equipped on your Mazda,
Refer to Meters and Gauges on page
4-12 .
Changing to manual shift mode while
driving will not damage the transaxle.
To return to automatic shift mode, shift the
lever from M to D.
NOTE
If you change to manual shift mode
when the vehicle is stopped, the gear
will shift to M1.
If you change to manual shift mode
without depressing the accelerator
pedal when driving in D range, 5th
gear/6th gear, the gear will shift to M4/
M5.
Indicators
Manual shift mode indication
In manual shift mode, the “M” of the shift
position indication in the instrument panel
illuminates.
Gear position indication
The numeral for the selected gear
illuminates.
Type A
Manual shift mode indication
Gear position indication
*Some models.4–34
When Driving
Transaxle
Type B
Gear position indication
Manual shift mode indication
Type C
Manual shift mode indication
Gear position indication
NOTE
If the gears cannot be shifted down
when driving at higher speeds, the gear
position indication will fl ash twice to
signal that the gears cannot be shifted
down (to protect the transaxle).
If the automatic transaxle fl uid (ATF)
temperature becomes too high, there
is the possibility that the transaxle
will switch to automatic shift mode,
canceling manual shift mode and
turning off the gear position indication
illumination. This is a normal function
to protect the automatic transaxle. After
the ATF temperature has decreased, the
gear position indication illumination
turns back on and driving in manual
shift mode is restored.
Shifting
You can shift gears up and down by
operating the selector lever or the steering
shift switches * .
Manually Shifting up
(M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 M6)
To shift up to a higher gear, move the
selector lever back ( ) once.
4–35
When Driving
Transaxle
To shift up to a higher gear with the
steering shift switches, pull the UP switch
toward you once with your fi ngers.
UP switch
WARNING
Keep your hands on the steering wheel
rim when using fi ngers on the steering
shift switches:
Putting your hands inside the rim of
the steering wheel when using the
steering shift switches is dangerous.
If the driver's air bag were to deploy
in a collision, your hands could be
impacted causing injury.
NOTE
When driving slowly, the gears may not
shift up.
In manual shift mode, do not run the
engine with the tachometer needle
in the RED ZONE. When the engine
rpm is high, a gear may shift up
automatically to protect the engine.
When depressing the accelerator fully,
the transaxle will shift to a lower gear,
depending on vehicle speed.
Manually Shifting down
(M6 M5 M4 M3 M2 M1)
To shift down to a lower gear, move the
selector lever forward ( ) once.
To shift down to a lower gear with the
steering shift switches, pull the DOWN
switch toward you once with your fi ngers.
DOWN switch
4–36
When Driving
Transaxle
WARNING
Do not use engine braking on slippery
road surfaces or at high speeds:
Shifting down while driving on wet,
snowy, or frozen roads, or while driving
at high speeds causes sudden engine
braking, which is dangerous. The
sudden change in tire speed could
cause the tires to skid. This could
lead to loss of vehicle control and an
accident.
Keep your hands on the steering wheel
rim when using fi ngers on the steering
shift switches:
Putting your hands inside the rim of
the steering wheel when using the
steering shift switches is dangerous.
If the driver's air bag were to deploy
in a collision, your hands could be
impacted causing injury.
NOTE
When driving at high speeds, the gear
may not shift down.
During deceleration, the gear may
automatically shift down depending on
vehicle speed.
When depressing the accelerator fully,
the transaxle will shift to a lower gear,
depending on vehicle speed.
Second gear fi xed mode
When the selector lever is moved back ( )
while the vehicle speed is about 10 km/h
(6.2 mph) or less, the transaxle is set in the
second gear fi xed mode. The gear is fi xed
in second while in this mode for easier
acceleration from a stop and driving on
slippery roads such as snow-covered
roads.
If the selector lever is moved back ( ) or
forward ( ) while in the second gear fi xed
mode, the mode will be canceled.
4–37
When Driving
Transaxle
Shift gear (shifting) speed limit
For each gear position while in the manual mode, the speed limit is set as follows: When the
selector lever is operated within the range of the speed limit, the gear is shifted.
Shift up
The gear does not shift up while the vehicle speed is lower than the speed limit.
Shift down
The gear does not shift down while the vehicle speed exceeds the speed limit.
If the vehicle speed exceeds the speed limit and the gear does not shift down, the gear
position indication fl ashes 2 times to notify the driver that the gear cannot be shifted.
Kickdown
When the accelerator pedal is depressed fully while driving, the gear shifts down.
NOTE
The gear also shifts down using kickdown while in the second gear fi xed mode.
Auto-shift down
The gear shifts down automatically depending on the vehicle speed during deceleration.
NOTE
If the vehicle comes to a stop while in the second gear fi xed mode, the gear remains in
second.
4–38
When Driving
Transaxle
Recommendations for shifting
Upshifting
For normal acceleration and cruising, Mazda recommends these shift points:
(U.S.A. and Canada)
Gear Vehicle speed *1
M1 to M2 24 km/h (15 mph)
M2 to M3 40 km/h (25 mph)
M3 to M4 65 km/h (40 mph)
M4 to M5 73 km/h (45 mph)
M5 to M6 81 km/h (50 mph)
*1 Always observe local speed limit regulations.
Downshifting
When you must slow down in heavy traffi c or on a steep upgrade, downshift before the
engine starts to overwork. This gives better acceleration when you need more speed.
On a steep downgrade, downshifting helps maintain safe speed and prolongs brake life.
4–39
When Driving
Transaxle
Direct Mode
Direct mode can be used for temporarily
switching gears by operating the steering
shift switch while the vehicle is being
driven with the selector lever in the D
range.
While in direct mode, the D and M
indication illuminate and the gear position
in use is illuminated.
Direct mode is canceled (released) under
the following conditions.
The UP switch is pulled rearward for a
certain amount of time or longer.
The vehicle is driven for a certain
amount of time or longer (time differs
depending on the driving conditions
while operating).
The vehicle is stopped or moving at a
slow speed.
Type A
Gear position indication
Direct mode indication
Type B
Gear position indication
Direct mode indication
Type C
Gear position indication
Direct mode indication
NOTE
Shifting up and down while in direct mode
may not be possible depending on the
vehicle speed. In addition, because direct
mode is canceled (released) depending
on the rate of acceleration or if the
accelerator is fully depressed, use of the
manual shift mode is recommended if you
need to drive the vehicle in a particular
gear for long periods.
4–40
When Driving
Transaxle
Driving Tips
WARNING
Do not let the vehicle move in a
direction opposite to the direction
selected by the selector lever:
Do not let the vehicle move backward
with the selector lever in a forward
position, or do not let the vehicle
move forward with the selector lever
in the reverse position. Otherwise, the
engine may stop, causing the loss of
the power brake and power steering
functions, and make it diffi cult to
control the vehicle which could result
in an accident.
Passing
For extra power when passing another
vehicle or climbing steep grades, depress
the accelerator fully. The transaxle will
shift to a lower gear, depending on vehicle
speed.
NOTE
(Some models)
The accelerator pedal feels heavy as it is
being depressed, but then lightens as it
is fully depressed. This change in pedal
force aids the engine control system in
determining how much the accelerator
pedal has been depressed for performing
kickdown, and functions to control
whether or not kickdown should be
performed.
Climbing steep grades from a stop
To climb a steep grade from a stopped
position:
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Shift to D or M1, depending on the
load weight and grade steepness.
3. Release the brake pedal while gradually
accelerating.
Descending steep grades
When descending a steep grade, shift to
lower gears, depending on load weight and
grade steepness. Descend slowly, using the
brakes only occasionally to prevent them
from overheating.
4–41
When Driving
Switches and Controls
Lighting Control
Headlights
Turn the headlight switch to turn the headlights, other exterior lights and dashboard
illumination on or off.
When the lights are turned on, the lights-on indicator light in the instrument cluster turns on.
NOTE
If the light switch is left on, the lights will automatically switch off approximately 30
seconds after switching the ignition off.
The time setting can be changed.
Refer to Personalization Features on page 9-12 .
To prevent discharging the battery, do not leave the lights on while the engine is off
unless safety requires them.
Without auto-light control
Switch Position
Ignition Position ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
Headlights Off Off Off Off On On
Daytime running lights On Off On Off Off Off
Taillights
Parking lights
License lights
Side-marker lights
Dashboard illumination
Off Off On On On On
4–42
When Driving
Switches and Controls
With auto-light control
Switch Position
Ignition Position ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
Headlights Off Off Auto *1 Off Off Off On On
Daytime running lights On Off Auto *1 Off On Off Off Off
Taillights
Parking lights
License lights
Side-marker lights
Dashboard illumination
Off Off Auto *1 Off On On On On
*1 The headlight and other light settings switch automatically depending on the surrounding brightness detected by
the sensor.
Auto-light control
When the headlight switch is in the position and the ignition is switched ON, the light
sensor senses the surrounding lightness or darkness and automatically turns the headlights,
other exterior lights and dashboard illumination on or off (see chart above).
4–43
When Driving
Switches and Controls
CAUTION
Do not shade the light sensor by adhering a sticker or a label on the windshield. Otherwise
the light sensor will not operate correctly.
The light sensor also works as a rain sensor for the auto-wiper control. Keep hands and
scrapers clear of the windshield when the wiper lever is in the position and the
ignition is switched ON as fi ngers could be pinched or the wipers and wiper blades could be
damaged when the wipers activate automatically. If you are going to clean the windshield,
be sure the wipers are turned off completely when it is particularly tempting to leave the
engine running. This is particularly important when clearing ice and snow.
NOTE
The headlights, other exterior lights and dashboard illumination may not turn off
immediately even if the surrounding area becomes well-lit because the light sensor
determines that it is night time if the surrounding area is continuously dark for several
minutes such as inside long tunnels, traffi c jams inside tunnels, or in indoor parking lots.
In this case, the lights turn off if the light switch is turned to the position.
(Without auto headlight off function)
When the headlight switch is in the position and the ignition is switched to ACC or
the ignition is switched off, the headlights, other exterior lights and dashboard
illumination will turn off.
The dashboard illumination can be adjusted by rotating the knob in the instrument
cluster. Also, the day/night mode can be changed by rotating the knob until a beep sound
is heard. To adjust the brightness of the dashboard illumination:
Refer to Dashboard Illumination on page 4-16 .
The sensitivity of the AUTO lights may be changed by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Refer to Personalization Features on page 9-12 .
*Some models.4–44
When Driving
Switches and Controls
Xenon fusion headlight bulbs *
The low-beam bulbs of the headlights have xenon fusion bulbs that produce a bright white
beam over a wide area.
WARNING
Do not replace the xenon fusion bulbs yourself:
Replacing the xenon fusion bulbs yourself is dangerous, because the xenon fusion
bulbs require high voltage. You could receive an electric shock if the bulbs are handled
incorrectly. Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer when replacement is necessary.
NOTE
If the headlights fl icker or the brightness weakens, the bulb-life may be depleted and a
replacement is necessary. Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
*Some models. 4–45
When Driving
Switches and Controls
Headlight High-Low Beam
Press the lever forward to turn on the high
beams.
Pull the lever back to its original position
for the low beams.
High beam
Low beam
The headlight high-beam indicator light
in the instrument cluster illuminates while
the high beams are turned on.
Flashing the Headlights
To fl ash the headlights, pull the lever fully
towards you (the headlight switch does not
need to be on).
OFF
Flashing
The headlight high-beam indicator light
in the instrument cluster illuminates
simultaneously. The lever will return to the
normal position when released.
Headlight Leveling *
The number of passengers and weight of
cargo in the luggage compartment change
the angle of the headlights.
Auto type
The angle of the headlights will be
automatically adjusted when turning on
the headlights.
The warning/indicator light turns on when
the system has a malfunction.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page
4-21 .
*Some models.4–46
When Driving
Switches and Controls
Manual type
The headlight leveling switch is used
to adjust the angle of the headlights
manually.
Select the proper headlight angle from the
following chart.
Front seat Rear
seat Load
Switch
Position Driver Passenger
× — — — 0
× × — — 0
× × × — 2
× × × ×
2.5
(Between
2 and 3)
× — — ×
3.5
(Between
3 and 4)
×: Yes
—: No
Adaptive Front Lighting System
(AFS)*
The adaptive front lighting system (AFS)
automatically adjusts the headlight beams
to the left or right in conjunction with the
operation of the steering wheel after the
headlights have been turned on.
AFS OFF Indicator Light
When illuminated
This indicator light illuminates briefl y
when the ignition is switched ON, and
then turns off. Pressing the AFS OFF
switch cancels the AFS function and
illuminates the indicator light.
When fl ashing
The indicator light fl ashes continuously if
the system is malfunctioning. Consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
NOTE
Even if the AFS is not operating due to
some malfunction, the normal headlight
function is still operable.
If there is a malfunction with the
headlight auto-leveling function, the
indicator light fl ashes.
4–47
When Driving
Switches and Controls
AFS OFF switch
Pressing the AFS OFF switch turns off the
AFS. The AFS OFF indicator light in the
instrument cluster illuminates.
Pressing the AFS OFF switch again turns
off the switch illumination and turns on
the AFS operation. The AFS OFF indicator
light turns off.
Daytime Running Lights
Some countries require moving vehicles
to have their lights on (daytime running
lights) during the daytime.
Daytime running lights turn on
automatically when the ignition is
switched ON.
They turn off when the parking brake is
operated or the shift lever is shifted to the
P position (automatic transaxle vehicle).
NOTE
(Except Canada)
The daytime running lights can be
deactivated.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-12 .
*Some models.4–48
When Driving
Switches and Controls
High Beam Control System (HBC) *
The High Beam Control System (HBC) determines the conditions in front of the vehicle
using the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) while driving in darkness to automatically switch
the headlights between high and low beams.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page 4-21 .
While driving the vehicle at a speed of about 30 km/h (18 mph), the headlights are switched
to high beams when there are no vehicles in front of your vehicle or approaching in the
opposite direction.
The system switches the headlights to low beams when one of the following occurs:
The system detects a vehicle or the headlights/lights of a vehicle approaching in the
opposite direction.
The vehicle is driven on roads lined with streetlamps or on roads in well-lit cities and
towns.
The vehicle is driven at less than about 20 km/h (12 mph).
Forward Sensing
Camera (FSC)
The recognition distance of the
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)
varies according to the
surrounding conditions.
The warning light fl ashes when the system has a malfunction.
Refer to Warning Lights on page 4-22 .
CAUTION
Do not adjust the vehicle height, modify the headlight units, or remove the camera,
otherwise the system will not operate normally.
4–49
When Driving
Switches and Controls
NOTE
The timing in which the system switches the headlights changes under the following
conditions. If the system does not switch the headlights appropriately, manually switch
between high and low beams according to the visibility as well as road and traffi c
conditions.
When there are sources of light in the area such as street lamps, illuminated signboards,
and traffi c signals.
When there are refl ective objects in the surrounding area such as refl ective plates and
signs.
When visibility is reduced under rain, snow and foggy conditions.
When driving on roads with sharp curves or hilly terrain.
When the headlights/rear lamps of vehicles in front of you or in the opposite lane are dim
or not illuminated.
When there is suffi cient darkness such as at dawn or dusk.
When the luggage compartment is loaded with heavy objects or the rear passenger seats
are occupied.
When visibility is reduced due to a vehicle in front of you spraying water from its tires
onto your windshield.
4–50
When Driving
Switches and Controls
To Operate the System
The High Beam Control System (HBC)
operates to switch the headlights
automatically between high and low
beams after the ignition is switched ON
and the headlight switch is in the AUTO
and high beam position. At the same time,
the High Beam Control System (HBC)
indicator light (green) in the instrument
cluster illuminates.
The High Beam Control System (HBC)
determines that it is dark based on the
brightness of the surrounding area.
NOTE
When the vehicle speed is 30 km/h
(18 mph) or higher, the headlights
automatically switch to high beams
when there are no vehicles in front of
your vehicle or approaching in the
opposite direction.
When the vehicle speed is less than
about 20 km/h (12 mph), the High
Beam Control System (HBC) switches
the headlights to low beams.
The low beams may not switch to high
beams when cornering.
Operation of the High Beam Control
System (HBC) function can be disabled.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-12 .
Manual Switching
Switching to low beams
Shift the lever to the low beam position.
The High Beam Control System (HBC)
indicator light (Green) turns off.
Switching to high beams
Turn the headlight switch to the
position.
The High Beam Control System (HBC)
indicator light (Green) turns off and the
is illuminated.
*Some models. 4–51
When Driving
Switches and Controls
Fog Lights *
Use this switch to turn on the fog lights.
The fog lights will improve visibility at
night and during foggy conditions.
To turn the fog lights on, rotate the fog
light switch to the position.
Fog light switch
The headlight switch must be in the
position before turning on the fog lights.
The fog light indicator light in the
instrument cluster illuminates while the
fog light are on.
To turn the fog lights off, rotate the fog
light switch to the position or turn the
headlight switch to the or
position.
NOTE
The fog lights will turn off when the
headlights are set at high beams.
(With auto-light control)
If the fog light switch is in the
position and the headlight switch is in
the position, the fog lights will
turn on when the headlights, the
exterior lights and dashboard
illumination turn on.
Turn and Lane-Change
Signals
The ignition must be switched ON to use
the turn and lane-change signals.
Turn Signals
Move the signal lever down (for a left
turn) or up (for a right turn) to the stop
position. The signal will self-cancel after
the turn is completed.
If the indicator light continues to fl ash
after a turn, manually return the lever to its
original position.
Right turn
Left turn
Right lane change
Left lane change
OFF
The turn signal indicators (green) in the
instrument cluster fl ash according to the
operation of the turn signal lever to show
which signal is working.
Right turn
Left turn
Right lane change
Left lane change
OFF
4–52
When Driving
Switches and Controls
NOTE
If an indicator light stays on without
fl ashing or if it fl ashes abnormally, one
of the turn signal bulbs may be burned
out.
A personalized function is available
to change the turn indicator sound
volume. (page 9-12 )
Lane-Change Signals
Move the lever halfway toward the
direction of the lane change—until the
indicator fl ashes— and hold it there. It will
return to the off position when released.
Three-Flash Turn Signal
To signal a lane change, operate the turn
signal lever up or down slightly and
release. After releasing the lever, the turn
signal indicator fl ashes three times.
NOTE
The three-fl ash turn signal function can be
switched to operable/inoperable using the
personalization function.
Refer to Personalization Features on page
9-12 .
Windshield Wipers and
Washer
The ignition must be switched ON to use
the wipers.
WARNING
Use only windshield washer fl uid or
plain water in the reservoir:
Using radiator antifreeze as washer
fl uid is dangerous. If sprayed on the
windshield, it will dirty the windshield,
aff ect your visibility, and could result in
an accident.
Only use windshield washer fl uid mixed
with anti-freeze protection in freezing
weather conditions:
Using windshield washer fl uid without
anti-freeze protection in freezing
weather conditions is dangerous as
it could freeze on the windshield and
block your vision which could cause
an accident. In addition, make sure
the windshield is suffi ciently warmed
using the defroster before spraying the
washer fl uid.
4–53
When Driving
Switches and Controls
NOTE
Because heavy ice and snow can jam the
wiper blades, the wiper motor is protected
from motor breakdown, overheating
and possible fi re by a circuit breaker.
This mechanism will automatically stop
operation of the blades, but only for about
5 minutes.
If this happens, turn off the wiper switch
and park off the right-of-way, and remove
the snow and ice.
After 5 minutes, turn on the switch and
the blades should operate normally. If
they do not resume functioning, consult
an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as
possible. Drive to the side of the road and
park off the right-of-way. Wait until the
weather clears before trying to drive with
the wipers inoperative.
Windshield Wipers
Turn the wipers on by pressing the lever
up or down.
With intermittent wiper
Switch
Position Wiper operation
MIST Single wipe cycle (mist)
INT Intermittent
LO Low speed
HI High speed
With auto-wiper control
Switch
Position Wiper operation
MIST Single wipe cycle (mist)
AUTO Auto control
LO Low speed
HI High speed
Variable-speed intermittent wipers
Set the lever to the intermittent position
and choose the interval timing by rotating
the ring.
INT ring Fast
Slow
4–54
When Driving
Switches and Controls
Auto-wiper control
When the wiper lever is in the
position, the rain sensor senses the amount
of rainfall on the windshield and turns the
wipers on or off automatically (off—
intermittent—low speed—high speed).
The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be
adjusted by turning the switch on the
wiper lever.
From the center position (normal), rotate
the switch downward for higher sensitivity
(faster response) or rotate it upward for
less sensitivity (slower response).
Higher sensitivity
Less sensitivity
Switch
Center
position
CAUTION
Do not shade the rain sensor by
adhering a sticker or a label on the
windshield. Otherwise the rain sensor
will not operate correctly.
When the wiper lever is in the AUTO
position and the ignition is switched ON,
the wipers may move automatically in
the following cases:
If the windshield above the rain
sensor is touched or wiped with a
cloth.
If the windshield is struck with a hand
or other object from either outside or
inside the vehicle.
Keep hands and scrapers clear of the
windshield when the wiper lever is in
the AUTO position and the ignition
is switched ON as fi ngers could be
pinched or the wipers and wiper blades
damaged when the wipers activate
automatically.
If you are going to clean the windshield,
be sure the wipers are turned off
completely (when it is most likely
that the engine is left running) this is
particularly important when clearing ice
and snow.
4–55
When Driving
Switches and Controls
NOTE
Switching the auto-wiper lever from the
to the position while driving
activates the windshield wipers once,
after which they operate according to
the rainfall amount.
The auto-wiper control may not operate
when the rain sensor temperature is
about -10 °C (14 °F) or lower, or about
85 °C (185 °F) or higher.
If the windshield is coated with water
repellent, the rain sensor may not be
able to sense the amount of rainfall
correctly and the auto-wiper control
may not operate properly.
If dirt or foreign matter (such as ice or
matter containing salt water) adheres
to the windshield above the rain sensor,
or if the windshield is iced, it could
cause the wipers to move automatically.
However, if the wipers cannot remove
this ice, dirt or foreign matter, the autowiper control will stop operation. In
this case, set the wiper lever to the low
speed position or high speed position
for manual operation, or remove the
ice, dirt or foreign matter by hand to
restore the auto-wiper operation.
If the auto-wiper lever is left in the
position, the wipers could
operate automatically from the effect of
strong light sources, electromagnetic
waves, or infrared light because the
rain sensor uses an optical sensor. It is
recommended that the auto-wiper lever
be switched to the position other
than when driving the vehicle under
rainy conditions.
The auto-wiper control functions can
be turned off. Refer to Personalization
Features on page 9-12 .
Windshield Washer
Pull the lever toward you and hold it to
spray washer fl uid.
Washer
OFF
NOTE
With the wiper lever in the or
intermittent position/ position, the
wipers will operate continuously until the
lever is released.
If the washer does not work, inspect the
fl uid level (page 6-31 ). If the fl uid level
is normal, consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
*Some models.4–56
When Driving
Switches and Controls
Rear Window Wiper and
Washer *
The ignition must be switched ON to use
the wiper.
Rear Window Wiper
Turn the wiper on by turning the rear
wiper/washer switch.
Switch
Position Wiper operation
INT Intermittent
ON Normal
Rear Window Washer
To spray washer fl uid, turn the rear wiper/
washer switch to the position. After the
switch is released, the washer will stop.
If the washer does not work, inspect the
fl uid level (page 6-31 ). If the fl uid level is
normal and the washer still does not work,
consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster clears fog from
the rear window.
The ignition must be switched ON to use
the defroster.
Press the switch to turn on the rear
window defroster. The rear window
defroster operates for about 15 minutes
and then turns off automatically.
The indicator light illuminates when the
defroster is operating.
To turn off the rear window defroster
before the 15 minutes has elapsed, press
the switch again.
Manual Climate Control
Indicator light
*Some models. 4–57
When Driving
Switches and Controls
Automatic Climate Control
Indicator light
Dual-Zone Automatic Climate Control
Indicator light
CAUTION
Do not use sharp instruments or
window cleaners with abrasives to
clean the inside of the rear window
surface. They may damage the
defroster grid inside the window.
NOTE
This defroster is not designed for melting
snow. If there is an accumulation of snow
on the rear window, remove it before using
the defroster.
Mirror Defroster *
To turn on the mirror defrosters, switch
the ignition ON and press the rear window
defroster switch (page 4-56 ).
4–58
When Driving
Switches and Controls
Horn
To sound the horn, press the mark on
the steering wheel.
Hazard Warning Flasher
The hazard warning lights should always
be used when you stop on or near a
roadway in an emergency.
The hazard warning lights warn other
drivers that your vehicle is a traffi c hazard
and that they must take extreme caution
when near it.
Depress the hazard warning fl asher and
all the turn signals will fl ash. The hazard
warning indicator lights in the instrument
cluster fl ash simultaneously.
NOTE
The turn signals do not work when the
hazard warning lights are on.
Check local regulations about the use
of hazard warning lights while the
vehicle is being towed to verify that it is
not in violation of the law.
*Some models. 4–59
When Driving
Switches and Controls
HomeLink Wireless
Control System *
NOTE
HomeLink and HomeLink house are
registered trademarks of Johnson
Controls.
The HomeLink system replaces up to
3 hand-held transmitters with a single
built-in component in the auto-dimming
mirror. Pressing the HomeLink button on
the auto-dimming mirror activates garage
doors, gates and other devices surrounding
your home.
HomeLink button
Indicator light
WARNING
Do not use the HomeLink system with
any garage door opener that lacks the
safety stop and reverse feature:
Using the HomeLink system with any
garage door opener that lacks the
safety stop and reverse feature as
required by federal safety standards
is dangerous. (This includes garage
doors manufactured before April 1,
1982.)
Using these garage door openers can
increase the risk of serious injury or
death. For further information, contact
HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515 or www.
homelink.com or an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
Always check the areas surrounding
garage doors and gates for people
or obstructions before programming
or during operation of the HomeLink
system:
Programming or operating the
HomeLink system without verifying
the safety of areas surrounding garage
doors and gates is dangerous and
could result in an unexpected accident
and serious injury if someone were to
be hit.
NOTE
The programming will not be erased even
if the battery is disconnected.
4–60
When Driving
Switches and Controls
Pre-programming the HomeLink
System
NOTE
It is recommended that a new battery be
placed in the hand-held transmitter of the
device being programmed to HomeLink
for quicker training and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Verify that there is a remote control
transmitter available for the device you
would like to program.
Disconnect the power to the device.
Programming the HomeLink
System
CAUTION
When programming a garage door
opener or a gate, disconnect the power
to these devices before performing
programming. Continuous operation
of the devices could damage the
motor.
The HomeLink system provides 3 buttons
which can be individually selected and
programmed using the transmitters for
current, on-market devices as follows:
1. Disconnect power to the device being
programmed.
2. Position the end of your hand-held
transmitter 2.5—7.5 cm (1—3 inches)
away from the HomeLink button you
wish to program while keeping the
indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both
the chosen HomeLink and hand-held
transmitter buttons. Do not release
the buttons until step 3 has been
completed.
NOTE
Some gate operators and garage door
openers may require you to replace this
Programming Step 2 with procedures
noted in the “Gate Operator/Canadian
Programming” section.
4. After the HomeLink indicator light
changes from a slow to a rapidly
blinking light, release both the
HomeLink and hand-held transmitter
buttons.
NOTE
If the HomeLink indicator light does not
change to a rapidly blinking light, contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or call
1-800-355-3515 for assistance.
5. Connect power to the device being
programmed.
6. Firmly press and hold the programmed
HomeLink button for fi ve seconds,
and then release it. Perform this
operation two times to activate the door
or gate. If the door or gate does not
activate, press and hold the just-trained
HomeLink button and observe the
indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on
constantly, programming is complete
and your device should activate when
the HomeLink button is pressed and
released.
NOTE
To program the remaining two HomeLink
buttons, begin with “Programming” —
step 1
4–61
When Driving
Switches and Controls
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for
two seconds and then turns to a constant
light, continue with “Programming”
steps 7—9 to complete the programming
of a rolling code equipped device (most
commonly a garage door opener).
7. At the garage door opener receiver
(motor-head unit) in the garage, locate
the “learn” or “smart” button. This can
usually be found where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the motorhead unit.
8. Firmly press and release the “learn” or
“smart” button. (The name and color of
the button may vary by manufacturer.)
NOTE
Complete the programming within 30
seconds.
9. Return to the vehicle and fi rmly press,
hold for two seconds and release the
programmed HomeLink button. Repeat
the “ press/hold/release ” sequence a
second time, and, depending on the
brand of the garage door opener (or
other rolling code equipped device),
repeat this sequence a third time to
complete the programming process.
HomeLink should now activate your
rolling code equipped device.
NOTE
To program the remaining two HomeLink
buttons, begin with “Programming” —
step 1
For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1800-355-3515 .
Gate operator/Canadian
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission
— which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian
law, some U.S. gate operators are designed
to “time-out” in the same manner.
If you live in Canada or you are having
diffi culties programming a gate operator
by using the “Programming” procedures
(regardless of where you live), replace
“Programming HomeLink” step 3 with
the following:
NOTE
If programming a garage door opener or
gate operator, it is advised to unplug the
device during the “cycling” process to
prevent possible overheating.
Continue to press and hold the HomeLink
button while you press and release
— every two seconds (“cycle”) your
hand-held transmitter until the frequency
signal has successfully been accepted by
HomeLink. (The indicator light will fl ash
slowly and then rapidly.)
Proceed with “Programming” step 4 to
complete.
Operating the HomeLink System
Press the programmed HomeLink button
to operate a programmed device. The
code will continue being transmitted for a
maximum of 20 seconds.
4–62
When Driving
Switches and Controls
Reprogramming the HomeLink
system
To program a device to HomeLink using
a HomeLink button previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink
button. DO NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to fl ash
after 20 seconds. Without releasing
the HomeLink button, proceed with
“Programming” - step 1.
Erasing Programmed HomeLink
Buttons
To erase the existing programming from
all three operating channels, press and
hold the two outside buttons ( , ) on
the auto-dimming mirror until the
HomeLink indicator light begins to fl ash
after approximately 10 seconds.
Verify that the programming has been
erased when you resell the vehicle.
*Some models. 4–63
When Driving
Forward Sensing Camera
Forward Sensing Camera *
Your vehicle is equipped with a Forward Sensing Camera (FSC). The Forward Sensing
Camera (FSC) is positioned near the rearview mirror and used by the following systems.
High Beam Control System (HBC)
Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)
The Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) determines the conditions ahead of the vehicle while
traveling at night and detects traffi c lanes. The distance in which the Forward Sensing
Camera (FSC) can detect objects varies depending on the surrounding conditions.
4–64
When Driving
Forward Sensing Camera
CAUTION
Heed the following cautions to assure the correct operation of the Forward Sensing
Camera (FSC).
Do not remove the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) cover.
Do not place objects on the dashboard which refl ect light.
Do not apply accessories, stickers or fi lm to the windshield near the Forward Sensing
Camera (FSC). If there are objects in front of the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) lens,
even a transparent sticker, they will cause the system to not operate correctly.
Always keep the windshield glass around the camera clean by removing dirt or
fogging. Use the windshield defroster to remove fogging on the windshield.
When cleaning the windshield, do not allow glass cleaners or similar cleaning agent
to get on the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) lens. In addition, do not touch the
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) lens.
Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer regarding cleaning the interior side of the
windshield around the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC).
Be careful not to scratch the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) lens or allow it to get
dirty. Also, do no take the camera apart. Otherwise, it could result in damage or
malfunction.
Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer before performing repairs around the Forward
Sensing Camera (FSC).
The Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) is installed to the windshield. Consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer for windshield repair and replacement.
When performing repairs around the rearview mirror, consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer regarding cleaning of the Forward Sensing
Camera (FSC) lens.
Do not hit or apply strong force to the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) or the area
around it. If strong force is applied, stop using the Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS) and the High Beam Control System (HBC), and consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
The direction in which the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) is pointed has been fi nely
adjusted. Do not change the installation position of the Forward Sensing Camera
(FSC) or remove it. Otherwise, it could result in damage or malfunction.
4–65
When Driving
Radar Sensor
Radar Sensor
Your vehicle is equipped with a radar sensor.
The following systems also use the radar sensor.
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
Forward Obstruction Warning (FOW)
The radar sensor functions by detecting the radio waves refl ected off a vehicle ahead or an
obstruction sent from the radar sensor.
The radar sensor is mounted behind the front emblem.
Radar Sensor
If the Forward Obstruction Warning (FOW) indicator light (amber) is illuminated, the area
around the radar sensor may be dirty. Refer to “Warning Guidance” in the type B audio
display.
Refer to If a Warning Light Turns On or Flashes on page 7-24 .
4–66
When Driving
Radar Sensor
CAUTION
Heed the following precautions to assure correct operation of each system.
Do not adhere stickers (including transparent stickers) to the surface of the radiator
grille and front emblem in and around the radar sensor, and do not replace the
radiator grille and front emblem with any product that is not a genuine product
designed for use with the radar sensor.
The radar sensor includes a function for detecting soiling of the radar sensor's front
surface and informing the driver, however, depending on the conditions, it may
require time to detect or it may not detect plastic shopping bags, ice or snow. If this
occurs, the system may not operate correctly, therefore always keep the radar sensor
clean.
Do not install a grille guard.
If the front part of the vehicle has been damaged in a vehicle accident, the position of
the radar sensor may have moved. Stop the system immediately and always have the
vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Do not use the front bumper to push other vehicles or obstructions such as when
pulling out of a parking space. Otherwise, the radar sensor could be hit and its
position deviated.
Do not remove, disassemble, or modify the radar sensor.
For repairs, replacement or paint work around the radar sensor, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Do not modify the suspension. If the suspension are modifi ed, the vehicle's posture
could change and the radar sensor may not be able to correctly detect a vehicle
ahead or an obstruction.
4–67
When Driving
Radar Sensor
NOTE
In the following cases, the radar sensor may not be able to detect vehicles ahead or
obstructions.
The rear surface of a vehicle ahead does not refl ect radio waves effectively, such as
an unloaded trailer or an automobile with a loading platform covered by a soft top,
vehicles with a hard plastic tailgate, and round-shaped vehicles.
Vehicles ahead with low vehicle height and thus less area for refl ecting radio waves.
Visibility is reduced due to a vehicle ahead casting off water, snow, or sand from its
tires and onto your windshield.
The trunk/luggage compartment is loaded with heavy objects or the rear passenger
seats are occupied.
Ice, snow, or soiling is on the front surface of the front emblem.
During inclement weather such as rain, snow, or sand storms.
When driving near facilities or objects emitting strong radio waves.
In the following cases, the radar sensor may detect vehicles in the opposite lane or
surrounding obstructions, or it may not be able to detect vehicles ahead or obstructions.
The beginning and end of a curve.
Roads with continuous curves.
Narrow lane roads due to road construction or lane closures.
The vehicle ahead enters the radar sensor's blind spot.
The vehicle ahead is running abnormally due to accident or vehicle damage.
Roads with repeated up and down slopes
Driving on poor roads or unpaved roads.
The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead is extremely short.
A vehicle suddenly comes close such as by cutting into the lane.
To prevent incorrect operation of the system, use tires of the same specifi ed size,
manufacturer, brand, and tread pattern on all four wheels. In addition, do not use tires
with signifi cantly different wear patterns or tire pressures on the same vehicle. (Including
the temporary spare tire)
If the battery power is weak, the system may not operate correctly.
When driving on roads with little traffi c and few vehicles ahead or obstructions for the
radar sensor to detect, Forward Obstruction Warning/Smart City Brake Support (FOW/
SCBS) indicator light temporarily illuminates, however, this does not indicate a problem.
4–68
When Driving
Brake
Brake System
Foot Brake
This vehicle has power-assisted brakes
that adjust automatically through normal
use.
Should power-assist fail, you can stop by
applying greater force than normal to the
brake pedal. But the distance required to
stop will be greater than usual.
WARNING
Do not coast with the engine stalled or
turned off , fi nd a safe place to stop:
Coasting with the engine stalled or
turned off is dangerous. Braking will
require more eff ort, and the brake's
power-assist could be depleted if
you pump the brake. This will cause
longer stopping distances or even an
accident.
Shift to a lower gear when going down
steep hills:
Driving with your foot continuously on
the brake pedal or steadily applying
the brakes for long distances is
dangerous. This causes overheated
brakes, resulting in longer stopping
distances or even total brake failure.
This could cause loss of vehicle
control and a serious accident. Avoid
continuous application of the brakes.
Dry off brakes that have become
wet by driving slowly, releasing the
accelerator pedal and lightly applying
the brakes several times until the brake
performance returns to normal:
Driving with wet brakes is dangerous.
Increased stopping distance or the
vehicle pulling to one side when
braking could result in a serious
accident. Light braking will indicate
whether the brakes have been aff ected.
CAUTION
Do not drive with your foot held on the
clutch pedal or brake pedal, or hold
the clutch pedal depressed halfway
unnecessarily. Doing so could result in
the following:
The clutch and brake parts will wear
out more quickly.
The brakes can overheat and
adversely aff ect brake performance.
Always depress the brake pedal with
the right foot. Applying the brakes with
the unaccustomed left foot could slow
your reaction time to an emergency
situation resulting in insuffi cient braking
operation.
Wear shoes appropriate for driving in
order to avoid your shoe contacting
the brake pedal when depressing the
accelerator pedal.
4–69
When Driving
Brake
Parking Brake
CAUTION
Driving with the parking brake on
will cause excessive wear of the brake
parts.
NOTE
For parking in snow, refer to Winter
Driving (page 3-47 ) regarding parking
brake use.
Setting the parking brake
Depress the brake pedal and then fi rmly
pull the parking brake lever fully upwards
with suffi cient force to hold the vehicle in
a stationary position.
Releasing the parking brake
Depress the brake pedal and pull the
parking brake lever upwards, then press
the release button. While holding the
button, lower the parking brake lever all
the way down to the released position.
Warning Light
The warning light turns on when the
system has a malfunction.
Refer to Warning Lights on page 4-22 .
Brake Pad Wear Indicator
When the disc brake pads become worn,
the built-in wear indicators contact the
disc plates. This causes a screeching noise
to warn that the pads should be replaced.
When you hear this noise, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as
possible.
4–70
When Driving
Brake
WARNING
Do not drive with worn disc pads:
Driving with worn disc pads is
dangerous. The brakes could fail and
cause a serious accident. As soon as
you hear a screeching noise consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Brake Assist
During emergency braking situations
when it is necessary to depress the brake
pedal with greater force, the brake assist
system provides braking assistance, thus
enhancing braking performance.
When the brake pedal is depressed hard or
depressed more quickly, the brakes apply
more fi rmly.
NOTE
When the brake pedal is depressed hard
or depressed more quickly, the pedal
will feel softer but the brakes will apply
more fi rmly. This is a normal effect of
the brake assist operation and does not
indicate a malfunction.
When the brake pedal is depressed
hard or depressed more quickly, a
motor/pump operation noise may be
heard. This is a normal effect of the
brake assist and does not indicate a
malfunction.
The brake assist equipment does not
supersede the functionality of the
vehicle's main braking system.
Hill Launch Assist (HLA)
Hill Launch Assist (HLA) is a function
which assists the driver in accelerating
from a stop while on a slope. When
the driver releases the brake pedal and
depresses the accelerator pedal while
on a slope, the function prevents the
vehicle from rolling. The braking force is
maintained automatically after the brake
pedal is released on a steep grade.
For vehicles with a manual transaxle,
Hill Launch Assist (HLA) operates on a
downward slope when the shift lever is in
the reverse (R) position, and on an upward
slope when the shift lever is in a position
other than the reverse (R) position.
For vehicles with an automatic transaxle,
Hill Launch Assist (HLA) operates on a
downward slope when the shift lever is in
the reverse (R) position, and on an upward
slope when the shift lever is in a forward
gear.
4–71
When Driving
Brake
WARNING
Do not rely completely on Hill Launch
Assist (HLA):
Hill Launch Assist (HLA) is an auxiliary
device for accelerating from a stop
on a slope. The system only operates
for about two seconds and therefore,
relying only on the system, when
accelerating from a stop is dangerous
because the vehicle may move (roll)
unexpectedly and cause an accident.
The vehicle could roll depending on
the vehicle's load or if it is towing
something. In addition, for vehicles
with a manual transaxle, the vehicle
could still roll depending on how the
clutch pedal or the accelerator pedal is
operated.
Always confi rm the safety around the
vehicle before starting to drive the
vehicle.
NOTE
Hill Launch Assist (HLA) does not
operate on a gentle slope. In addition,
the gradient of the slope on which the
system will operate changes depending
on the vehicle's load.
Hill Launch Assist (HLA) does not
operate if the parking brake is applied,
the vehicle has not stopped completely,
or the clutch pedal is released.
While Hill Launch Assist (HLA) is
operating, the brake pedal may feel
stiff and vibrate, however, this does not
indicate a malfunction.
Hill Launch Assist (HLA) does not
operate while the TCS/DSC indicator
light is illuminated.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on
page 4-21 .
Hill Launch Assist (HLA) does not
turn off even if the DSC OFF switch is
pressed to turn off the TCS/DSC.
*Some models.4–72
When Driving
Brake
Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) *
The Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system is designed to reduce damage in the
event of a collision by operating the brake control (SCBS brake) when the system's laser
sensor detects a vehicle ahead and determines that a collision with the vehicle ahead is
unavoidable. It may also be possible to avoid a collision if the relative speed between your
vehicle and the vehicle ahead is less than about 15 km/h (9.3 mph).
In addition, when the driver depresses the brake pedal while the system is in the operation
range at about 4 to 30 km/h (2 to 18 mph), the brakes are applied fi rmly and quickly to
assist. (Brake Assist (SCBS brake assist))
Laser sensor
WARNING
Do not rely on the Smart City Brake Support System (SCBS) as a substitute for safe
driving:
The Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system cannot compensate for unsafe and reckless
driving, excessive speed, tailgating (following another vehicle too closely), and driving on
slippery roads such as wet, snowy, and icy roads (reduced tire friction and road contact
because of water on the road surface). You can still have an accident.
4–73
When Driving
Brake
Do not rely completely on the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system:
The Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system is only designed to reduce damage in the
event of a collision. Over reliance on the system leading to the accelerator pedal or
brake pedal being mistakenly operated could result in an accident.
The Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) is a system which operates in response to a
vehicle ahead. The system may not be able to detect or react to 2-wheeled vehicles or
pedestrians.
The laser sensor for the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system is installed near the
rearview mirror. To assure the correct operation of the Smart City Brake Support
(SCBS), heed the following cautions.
Do not apply stickers to the surface of the windshield near the laser sensor
(including transparent stickers). Otherwise, the laser sensor may not be able to
detect vehicles or obstructions ahead which could result in an accident.
Do not disassemble the laser sensor.
If cracks or damage caused by fl ying gravel or debris is visible near the laser sensor,
stop using the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system immediately and have your
vehicle inspected by an Authorized Mazda Dealer. If the vehicle continues to be
driven with cracks or scratch marks left on the windshield near the laser sensor, the
system may operate unnecessarily and cause an unexpected accident.
Refer to Stopping The Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) System Operation on page
4-78 .
When replacing the windshield wipers or windshield, consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
Do not modify the suspension:
If the vehicle height or inclination is changed, the system will not be able to correctly
detect vehicles or obstructions ahead. This will result in the Smart City Brake Support
(SCBS) system not operating normally or mistakenly operating, which could cause a
serious accident.
Turn off the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) when the vehicle is running on a chassis
roller or being towed:
Turn off the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system to prevent mistaken operation when
the vehicle is running on a chassis roller or being towed. See the next page on how to turn
off the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS).
Refer to Stopping The Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) System Operation on page 4-78 .
4–74
When Driving
Brake
CAUTION
When driving off -road in areas where there is grass or forage, it is recommended that the
Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system be turned off .
Always use tires for all wheels that are of the specifi ed size, and the same manufacturer,
brand, and tread pattern. In addition, do not use tires with signifi cantly diff erent wear
patterns on the same vehicle as the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system may not
operate normally.
The laser sensor includes a function for detecting a soiled windshield and informing the
driver, however, depending on the conditions, it may not detect plastic shopping bags, ice
or snow on the windshield. In such cases, the system cannot accurately determine a vehicle
or obstruction ahead and may not be able to operate normally. Always drive carefully and
pay attention to the road ahead.
NOTE
The Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system will operate under the following
conditions.
The engine is running.
The Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) indicator light does not illuminate.
The vehicle speed is between about 4 to 30 km/h (2 to 18 mph).
The Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system is not turned off.
The DSC operation is not turned off using the DSC OFF switch.
The DSC is not malfunctioning.
The driver is not deliberately performing driving operations (accelerator pedal,
steering wheel, and braking operations).
The Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) detects a vehicle ahead by emitting a near-infrared
laser beam and receiving the beam refl ected off the refl ector of the vehicle ahead, and
then using it for the measurement. Consequently, the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS)
may not operate under the following conditions:
Refl ection of the laser is poor due to the shape of the vehicle ahead.
The vehicle ahead is signifi cantly dirty.
Under bad weather condition, such as rain, fog and snow.
The window washer is being used or the windshield wipers are not used when it's
raining.
The windshield is dirty.
The steering wheel is turned completely left or right, or the vehicle is accelerated
rapidly and comes close to the vehicle ahead.
Trucks with low loading platforms, vehicles traveling at extremely low speeds, and
vehicles with a high profi le.
Vehicles with certain shapes such as a vehicle carrier.
*Some models. 4–75
When Driving
Brake
Under the following conditions, the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system may not
operate normally.
Heavy luggage is loaded in the luggage compartment or on the rear seat.
When there is the possibility of partial contact with a vehicle or obstruction ahead.
When driving on continuously curving roads, entering and exiting curves, and unstable
driving due to a vehicle accident or breakdown in a driving lane.
Elongated luggage or cargo is loaded onto installed roof rails and covers the laser
sensor.
Exhaust gas from the vehicle in front, sand, snow, and water vapor rising from
manholes and grating, and water splashed into the air.
When towing a malfunctioning vehicle.
In the following cases, the laser sensor may inadvertently determine that there is a
vehicle ahead and the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system may operate.
Objects on the road at the entrance to a curve.
Vehicles passing in the opposite lane while making a curve.
Metal objects, bumps, or protruding objects on the road.
When passing through a toll gate.
When passing under a vinyl curtain or fl ag.
Plastic objects such as pylons.
Two-wheeled vehicles, pedestrians, animals or standing trees.
If the vehicle is driven with some of the tires having signifi cant wear, the system may not
operate correctly. If the tires are returned to a normal state and the Smart City Brake
Support (SCBS) indicator light still illuminates, have your vehicle inspected by an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
When the system operates, the user is notifi ed by the fl ashing warning light and the active
driving display * .
The indicator light turns on when the system has a malfunction.
Refer to Warning Lights on page 4-22 .
4–76
When Driving
Brake
Laser Sensor Handling
The Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) laser sensor is installed at the top of the windshield
near the rearview mirror.
Always keep the surface of the windshield around the laser sensor clean to assure proper
operation of the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system.
WARNING
As there is the possibility of eye damage occurring from the laser, always heed the
following precautions:
Never remove the sensor.
A removed sensor will not meet the conditions for a class 1M laser under the IEC
60825-1 specifi cation and therefore eye safety cannot be assured.
Do not peer into the sensor using optical instruments with a magnifi cation function
such as magnifying glasses, and microscopic and objective lenses within a distance of
100 mm (3.94 in) from the sensor.
4–77
When Driving
Brake
Laser sensor radiation data
Maximum average power: 45 mW
Pulse duration: 33 ns
Wavelength: 905 nm
Divergence angle (horizontal×vertical): 28 degrees×12 degrees
4–78
When Driving
Brake
Smart City Brake Support (SCBS)
Warning Light (Red)
If the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) is
operating, the warning light fl ashes.
Deactivating The Smart City
Brake Support (SCBS) System
Operation
The Smart City Brake Support (SCBS)
system can be deactivated.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-12 .
When the Smart City Brake Support
(SCBS) system is turned off, the Smart
City Brake Support (SCBS) OFF indicator
light turns on.
NOTE
When the DSC OFF switch is pressed to
stop the DSC operation, the Smart City
Brake Support (SCBS) system operation
also stops and the Smart City Brake
Support (SCBS) OFF indicator light turns
on.
4–79
When Driving
ABS/TCS/DSC
Antilock Brake System
(ABS)
The ABS control unit continuously
monitors the speed of each wheel. If
one wheel is about to lock up, the ABS
responds by automatically releasing and
reapplying that wheel's brake.
The driver will feel a slight vibration in
the brake pedal and may hear a chattering
noise from the brake system. This is
normal ABS system operation. Continue to
depress the brake pedal without pumping
the brakes.
The warning light turns on when the
system has a malfunction.
Refer to Warning Lights on page 4-22 .
WARNING
Do not rely on ABS as a substitute for
safe driving:
The ABS cannot compensate for unsafe
and reckless driving, excessive speed,
tailgating (following another vehicle
too closely), driving on ice and snow,
and hydroplaning (reduced tire friction
and road contact because of water on
the road surface). You can still have an
accident.
NOTE
Braking distances may be longer on
loose surfaces (snow or gravel, for
example) which usually have a hard
foundation. A vehicle with a normal
braking system may require less
distance to stop under these conditions
because the tires will build up a wedge
of surface layer when the wheels skid.
The sound of the ABS operating may
be heard when starting the engine
or immediately after starting the
vehicle, however, it does not indicate a
malfunction.
4–80
When Driving
ABS/TCS/DSC
Traction Control System
(TCS)
The Traction Control System (TCS)
enhances traction and safety by controlling
engine torque and braking. When the TCS
detects driving wheel slippage, it lowers
engine torque and operates the brakes to
prevent loss of traction.
This means that on a slick surface, the
engine adjusts automatically to provide
optimum power to the drive wheels,
limiting wheel spin and loss of traction.
The warning light turns on when the
system has a malfunction.
Refer to Warning Lights on page 4-22 .
WARNING
Do not rely on the Traction Control
System (TCS) as a substitute for safe
driving:
The Traction Control System (TCS)
cannot compensate for unsafe and
reckless driving, excessive speed,
tailgating (following another vehicle
too closely), and hydroplaning
(reduced tire friction and road contact
because of water on the road surface).
You can still have an accident.
Use snow tires or tire chains and drive at
reduced speeds when roads are covered
with ice and/or snow:
Driving without proper traction devices
on snow and/or ice-covered roads
is dangerous. The Traction Control
System (TCS) alone cannot provide
adequate traction and you could still
have an accident.
NOTE
To turn off the TCS, press the DSC OFF
switch (page 4-82 ).
TCS/DSC Indicator Light
This indicator light stays on for a few
seconds when the ignition is switched
ON. If the TCS or DSC is operating, the
indicator light fl ashes.
If the light stays on, the TCS, DSC
or the brake assist system may have a
malfunction and they may not operate
correctly. Take your vehicle to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
NOTE
In addition to the indicator light
fl ashing, a slight lugging sound will
come from the engine. This indicates
that the TCS/DSC is operating properly.
On slippery surfaces, such as fresh
snow, it will be impossible to achieve
high rpm when the TCS is on.
4–81
When Driving
ABS/TCS/DSC
Dynamic Stability Control
(DSC)
The Dynamic Stability Control (DSC)
automatically controls braking and engine
torque in conjunction with systems such
as ABS and TCS to help control side slip
when driving on slippery surfaces, or
during sudden or evasive maneuvering,
enhancing vehicle safety.
Refer to ABS (page 4-79 ) and TCS (page
4-80 ).
DSC operation is possible at speeds
greater than 20 km/h (12 mph).
The warning light turns on when the
system has a malfunction.
Refer to Warning Lights on page 4-22 .
WARNING
Do not rely on the Dynamic Stability
Control as a substitute for safe driving:
The Dynamic Stability Control (DSC)
cannot compensate for unsafe and
reckless driving, excessive speed,
tailgating (following another vehicle
too closely), and hydroplaning
(reduced tire friction and road contact
because of water on the road surface).
You can still have an accident.
CAUTION
The DSC may not operate correctly
unless the following are observed:
Use tires of the correct size specifi ed
for your Mazda on all four wheels.
Use tires of the same manufacturer,
brand and tread pattern on all four
wheels.
Do not mix worn tires.
The DSC may not operate correctly when
tire chains are used or a temporary
spare tire is installed because the tire
diameter changes.
TCS/DSC Indicator Light
This indicator light stays on for a few
seconds when the ignition is switched
ON. If the TCS or DSC is operating, the
indicator light fl ashes.
If the light stays on, the TCS, DSC
or the brake assist system may have a
malfunction and they may not operate
correctly. Take your vehicle to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
4–82
When Driving
ABS/TCS/DSC
DSC OFF Indicator Light
This indicator light stays on for a few
seconds when the ignition is switched ON.
It also illuminates when the DSC OFF
switch is pressed and TCS/DSC is
switched off.
Refer to DSC OFF Switch on page 4-82 .
If the light remains illuminated and the
TCS/DSC is not switched off, take your
vehicle to an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
The DSC may have a malfunction.
DSC OFF Switch
Press the DSC OFF switch to turn off the
TCS/DSC. The DSC OFF indicator light
in the instrument cluster will illuminate.
Press the switch again to turn the TCS/
DSC back on. The DSC OFF indicator
light will turn off.
NOTE
When DSC is on and you attempt to free
the vehicle when it is stuck, or drive
it out of freshly fallen snow, the TCS
(part of the DSC system) will activate.
Depressing the accelerator will not
increase engine power and freeing
the vehicle may be diffi cult. When this
happens, turn off the TCS/DSC.
If the TCS/DSC is off when the engine
is turned off, it automatically activates
when the ignition is switched ON.
Leaving the TCS/DSC on will provide
the best traction.
If the DSC OFF switch is pressed and
held for 10 seconds or more, the DSC
OFF switch malfunction detection
function operates and the DSC system
activates automatically. The DSC OFF
indicator light turns off while the DSC
system is operative.
*Some models. 4–83
When Driving
i-ELOOP
i-ELOOP *
On conventional vehicles, the kinetic energy that is generated when the vehicle is
decelerated by applying the brakes or during engine braking ends up being discarded as
heat. By utilizing this discarded kinetic energy to generate electricity and use it to power the
vehicle's electrical devices and accessories such as the A/C and audio, fuel consumption can
be reduced. Mazda's system for generating electricity from this kinetic energy is called the
Regenerative Braking System (i-ELOOP).
Electric components
Engine Components
Vehicle Systems:
Air-conditioning
Audio
Head-lights, etc
Accelerator OFF
Accelerator ON
Energy
regeneration Charge
Battery
Battery
Power
Power
Electric components
Engine Components
Vehicle Systems:
Air-conditioning
Audio
Head-lights, etc
Engine
Variable
Voltage
alternator
Variable
Voltage
alternator
Engine
Tire
Tire
Capacitor
Capacitor
DC-DC converter
DC-DC converter
Kinetic energy
Electrical
4–84
When Driving
i-ELOOP
A capacitor is incorporated as the device for storing the generated electricity, which can
store and use large amounts of electricity instantly.
Variable
Voltage
alternator
Capacitor
DC-DC Converter
CAUTION
High-current electricity fl ows through the following areas, therefore do not touch them.
Variable Voltage alternator
DC-DC converter
Capacitor
NOTE
When installing high power consumption devices such high-output speakers, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
A difference in the fuel economy may occur depending on use conditions such as with the
A/C and headlights.
If the capacitor is to be disposed of, always consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer. For
details, go to the following URL.
http://www.mazda.com/csr/environment/recycling
4–85
When Driving
i-ELOOP
i-ELOOP Indicator Light/Control
Status Display
The driver is notifi ed of the i-ELOOP
power generating status and the vehicle
conditions by the i-ELOOP indicator light
and the control status display.
i-ELOOP Indicator Light
Illuminated (vehicle without type B
audio)
The light turns on during power
generation.
Flashing
If the engine is started after the vehicle has
not been driven for a long period of time,
the i-ELOOP indicator light may fl ash.
Leave the engine idling and wait until the
indicator light turns off.
NOTE
The beep will sound if the vehicle is
driven while the i-ELOOP indicator
light is fl ashing. In addition, if you
turn the steering wheel while the light
is fl ashing, it will feel heavier than
normal, but this does not indicate an
abnormality. Stop the vehicle in a safe
location with the engine running and do
not attempt to turn the steering wheel.
The steering operation will return to
normal after the i-ELOOP indicator
light stops fl ashing.
(Vehicles with type B Audio)
A notifi cation is displayed in the audio
display and the i-ELOOP indicator
light fl ashes at the same time.
Refer to Warning Message Indicated on
Display on page 7-34 .
Control status display (vehicles with
type B audio)
The i-ELOOP power generating status is
displayed in the audio display.
Refer to Control Status Display on page
4-87 .
*Some models.4–86
When Driving
Fuel Economy Monitor
Fuel Economy Monitor *
For vehicles with type B audio, the Control Status and Fuel Consumption are switched and
displayed by operating each icon in the display.
In addition, after completing a trip, the total energy effi ciency to date is displayed in the
ending display when the ending display is turned on.
1. Select the ( ) icon on the home screen to display the Applications screen.
2. Select the Fuel Economy Monitor.
3. Operate the commander switch or touch the screen and display the menu.
NOTE
When the menu is displayed by touching the screen, the display is hidden automatically after
6 seconds.
4. Select the icon in the menu and perform the operation. Each icon operates as follows:
Indication on display Control status
Hides the menu display.
Displays the Application screen.
Switches the Fuel Economy Monitor in the order of
Control Status and Effectiveness.
Resets the fuel economy data.
Displays the following SETTING screen.
Ending display on/off switching
On/off switching for function which synchronizes reset
fuel economy data to trip meter (Trip A)
Fuel Consumption Display
Information regarding the fuel economy is displayed.
Indication on display Control status
Displays the fuel economy for the past 60 minutes.
Displays the fuel economy every minute for the past 1
to 10 minutes.
Displays the fuel economy every 10 minutes for the
past 10 to 60 minutes.
Displays the average fuel economy over the past 5 resets
and after the current reset.
Calculates the average fuel economy every minute after
vehicle travel begins, and displays it.
4–87
When Driving
Fuel Economy Monitor
NOTE
The fuel economy data can be reset by doing the following operation:
Press the reset switch from the menu screen.
When the function which synchronizes the fuel economy monitor and the trip meter is
on, reset trip A of the trip meter.
Delete the average fuel economy information displayed in the trip computer.
After resetting the fuel economy data, “-- -” is displayed while the average fuel economy
is calculated.
Control Status Display
The power generating status is displayed
Indication on display Control status
Displays the level of electricity generated by
regenerative braking.
Displays the amount of the electricity stored in the
capacitor.
Displays the status of the electricity stored in the
capacitor and being supplied to the electrical devices
(whole vehicle in display is illuminated simultaneously).
Displays the accumulated fuel economy.
Ending Screen Display
When the ignition is switched off from ON after completing a trip, the actual performance
for the total fuel economy effi ciency is displayed for 5 seconds.
*Some models.4–88
When Driving
Drive Selection
Drive Selection *
Mazda Drive Selection provides an opportunity to select a different driving characteristic
when SPORT mode is activated. By selecting SPORT mode, greater vehicle response
is achieved through automatic adjustments in transaxle shift control and engine throttle
control. This provides additional quick acceleration which may be needed to safely make
maneuvers such as lane changes, merging onto freeways, or passing other vehicles.
NOTE
If driving long distances in SPORT mode, the fuel economy will decrease due to the
frequency of driving in lower gears. Driving in SPORT mode all of the time is not
recommended. SPORT mode is best used only in situations requiring quick, responsive
driving.
4–89
When Driving
Drive Selection
Drive Selection Switch
The SPORT mode indicator light in the
instrument cluster is illuminated while in
SPORT mode.
NOTE
If the SET / SET Switch of the
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
system/cruise control is pressed while
in SPORT mode, SPORT mode is
automatically switched off.
When the ignition is switched off,
SPORT mode is also switch off.
When SPORT mode is selected, the
transaxle may automatically shift down
or the vehicle speed may accelerate
depending on the vehicle speed.
SPORT Mode Indicator Light
Type A
Type B
The light is illuminated while in SPORT
mode.
NOTE
The indicator light fl ashes a few times to
indicate that the mode cannot be switched
to SPORT mode even if the drive select
switch is pressed under the following
conditions:
The vehicle is driven on a slippery road
surface such as an icy or snow-bound
road.
The Mazda Radar Cruise Control
(MRCC) system/cruise control is
operating.
The vehicle is making a turn or driving
on a curved road.
4–90
When Driving
Power Steering
Power Steering
Power steering is only operable when
the engine is running. If the engine is
off or if the power steering system is
inoperable, you can still steer, but it
requires more physical effort.
If the steering feels stiffer than usual
during normal driving or the steering
vibrates, consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
The warning light notifi es the driver
of system abnormalities and operation
conditions.
In addition, the buzzer may also activate
depending on the system abnormality or
operation condition.
Refer to Warning Lights on page 4-22 .
Refer to Power Steering Warning Buzzer
on page 7-39 .
CAUTION
Never hold the steering wheel to the
extreme left or right for more than 5
seconds with the engine running. This
could damage the power steering
system.
4–91
When Driving
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
The Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system is designed to maintain headway control *1
according to the vehicle speed using a radar sensor to detect the distance to a vehicle ahead,
and by presetting the vehicle speed between 30 km/h (19 mph) and 145 km/h (90 mph) the
driver is freed from having to constantly use the accelerator or brake pedals.
*1 Headway Control: Control of the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead
detected by the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system.
Additionally, if your vehicle starts closing in on the vehicle ahead because, for example, the
vehicle ahead brakes suddenly, a warning sound and a warning indication in the display are
activated simultaneously to alert you to maintain a suffi cient distance between the vehicles.
Use the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system on expressways and other highways
which do not require a lot of repeated acceleration and deceleration.
WARNING
Do not rely completely on the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system and always
drive carefully:
The Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system is designed to reduce load on the
driver, and although it maintains a constant vehicle speed, or specifi cally, it maintains
a constant distance between your vehicle and the detected vehicle ahead according to
the vehicle speed, the system has detection limitations depending on the type of vehicle
ahead and its conditions, the weather conditions, and the road conditions. Additionally,
the system may be unable to decelerate suffi ciently to avoid hitting the vehicle ahead
if the vehicle ahead applies the brakes suddenly or another vehicle cuts into the driving
lane, which could result in an accident. Always verify the safety of the surrounding area
and depress the brake pedal or accelerator pedal while keeping a safe distance from
vehicles ahead or on-coming vehicles.
4–92
When Driving
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
Do not use the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system in the following locations.
Otherwise, it could lead to an accident:
Roads with sharp curves and where vehicle traffi c is heavy and there is insuffi cient
space between vehicles. Roads where frequent and repetitive acceleration and
deceleration occur (Driving under these conditions using the Mazda Radar Cruise
Control (MRCC) system is not possible).
When entering and exiting interchanges, service areas, and parking areas of highways
(If you exit a highway while headway control is in use, the vehicle ahead will no longer
be tracked and your vehicle may accelerate to the set speed).
Slippery roads such as ice or snow-bound roads (The tires could spin causing you to
lose vehicle control).
Long descending slopes (to maintain distance between vehicles, the system
automatically and continuously applies the brakes which could result in the loss of
brake power).
For the purposes of safety, switch the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system off
when it is not being used.
CAUTION
If the vehicle is towed or you are towing something, switch the Mazda Radar Cruise
Control (MRCC) system off to prevent an incorrect operation.
NOTE
The Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system operates when all of the following
conditions are met.
The vehicle speed is about 30 km/h (19 mph) to 145 km/h (90 mph).
The Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system is turned on.
The parking brake is not applied.
The Forward Obstruction Warning (FOW) indicator light (amber) does not illuminate.
The Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) is operating normally.
(Manual transaxle)
The shift lever is in a position other than reverse (R) or neutral (N).
The clutch pedal is not depressed.
(Automatic transaxle)
The selector lever is in the drive (D) position or manual (M) position (manual mode).
4–93
When Driving
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
In the following cases, the warnings may not activate even if your vehicle starts closing
in on the vehicle ahead.
You are driving at the same speed as the vehicle ahead.
Directly after the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system has been set.
When the accelerator pedal is depressed or directly after the accelerator pedal is
released.
Another vehicle cuts into the driving lane.
The following are not detected as physical objects.
Vehicles approaching in the opposite direction
Pedestrians
Stationary objects (stopped vehicles, obstructions)
If a vehicle ahead is traveling at an extremely low speed, the system may not detect it
correctly.
During headway control travel, do not set the system on two-wheeled vehicles such as
motorcycles and bicycles.
Do not use the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system under conditions in which
the close proximity warnings are frequently activated.
During headway control travel, the system accelerates and decelerates your vehicle in
conjunction with the speed of the vehicle ahead. However, if it is necessary to accelerate
for a lane change or if the vehicle ahead brakes suddenly causing you to close in on the
vehicle rapidly, accelerate using the accelerator pedal or decelerate using the brake
pedal depending on the conditions.
While the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system is in use, it does not cancel even
if the selector lever (automatic transaxle)/shift lever (manual transaxle) is operated and
any intended engine braking will not occur. If deceleration is required, lower the vehicle
speed setting or depress the brake pedal.
The brake lights are illuminated while the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
automatic braking is operating, however, they may not be illuminated while the vehicle is
on a down slope at the set vehicle speed or traveling at a constant speed and following a
vehicle ahead.
The Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) warning light (amber) fl ashes when the
system has a malfunction.
Refer to Warning Lights on page 4-22 .
4–94
When Driving
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) Display Indication
The setting status and operation conditions of the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
system are indicated in the active driving display.
Vehicle ahead display
MRCC Distance between vehicle display
MRCC Set vehicle
speed
Close Proximity Warning
If your vehicle rapidly closes in on
the vehicle ahead because the vehicle
applies the brakes suddenly while you are
traveling in headway control, the warning
sound activates and the brake warning is
indicated in the display. Always verify
the safety of the surrounding area and
depress the brake pedal while keeping
a safe distance from the vehicle ahead.
Additionally, always keep a safe distance
from the vehicles behind you.
NOTE
When the active driving display is closed,
only the warning sound activates to alert.
4–95
When Driving
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
Setting the System
To Activate
To activate the system, press the ON switch.
CANCEL switch
switch
switch
RESUME switch
OFF switch ON switch
Cruise control
SET+/SET- switch
When the system is activated, the vehicle speed and the distance between vehicles while in
headway control can be set. The Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) indication is shown
in the active driving display.
NOTE
When the ignition is switched to ACC or OFF while the Mazda Radar Cruise Control
(MRCC) is ON, the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) remains ON automatically.
4–96
When Driving
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
How to Set the Speed
1. Adjust the vehicle speed to the desired
setting using the accelerator pedal.
2. Headway control begins when the
SET or SET switch is pressed. The
set speed and the inter-vehicle distance
display fi lled with white lines is
displayed. The Mazda Radar Cruise
Control (MRCC) indicator light (green)
is indicated simultaneously.
Travel status Display
During travel at constant
speed
During travel under
headway control
NOTE
If a vehicle ahead is detected while
traveling at a constant speed, the
vehicle-ahead indication is displayed
and headway control is performed.
Additionally, when a vehicle ahead is
no longer detected, the vehicle-ahead
indication turns off and the system
switches back to travel at constant
speed.
If you are driving the vehicle at a speed
faster than the set speed, headway
control on the vehicle ahead is not
possible Adjust the system to the desired
vehicle speed using the accelerator
pedal.
4–97
When Driving
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
How to Set the Distance Between
Vehicles During Headway Control
The distance between vehicles is set to a
shorter distance each time the switch is
pressed. The distance between vehicles is
set to a longer distance by pressing the
switch. The distance-between-vehicles can
be set to 4 levels; Long, medium, short,
and extremely short distance.
Distance-betweenvehicles guideline
(at 80 km/h (50 mph)
vehicle speed)
Indication on display
Long (about 50 m (164
ft))
Medium (about 40 m
(131 ft))
Short (about 30 m (98
ft))
Extremely short (about
25 m (82 ft))
NOTE
The distance between vehicles differs
depending on the vehicle speed, and the
slower the vehicle speed, the shorter the
distance.
When the ignition is switched to ACC
or OFF and then the engine is started
again, the system automatically sets
the distance between vehicles to the
previous setting.
Changing the Set Vehicle Speed
Changing the set vehicle speed using the
SET / SET switch
Press the SET switch to accelerate. Press
the SET switch to decelerate. The set
vehicle speed changes as follows each
time the SET / SET switch is pressed.
Short press 1 km/h (1 mph)
Long press 10 km/h (5 mph)
NOTE
For example, the set vehicle speed is
changed by pressing the SET / SET
switch four times as follows:
The vehicle speed accelerates or
decelerates by 4 km/h (4 mph).
To accelerate using accelerator pedal
Depress the accelerator pedal and press
and release the SET or SET switch at
the desired speed. If a switch cannot be
operated, the system returns to the set
speed when you release your foot from the
accelerator pedal.
CAUTION
The warnings and brake control do not
operate while the accelerator pedal is
depressed.
4–98
When Driving
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
NOTE
When accelerating using the SET
switch while in headway control, the set
vehicle speed can be adjusted but
acceleration is not possible. If there is
no longer a vehicle ahead, acceleration
continues until reaching the set vehicle
speed. Check the set vehicle speed by
viewing the set vehicle speed display in
the active driving display.
When depressing the accelerator pedal,
the inter-vehicle distance display in
the display in the instrument cluster
changes to the white-line display.
The minimum settable speed is 30 km/h
(19 mph). If the set vehicle speed
reaches 30 km/h (19 mph) using the
switch operation, constant speed travel
is maintained at about 30 km/h (19
mph) even if the SET switch is
pressed. The Mazda Radar Cruise
Control (MRCC) system is not
canceled.
To Deactivate
The Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
is canceled when the OFF switch is
pressed.
When the system is temporarily
canceled
In the following cases, the Mazda Radar
Cruise Control (MRCC) system is
temporarily canceled and the “MRCC
Cancelled” indication is displayed in
the display in the instrument cluster.
The Mazda Radar Cruise Control
(MRCC) indicator light (green) turns off
simultaneously.
The CANCEL switch is pressed.
The brake pedal is depressed.
The parking brake is applied.
The selector lever is shifted to park (P),
neutral (N) or reverse (R) (automatic
transaxle).
The shift lever is in the reverse (R)
position (manual transaxle).
In the following cases, the “MRCC
Cancelled” indication is displayed and
the beep sounds one time.
The vehicle speed decreases to less
than 25 km (16 mph).
The DSC has operated.
The TCS has operated for a certain
period of time.
The Smart City Brake Support (SCBS)
has operated.
When traveling on a down slope for a
long period of time.
There is a problem with the system.
The engine stalls.
(Manual transaxle)
The shift lever is shifted to neutral (N)
for a certain period of time.
The clutch is depressed for a certain
period of time.
4–99
When Driving
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
NOTE
The Mazda Radar Cruise Control
(MRCC) system may be canceled
during rain, fog, snow or other
inclement weather conditions, or the
front surface of the radiator grille is
dirty.
If the Mazda Radar Cruise Control
(MRCC) system has been temporarily
canceled, you can return to the
previously set vehicle speed by pressing
the RESUME switch after the following
conditions have been met.
All of the Mazda Radar Cruise
Control (MRCC) operation
conditions have been met.
A certain period of time has elapsed
since the system was automatically
canceled while driving for a long
time on a down slope.
If the SET / SET or RESUME switch
is pressed before a certain period of
time has elapsed since the system was
automatically canceled while driving
for a long time on a down slope,
“MRCC Not available” is displayed in
the display.
If the OFF switch is pressed to cancel
the Mazda Radar Cruise Control
(MRCC), the system does not return
to the previously set speed even if the
RESUME switch is pressed.
Shift-up/Shift-down Request
Display (Manual Transaxle)
The shift-up or shift-down request display
in the display of the instrument cluster
may be displayed while the Mazda
Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system
is operating. When this occurs, shift
gears because the gear position is not
appropriate.
Request Indication on display
Shift up
Shift down
NOTE
If the gears are not shifted up even
though the shift-up request indication
is displayed, load will be applied
to the engine and the Mazda Radar
Cruise Control (MRCC) system may
be automatically canceled or engine
damage could occur.
If the gears are not shifted down
even though the shift-down request
indication is displayed, the Mazda
Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system
may be automatically canceled or
engine stalling could occur.
Radar Sensor Handling
The Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
radar sensor is installed on the backside of
the radiator grille.
Refer to Radar Sensor on page 4-65 .
*Some models.4–100
When Driving
Cruise Control
Cruise Control *
With cruise control, you can set and automatically maintain any speed of more than about
25 km/h (16 mph).
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control under the following conditions:
Using the cruise control under the following conditions is dangerous and could result in
loss of vehicle control.
Hilly terrain
Steep inclines
Heavy or unsteady traffi c
Slippery or winding roads
Similar restrictions that require inconsistent speed
Cruise Control Switch
CANCEL switch
OFF switch
ON switch
RESUME switch
Cruise control
SET+/SET- switch
4–101
When Driving
Cruise Control
Cruise Main Indicator Light
(Amber)/Cruise Set Indicator
Light (Green)
The indicator light has two colors.
Cruise Main Indicator Light (Amber)
The indicator light illuminates amber
when the cruise control system is
activated.
Cruise Set Indicator Light (Green)
The indicator light illuminates green when
a cruising speed has been set.
Activation/Deactivation
To activate the system, press the ON
switch. The cruise main indicator light
(Amber) illuminates.
To deactivate the system, press the OFF
switch.
The cruise main indicator light (Amber)
turns off.
WARNING
Always turn off the cruise control system
when it is not in use:
Leaving the cruise control system in an
activation-ready state while the cruise
control is not in use is dangerous as
the cruise control could unexpectedly
activate if the activation button is
accidentally pressed, and result in loss
of vehicle control and an accident.
To Set Speed
1. Activate the cruise control system
by pressing the ON switch. The
cruise main indicator light (Amber)
illuminates.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed, which
must be more than 25 km/h (16 mph).
3. Set the cruise control by pressing the
SET or SET switch at the desired
speed. The cruise control is set at the
moment the SET or SET switch is
pressed. Release the accelerator pedal
simultaneously. The cruise set indicator
light (Green) illuminates.
NOTE
Release the SET or SET switch at
the desired speed, otherwise the speed
will continue increasing while the SET
switch is pressed and held, and
continue decreasing while the SET
switch is pressed and held (except when
the accelerator pedal is depressed).
On a steep grade, the vehicle may
momentarily slow down while
ascending, or speed up while
descending.
Cruise control will cancel if the vehicle
speed decreases below 21 km/h (13
mph) when cruise is activated, such as
when climbing a steep grade.
Cruise control may cancel at about 15
km/h (9 mph) below the preset speed,
such as when climbing a long, steep
grade.
4–102
When Driving
Cruise Control
To Increase Cruising Speed
Follow either of these procedures.
To increase speed using cruise control
switch
Press the SET switch and hold it. Your
vehicle will accelerate. Release the switch
at the speed you want.
Press the SET switch and release it
immediately to adjust the preset speed.
Multiple operations will increase the
preset speed according to the number of
times it is operated.
Increasing speed with a single SET
switch operation
Meter display for vehicle speed indicated
in km/h: 1 km/h (0.6 mph)
Meter display for vehicle speed indicated
in mph: 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
To increase speed using accelerator
pedal
Depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate
to the desired speed. Press the SET or
SET switch and release it immediately.
NOTE
Accelerate if you want to speed up
temporarily when the cruise control is on.
Greater speed will not interfere with or
change the set speed. Take your foot off the
accelerator to return to the set speed.
To Decrease Cruising Speed
Press the SET switch and hold it. The
vehicle will gradually slow.
Release the switch at the speed you want.
Press the SET switch and release it
immediately to adjust the preset speed.
Multiple operations will decrease the
preset speed according to the number of
times it is operated.
Decreasing speed with a single SET
switch operation
Meter display for vehicle speed indicated
in km/h: 1 km/h (0.6 mph)
Meter display for vehicle speed indicated
in mph: 1 mph (1.6 km/h)
To Resume Cruising Speed at
More Than 25 km/h (16 mph)
If some other method besides the OFF
switch was used to cancel cruising speed
(such as applying the brake pedal) and the
system is still activated, the most recent
set speed will automatically resume when
the RESUME switch is pressed.
If vehicle speed is below 25 km/h (16
mph), increase the vehicle speed up to
25 km/h (16 mph) or more and press the
RESUME switch.
To Temporarily Cancel
To temporarily cancel the system, use one
of these methods:
Slightly depress the brake pedal.
Depress the clutch pedal (Manual
transaxle only).
Press the CANCEL switch.
If the RESUME switch is pressed when
the vehicle speed is 25 km/h (16 mph) or
higher, the system reverts to the previously
set speed.
4–103
When Driving
Cruise Control
To Deactivate
To deactivate the system, press the OFF
switch.
*Some models.4–104
When Driving
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Tire Pressure Monitoring System *
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) monitors the air pressure of all four tires. If
the air pressure of one or more tires is too low, the system warns the driver by indicating the
tire pressure monitoring system warning light in the instrument cluster and operating a beep
sound. The system monitors the tire pressures indirectly using the data sent from the ABS
wheel speed sensors.
To allow the system to operate correctly, the system needs to be initialized with the specifi ed
tire pressure (value on the tire pressure label). Follow the procedure and perform the
initialization.
Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System Initialization on page 4-107 .
The warning light fl ashes when the system has a malfunction.
Refer to Warning Lights on page 4-22 .
ABS wheel speed sensor
4–105
When Driving
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
CAUTION
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and
infl ated to the infl ation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire infl ation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a diff erent size than the
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire infl ation pressure label, you should determine
the proper tire infl ation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires
is signifi cantly under-infl ated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates,
you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and infl ate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a signifi cantly under-infl ated tire causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure. Under-infl ation also reduces fuel effi ciency and tire tread life, and may
aff ect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-infl ation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will fl ash for approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement
or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on
your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly.
To avoid false readings, the system samples for a little while before indicating a problem.
As a result it will not instantaneously register a rapid tire defl ation or blow out.
4–106
When Driving
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
NOTE
Because this system detects slight changes in tire conditions, the timing of the warning may
be faster or slower in the following cases:
The size, manufacturer, or the type of tires is different from the specifi cation.
The size, manufacturer, or the type of a tire is different from the others, or the level of tire
wear is excessively different between them.
A run-fl at tire, studless tire, snow tire, or tire chains are used.
An emergency tire is used (The tire pressure monitoring system warning light may fl ash
and then continue illuminating).
A tire is repaired using the puncture tire repair kit.
The tire pressure is excessively higher than the specifi ed pressure, or the tire pressure is
suddenly lowered for some reason such as a tire burst during driving.
The vehicle speed is lower than about 15 km/h (9.3 mph) (including when the vehicle is
stopped), or the drive period is shorter than 5 minutes.
The vehicle is driven on an extremely rough road or a slippery, icy road.
Hard steering and rapid acceleration/deceleration are repeated such as during
aggressive driving on a winding road.
Load on the vehicle is applied to a tire such as by loading heavy luggage to one side of
the vehicle.
System initialization has not been implemented with the specifi ed tire pressure.
4–107
When Driving
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Initialization
In the following cases, system
initialization must be performed so that the
system operates normally.
A tire pressure is adjusted.
Tire rotation is performed.
A tire or wheel is replaced.
The battery is replaced or completely
drained.
The tire pressure monitoring system
warning light is illuminated.
Initialization method
1. Park the car in a safe place and fi rmly
apply the parking brake.
2. Let the tires cool, then adjust the tire
pressure of all four (4) tires to the
specifi ed pressure indicated on the tire
pressure label located on the door jamb
of the driver's door (door open).
Refer to Tires on page 9-10 .
3. Switch the ignition ON.
4. While the vehicle is parked, press
and hold the tire pressure monitoring
system set switch and verify that
the tire pressure monitoring system
warning light in the instrument cluster
fl ashes twice and a beep sound is heard
once.
CAUTION
If the system initialization is performed
without adjusting the tire pressure,
the system cannot detect the normal
tire pressure and it may not illuminate
the tire pressure monitoring system
warning light even if a tire pressure is
low, or it may illuminate the light even
if the pressures are normal.
The system initialization will not be
performed if the switch is pressed while
the vehicle is being driven.
4–108
When Driving
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) System
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) System
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system is designed to assist the driver by monitoring
blind spots on both sides of the vehicle to the rear in certain situations such as when
changing lanes on roads and freeways or reversing the vehicle from a parking garage.
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) System consists of the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)
and Rear Cross Traffi c Alert (RCTA).
WARNING
Do not rely completely on the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system. Always look over
your shoulder before changing lanes or reversing the vehicle from a parking garage:
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system can assist the driver in confi rming the safety of
the surroundings but is not a complete substitute. The driver is responsible for assuring
lane changes and other maneuvers. Always pay attention to the direction in which the
vehicle is traveling and the vehicle's surroundings.
NOTE
The detectability of the radar sensors has its limitations. The Blind Spot Monitoring
(BSM) System may not operate properly under the following conditions:
Ice, snow, or soil adheres to the rear bumper surface around the radar sensors.
During adverse weather conditions such as rain or snow, or under conditions where
water is sprayed.
The rear bumper area around the radar sensors is blocked by foreign material (such as
stickers or a bicycle carrier).
The radar sensors do not detect human, animal, shopping cart, bicycle, or static objects
such as fences.
The radar sensors may not detect all types of vehicles around your vehicle, especially the
following types of vehicles:
Motorcycles
Vehicles with body shapes that radar may not refl ect such as a fl atbed trailer with no
cargo.
Vehicles with lower body height such as sports cars.
Although the system may detect objects on the road side such as parked vehicles or
guardrails and operate the warning light/beep, it does not indicate a malfunction.
If the vehicle is driven on a road with less traffi c and few vehicles that the radar sensors
can detect, the system may pause (the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) OFF indicator light
in the instrument cluster fl ashes). However, it does not indicate a malfunction.
4–109
When Driving
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) System
The following conditions may affect the visibility of the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)
warning lights on the outside mirror, making it diffi cult to confi rm the illumination of the
lights:
Ice or snow adheres to the surface of the outside mirrors.
The door window glass is tinted.
The radar sensors are equipped inside the rear bumper (page 4-114 ).
Have the radar sensors inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer if any shock is applied
to the rear bumper, even in a minor accident. If the vehicle is driven with a damaged
radar sensor, the system may not operate properly resulting in an accident.
For repairs or paintwork around the radar sensors, or replacement of the bumper,
consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
The radar sensors of the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may be regulated under
the radio wave related laws of the country where the vehicle is driven. The sensors in this
system are approved for use in the U.S.A. (including territories), Canada, and Mexico.
If a vehicle with a Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system is driven in a country other
than the U.S.A., Canada, or Mexico, the system has to be turned off using the Blind Spot
Monitoring (BSM) OFF switch.
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system monitors the detection areas on both sides of
the vehicle to the rear and when there are vehicles in the detection area it notifi es the driver
by illuminating the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning light while the vehicle speed is
about 10 km/h (6.2 mph) or faster and driving forward.
If the turn signal lever is operated to the side the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning
light is illuminated, the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning light fl ashes and the system
warns the driver of the vehicle in the detection area using a BSM warning beep sound.
Detection areas
Your vehicle
4–110
When Driving
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) System
NOTE
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) does not operate when the vehicle speed is lower than
about 10 km/h (6.2 mph).
The detection area of the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) has been determined based on
the lane width of general freeways. Therefore on a road with a narrower lane width, the
system may detect vehicles on a lane next to the adjacent lane and operate the warning
light/beep. On a road with wider lane width, the system may not detect vehicles on the
adjacent lane and may not operate the warning light/beep.
Under the following conditions, the system may be unable to detect vehicles, or detection
may be delayed.
The vehicle accelerates from a standing-start with a vehicle alongside.
A vehicle moves from a lane two lanes over to the adjacent lane.
The difference in vehicle speed between your vehicle and another vehicle is larger
when passing or being passed, and the vehicle passes the detection area within a short
period of time.
On a steep incline, or when there is a difference in height between lanes.
Immediately after the system has been activated by pressing the Blind Spot Monitoring
(BSM) OFF switch again after it has been turned off (Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)
OFF indicator light in instrument cluster illuminates) by pressing the switch.
(Automatic transaxle vehicles)
The shift lever is shifted to the R position, or directly after being shifted from the R
position.
The system may not operate normally when towing a trailer. Turn off the system by
operating the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) OFF switch when towing a trailer.
The system switches to the Rear Cross Traffi c Alert function when the shift lever (Manual
transaxle) or the selector lever (Automatic transaxle) is shifted to the R position.
4–111
When Driving
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) System
Rear Cross Traffi c Alert (RCTA)
When reversing the vehicle from a parking garage, vehicles approaching both sides of the
vehicle are detected to alert the driver of a possible collision by fl ashing the Blind Spot
Monitoring (BSM) warning light and activating the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning
beep sound.
Detection areas
Your vehicle
Rear Cross Traffi c Alert (RCTA) system operation
1. The Rear Cross Traffi c Alert (RCTA) system operates when the shift lever (manual
transaxle) or the selector lever (automatic transaxle) is shifted to the R position.
2. If a vehicle approaches which may hit you, the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system
warning light fl ashes and the Blind Spot Monitoring system (BSM) warning beep sounds
at the same time.
4–112
When Driving
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) System
NOTE
Under the following conditions, the system may be unable to detect vehicles, or detection
may be delayed.
The vehicle is reversed at a speed of 12 km/h or faster
The radar is obstructed by objects such as a large vehicle parked adjacently or by a wall.
(Reverse vehicle to position in which radar is not obstructed.)
Your vehicle
A vehicle approaches from straight behind
Your vehicle
The vehicle is parked at a highly acute angle
Your vehicle
Immediately after the system has been activated by pressing the Blind Spot Monitoring
(BSM) OFF switch again after it has been turned off (Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) OFF
indicator light in instrument cluster illuminates) by pressing the switch.
4–113
When Driving
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) System
BSM Warning Light
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system alerts the driver to the presence of another
vehicle in an adjacent lane using the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning lights and the
warning beep while the system is operational.
The warning light is equipped on the left and right door mirrors.
This warning light illuminates for a few seconds when the ignition is switched ON.
Driving forward
If the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system detects a vehicle in the detection area while the
vehicle is driven at a speed of about 10 km/h (6.2mph) or more, the Blind Spot Monitoring
(BSM) warning light illuminates on the side of the vehicle where the rear on-coming vehicle
is detected. A warning indicator light fl ashes when the turn signal lever is operated to the
side where the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning lights is illuminated to alert the
driver.
Reversing
If vehicles approach from the rear on the left and right, the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)
warning lights on both sides fl ash.
NOTE
If ice or snow adhere to the outer mirror surface, the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)
warning light may not be visible.
If the door window glass is tinted, it may affect the visibility of the Blind Spot Monitoring
(BSM) warning light, making it diffi cult to confi rm the illumination of the light.
4–114
When Driving
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) System
BSM OFF Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates for a few
seconds when the ignition is switched ON.
The BSM OFF indicator light illuminates
when the BSM system is turned off by
pressing the BSM OFF switch.
The indicator light fl ashes if the BSM
system has a malfunction. Consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
NOTE
If the vehicle is driven on a road with less
traffi c and few vehicles that the radar
sensors can detect, the system may pause
(The BSM OFF indicator light in the
instrument cluster fl ashes). However, it
does not indicate a malfunction.
BSM OFF Switch
When the BSM OFF switch is pressed, the
BSM system turns off and the BSM OFF
indicator light illuminates.
Press the BSM OFF switch again to turn
on the BSM system. The BSM OFF
indicator light turns off.
NOTE
If the ignition is switched off with the BSM
system turned off, the system becomes
operable automatically when the ignition
is switched ON.
Care of Radar Sensors
The radar sensors are equipped inside the
rear bumper.
4–Door
Radar sensors
4–115
When Driving
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) System
5–Door
Radar sensors
Always keep the bumper surface near the
radar sensor area clean so that the BSM
system operates normally.
Refer to Exterior Care on page 6-63 .
NOTE
The BSM OFF indicator light fl ashes
if the radar sensors cannot operate
normally. If the light remains fl ashing
after cleaning the bumper surface
near the radar sensor area, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
For repairs or paintwork around the
radar sensors, or replacement of the
bumper, consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
4–116
When Driving
Forward Obstruction Warning (FOW)
Forward Obstruction Warning (FOW)
Forward Obstruction Warning (FOW) is a system which alerts the driver of a possible
collision using an indicator and warning sound in the instrument cluster while the vehicle
is being driven at about 15 km/h or faster (10 mph or faster) and the system's radar sensor
determines that your vehicle may hit a vehicle or obstruction ahead.
WARNING
Do not rely completely on the Forward Obstruction Warning (FOW) system and always
drive carefully:
Forward Obstruction Warning (FOW) is only designed to reduce damage in the event of
a collision. The ability to detect an obstruction is limited depending on the obstruction,
weather conditions, or traffi c conditions. Therefore, if the accelerator pedal or brake
pedal is mistakenly operated it could result in an accident. Always verify the safety of the
surrounding area and depress the brake pedal or accelerator pedal while keeping a safe
distance from vehicles ahead or on-coming vehicles.
NOTE
The Forward Obstruction Warning (FOW) system operates when all of the following
conditions are met:
The ignition is switched ON.
The Forward Obstruction Warning (FOW) system is on.
The vehicle speed is about 15 km/h (10 mph) or faster.
The relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle or obstruction ahead is about
15 km/h (10 mph) — 145 km/h (90 mph).
The Forward Obstruction Warning (FOW) system may not operate under the following
conditions:
If there is the possibility of hitting only a part of a vehicle or obstruction ahead.
If the vehicle is accelerated rapidly and it comes close to a vehicle ahead.
The DSC is malfunctioning.
The vehicle is driven at the same speed as the vehicle ahead.
The accelerator pedal is depressed.
The brake pedal is depressed.
The steering wheel is being operated.
The selector lever is being operated.
The turn signal is being used.
4–117
When Driving
Forward Obstruction Warning (FOW)
Although the objects which activate the system are 4-wheeled vehicles, the radar sensor
could detect the following objects, determine them to be an obstruction, and operate the
Forward Obstruction Warning (FOW) system.
Objects on the road at the entrance to a curve (including guardrails and snow banks).
A vehicle appears in the opposite lane while cornering or rounding a curve.
When crossing a narrow bridge.
When passing under a low gate or through a tunnel or narrow gate.
When entering an underground parking area.
Metal objects, bumps, or protruding objects on the road.
If you suddenly come close to a vehicle ahead.
When driving in areas where there is high grass or forage.
Two-wheeled vehicles such as motorbikes or bicycles.
Pedestrians or non-metallic objects such as standing trees.
When the system operates, the user is notifi ed by the fl ashing warning light and the active
driving display.
The indicator light turns on when the system has a malfunction.
(page 4-22 )
4–118
When Driving
Forward Obstruction Warning (FOW)
Forward Obstruction Warning
(FOW) Warning Light (Red)
If the Forward Obstruction Warning
(FOW) is operating, the warning light
fl ashes.
Collision Warning
If there is the possibility of a collision
with a vehicle or obstruction ahead, the
beep sounds continuously and a warning is
indicated in the display.
Stopping The Forward
Obstruction Warning (FOW)
System Operation
The Forward Obstruction Warning (FOW)
system can be deactivated.
Refer to Personalization Features on page
9-12 .
When the Forward Obstruction Warning
(FOW) system is turned off, the Forward
Obstruction Warning (FOW) OFF
indicator light turns on.
Radar Sensor Handling
The Forward Obstruction Warning (FOW)
radar sensor is installed on the backside of
the radiator grille.
Refer to Radar Sensor on page 4-65 .
*Some models. 4–119
When Driving
Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)
Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) *
The LDWS notifi es the driver that the vehicle may be deviating from its lane.
The system detects the white or yellow lines on the traffi c lane using the Forward Sensing
Camera (FSC). If it determines that the vehicle may be deviating from its lane, it notifi es
the driver by fl ashing the LDWS indicator light (green) and operating the LDWS warning
sound.
Refer to Forward Sensing Camera on page 4-63 .
Use the LDWS when you drive the vehicle on roads with white or yellow lines.
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)
LDWS warning light (Amber)/
LDWS indicator light (Green)
The warning light fl ashes when the system has a malfunction.
Refer to Warning Lights on page 4-22 .
WARNING
Do not use the LDWS under the following conditions:
The system may not operate adequately according to the actual driving conditions,
resulting in an accident.
Driving on roads with tight curves.
Driving under bad weather conditions (rain, fog, and snow).
The functions of the LDWS have limitations:
Always stay on course using the steering wheel and drive with care. The system is not
designed to compensate for a driver’s lack of cautions and if you rely too much on the
LDWS it could lead to an accident. The driver is responsible for assuring lane changes and
other maneuvers. Always pay attention to the direction in which the vehicle is traveling
and the vehicle’s surroundings.
4–120
When Driving
Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)
CAUTION
Do not modify the suspension. If the vehicle height or the damping force of the
suspensions is changed, the LDWS may not operate correctly.
NOTE
If your vehicle deviates from its traffi c lane, the LDWS operates (warning sound and
indicator light). Steer the vehicle adequately to drive the vehicle to the center of the lane.
When the turn signal lever is operated for a lane change, the LDWS warning is
automatically canceled. The LDWS warning becomes operable when the turn signal lever
is returned and the system detects the white or yellow lines.
If the steering wheel, accelerator pedal, or brake pedal is operated abruptly and the
vehicle moves close to a white or yellow line, the system determines that the driver is
making a lane change and the LDWS warning is automatically canceled.
The LDWS may not operate during the period immediately after the vehicle has deviated
from its lane and the LDWS has operated, or the vehicle deviates from its lane repeatedly
within a short period of time.
The LDWS does not operate if it does not detect the white or yellow lines of the traffi c
lane.
4–121
When Driving
Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)
Under the following conditions, the LDWS may not be able to detect white or yellow lines
correctly and the LDWS may not operate correctly.
If an object placed on the dashboard is refl ected in the windshield and picked up by the
camera.
Heavy luggage is loaded in the luggage compartment or on the rear seat and the
vehicle is inclined.
The tire pressures are not adjusted to the specifi ed pressure.
When the vehicle is driven on the entry and exit to or from the rest area or tollgate of a
highway.
The white or yellow lines are less visible because of dirt or paint fl aking.
The vehicle in front of your vehicle is running near a white or yellow line and the line
is less visible.
A white or yellow line is less visible because of bad weather (rain, fog, or snow).
The vehicle is driven on a temporary lane or section with a closed lane due to
construction.
A misleading line is picked up on the road such as a temporary line for construction,
or because of shade, lingering snow, or grooves fi lled with water.
The surrounding brightness suddenly changes such as when entering or exiting a
tunnel.
The illumination of the headlights is weakened because of dirt or the optical axis is
deviated.
The windshield is dirty or foggy.
Back-light is refl ecting from the road surface.
The road surface is wet and shiny after rain, or there are puddles on the road.
The shade of a guardrail parallel to a white or yellow line is on the road.
The width of a lane is excessively narrow or wide.
The road is excessively uneven.
The vehicle is shaken after hitting a road bump.
There are two or more adjacent white or yellow lines.
There are various road markings or lane markings of various shapes near an
intersection.
4–122
When Driving
Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)
When The System Operates
1. Press the LDWS switch. The LDWS
goes on stand-by and the LDWS
warning light (amber) illuminates.
The lane indication (bordered line) is
indicated in the active driving display
(Type A instrument cluster *1 ) or the
multi information display (Type B
instrument cluster *1 ).
*1 To determine which instrument cluster
is equipped on your Mazda, Refer to
Meters and Gauges on page 4-12 .
Indication on display
2. Drive the vehicle near the center of
the lane and the LDWS indicator light
(green) illuminates in the instrument
cluster when all of the following
conditions are met.
The vehicle is driven near the center of
the lane with the white or yellow line
on the left and right sides, or on either
side.
The vehicle speed is about 70 km/h (44
mph) or more
The vehicle is driven on a straight road
or road with gentle curves
The lane indication is indicated in
the active driving display (Type
A instrument cluster *1 ) or the
multi information display (Type B
instrument cluster *1 ).
*1 To determine which instrument cluster
is equipped on your Mazda, Refer to
Meters and Gauges on page 4-12 .
Indication on display
NOTE
The LDWS remains on stand-by until it
detects white or yellow lines on both the
left and right sides, or on either side.
When the system detects a white or
yellow line on one side only, the system
will operate the warning only when the
vehicle deviates to the side the white or
yellow line detected.
4–123
When Driving
Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)
Auto cancel
Under the following conditions, the
LDWS is automatically canceled and
kept on stand-by, and the LDWS warning
light (amber) in the instrument cluster
illuminates.
The system cannot detect white or
yellow lines.
The vehicle speed is less than about 65
km/h (40 mph).
The vehicle is making a sharp turn.
The vehicle is making a turn at an
inadequate speed.
The temperature inside the camera is
high or low.
The windshield around the camera is
foggy.
The windshield around the camera is
blocked by an obstruction, causing poor
forward visibility.
The lane indication (bordered line) is
indicated in the active driving display
(Type A instrument cluster *1 ) or the multi
information display (Type B instrument
cluster*1 ).
The LDWS is automatically enabled when
the condition changes and the system is
operable.
*1 To determine which instrument cluster
is equipped on your Mazda, Refer to
Meters and Gauges on page 4-12 .
Auto cancel of warning
Under the following conditions, the
LDWS determines that the driver is
making lane changes and the warning is
automatically canceled.
The LDWS is automatically enabled after
the operation.
The steering wheel is operated abruptly.
The brake pedal is depressed abruptly.
The accelerator pedal is depressed
abruptly.
A turn signal lever is operated (after the
turn signal lever is returned, the LDWS
warning may not operate for about 3
seconds which is the period of time
required to make a lane correction).
NOTE
After about 5 seconds have elapsed
with the turn signal lever left operating,
the LDWS warning may operate if the
vehicle is close to a white or yellow
line.
The sensitivity of the warning
(sensitivity with which the system
determines the driver's intentional lane
change) can be changed.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-12 .
Canceling The System
To cancel the LDWS, press the LDWS
switch. The LDWS indicator light (Green/
Amber) in the instrument cluster turns off.
The lane indication displayed in the
active driving display (Type A instrument
cluster*1 ) or the multi information display
(Type B instrument cluster *1 ) turns off.
*1 To determine which instrument cluster
is equipped on your Mazda, Refer to
Meters and Gauges on page 4-12 .
4–124
When Driving
Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)
LDWS Warning
If the system determines that the vehicle
may be deviating from its lane while the
system is operating, the LDWS warning
sounds and the LDWS indicator light
(green) fl ashes.
Refer to Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS) Warning Sound on page 7-38 .
In the active driving display (Type
A instrument cluster *1 ) or the multi
information display (Type B instrument
cluster*1 ), the direction in which the
system determined that the vehicle may
be deviating from its lane is indicated.
Operate the steering wheel adequately and
drive in the center of the lane.
*1 To determine which instrument cluster
is equipped on your Mazda, Refer to
Meters and Gauges on page 4-12 .
Indication on display
NOTE
If the LDWS warning sound is set to
rumble, the sound will be heard from
the vehicle speaker on the side which
the system determined the vehicle may
be deviating from its lane.
The LDWS warning sound may not be
heard depending on the surrounding
conditions such as outside noise.
The warning timing with which the
system determines the vehicle may be
deviating from its lane can be changed.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-12 .
*Some models. 4–125
When Driving
Rear View Monitor
Rear View Monitor *
The rear view monitor provides visual images of the rear of the vehicle when reversing.
WARNING
Always drive carefully confi rming the safety of the rear and the surrounding conditions
by looking directly with your eyes:
Reversing the vehicle by only looking at the screen is dangerous as it may cause an
accident or a collision with an object. The rear view monitor is only a visual assist device
when reversing the vehicle. The images on the screen may be diff erent from the actual
conditions.
CAUTION
Do not use the rear view monitor under the following conditions: Using the rear view
monitor under the following conditions is dangerous and could result in injury or vehicle
damage or both.
Icy or snow-covered roads.
Tire chains or a temporary spare tire is installed.
The trunk lid/liftgate is not fully closed.
The vehicle is on a road incline.
When the display is cold, images may course across the monitor or the screen and may be
dimmer than usual, which could cause diffi culty in confi rming the surrounding conditions
of the vehicle. Always drive carefully confi rming the safety of the rear and the surrounding
conditions by looking directly with your eyes.
Do not apply excessive force to the camera. The camera position and angle may deviate.
Do not disassemble, modify, or remove it as it may no longer be waterproof.
The camera cover is made of plastic. Do not apply degreasing agents, organic solvents,
wax, or glass coating agents to the camera cover. If any are spilled on the cover, wipe off
with a soft cloth immediately.
Do not rub the cover excessively, or polish it using an abrasive compound or a hard brush.
The cover may be damaged aff ecting the image.
NOTE
If water, snow, or mud is stuck on the camera lens, wipe it off using a soft cloth. If it
cannot be wiped off, use a mild detergent.
If the camera temperature changes rapidly (Hot to cold, cold to hot), the rear view
monitor may not operate correctly.
When replacing the tires, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer. Replacing the tires could
result in deviation of the guide lines which appear on the display.
If the vehicle's front, side, or rear has been involved in a collision, the alignment of
the rear view parking camera (location, installation angle) may have deviated. Always
consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer to have the vehicle inspected.
4–126
When Driving
Rear View Monitor
Rear View Parking Camera Location
Rear View Parking Camera
4-Door 5-Door
Switching to the Rear View Monitor Display
Shift the shift lever to R with the ignition switched ON to switch the display to the rear view
monitor display.
NOTE
When the shift lever is shifted from R to another shift lever position, the screen returns to the
previous display.
4–127
When Driving
Rear View Monitor
Displayable Range on the Screen
The images on the screen may be different from the actual conditions.
(Screen display)
(Actual view)
Object
Trunk lid (4-door)/
garnish (5-door)
Bumper
NOTE
The displayable range varies depending on the vehicle and road conditions.
The displayable range is limited. Objects under the bumper or around the bumper ends
cannot be displayed.
The distance appearing in the displayed image is different from the actual distance
because the rear view parking camera is equipped with a specifi c lens.
Some optionally installed vehicle accessories may be picked up by the camera. Do not
install any optional parts that can interfere with the camera view, such as illuminating
parts or parts made of refl ective material.
It may be diffi cult to see the display under the following conditions, however, it does not
indicate a malfunction.
In darkened areas.
When the temperature around the lens is high/low.
When the camera is wet such as on a rainy day or during periods of high humidity.
When foreign material such as mud is stuck around the camera.
When the camera lens refl ects sunlight or headlight beams.
Image display may be delayed if the temperature around the camera is low.
4–128
When Driving
Rear View Monitor
Viewing the Display
Guide lines which indicate the width of the vehicle (yellow) are displayed on the screen as a
reference to the approximate width of the vehicle in comparison to the width of the parking
space you are about to back into.
Use this display view for parking your vehicle in a parking space or garage.
b a a) Vehicle width guide lines (yellow)
These guide lines serve as a reference to the approximate width of the vehicle.
b) Distance guide lines.
These guide lines indicate the approximate distance to a point measured from the
vehicle's rear (from the end of the bumper).
The red and yellow lines indicate the points about 50 cm (19 in) for the red line and 100
cm (39.3 in) for the yellow lines from the rear bumper (at the center point of each of the
lines).
CAUTION
The guide lines on the screen are fi xed lines. They are not synced to the driver's turning
of the steering wheel. Always be careful and check the area to the vehicle's rear and the
surrounding area directly with your eyes while backing up.
Rear View Monitor Operation
The operation of the rear view monitor when reversing the vehicle varies depending on
the traffi c, road, and vehicle conditions. The amount of steering and the timing also varies
depending on conditions, so confi rm the surrounding conditions directly with your eyes and
steer the vehicle in accordance with the conditions.
Be well aware of the above cautions prior to using the rear view monitor.
NOTE
Images displayed on the monitor from the rear view parking camera are reversed images
(mirror images).
4–129
When Driving
Rear View Monitor
1. Shift the shift lever to R to switch the display to the rear view monitor display.
2. Confi rming the surrounding conditions, reverse the vehicle.
(Display condition) (Vehicle condition)
3. After your vehicle begins entering the parking space, continue backing up slowly so that
the distance between the vehicle width lines and the sides of the parking space on the left
and right are roughly equal.
4. Continue to adjust the steering wheel until the vehicle width guide lines are parallel to
the left and right sides of the parking space.
5. Once they are parallel, straighten the wheels and back your vehicle slowly into the
parking space. Continue checking the vehicle's surroundings and then stop the vehicle
in the best possible position. (If the parking space has division lines, check whether the
vehicle width guide lines are parallel to them.)
(Display condition) (Vehicle condition)
4–130
When Driving
Rear View Monitor
6. When the shift lever is shifted from R to another shift lever position, the screen returns to
the previous display.
NOTE
Because there may be a difference between the displayed image, such as indicated below,
and the actual conditions when parking, always verify the safety at the rear of the vehicle
and the surrounding area directly with your eyes.
In the image of the parking space (or garage) displayed below, even though the back end
and distance guide lines appear parallel in the monitor, they may not actually be parallel
on the ground.
When parking in a space with a division line on only one side of the parking space, the
division line and the vehicle width guide line may appear parallel on the monitor, but
they may not actually be parallel on the ground.
4–131
When Driving
Rear View Monitor
Variance Between Actual Road Conditions and Displayed Image
Some variance occurs between the actual road and the displayed road. Such variance in
distance perspective could lead to an accident. Note the following conditions that may cause
a variance in distance perspective.
When the vehicle is tilted due to the weight of passengers and load
When the vehicle rear is lowered, the object displayed on the screen appears farther than the
actual distance.
Variance
Object
When there is a steep grade behind the vehicle
When there is a steep upgrade (downgrade) behind the vehicle, the object displayed on the
screen appears farther (downgrade: closer) than the actual distance.
Appears
farther than
actual
distance
Appears
closer than
actual
distance
Object at actual
position
Object at actual position
Object on screen
A: Distance between the vehicle and object displayed on the screen.
B: Actual distance between the vehicle and object.
Object on screen
4–132
When Driving
Rear View Monitor
Three-dimensional object on vehicle rear
Because the distance guide lines are displayed based on a fl at surface, the distance to the
three-dimensional object displayed on the screen is different from the actual distance.
A
A
C
B
C B
(Actual distance) B>C=A
Sensed distance on screen A>B>C
(Screen display)
(Actual condition)
Picture Quality Adjustment
WARNING
Always adjust the picture quality of the rear view monitor while the vehicle is stopped:
Do not adjust the picture quality of the rear view monitor while driving the vehicle.
Adjusting the picture quality of the rear view monitor such as brightness, contrast, color,
and tint while driving the vehicle is dangerous as it could distract your attention from the
vehicle operation which could lead to an accident.
Picture quality adjustment can be done while the shift lever is in reverse (R).
There are four settings which can be adjusted including, brightness, contrast, tint, and color.
When adjusting, pay suffi cient attention to the vehicle surroundings.
1. Select the ( ) icon on the screen to display the tabs.
2. Select the desired tab item.
3. Adjust the brightness, contrast, tint, and color using the slider.
If you need to reset, press the reset button.
4. Select the ( ) icon on the screen to close the tab.
*Some models. 5–1
5 Interior Features
Use of various features for ride comfort, including air-conditioning and
audio system.
Climate Control System..................................................................... 5-2
Operating Tips ............................................................................... 5-2
Vent Operation .............................................................................. 5-3
Manual Climate Control ............................................................... 5-5
Automatic Climate Control ........................................................... 5-9
Dual-Zone Automatic Climate Control ....................................... 5-12
Audio System .................................................................................... 5-16
Antenna ....................................................................................... 5-16
Operating Tips for Audio System ............................................... 5-17
Audio Set (Type A) ..................................................................... 5-26
Audio Set (Type B) ..................................................................... 5-38
Audio Control Switch Operation* ............................................... 5-58
AUX/USB/iPod mode ................................................................. 5-59
Bluetooth® ......................................................................................... 5-75
Bluetooth® (Type A/Type B)* ...................................................... 5-75
Bluetooth® Hands-Free (Type A)* ............................................... 5-95
Bluetooth® Hands-Free (Type B)* ............................................. 5-102
Bluetooth® Audio (Type A)* ...................................................... 5-114
Bluetooth® Audio (Type B)* ...................................................... 5-116
Troubleshooting (Type A/Type B)* ........................................... 5-129
Interior Equipment ........................................................................ 5-133
Sunvisors ................................................................................... 5-133
Interior Lights ........................................................................... 5-134
Accessory Sockets .................................................................... 5-136
Cup Holder ................................................................................ 5-137
Bottle Holder ............................................................................. 5-138
Storage Compartments .............................................................. 5-139
5–2
Interior Features
Climate Control System
Operating Tips
Operate the climate control system with
the engine running.
To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the fan control
dial on for a long period of time with the
ignition switched ON when the engine is
not running.
Clear all obstructions such as leaves,
snow and ice from the hood and the air
inlet in the cowl grille to improve the
system effi ciency.
Use the climate control system to defog
the windows and dehumidify the air.
The recirculate mode should be used
when driving through tunnels or while in
a traffi c jam, or when you would like to
shut off outside air for quick cooling of
the interior.
Use the outside air mode for ventilation
or windshield defrosting.
If the vehicle has been parked in direct
sunlight during hot weather, open the
windows to let warm air escape, then
run the climate control system.
Run the air conditioner about 10 minutes
at least once a month to keep internal
parts lubricated.
Have the air conditioner checked before
the weather gets hot. Lack of refrigerant
may make the air conditioner less
effi cient.
The refrigerant specifi cations are
indicated on a label attached to the
inside of the engine compartment. Check
the label before refi lling the refrigerant.
If the wrong type of refrigerant is used,
it could result in a serious malfunction
of the air conditioner.
For details, consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
Label
5–3
Interior Features
Climate Control System
Vent Operation
Adjusting the Vents
Directing airfl ow
To adjust the direction of airfl ow, move the
adjustment knob.
NOTE
When using the air conditioner under
humid ambient temperature conditions,
the system may blow fog from the vents.
This is not a sign of trouble but a result of
humid air being suddenly cooled.
Side Vents
Open
Knob Knob
Dial Dial
Close OpenClose
Center Vents
Knob
5–4
Interior Features
Climate Control System
Selecting the Airfl ow Mode
Dashboard Vents
Dashboard and Floor Vents
Floor Vents
Defroster and Floor Vents
Defroster Vents
*Some models. 5–5
Interior Features
Climate Control System
Manual Climate Control
Rear window defroster switchTemperature control dial
Fan control dial Mode selector dial
A/C switch
Air intake selector
(recirculated air
mode)
Air intake selector
(outside air mode)
* With A/C switch
Control Switches
Temperature control dial
This dial controls temperature. Turn it
clockwise for hot and counterclockwise
for cold.
NOTE
When the mode is set to or with the
fan control dial in a position other than 0
and the temperature control dial in the
maximum cold position, the air intake
selector switches to the recirculated air
mode and the A/C turns on automatically.
If A/C is not desired, press the A/C switch
to turn it off.
Fan control dial
This dial allows variable fan speeds.
The fan has seven speeds.
Mode selector dial
Turn the mode selector dial to select
airfl ow mode (page 5-4 ).
NOTE
The mode selector dial can be set at the
intermediate positions ( ) between
each mode. Set the dial to an
intermediate position if you want to
split the airfl ow between the two modes.
For example, when the mode selector
dial is at the position between the
and positions, airfl ow from the fl oor
vent is less than that of the position.
A/C switch *
Press the A/C switch to turn the air
conditioner on. The indicator light on the
switch will illuminate when the fan control
dial is in any position except OFF.
Press the switch once again to turn the air
conditioner off.
NOTE
The air conditioner may not function when
the outside temperature approaches 0 °C
(32 °F).
5–6
Interior Features
Climate Control System
Air intake selector
This switch controls the source of air
entering the vehicle.
Press the air intake selector switch to
alternate between the outside air and
recirculated air modes.
Recirculated air mode ( )
Outside air is shut off. Air within the
vehicle is recirculated.
Outside air mode ( )
Outside air is allowed to enter the
cabin. Use this mode for ventilation or
windshield defrosting.
WARNING
Do not use the recirculated air mode in
cold or rainy weather:
Using the recirculated air mode in cold
or rainy weather is dangerous as it
will cause the windows to fog up. Your
vision will be hampered, which could
lead to a serious accident.
Heating
1. Set the mode selector dial to the
position.
2. Set the air intake selector to the outside
air mode.
3. Set the temperature control dial to the
hot position.
4. Set the fan control dial to the desired
speed.
5. If dehumidifi ed heating is desired, turn
on the air conditioner.
NOTE
If the windshield fogs up easily, set the
mode selector dial to the position.
If cooler air is desired at face level, set
the mode selector dial at the position
and adjust the temperature control dial
to maintain maximum comfort.
The air to the fl oor is warmer than
air to the face (except when the
temperature control dial is set at the
extreme hot or cold position).
In the or position, the air
conditioner is automatically turned on
and the outside air mode is
automatically selected to defrost the
windshield. In the or position, the
outside air mode cannot be changed to
the recirculated air mode.
Cooling (With air conditioner)
1. Set the mode selector dial to the
position.
2. Set the temperature control dial to the
cold position.
3. Set the fan control dial to the desired
speed.
4. Turn on the air conditioner by pressing
the A/C switch.
5. After cooling begins, adjust the fan
control dial and temperature control
dial as needed to maintain maximum
comfort.
5–7
Interior Features
Climate Control System
CAUTION
If the air conditioner is used while
driving up long hills or in heavy
traffi c, monitor the engine coolant
temperature warning light to see if it is
illuminated or fl ashing (page 4-21 ).
The air conditioner may cause engine
overheating. If the warning light is
illuminated or fl ashing, turn the air
conditioning off (page 7-19 ).
NOTE
When maximum cooling is desired,
set the temperature control dial to the
extreme cold position and set the air
intake selector to the recirculated air
mode, then turn the fan control dial
fully clockwise.
If warmer air is desired at fl oor level,
set the mode selector dial at the
position and adjust the temperature
control dial to maintain maximum
comfort.
The air to the fl oor is warmer than
air to the face (except when the
temperature control dial is set at the
extreme hot or cold position).
Ventilation
1. Set the mode selector dial to the
position.
2. Set the air intake selector to the outside
air mode.
3. Set the temperature control dial to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan control dial to the desired
speed.
Windshield Defrosting and
Defogging
1. Set the mode selector dial to the
position.
2. Set the temperature control dial to the
desired position.
3. Set the fan control dial to the desired
speed.
4. If dehumidifi ed heating is desired, turn
on the air conditioner.
WARNING
Do not defog the windshield using the
position with the temperature
control set to the cold position:
Using the position with the
temperature control set to the cold
position is dangerous as it will cause
the outside of the windshield to fog up.
Your vision will be hampered, which
could lead to a serious accident. Set
the temperature control to the hot or
warm position when using the
position.
NOTE
For maximum defrosting, turn on the
air conditioner, set the temperature
control dial to the extreme hot position,
and turn the fan control dial fully
clockwise.
If warm air is desired at the fl oor, set
the mode selector dial to the
position.
In the or position, the air
conditioner is automatically turned on
and the outside air mode is
automatically selected to defrost the
windshield. In the or position, the
outside air mode cannot be changed to
the recirculated air mode.
5–8
Interior Features
Climate Control System
Dehumidifying (With air
conditioner)
Operate the air conditioner in cool or cold
weather to help defog the windshield and
side windows.
1. Set the mode selector dial to the desired
position.
2. Set the air intake selector to the outside
air mode.
3. Set the temperature control dial to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan control dial to the desired
speed.
5. Turn on the air conditioner by pressing
the A/C switch.
NOTE
One of the functions of the air conditioner
is dehumidifying the air and, to use
this function, the temperature does not
have to be set to cold. Therefore, set the
temperature control dial to the desired
position (hot or cold) and turn on the air
conditioner when you want to dehumidify
the cabin air.
5–9
Interior Features
Climate Control System
Automatic Climate Control
Rear window defroster switch
Temperature control dial Fan control dial Mode selector dial
A/C switch Air intake selector switch
Control Switches
Temperature control dial
This dial controls temperature. Turn it
clockwise for hot and counterclockwise
for cold.
Fan control dial
The fan has seven speeds.
AUTO position
The amount of airfl ow will be
automatically controlled in accordance
with the set temperature.
Except AUTO position
The airfl ow amount can be adjusted to the
desired level by turning the dial.
0 position
To turn off the system, set the dial to 0
position.
Mode selector dial
Turn the mode selector dial to select
airfl ow mode (page 5-4 ).
AUTO position
The airfl ow mode automatically adjusts to
the selected temperature.
Except AUTO position
The desired airfl ow position can be
selected by turning the dial.
NOTE
With the airfl ow mode set to the
position and the temperature control
dial set at a medium temperature,
heated air is directed to the feet and air
at a comparably lower temperature will
fl ow through the central, left and right
vents.
When the fan control dial is ON, and
the mode selector dial is in the or
position, the air conditioner is
automatically turned on and the outside
air mode is automatically selected to
defrost the windshield. In the or
position, the outside air mode cannot be
changed to the recirculated air mode.
5–10
Interior Features
Climate Control System
A/C switch
Pressing the A/C switch while the AUTO
switch is turned on will turn off the air
conditioning (cooling/dehumidifying
functions).
The air conditioning can be turned on and
off by pressing the A/C switch while the
fan control dial is on.
NOTE
The air conditioner may not function when
the outside temperature approaches 0 °C
(32 °F).
Air intake selector
Outside or recirculated air positions can be
selected. Press the switch to select outside/
recirculated air positions.
Recirculated air position (indicator light
illuminated)
Outside air is shut off. Use this position
when going through tunnels, driving in
congested traffi c (high engine exhaust
areas) or when quick cooling is desired.
Outside air position (indicator light
turned off)
Outside air is allowed to enter the
cabin. Use this mode for ventilation or
windshield defrosting.
WARNING
Do not use the position in cold or
rainy weather:
Using the position in cold or rainy
weather is dangerous as it will cause
the windows to fog up. Your vision will
be hampered, which could lead to a
serious accident.
Operation of Automatic Air
Conditioning
1. Set the mode selector dial to the AUTO
position.
2. Set the air intake selector to the outside
air position (indicator light turned off).
3. Set the temperature control dial to the
desired position.
4. Set the fan control dial to the AUTO
position.
5. Turn on the air conditioner.
To turn off the system, set the fan control
dial to OFF.
NOTE
Setting the temperature to maximum
high or low will not provide the desired
temperature at a faster rate.
When selecting heat, the system will
restrict airfl ow until it has warmed to
prevent cold air from blowing out of the
vents.
5–11
Interior Features
Climate Control System
Windshield Defrosting and
Defogging
Set the mode selector dial to the
position and turn the fan control dial to the
desired speed.
In this position, the outside air position
is automatically selected, and when the
fan control dial is ON, the air conditioner
automatically turns on. The air conditioner
will directly dehumidify the air to the front
windshield and side windows (page 5-4 ).
Airfl ow amount will be increased.
WARNING
Set the temperature control to the hot
or warm position when defogging (
position):
Using the position with the
temperature control set to the cold
position is dangerous as it will cause
the outside of the windshield to fog up.
Your vision will be hampered, which
could lead to a serious accident.
NOTE
Use the temperature control dial to
increase the air fl ow temperature and
defog the windshield more quickly.
Sunlight/Temperature Sensor
The climate control system measures
inside and outside temperatures, and
sunlight. It then sets temperatures inside
the passenger compartment accordingly.
CAUTION
Do not obstruct either sensor,
otherwise the climate control system
will not operate properly.
Sunlight sensor
Interior temperature sensor
5–12
Interior Features
Climate Control System
Dual-Zone Automatic Climate Control
Climate control information is displayed on the display.
Airflow display
Temperature setting display (driver)
Mode selector
display
A/C mode display
Temperature setting display (passenger)
Air intake selector
(recirculated air
position)
Air intake selector
(outside air position)
Driver temperature control dial
AUTO switch
Mode selector switchFan control switch
OFF switch
Windshield defroster switch
Rear window defroster switch
Passenger temperature
control dial
DUAL switch
A/C switch
Control Switches
AUTO switch
By pressing the AUTO switch the
following functions will be automatically
controlled in accordance with the selected
set temperature:
Airfl ow temperature
Amount of airfl ow
Selection of airfl ow mode
Outside/Recirculated air selection
Air conditioner operation
NOTE
AUTO switch indicator light
When on, it indicates auto operation,
and the system will function
automatically.
If any of the following switches are
operated while in auto control, the
AUTO switch indicator turns off.
Mode selector switch
Fan control switch
Windshield defroster switch
The functions for switches other than
those operated in the above continue
to operate in auto control.
OFF switch
Pressing the OFF switch shuts off the
climate control system.
5–13
Interior Features
Climate Control System
Temperature control dial
This dial controls temperature. Turn it
clockwise for hot and counterclockwise
for cold.
When the DUAL switch is off:
Turn the driver temperature control dial
to control the temperature throughout
the entire cabin.
When the DUAL switch is on:
Turn the driver or front passenger
temperature control dial to
independently control the temperature
on each side of the cabin.
NOTE
The climate control system changes to
the individual operation mode ( DUAL
switch indicator light illuminated) by
turning the front passenger temperature
control dial even when the DUAL
switch is off, which allows individual
control of the set temperature for the
driver and front passenger.
The temperature units for the
temperature setting display can be
changed in conjunction with the
temperature units for the outside
temperature display. Refer to Outside
Temperature Display on page 4-16 .
Fan control switch
The fan has seven speeds. The selected
speed will be displayed.
Mode selector switch
The desired airfl ow mode can be selected
(page 5-4 ).
NOTE
With the airfl ow mode set to the
position and the temperature control
dial set at a medium temperature,
heated air is directed to the feet and air
at a comparably lower temperature will
fl ow through the central, left and right
vents.
To set the air vent to , press the
windshield defroster switch.
In the or position, the air
conditioner is automatically turned on
and the outside air mode is
automatically selected to defrost the
windshield. In the or position, the
outside air mode cannot be changed to
the recirculated air mode.
A/C switch
Pressing the A/C switch while the AUTO
switch is turned on will turn off the air
conditioning (cooling/dehumidifying
functions).
The air conditioning can be turned on and
off by pressing the A/C switch while the
fan control switch is on.
NOTE
The air conditioning operates when the
A/C switch is pressed even if the fan is
off.
The air conditioner may not function
when the outside temperature
approaches 0 °C (32 °F).
5–14
Interior Features
Climate Control System
Air intake selector
Outside or recirculated air positions can be
selected. Press the switch to select outside/
recirculated air positions.
Recirculated air position ( )
Outside air is shut off. Use this position
when going through tunnels, driving in
congested traffi c (high engine exhaust
areas) or when quick cooling is desired.
Outside air position ( )
Outside air is allowed to enter the
cabin. Use this mode for ventilation or
windshield defrosting.
WARNING
Do not use the position in cold or
rainy weather:
Using the position in cold or rainy
weather is dangerous as it will cause
the windows to fog up. Your vision will
be hampered, which could lead to a
serious accident.
DUAL switch
Use the DUAL switch to change the
mode between the individual operation
(driver and passenger) and interconnection
(simultaneous) modes.
Individual operation mode (indicator
light illuminated)
The set temperature can be controlled
individually for the driver and front
passenger.
Interconnection mode (indicator light
turned off)
The set temperature for the driver
and front passenger is controlled
simultaneously.
Windshield defroster switch
Press the switch to defrost the windshield
and front door windows.
Operation of Automatic Air
Conditioning
1. Press the AUTO switch. Selection
of the airfl ow mode, air intake
selector and amount of airfl ow will be
automatically controlled.
2. Use the temperature control dial to
select a desired temperature.
Press the DUAL switch or turn the
front passenger temperature control
dial to control the set temperature
individually for the driver and front
passenger.
To turn off the system, press the OFF
switch.
NOTE
Setting the temperature to maximum
high or low will not provide the desired
temperature at a faster rate.
When selecting heat, the system will
restrict airfl ow until it has warmed to
prevent cold air from blowing out of the
vents.
5–15
Interior Features
Climate Control System
Windshield Defrosting and
Defogging
Press the windshield defroster switch.
In this position, the outside air position
is automatically selected, and the air
conditioner automatically turns on. The
air conditioner will directly dehumidify
the air to the front windshield and side
windows (on Page 5-4 ). Airfl ow amount
will be increased.
WARNING
Set the temperature control to the hot
or warm position when defogging (
position):
Using the position with the
temperature control set to the cold
position is dangerous as it will cause
the outside of the windshield to fog up.
Your vision will be hampered, which
could lead to a serious accident.
NOTE
Use the temperature control dial to
increase the air fl ow temperature and
defog the windshield more quickly.
Sunlight/Temperature Sensor
The climate control system measures
inside and outside temperatures, and
sunlight. It then sets temperatures inside
the passenger compartment accordingly.
CAUTION
Do not obstruct either sensor,
otherwise the climate control system
will not operate properly.
Sunlight sensor
Interior temperature sensor
*Some models.5–16
Interior Features
Audio System
Antenna
Antenna (4-Door)
AM/FM Radio Antenna
The AM/FM radio antenna receives both
AM and FM signals.
The antenna is embedded into the window
glass.
CAUTION
When washing the inside of the
window which has an antenna, use
a soft cloth dampened in lukewarm
water, gently wiping the antenna lines.
Use of glass cleaning products could
damage the antenna.
Satellite Radio Antenna *
The satellite radio antenna receives
SiriusXM signals.
Antenna
Antenna (5-Door)
AM/FM Radio Antenna *
The AM/FM radio antenna receives both
AM and FM signals.
(Type A)
To remove the antenna, turn it
counterclockwise.
To install the antenna, turn it clockwise.
Make sure the antenna is securely
installed.
Remove
Install
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the antenna,
remove it before entering a car wash
facility or passing beneath a low
overhead clearance.
Be careful around the antenna when
removing snow from the roof. Otherwise
the antenna could be damaged.
NOTE
When leaving your vehicle unattended, we
recommend that you remove the antenna
and store it inside the vehicle.
*Some models. 5–17
Interior Features
Audio System
(Type B)
Antenna
Antenna for AM/FM and Satellite Radio
Antenna*
The antenna for AM/FM and satellite radio
antenna receives both AM and FM signals
and SiriusXM signals.
Antenna
Operating Tips for Audio
System
WARNING
Always adjust the audio while the
vehicle is stopped:
Do not adjust the audio control
switches while driving the vehicle.
Adjusting the audio while driving
the vehicle is dangerous as it could
distract your attention from the vehicle
operation which could lead to a
serious accident.
Even if the audio control switches are
equipped on the steering wheel, learn
to use the switches without looking
down at them so that you can keep
your maximum attention on the road
while driving the vehicle.
CAUTION
For the purposes of safe driving,
adjust the audio volume to a level that
allows you to hear sounds outside of
the vehicle including car horns and
particularly emergency vehicle sirens.
NOTE
To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the audio
system on for a long period of time
when the engine is not running.
If a cellular phone or CB radio is used
in or near the vehicle, it could cause
noise to occur from the audio system,
however, this does not indicate that the
system has been damaged.
5–18
Interior Features
Audio System
Do not spill any liquid on the audio
system.
Do not insert any objects, other than CDs,
into the slot.
Radio Reception
AM characteristics
AM signals bend around such things as
buildings or mountains and bounce off the
ionosphere.
Therefore, they can reach longer distances
than FM signals.
Because of this, two stations may
sometimes be picked up on the same
frequency at the same time.
Station 2Station 1
Ionosphere
FM characteristics
An FM broadcast range is usually about
40—50 km (25—30 miles) from the
source. Because of extra coding needed to
break the sound into two channels, stereo
FM has even less range than monaural
(non-stereo) FM.
FM Station
40—50km
(25—30 miles)
Signals from an FM transmitter are similar
to beams of light because they do not
bend around corners, but they do refl ect.
Unlike AM signals, FM signals cannot
travel beyond the horizon. Therefore, FM
stations cannot be received at the great
distances possible with AM reception.
AM wave
FM wave
FM wave
100—200 km (60—120 miles)
Ionosphere
Atmospheric conditions can also affect
FM reception. High humidity will cause
poor reception. However, cloudy days may
provide better reception than clear days.
5–19
Interior Features
Audio System
Multipath noise
Since FM signals can be refl ected by
obstructions, it is possible to receive both
the direct signal and the refl ected signal
at the same time. This causes a slight
delay in reception and may be heard as a
broken sound or a distortion. This problem
may also be encountered when in close
proximity to the transmitter.
Reflected wave
Direct
Flutter/Skip noise
Signals from an FM transmitter move in
straight lines and become weak in valleys
between tall buildings, mountains, and
other obstacles. When a vehicle passes
through such an area, the reception
conditions may change suddenly, resulting
in annoying noise.
Weak signal noise
In suburban areas, broadcast signals
become weak because of distance from the
transmitter. Reception in such fringe areas
is characterized by sound breakup.
Strong signal noise
This occurs very close to a transmitter
tower. The broadcast signals are extremely
strong, so the result is noise and sound
breakup at the radio receiver.
Station drift noise
When a vehicle reaches the area of two
strong stations broadcasting at similar
frequencies, the original station may be
temporarily lost and the second station
picked up. At this time there will be some
noise from this disturbance.
Station 2
88.3 MHz
Station 1
88.1 MHz
5–20
Interior Features
Audio System
Operating Tips for CD Player
Condensation phenomenon
Immediately after turning on the heater
when the vehicle is cold, the CD or
optical components (prism and lens) in
the CD player may become clouded with
condensation. At this time, the CD will
eject immediately when placed in the unit.
A clouded CD can be corrected simply by
wiping it with a soft cloth. Clouded optical
components will clear naturally in about
an hour. Wait for normal operation to
return before attempting to use the unit.
Handling the CD player
The following precautions should be
observed.
The CD revolves at high speed within
the unit. Defective (cracked or badly
bent) CDs should never be used.
Do not use non-conventional discs such
as heart-shaped, octagonal discs, etc.
The disc may not eject resulting in a
malfunction.
If the memory portion of the CD is
transparent or translucent, do not use the
disc.
Transparent
A new CD may have rough edges on its
inner and outer perimeters. If a disc with
rough edges is used, proper setting will
not be possible and the CD player will
not play the CD. In addition, the disc
may not eject resulting in a malfunction.
Remove the rough edges in advance
by using a ball-point pen or pencil as
shown below. To remove the rough
edges, rub the side of the pen or pencil
against the inner and outer perimeter of
the CD.
When driving over uneven surfaces, the
sound may jump.
5–21
Interior Features
Audio System
The CD player has been designed to
play CDs bearing the identifi cation logo
as shown below. No other discs can be
played.
Use discs that have been legitimately
produced. If illegally-copied discs such
as pirated discs are used, the system may
not operate properly.
Be sure never to touch the signal surface
when handling the CDs. Pick up a CD
by grasping the outer edge or the edge of
the hole and the outer edge.
Do not stick paper or tape on the CD.
Avoid scratching the reverse side (the
side without a label). The disc may not
eject resulting in a malfunction.
Dust, fi nger smudges, and dirt can
decrease the amount of light refl ected
from the signal surface, thus affecting
sound quality. If the CD should become
soiled, gently wipe it with a soft cloth
from the center of the CD to the edge.
Do not use record sprays, antistatic
agents, or household spray cleaners.
Volatile chemicals such as benzine and
thinner can also damage the surface of
the CD and must not be used. Anything
that can damage, warp, or fog plastic
should never be used to clean CDs.
The CD player ejects the CD if the CD
is inserted upside down. Also dirty and/
or defective CDs may be ejected.
Do not insert cleaning discs in the CD
player.
Do not insert any disc with a peel-off
seal affi xed to it.
This unit may not be able to play certain
CD-R/CD-RWs made using a computer
or music CD recorder due to disc
characteristics, scratches, smudges, dirt,
etc., or due to dust or condensation on
the lens inside the unit.
Storing CDs in the vehicle exposed to
direct sunlight or high temperature may
damage the CD-R/CD-RWs, and make
them unplayable.
CD-R/CD-RW exceeding 700 MB
cannot be played.
This unit may not be able to play certain
discs made using a computer due to the
application (writing software) setting
used. (For details, consult the store
where the application was purchased.)
It is possible that certain text data, such
as titles, recorded on a CD-R/CD-RW
may not be displayed when musical data
(CD-DA) is playing.
The period from when a CD-RW is
inserted to when it begins playing is
longer than a normal CD or CD-R.
Completely read the instruction manual
and cautions for CD-R/CD-RWs.
Do not use discs with cellophane tape
adhering, partially peeled off labels,
or adhesive material exuding from the
edges of the CD label. Also, do not use
discs with a commercially-available
CD-R label affi xed. The disc may not
eject resulting in a malfunction.
5–22
Interior Features
Audio System
Operating Tips for MP3
NOTE
Supply of this product only conveys a
license for private, non-commercial
use and does not convey a license nor
imply any right to use this product in any
commercial (i.e. revenue-generating)
real time broadcasting (terrestrial,
satellite, cable and/or any other media),
broadcasting/streaming via the Internet,
intranets and/or other networks or in other
electronic content distribution systems,
such as pay-audio or audio-on-demand
applications. An independent license for
such use is required. For details, please
visit http://www.mp3licensing.com.
This audio system handles MP3 fi les
that have been recorded on CD-R/CDRW/CD-ROMs.
When naming an MP3 fi le, be sure to
add an MP3 fi le extension (.mp3) after
the fi le name.
The number of characters which can be
displayed is restricted.
CAUTION
This unit can only play MP3 fi les that
have an MP3 fi le extension (.mp3)
attached. Do not attach an MP3 fi le
extension to any other type fi le as it
could cause noise to be emitted or a
malfunction in the unit.
Specialized glossary
MP3
Abbreviation for “MPEG Audio Layer
3”. A technical standard for audio
compression as decided by the ISO *1
MPEG working group. Use of MP3
allows for audio data to be compressed to
approximately a tenth of the source data
size.
*1 International Organization for
Standardization
Operating Tips for WMA
WMA is short for Windows Media Audio
and is the audio compression format used
by Microsoft.
Audio data can be created and stored at a
higher compression ratio than MP3.
Microsoft and Windows Media are
registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation U.S. in the United States
and other countries.
CAUTION
This unit plays fi les with the (.wma) fi le
extension as a WMA fi le. Do not use the
WMA fi le extension for fi les other than
WMA fi les. Otherwise, it could result in
noise or a malfunction.
WMA fi les written under specifi cations
other than the indicated specifi cation
may not play normally or fi les or folder
names may not display correctly.
The fi le extension may not be provided
depending on the computer operating
system, version, software, or settings. In
this case, add the fi le extension “.wma”
to the end of the fi le name, and then
write it to the disc.
5–23
Interior Features
Audio System
Operating Tips for AAC
AAC stands for Advanced Audio Coding,
which is standardized voice compression
established by the ISO *1 working group
(MPEG). Audio data can be created and
stored at a higher compression ratio than
MP3.
*1 International Organization for
Standardization
CAUTION
This unit plays fi les with the fi le
extension (.aac/.m4a/.mp4 *2 /.wav *2 )
as an AAC fi le. Do not use the AAC fi le
extension for fi les other than AAC fi les.
Otherwise, it could result in noise or a
malfunction.
*2 Type B
AAC fi les written under specifi cations
other than the indicated specifi cation
may not play normally or fi les or folder
names may not display correctly.
The fi le extension may not be provided
depending on the computer operating
system, version, software, or settings. In
this case, add the fi le extension “.aac ”,
“.m4a”, ".mp4 *2 ", or ".wav *2 " to the end
of the fi le name, and then write it to the
memory.
*2 Type B
Operating Tips for OGG
OGG is the audio compression format for
Xiph. Org Foundation.
Audio data can be created and stored at a
higher compression ratio than MP3.
CAUTION
This unit plays fi les with the (.ogg) fi le
extension as a OGG fi le. Do not use the
OGG fi le extension for fi les other than
OGG fi les. Otherwise, it could result in
noise or a malfunction.
OGG fi les written under specifi cations
other than the indicated specifi cation
may not play normally or fi les or folder
names may not display correctly.
The fi le extension may not be provided
depending on the computer operating
system, version, software, or settings. In
this case, add the fi le extension “.ogg” to
the end of the fi le name, and then write
it to the disc.
5–24
Interior Features
Audio System
Operating Tips for USB device
This unit supports playback of MP3/
WMA/AAC/OGG*1 fi les recorded to USB
device.
NOTE
Music data (MP3/WMA/AAC (.aac/.
m4a/.mp4*1 /.wav *1 )/OGG *1 format)
stored in a USB mass-storage class
compliant device (such as USB fl ash
memory) can be played.
Playback may not be possible
depending on the type and condition of
the USB fl ash memory even if the audio
fi le complies with the standard above.
A copyright protected WMA/AAC fi le
cannot be played in this unit.
The order of the music data stored in
the device may differ from the playback
order.
To prevent loss or damage of stored
data, we recommend that you always
back up your data.
If a device exceeds the maximum
electric current value of 1,000 mA,
it may not operate or recharge when
connected.
Do not pull out the USB device while in
the USB mode (only pull it out while in
FM/AM radio or CD mode).
The device will not operate if the data
is password protected.
*1 Type B
CAUTION
This unit plays fi les with the fi le
extension (mp3) as an MP3 fi le. Do not
use the MP3 fi le extension for fi les other
than MP3 fi les. Otherwise, it could result
in noise or a malfunction.
This unit plays fi les with the fi le
extension (wma) as a WMA fi le. Do not
use the WMA fi le extension for fi les other
than WMA fi les. Otherwise, it could
result in noise or a malfunction.
This unit plays fi les with the fi le
extension (.aac/.m4a/.mp4 *1 /.wav *1 )
as an AAC fi le. Do not use the AAC fi le
extension for fi les other than AAC fi les.
Otherwise, it could result in noise or a
malfunction.
(Type B)
This unit plays fi les with the fi le
extension (ogg) as an OGG fi le. Do not
use the OGG fi le extension for fi les other
than OGG fi les. Otherwise, it could result
in noise or a malfunction.
*1 Type B
MP3/WMA/AAC/OGG *1 fi les written
under specifi cations other than the
indicated specifi cation may not play
normally or fi les/folder names may not
display correctly.
The fi le extension may not be provided
depending on the computer operating
system, version, software, or settings. In
this case, add the fi le extension “.mp3”,
“.wma”, “.aac ”, “.m4a”, ".mp4 *1 ",
".wav*1 ", or ".ogg *1 " to the end of the fi le
name, and then write it to the memory.
*1 Type B
5–25
Interior Features
Audio System
Operating Tips for iPod
This unit supports playback of music fi les
recorded to an iPod.
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc.,
registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
The iPod may not be compatible
depending on the model or OS version. In
this case, an error message is displayed.
CAUTION
Remove the iPod when it is not in
use. Because the iPod is not designed
to withstand excessive changes in
temperature inside the cabin, it could be
damaged or the battery may deteriorate
due to the excessive temperature or
humidity inside the cabin if it is left in
the vehicle.
If data in the iPod is lost while it is
connected to the unit, Mazda cannot
guarantee recovery of any lost data.
If the iPod battery is deteriorated, the
iPod may not recharge and playback
may not be possible when it is
connected to the unit. Replace the iPod
battery immediately.
Be careful not to pinch the iPod
connecting cable when opening/closing
the center console.
For details on using the iPod, refer to the
iPod instruction manual.
When connecting the iPod to a USB port,
all commands are made from the audio
unit. iPod control is not possible.
NOTE
The audio unit cannot display images or
videos stored in an iPod.
5–26
Interior Features
Audio System
Audio Set (Type A)
Power/Volume/Sound Controls ............................................................................. page 5-28
Clock ..................................................................................................................... page 5-30
Operating the Radio .............................................................................................. page 5-32
Operating the Compact Disc (CD) Player............................................................. page 5-34
How to use Auxiliary jack/USB port .................................................................... page 5-37
Error Indications ................................................................................................... page 5-37
5–27
MEMO
5–28
Interior Features
Audio System
Power/Volume/Sound Controls
Power/Volume/Audio control dial
Menu button
Audio display
Power ON/OFF
Switch the ignition to ACC or ON. Press
the power/volume dial to turn the audio
system on. Press the power/volume dial
again to turn the audio system off.
Volume adjustment
To adjust the volume, turn the power/
volume dial. Turn the power/volume dial
to the right to increase volume, to the left
to decrease it.
Audio sound adjustment
1. Press the menu button ( ) to select
the function. The selected function will
be indicated.
2. Turn the audio control dial to adjust the
selected functions as follows:
Indication
Setting value
Turn Left Turn Right
ALC
(Automatic volume
adjustment)
Level
decrease
Level
increase
BASS
(Low pitch sound)
Decrease
bass
Increase
bass
TREB
(Treble sound)
Decrease
treble
Increase
treble
FADE
(Front/back volume
balance)
Shift the
sound to
the front
Shift the
sound to
the rear
BAL
(Left/right volume
balance)
Shift the
sound to
the left
Shift the
sound to
the right
BEEP
(Audio operation sound) Off On
BT SETUP * Select mode
12Hr 24Hr
12Hr
(Flashing)
24Hr
(Flashing)
* Depending on the model, this function
may not be available.
*Some models. 5–29
Interior Features
Audio System
NOTE
If not operated for several seconds, the
display returns to the previous display. To
reset bass, treble, fade, and balance, press
the menu button ( ) for 2 seconds.
The unit will beep and “ CLEAR ” will be
displayed.
Automatic Level Control (ALC)
The automatic level control (ALC)
changes the audio volume automatically
according to the vehicle speed. The faster
the vehicle speed, the higher the volume
increases. ALC has ALC OFF and ALC
LEVEL 1 to 7 modes. At ALC LEVEL 7,
the amount that the volume can increase
is at the maximum. Select the mode
according to the driving conditions.
BT SETUP mode *
Music and other audio such as voice data
recorded on portable audio devices and
mobile phones available on the market
which are equipped with the Bluetooth ®
transmission function can be listened to
via wireless transmission over the vehicle's
speakers. Using the BT SETUP mode,
these devices can be programmed to the
Bluetooth® unit or changed (page 5-78 ).
Time adjustment
Rotating the audio control dial switches
the display between 12 and 24-hour clock
time (page 5-30 ).
5–30
Interior Features
Audio System
Clock
Audio displayAudio control dial
Hour/Minute set switch
:00 button
Menu buttonClock button
Setting the time
The clock can be set at any time when the
ignition is switched to ACC or ON.
1. To adjust the time, press the clock
button ( ) for about 2 seconds until
a beep is heard.
2. The clock's current time will fl ash.
Time adjustment
To adjust the time, press the hour/
minute set button ( , ) while the
clock's current time is fl ashing.
The hours advance while the hour set
button ( ) is pressed. The minutes
advance while the minute set button
( ) is pressed.
3. Press the clock button ( ) again to
start the clock.
Time resetting
1. Press the clock button ( ) for about
2 seconds until a beep is heard.
2. Press the :00 button ( 1 ).
3. When the button is pressed, the time
will be reset as follows:
(Example)
12:01—12:29 12:00
12:30—12:59 1:00
NOTE
When the :00 button ( 1 ) is pressed, the
seconds will start at “ 00 ”.
Switching between 12 and 24-hour
clock time:
Press the menu button ( ) several
times until 12 and 24-hour clock time
are displayed. Turn the audio control
dial in either direction, select the
desired clock setting while the preferred
clock time is fl ashing.
5–31
MEMO
5–32
Interior Features
Audio System
Operating the Radio
Band selector button
Channel preset buttons
Scan button Auto memory buttonTuning button
Audio display
Radio ON
Press a band selector button ( ) to
turn the radio on.
Band selection
Successively pressing the band selector
button ( ) switches the bands as
follows: FM1 FM2 AM.
The selected mode will be indicated.
NOTE
If the FM broadcast signal becomes weak,
reception automatically changes from
STEREO to MONO for reduced noise.
Tuning
The radio has the following tuning
methods: Manual, Seek, Scan, Preset
channel, and Auto memory tuning. The
easiest way to tune stations is to set them
on preset channels.
Manual tuning
Select the station by pressing the tuning
button ( , ) lightly.
Seek tuning
Automatic search for radio stations starts
when the tuning button ( , ) is pressed
until a beep sound is heard. The search
stops when a station is found.
NOTE
If you continue to press and hold the
button, the frequency will continue
changing without stopping.
Scan tuning
Press and hold the scan button ( ) to
automatically sample strong stations.
Scanning stops at each station for about 5
seconds. To hold a station, press and hold
the scan button ( ) again during this
interval.
5–33
Interior Features
Audio System
Preset channel tuning
The 6 preset channels can be used to store
6 AM and 12 FM stations.
1. To set a channel fi rst select AM, FM1,
or FM2. Tune to the desired station.
2. Press a channel preset button for
about 2 seconds until a beep is heard.
The preset channel number or station
frequency will be displayed. The
station is now held in the memory.
3. Repeat this operation for the other
stations and bands you want to store.
To tune one in the memory, select AM,
FM1, or FM2 and then press its channel
preset button. The station frequency or
the channel number will be displayed.
Auto memory tuning
This is especially useful when driving in
an area where the local stations are not
known.
Press and hold the auto memory button
( ) for about 2 seconds until a beep
is heard; the system will automatically
scan and temporarily store up to 6 stations
with the strongest frequencies in each
selected band in that area.
After scanning is completed, the station
with the strongest frequency will be tuned
and its frequency displayed. Press and
release the auto memory button ( )
to recall stations from the auto-stored
stations. One stored station will be
selected each time and its frequency and
channel number will be displayed.
NOTE
If no stations can be tuned after scanning
operations, “ A ” will be displayed.
*Some models.5–34
Interior Features
Audio System
Operating the Compact Disc (CD) Player *
CD eject button CD slot
Media/Scan button
Folder down button
Folder up button
Play/Pause button
Random button
Repeat button
Audio display
Text button
Track down/
Reverse button
Track up/
Fast-forward button
Type Playable data
Music/MP3/WMA/
AAC CD player
Music data (CD-DA)
MP3/WMA/AAC fi le
NOTE
If a disc has both music data (CD-DA)
and MP3/WMA/AAC fi les, playback of the
two or three fi le types differs depending on
how the disc was recorded.
Inserting the CD
Insert the CD into the slot, label-side up.
The auto-loading mechanism will set the
CD and begin play.
NOTE
There will be a short lapse before play
begins while the player reads the digital
signals on the CD.
Ejecting the CD
Press the CD eject button ( ) to eject the
CD.
Playback
Press the media button ( ) to switch
to CD mode and start playback.
NOTE
The CD mode cannot be selected if a CD
has not been inserted.
Pause
To stop playback, press the Play/Pause
button ( 4 ).
Press the button again to resume playback.
Fast-forward/Reverse
Press and hold the fast-forward button ( )
to advance through a track at high speed.
Press and hold the reverse button ( ) to
reverse through a track at high speed.
5–35
Interior Features
Audio System
Track search
Press the track up button ( ) once to skip
forward to the beginning of the next track.
Press the track down button ( ) within a
few seconds after playback begins to track
down to the beginning of the previous
track.
Press the track down button ( ) after a
few seconds have elapsed to start playback
from the beginning of the current track.
Folder search (during MP3/WMA/AAC
CD playback)
To change to the previous folder, press the
folder down button ( ), or press the folder
up button ( ) to advance to the next
folder.
Music scan
During music CD playback
This function scans the titles on a CD and
plays 10 seconds of each song to aid you
in fi nding a song you want to listen to.
Press and hold the scan button ( )
during playback to start the scan play
operation (the track number will fl ash).
Press and hold the scan button ( )
again to cancel scan playback.
During MP3/WMA/AAC CD playback
This function scans the titles in a folder
currently being played and plays 10
seconds of each song to aid you in fi nding
a song you want to listen to. Press and
hold the scan button ( ) during
playback to start the scan play operation
(the track number will fl ash).
Press and hold the scan button ( )
again to cancel scan playback.
NOTE
If the unit is left in scan, normal playback
will resume where scan was selected.
Repeat playback
During music CD playback
1. Press the repeat button ( 1 ) during
playback to play the current track
repeatedly. “ TRACK RPT ” is
displayed.
2. Press the button again to cancel the
repeat playback.
During MP3/WMA/AAC CD playback
(Track repeat)
1. Press the repeat button ( 1 ) during
playback to play the current track
repeatedly. “ TRACK RPT ” is
displayed.
2. To cancel the repeat playback, press the
button again after 3 seconds.
(Folder repeat)
1. Press the repeat button ( 1 ) during
playback, and then press the button
again within 3 seconds to play the
tracks in the current folder repeatedly.
“ FOLDER RPT ” is displayed.
2. Press the button again to cancel the
repeat playback.
Random playback
Tracks are randomly selected and played.
During music CD playback
1. Press the random button ( 2 ) during
playback to play the tracks on the CD
randomly. “ DISC RDM ” is displayed.
2. Press the button again to cancel the
random playback.
5–36
Interior Features
Audio System
During MP3/WMA/AAC CD playback
(Folder random)
1. Press the random button ( 2 ) during
playback to play the tracks in the
folder randomly. “ FOLDER RDM ” is
displayed.
2. To cancel the random playback, press
the button again after 3 seconds.
(CD random)
1. Press the random button ( 2 ) during
playback, and then press the button
again within 3 seconds to play the
tracks on the CD randomly. “ DISC
RDM ” is displayed.
2. Press the button again to cancel the
random playback.
Switching the display
For fi les with a fi le name and other
information that have been input, the
display switches between display of the
fi le name and other information each
time the text button ( 3 ) is pressed during
playback.
Music CD
Track name*
Album name*
Artist name*
* Depending on the CD, this information
may not available.
Track number/Elapsed time
Track number
MP3/WMA/AAC CD
File name
Folder name
Album name
Song name
Artist name
Folder number/File number
File number/Elapsed time
NOTE
The information viewable in the display
is only CD information (such as artist
name, song title) which has been
recorded to the CD.
This unit cannot display some
characters. Characters which cannot be
displayed are indicated by an asterisk
( ).
Display scroll
Only 13 characters can be displayed at one
time. To display the rest of the characters
of a long title, press and hold the text
button ( 3 ). The display scrolls the next 13
characters. Press and hold the text button
( 3 ) again after the last 13 characters have
been displayed to return to the beginning
of the title.
5–37
Interior Features
Audio System
NOTE
The number of characters which can be
displayed is restricted.
Message display
If “ CHECK CD ” is displayed, it means
that there is some CD malfunction. Check
the CD for damage, dirt, or smudges, and
then properly reinsert. If the message
appears again, take the unit to an
Authorized Mazda Dealer for service.
How to use Auxiliary jack/USB
port
Audio can be heard from the vehicle's
speakers by connecting a commerciallyavailable portable audio unit to the
auxiliary jack.
Use a commercially-available, nonimpedance (3.5 ) stereo mini plug cable.
Contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer for
details.
In addition, audio can be played from the
vehicle audio device by connecting a USB
device or an iPod to the USB port.
Refer to AUX/USB/iPod mode on page
5-59 .
Error Indications
If you see an error indication on the audio
display, fi nd the cause in the chart. If you
cannot clear the error indication, take the
vehicle to an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Indication Cause Solution
CHECK
CD
CD is
inserted
upside
down
Insert the CD properly.
If the error indication
continues to display,
consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
CD is
defective
Insert another CD
properly. If the error
indication continues
to display, consult an
Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
5–38
Interior Features
Audio System
Audio Set (Type B)
NOTE
The explanation of functions described in this manual may differ from the actual
operation, and the shapes of screens and buttons and the letters and characters displayed
may also differ from the actual appearance.
Additionally, depending on future software updates, the content may successively change
without notice.
Audio Set (Type B) has three different human interfaces.
Commander with switches
Touch panel
Voice recognition with steering switch and microphone
Commander and switch operation
Volume dial
NOTE
For safety reasons, some operations are disabled while the vehicle is being driven.
Volume dial operation
Press the volume dial to switch the audio MUTE on and off.
Turn the volume dial to adjust the volume. The volume increases by turning the dial
clockwise, and decreases by turning it counter clockwise.
Switches around commander knob
: Displays the home screen.
: Displays the audio screen.
: Displays the navigation screen. (Only navigation-equipped vehicles)
: Displays the Favorites screen. Long-press to store particular items in Favorites. (AM/
FM radio, phonebook and destination of the navigation system can be programmed.)
: Returns to previous screen.
5–39
Interior Features
Audio System
Commander knob operation
(Selection of icons on screen)
1. Tilt or turn the commander knob and move the cursor to the desired icon.
2. Press the commander knob and select the icon.
NOTE
Long-press operation of the commander knob is also possible for some functions.
Touch panel operation
CAUTION
Do not press the screen strongly or press it with a sharp-pointed object. Otherwise, the
screen could be damaged.
NOTE
For safety reasons, touch panel operation is disabled while the vehicle is driven.
5–40
Interior Features
Audio System
Basic Operation Method
TOUCH & TAP
1. Touch the item indicated in the audio display.
2. The operation is launched and the next item is displayed.
SLIDE
1. Touch the setting item displaying a slider bar.
2. Slide your fi nger in the desired direction.
3. Release your fi nger, and the value is changed accordingly.
SWIPE
1. Touch the item displaying a slider bar.
2. Swipe your fi nger in the desired direction.
5–41
Interior Features
Audio System
Return to previous screen
1. Touch the icon.
Displaying the home screen
1. Touch the icon.
Home screen
Icon Function
Applications
Information such as average fuel economy, maintenance, and warnings can be verifi ed.
Audio
Operates audio such as the radio and CDs. The audio source most recently used is
displayed. An audio source which cannot be used at that time is skipped and the previous
audio source is displayed.
To change the audio source, select the icon again.
Communication
Bluetooth ® related functions are available.
Navigation (vehicles with navigation system)
Navigation screen is displayed.
Settings
Overall setting menu (Such as AD-Disp, display, sound, safety, Bluetooth ® , Wi-Fi™ and
Language).
5–42
Interior Features
Audio System
Volume/Display/Sound Controls
Volume dial
Commander switch Audio control switch
Volume switch
Volume adjustment
Turn the commander switch volume dial.
The volume switch on the steering switch
can also be pressed.
Display setting
Select the icon on the home screen and
display the settings screen.
Select the tab to select the item you
would like to change.
Display OFF/Clock
The audio display can be turned off. Select
the icon to turn the display off.
When the icon is selected the audio
display turns off and the clock is
displayed.
The audio display can be turned back on
as follows:
Touch the audio display.
Operate the commander switch.
Daytime/nighttime screen setting
The daytime or nighttime screen can be
selected.
: Switches screen automatically
according to headlight illumination
condition
: Daytime screen setting
: Nighttime screen setting
Brightness adjustment
Adjust the audio display brightness using
the slider.
Contrast adjustment
Adjust the audio display contrast using the
slider.
Display setting reset
All of the screen setting values can be
reset to their initial settings.
1. Select the icon.
2. Select the icon.
5–43
Interior Features
Audio System
Audio sound adjustment
Select the icon on the home screen and
display the settings screen.
Select the tab to select the item you
would like to change.
Indication Setting value
Bass
(Low pitch sound)
Side: Low pitch
enhancement
Side: Low pitch
reduction
Treble
(Treble sound)
Side: Treble
enhancement
Side: Treble reduction
Fade
(Front/back volume
balance)
Back: Front speaker
volume reduction
Front: Rear speaker
volume reduction
Balance
(Left/right volume
balance)
Right: Left side volume
reduction
Left: Right side volume
reduction
Auto Level Control *1
(Automatic volume
adjustment)
Off—Adjustment at
seven levels
Centerpoint *2
(Automatic surround
level adjustment)
On/Off
AudioPilot *2
(Automatic volume
adjustment)
On/Off
Beep
(Audio operation sound) On/Off
*1 Standard audio
*2 Bose ® Sound System
Automatic Level Control (ALC)
The automatic level control is a feature
that automatically adjusts audio volume
and sound quality according to the vehicle
speed. The volume increases in accordance
with the increase in vehicle speed, and
decreases as vehicle speed decreases.
AudioPilot® 2 *3
When driving, background noise can
interfere with enjoying music.
AudioPilot ® 2 noise compensation
technology continuously adjusts the music
to compensate for background noise and
vehicle speed.
It reacts only to sustained noise sources
and not intermittent ones, such as speed
bumps.
An enhanced DSP algorithm allows faster
and more effective compensation for
unusual situations, such as driving on a
very rough road or at high speeds.
*3 AudioPilot ® 2 is a registered trademark
of Bose Corporation.
Centerpoint® 2 *4
Centerpoint ® 2 lets vehicle owners enjoy
a Bose ® surround sound experience from
their existing CDs, MP3s and satellite
radio.
Specifi cally engineered to meet the unique
demands of reproducing surround sound in
a vehicle.
Converts stereo signals to multiple
channels allowing greater precision when
reproducing the sound.
An enhanced algorithm to simultaneously
create a wider, more spacious sound fi eld.
*4 Centerpoint ® 2 is a registered trademark
of Bose Corporation.
5–44
Interior Features
Audio System
Operating the Radio
Radio ON
Select the icon on the home screen and display the Audio screen. When selecting the
desired radio, the following icons are indicated in the lower part of the audio display.
AM/FM Radio
Icon Function
Displays the Audio menu. Use to switch to a different audio source.
Displays the station list.
Select the icon to display the frequencies of up to ten radio stations on
the auto memory preset list.
Select the desired frequency.
Displays the Favorites list. Long-press to store radio stations currently being aired.
Switches the on and off. Displays the multi-cast channel list of the
.
You can search for receivable radio stations.
Scanning stops at each station for about fi ve seconds.
Select again to continue receiving the radio station.
Manual radio station selection.
Select the tuner and rotate the commander knob or drag the display, or touch the radio
frequency.
Press or to select a radio station automatically.
When or is long-pressed, the radio frequency changes continually. It stops when you
remove your hand from the icon or the commander knob.
Launches the iTunes Tagging function (for Apple devices with USB use only). Can be used
when the is on.
Automatic radio station selection.
When long-pressed, the radio frequency changes continually. It stops when you remove
your hand from the icon or the commander knob.
Adjusts the audio quality level.
Refer to Volume/Display/Sound Controls on page 5-42 .
*Some models. 5–45
Interior Features
Audio System
Favorites Radio
Selected stations can be registered for
convenient operation. Up to 50 stations
can be registered. The Favorites list is
common to AM, FM, and satellite radio.
Registering to Favorites
Long-press the icon to register the
current radio station. The registration can
also be performed using the following
procedure.
1. Select the icon to display the
Favorites list.
2. Select the icon.
3. Select the icon.
4. The station is added to the bottom of
the Favorites list.
NOTE
If the battery is disconnected, your
Favorites list will be not deleted.
Selecting radio station from Favorites
1. Select the icon to display the
Favorites list.
2. Select the radio station name or radio
frequency to tune in the radio station.
Deleting from Favorites
1. Select the icon to display the
Favorites list.
2. Select the icon.
3. Select the icon.
4. Select the radio station or radio
frequency you want to delete.
5. Select the icon.
Changing Favorites list order
1. Select the icon to display the
Favorites list.
2. Select the icon.
3. Select the icon.
4. Select a radio station or radio
frequency. The selected radio station
can be moved.
5. Move the radio station then select the
icon.
Radio Broadcast Data System (RBDS) *
Radio text information display
Radio text information sent from a
broadcasting station is displayed in the
audio display.
NOTE
Radio text information is a function of FM
radio. Text information is not displayed in
the following:
During reception
Not an RBDS broadcast
During HD reception
RBDS broadcast, but radio text is not
transmitted from the radio station
Genre Seek
Some FM stations transmit Genre codes
(Program type like a Rock, News, and so
on). This code enables alternative stations
transmitting the same Genre code to be
found quickly. To select from the genre
list, select the icon while in the
FM mode and the desired Genre Seek.
(To scan for Genre Seek:)
1. Select the genre type you want to
select.
2. Select the , icon.
5–46
Interior Features
Audio System
NOTE
To change the desired genre, select the
icon.
Ex.)
89.3 is currently being received. With
Rock selected as the Genre, the radio
stations broadcasting Rock are at the
following frequencies.
98.3 *1 , 98.7, 104.3 *1 , 107.1
*1 Radio stations with good reception
The frequency changes as follows each
time the icon is pressed.
89.3 98.3 104.3 98.3
NOTE
Only one Genre can be selected.
It may not be possible to receive any
station even if the Genre Seek function
is used.
If a program in the selected genre is not
broadcast to a region, reception is not
possible even if the Genre Seek function
is used.
The Genre Seek function searches for
genre code (program type) which FM
analog broadcasts transmit.
specialty programs (HD2-HD8) cannot
be searched because they are not FM
analog broadcasts.
If radio stations which are selected by
scanning using the Genre Seek function
are broadcasting stations,
they are changed from analog
broadcasts to broadcasts
after a few seconds if the reception
conditions are good. The genre is
displayed after the switch, however, the
genre for FM analog broadcasts may
differ.
HD Radio
What is HD Radio™ Technology and
how does it work?
HD Radio™ Technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
radio product has a special receiver which
allows it to receive digital broadcasts
(where available) in addition to the analog
broadcasts it already receives. Digital
broadcasts have better sound quality than
analog broadcasts as digital broadcasts
provide free, crystal clear audio. For more
information, and a guide to available radio
stations and programming, please visit
www.hdradio.com.
Benefi ts of HD Radio™ Technology
(Information)
The song title, artist name, album name
and genre will appear on the screen when
available by the radio station.
(Multicast)
On the FM radio frequency most digital
stations have “multiple” or supplemental
programs on each FM station.
Listening to HD Radio™ Technology
If icon turns on by selecting a radio
station which is an broadcasting
station, the analog broadcast is switched to
an broadcast automatically after
a few seconds and then received.
If the broadcast is stopped and
changed to an analog broadcast, press
down to turn off .
Multicast channel selection (FM)
If multi-cast channels are available for an
broadcast currently being
received, the multi-cast channel list is
displayed. Select the desired radio station.
5–47
Interior Features
Audio System
NOTE
If an analog broadcast is received once
and is received while HD1 is
selected, the audio unit switches to the
station automatically.
When the icon is illuminated, there
could be a noticeable difference in
sound quality and volume when a
change from digital to analog signals
occurs. If the sound quality and volume
become noticeably diminished or cut
off, select the icon to turn off
( icon is not illuminated).
Once an analog broadcast is received
when HD1 is selected from the Favorite
channels, it is switched to
automatically. If the radio reception
conditions are poor, or HD is off,
switching to broadcasts is
not possible.
When an HD specialty channel (HD2 to
HD8) is selected from the Favorite
channels, “Signal Lost” is displayed
and no audio is output until
is received. If the radio reception
conditions are poor, “Signal Lost”
continues to be displayed.
If the icon is not illuminated,
information such as song titles of the
station are received,
however, the audio output is analog.
iTunes Tagging (for Apple devices with
USB use only)
By tagging a song currently being aired,
the song can be easily purchased from the
iTunes Store. Up to 100 tags can be stored.
1. Select the icon. The tag is stored in
the audio unit.
2. Connect the device via USB. The
tag is sent to the connected device
automatically.
3. Synchronize the device with iTunes.
The tagged song can now be purchased
from the iTunes Store.
NOTE
Both AM and FM can be
used.
Because iTunes Tagging only supports
purchasing from the iTunes Store, direct
downloading from the equipped vehicle
audio is not possible.
If the available memory for the
connected device is insuffi cient, the tag
is not sent.
If an error occurs while the tag is being
sent, reconnect the device.
*Some models.5–48
Interior Features
Audio System
Operating the Satellite Radio *
What is satellite radio?
With over 130 channels, SiriusXM
Satellite Radio brings you more of what
you love. Get channels and channels of
commercial-free music, plus sports, news,
talk, entertainment and more.
Commercial-free music from nearly
every genre — rock to pop, hip-hop to
country, jazz, classical and more. Plus
live performances and artist-dedicated
channels.
Live sports Play-by-Play & Expert Talk
— every NFL game, every NASCAR ®
race, 24/7 sports talk, college sports and
more.
Exclusive entertainment, comedy and
talk — The biggest names, compelling
talk, hilarious comedy.
World-class news plus local traffi c and
weather.
Sign up for SiriusXM Satellite Radio
today!
NOTE
To listen to SiriusXM, a prior
subscription (fee-based) is required.
The channels which you can receive
depend on the package you subscribe
to.
Satellite radio is broadcast as Sirius,
XM, and SiriusXM in the U.S.A.,
and Sirius and XM in Canada. In
this owner’s manual, only the name
SiriusXM is used.
For traffi c and weather channels, map
information is not displayed and only
audio broadcasts can be received.
Call 888-539-7474 to activate. For
more information, visit www.siriusxm.
com. Satellite radio is only available in
regions providing satellite radio service
(some areas of the United States and
Canada). Contact Authorized Mazda
Dealer for details.
How to Activate Satellite Radio
You must call SiriusXM to activate your
service. Activation is free and takes only a
few minutes.
SiriusXM service uses an ID code to
identify your radio. This code is needed to
activate SiriusXM service, and report any
problems.
Please have the following information
ready:
Radio ID (8-digit electronic serial no See below for how to fi nd your ESN)
Valid credit card information (may not
be required at initial sign-up)
Be sure you are parked outside with a clear
view of open sky, you will be instructed
to turn on your radio (in SiriusXM mode
and tuned to channel 184 (Sirius)/1 (XM
and SiriusXM)). Activation typically takes
only 2—5 minutes.
Displaying the Radio ID (ESN)
When channel 0 is selected, the radio ID is
displayed.
5–49
Interior Features
Audio System
SiriusXM operation
Select the icon on the home screen to display the Audio screen. When icon is
selected, the following icons are indicated in the bottom part of the audio display.
Icon Function
Displays the Audio menu. Use to switch to a different audio source.
Displays the channel list of the current category.
Displays the favorites list. Long-press to store the channel currently being aired.
Refer to Operating the Radio on page 5-44 .
Indicates that the parental lock function is in use.
Switching of Lock/Unlock and PIN code setting changes can be performed.
Plays each channel in the current channel list for 5 seconds.
Select again to continue receiving the channel.
Plays the previous channel.
Plays the next channel.
Adjusts the audio quality level.
Refer to Volume/Display/Sound Controls on page 5-42 .
Selection from channel list
Receivable channels can be displayed on
the channel list screen. You can easily
select the channel you want to listen
from the list. Each category can be also
displayed.
1. Select the icon to display the
channel list.
2. Select a desired channel.
(Select from category list)
1. Select the icon to display the
channel list.
2. Select the icon to display the
category list.
3. Select a desired category.
5–50
Interior Features
Audio System
Parental lock
If a channel is locked, the channel is
muted.
To use the parental lock function, the PIN
code must be initialized fi rst.
By using the session lock, the parental
lock can be enabled or disabled during the
current drive cycle (from when the ignition
is switched on to switched off). When
the session lock is on, the parental lock is
available. When the session lock is off, the
parental lock is temporarily cancelled.
When canceling the parental lock or
session lock, or when changing the PIN
code, PIN code input is required.
PIN code reset
If the registered code has been forgotten,
reset the code to the default [0000] code.
1. Select the icon.
2. If the selected channel is locked, input
the PIN code to cancel the parental lock
temporarily.
3. Select the icon
4. Input the default code [0000] using the
number buttons.
5. Select the icon.
6. Input the new PIN code using the
number buttons.
7. Select the icon.
5–51
MEMO
5–52
Interior Features
Audio System
Operating the Compact Disc (CD) Player
CD eject button CD slot
Type Playable data
Music/MP3/WMA/
AAC CD player
Music data (CD-DA)
MP3/WMA/AAC fi le
NOTE
If a disc has both music data (CD-DA)
and MP3/WMA/AAC fi les, playback of the
two or three fi le types differs depending on
how the disc was recorded.
Inserting the CD
Insert the CD into the slot, label-side up.
The auto-loading mechanism will set the
CD and begin play.
NOTE
There will be a short lapse before play
begins while the player reads the digital
signals on the CD.
Ejecting the CD
Press the CD eject button ( ) to eject the
CD.
5–53
Interior Features
Audio System
Playback
Select the icon on the home screen with a CD inserted and display the Audio screen.
When the icon is selected, the following icons are indicated in the lower part of the
audio display.
Icon Function
Displays the Audio menu. Use to switch to a different audio source.
(Music CD)
Displays the track list of the CD.
Select the track you want to play.
(MP3/WMA/AAC CD)
Displays the top level folder/fi le list.
Select the folder you want to select.
The fi les in the selected folder are displayed.
Select the fi le you want to play.
(MP3/WMA/ACC CDs only)
Displays the fi le list of the folder currently being played.
Select the song you want to listen to.
(Music CD)
Replays the song currently being played repeatedly.
Select it again to cancel.
(MP3/WMA/AAC CD)
Replays the song currently being played repeatedly.
When selected again, the songs in the folder are played repeatedly.
Select it again to cancel.
(Music CD)
Plays songs on the CD in random order.
Select it again to cancel.
(MP3/WMA/AAC CD)
Plays songs in the folder in random order.
When selected again, the songs on the CD are played in random order.
Select it again to cancel.
(Music CD)
The beginning of each track on a CD is played to aid in searching for a desired track.
When selected again, the operation is canceled and the song currently being played
continues.
(MP3/WMA/AAC CD)
The beginning of each track in a folder is played to aid in searching for a desired track.
When selected again, the operation is canceled and the song currently being played
continues.
If selected within a few seconds of a song which has started to play, the previous song is
selected.
If more than a few seconds have elapsed after a song has begun to play, the song currently
being played is replayed from the beginning.
Long-press to fast reverse. It stops when you remove your hand from the icon or the
commander knob.
5–54
Interior Features
Audio System
Icon Function
Plays a CD. When selected again, playback is temporarily stopped.
Advances to the beginning of the next song.
Long-press to fast forward. It stops when you remove your hand from the icon or the
commander knob.
Adjusts the audio quality level.
Refer to Volume/Display/Sound Controls on page 5-42 .
Example of use (When searching for
a song from the top level of an MP3/
WMA/AAC CD)
1. Select the icon and display the
folder/fi le list at the top level.
2. When the folder is selected, folders/fi le
lists in the folder are displayed.
3. Select the desired song.
NOTE
Select the icon to move to a folder
one level higher.
The appearance of the repeat and
shuffl e icons changes depending on the
type of operation in which the function
is used.
If the audio is operated during scanplay, the track being scan-played
is played normally. Then, the audio
operation is performed.
How to use Auxiliary jack/USB
port
Audio can be heard from the vehicle's
speakers by connecting a commerciallyavailable portable audio unit to the
auxiliary jack.
Use a commercially-available, nonimpedance (3.5 ) stereo mini plug cable.
Contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer for
details.
In addition, audio can be played from the
vehicle audio device by connecting a USB
device or an iPod to the USB port.
Refer to AUX/USB/iPod mode on page
5-59 .
5–55
Interior Features
Audio System
Settings
Select the icon on the home screen and display the Settings screen.
Switch the tab and select the setting item you want to change.
You can customize settings in the setup display as follows:
Tab Item Function
AD-Disp
Height
Brightness Control
Other
Refer to Active Driving Display on page 4-19 .
Display Refer to Volume/Display/Sound Controls on page 5-42 .
Safety
Smart City Brake Support
Blind Spot Monitoring Volume
Other
Refer to Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) on
page 4-72 .
Refer to Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) System
on page 4-108 .
Refer to Forward Obstruction Warning (FOW)
on page 4-116 .
Refer to Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS) on page 4-119 .
Sound Refer to Volume/Display/Sound Controls on page 5-42 .
Vehicle
Rain Sensing Wiper
Door Lock
Other
Refer to Windshield Wipers on page 4-53 .
Refer to Auto Lock/Unlock Function on page
3-17 .
Refer to Transmitter on page 3-4 .
Refer to Locking, Unlocking with Request
Switch (With the advanced keyless function)
on page 3-13 .
Refer to Turn and Lane-Change Signals on
page 4-51 .
Refer to Illuminated Entry System on page
5-135 .
Refer to High Beam Control System (HBC) on
page 4-48 .
Refer to Lights-On Reminder on page 7-36 .
Refer to Headlights on page 4-41 .
Refer to Daytime Running Lights on page
4-47 .
Devices
Bluetooth Refer to Bluetooth
® Preparation (Type B) on
page 5-92 .
Network Management
Wi-Fi™ is used to obtain Navi POI/Real Time
Traffi c function (Such as gas prices, weather,
nearest restaurant)
5–56
Interior Features
Audio System
Tab Item Function
System
Clock
Adjust Time
Displays the currently set time is displayed.
Press to advance the hour/minute, and select
to move the hour/minute back.
AM/PM can only be selected with the 12-hour
clock display.
GPS Sync When ON is selected, “Adjust Time” and “Time Zone Select” are disabled.
Time Format Changes the display between 12 and 24-hour clock time.
Time Zone Select Selects the time zone.
Language Changes the language.
Temp Changes the setting between Fahrenheit and Celsius.
Distance Changes the setting between miles and kilometers.
Music Database Update
Used to update Gracenote. Gracenote is used
with USB Audio, and provides:
1. Supplemental music information (Such
as song name, artist name)
2. Voice recognition assistance for Play
Artist and Play Album
Gracenote can be downloaded from the Mazda
Handsfree Website.
Factory Reset
Memory and settings other than sound and
language are initialized to the factory settings.
The initialization launches by selecting the
icon.
Agreements and Disclaimers Verify the disclaimer and agree.
About Can verify the current audio unit OS version and Gracenote Database version.
*Some models. 5–57
Interior Features
Audio System
Applications
Select the icon on the home screen to display the Applications screen. The following
information can be verifi ed.
Top screen Item Function
Fuel Economy
Monitor
Fuel Consumption
Control Status (Vehicles with
i-ELOOP)
Settings
Refer to Fuel Economy Monitor on page 4-86 .
Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance
Tire Rotation
Oil Change
Refer to Maintenance Monitor (Type B audio) on page
6-20 .
HD Traffi c Image * — —
Warning
Guidance
Warnings currently being activated
can be verifi ed.
Refer to If a Warning Light Turns On or Flashes on
page 7-24 .
*Some models.5–58
Interior Features
Audio System
Audio Control Switch
Operation*
Without Bluetooth ® Hands-Free
With Bluetooth ® Hands-Free
Adjusting the Volume
To increase the volume, press up the
volume switch ( ).
To decrease the volume, press down the
volume switch ( ).
Seek Switch
AM/FM radio
Press the seek switch ( , ). The radio
switches to the next/previous stored station
in the order that it was stored.
Press and hold the seek switch ( , ) to
seek all usable stations at a higher or lower
frequency whether programmed or not.
Radio stations which have been previously
stored in the auto memory tuning (Type
A)/favorite radio (Type B) can be called
up by pressing the seek switch ( , )
while any radio station stored in the auto
memory tuning (Type A)/favorite radio
(Type B) is being received. Radio stations
can be called up in the order they were
stored with each press of the switch
( , ).
*Some models. 5–59
Interior Features
Audio System
USB Audio/Bluetooth ® Audio/CD
Press the seek switch ( ) to skip forward
to the beginning of the next track.
Press the seek switch ( ) within a few
seconds after playback begins to track
down to the beginning of the previous
track.
Press the seek switch ( ) after a few
seconds have elapsed to start playback
from the beginning of the current track.
Press and hold the seek switch ( , ) to
continuously switch the tracks up or down.
Pandora ®* /Stitcher™ Radio *1
Press the seek switch ( ) to skip forward
to the beginning of the next track.
(Pandora® only)
Long-press the seek switch ( , ) to
evaluate the playback of the current song
as “Thumbs-Up/Thumbs-Down”.
*1 Type B
Mute Switch *
Press the mute switch ( ) once to mute
audio, press it again to resume audio
output.
NOTE
If the ignition is switched off with the
audio muted, the mute will be canceled.
Therefore, when the engine is restarted,
the audio is not muted. To mute the audio
again, press the mute switch ( ).
AUX/USB/iPod mode
Audio can be heard from the vehicle's
speakers by connecting a commerciallyavailable portable audio unit to the
auxiliary jack.
A commercially-available, non-impedance
(3.5 ) stereo mini plug cable is required.
Contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer for
details.
In addition, audio can be played from the
vehicle audio device by connecting a USB
device or an iPod to the USB port.
NOTE
(Type B)
The SD card slot is for the navigation
system. For vehicles with the navigation
system, the SD card (Mazda genuine) with
stored map data is inserted into the SD
card slot and used.
5–60
Interior Features
Audio System
Type A (Without CD player)
Auxiliary jack/USB port
Type A (With CD player)
Auxiliary jack/USB port
Type B
Auxiliary jack
USB port
How to use AUX mode (Type A) .......................................................................... page 5-63
How to use USB mode (Type A) .......................................................................... page 5-64
How to use iPod mode (Type A) ........................................................................... page 5-68
How to use AUX mode (Type B) .......................................................................... page 5-71
How to use USB mode (Type B) .......................................................................... page 5-72
5–61
Interior Features
Audio System
WARNING
Do not adjust the portable audio unit
or a similar product while driving the
vehicle:
Adjusting the portable audio unit
or a similar product while driving
the vehicle is dangerous as it could
distract your attention from the vehicle
operation which could lead to a serious
accident. Always adjust the portable
audio unit or a similar product while
the vehicle is stopped.
CAUTION
Always close the auxiliary jack/USB port
lid when it is not in use. If foreign matter
or liquid penetrates the auxiliary jack/
USB port, it may cause a malfunction.
Depending on the portable audio
device, noise may occur when the device
is connected to the vehicle accessory
socket. (If noise occurs, do not use the
accessory socket.)
NOTE
This mode may not be usable depending
on the portable audio device to be
connected.
Before using the auxiliary jack/USB
port, refer to the instruction manual for
the portable audio device.
Use a commercially-available, nonimpedance (3.5 ) stereo mini plug for
connecting the portable audio unit to
the auxiliary jack. Before using the
auxiliary jack, read the manufacturer's
instructions for connecting a portable
audio unit to the auxiliary jack.
To prevent discharging of the battery,
do not use the auxiliary input for long
periods with the engine off or idling.
When connecting a device to the
auxiliary jack or USB port, noise may
occur depending on the connected
device. If the device is connected to the
vehicle's accessory socket, the noise
can be reduced by unplugging it from
the accessory socket.
5–62
Interior Features
Audio System
How to connect USB port/
Auxiliary jack
Type A (Without CD player)
Auxiliary jackUSB port
Type A (With CD player)
USB port Auxiliary jack
Type B
USB port Auxiliary jack
Connecting a device
1. Open the console lid (with CD player).
2. If there is a cover on the AUX jack or
USB port, remove the cover.
3. Connect the connector on the device to
the USB port.
Connecting with a connector cable
1. Open the console lid (with CD player).
2. If there is a cover on the AUX jack or
USB port, remove the cover.
3. Connect the device plug/connector
cable to the auxiliary jack/USB port.
For vehicles with a CD player, pass the
device plug/connector cable through
the notch in the console and connect.
WARNING
Do not allow the connection plug cord
to get tangled with the parking brake or
the shift lever:
Allowing the plug cord to become
tangled with the parking brake or
the shift lever is dangerous as it could
interfere with driving, resulting in an
accident.
CAUTION
Do not place objects or apply force to
the auxiliary jack/USB port with the
plug connected.
NOTE
Insert the plug into the auxiliary jack/
USB port securely.
Insert or pull out the plug with the plug
perpendicular to the auxiliary jack/USB
port hole.
Insert or remove the plug by holding its
base.
5–63
Interior Features
Audio System
How to use AUX mode (Type A)
1. Switch the ignition to ACC or ON.
2. Press the power/volume dial to turn the
audio system on.
3. Press the media button ( ) of the
audio unit to change to the AUX mode.
NOTE
When the device is not connected to the
auxiliary jack, the mode does not switch
to the AUX mode.
Set the volume of the portable audio
unit to the maximum within the range
that the sound does not become
distorted, then adjust the volume using
the power/volume dial of the audio
unit or the up/down switch of the audio
control switch.
Audio adjustments other than audio
volume can only be done using the
portable audio device.
If the connection plug is pulled out from
the auxiliary jack while in AUX mode,
noise may occur.
5–64
Interior Features
Audio System
How to use USB mode (Type A)
Media/Scan button
Folder down button
Folder up button
Play/Pause button
Random button
Repeat button
Audio display
Text button
Track down/Reverse button
Track up/Fast-forward button
Type Playable data
USB mode MP3/WMA/AAC fi le
This unit does not support a USB 3.0
device. In addition, other devices may not
be supported depending on the model or
OS version.
Playback
1. Switch the ignition to ACC or ON.
2. Press the power/volume dial to turn the
audio system on.
3. Press the media button ( ) to
switch to the USB mode and start
playback.
NOTE
Some devices such as smart phones
may require a setting change to allow
USB operation.
When the USB device is not connected,
the mode does not switch to USB mode.
When there is no playable data in the
USB device, “ NO CONTENTS ”is
fl ashed.
Playback of the USB device is in the
order of the folder numbers. Folders
which have no MP3/WMA/AAC fi les are
skipped.
Do not remove the USB device while
in the USB mode. The data may be
damaged.
Pause
To stop playback, press the play/pause
button ( 4 ).
Press the button again to resume playback.
Fast-forward/Reverse
Press and hold the fast-forward button ( )
to advance through a track at high speed.
Press and hold the reverse button ( ) to
reverse through a track at high speed.
5–65
Interior Features
Audio System
Track search
Press the track up button ( ) once to skip
forward to the beginning of the next track.
Press the track down button ( ) within a
few seconds after playback begins to track
down to the beginning of the previous
track.
Press the track down button ( ) after a
few seconds have elapsed to start playback
from the beginning of the current track.
Folder search
To change to the previous folder, press the
folder down button ( ), or press the folder
up button ( ) to advance to the next
folder.
Music Scan
This function scans the titles in a folder
currently being played and plays ten
seconds of each song to aid you in fi nding
a song you want to listen to.
Press and hold the scan button ( )
during playback to start the scan play
operation (the track number will fl ash).
Press and hold the scan button ( )
again to cancel scan playback.
NOTE
If the unit is left in scan, normal playback
will resume where scan was selected.
Repeat playback
Track repeat
1. Press the repeat button ( 1 ) during
playback to play the current track
repeatedly. “ TRACK RPT ” is
displayed.
2. To cancel the repeat playback, press the
button again after 3 seconds.
Folder repeat
1. Press the repeat button ( 1 ) during
playback, and then press the button
again within 3 seconds to play the
tracks in the current folder repeatedly.
“ FOLDER RPT ” is displayed.
2. Press the button again to cancel the
repeat playback.
Random playback
Tracks are randomly selected and played.
Folder random
1. Press the random button ( 2 ) during
playback to play the tracks in the
folder randomly. “ FOLDER RDM ” is
displayed.
2. To cancel the random playback, press
the button again after 3 seconds.
All random
1. Press the random button ( 2 ) during
playback, and then press the button
again within 3 seconds to play the
tracks in the USB device randomly.
“ ALL RDM ” is displayed.
2. Press the button again to cancel the
random playback.
5–66
Interior Features
Audio System
Switching the display
For fi les with a fi le name and other
information that have been input, the
display switches between display of the
fi le name and other information each
time the text button ( 3 ) is pressed during
playback.
Folder name
File name
Album name
Song name
Artist name
Folder number/File number
File number/Elapsed time display
NOTE
The information (artist name, music
name) is displayed only when the USB
device information in the USB device
has information which can be displayed
on the screen.
This unit cannot display some
characters. Characters which cannot be
displayed are indicated by an asterisk
( ).
Display scroll
Only 13 characters can be displayed at one
time. To display the rest of the characters
of a long title, press and hold the text
button ( 3 ). The display scrolls the next 13
characters. Press and hold the text button
( 3 ) again after the last 13 characters have
been displayed to return to the beginning
of the title.
NOTE
The number of characters which can be
displayed is restricted.
Error Messages
When the message “ CHECK USB ” is
displayed, it indicates that there is some
error in the USB device. Verify that the
content recorded in the USB device has
MP3/WMA/AAC fi les and re-connect
correctly. If the message reappears, have
the unit checked by an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
5–67
MEMO
5–68
Interior Features
Audio System
How to use iPod mode (Type A)
Media/Scan button List down button
List up button
Play/Pause button
Random button
Repeat button
Audio display
Text button
Track down/Reverse button
Track up/Fast-forward button
Category down button
Category up button
An iPod may not be compatible depending
on the model or OS version. In this case,
an error message is displayed.
NOTE
The iPod functions on the iPod cannot
be operated while it is connected to the
unit because the unit controls the iPod
functions.
Playback
1. Switch the ignition to ACC or ON.
2. Press the power/volume dial to turn the
audio system on.
3. Press the media button ( ) to
switch to the iPod mode and start
playback.
NOTE
When an iPod is not connected, the
mode does not switch to the iPod mode.
When there is no playable data in the
iPod, “ NO CONTENTS ” is fl ashed.
Do not remove the iPod while in the
iPod mode. Otherwise, the data could
be damaged.
Pause
To stop playback, press the play/pause
button ( 4 ).
Press the button again to resume playback.
Fast-forward/Reverse
Press and hold the fast-forward button ( )
to advance through a track at high speed.
Press and hold the reverse button ( ) to
reverse through a track at high speed.
Track search
Press the track up button ( ) once to skip
forward to the beginning of the next track.
Press the track down button ( ) within a
few seconds (depends on iPod software
version) after playback begins to track
down to the beginning of the previous
track.
Press the track down button ( ) after a
few seconds (depends on iPod software
version) have elapsed to start playback
from the beginning of the current track.
Category search
Press the category down button ( 5 ) to
select the previous category and press the
category up button ( 6 ) to select the next
category.
NOTE
The types of categories include Playlist,
Artist, Album, Song, Podcast, Genre,
Composer, and Audio book.
5–69
Interior Features
Audio System
List search
Press the list down button ( ) to select the
previous list and press the list up button
( ) to select the next list.
NOTE
When the selected category is Song or
Audio book, there is no list.
Music Scan
This function scans the titles in a list
currently being played and plays 10
seconds of each song to aid you in fi nding
a song you want to listen to.
Press and hold the scan button ( )
during playback to start the scan play
operation (the track number will fl ash).
Press and hold the scan button ( )
again to cancel scan playback.
NOTE
If the unit is left in scan, normal playback
will resume where scan was selected.
Repeat playback
1. Press the repeat button ( 1 ) during
playback to play the current track
repeatedly. “ TRACK RPT ” is
displayed.
2. Press the button again to cancel the
repeat playback.
Random playback
Tracks are randomly selected and played.
Song random
1. Press the random button ( 2 ) during
playback to play the tracks in the list
randomly. “ SONG RDM ” is displayed.
2. To cancel the random playback, press
the button again after 3 seconds.
Album random
1. Press the random button ( 2 ) during
playback, and then press the button
again within 3 seconds to play the
tracks in the iPod randomly. “ ALBUM
RDM ” is displayed.
2. Press the button again to cancel the
random playback.
NOTE
The track number being played randomly
is in the order of the iPod shuffl e table.
Switching the display
For fi les with a fi le name and other
information that have been input, the
display switches between display of the
fi le name and other information each
time the text button ( 3 ) is pressed during
playback.
Album name
Song name
Artist name
Category (Playlist title/Genre
title /Composer title/Podcast title)
File number/Elapsed time
5–70
Interior Features
Audio System
NOTE
The information (artist name, music
name) is displayed only when the
iPod has information which can be
displayed.
This unit cannot display some
characters. Characters which cannot be
displayed are indicated by an asterisk
( ).
Display scroll
13 characters can be displayed at one
time. To display the rest of the characters
of a long title, press and hold the text
button ( 3 ). The display scrolls the next 13
characters. Press and hold the text button
( 3 ) again after the last 13 characters have
been displayed to return to the beginning
of the title.
NOTE
The number of characters which can be
displayed is restricted.
Error Messages
If the message “ CHECK iPod ” is
displayed, it indicates that there is a
malfunction in the iPod. Verify that the
content recorded in the iPod has playable
fi les and connect correctly. If the message
reappears, have the unit checked by an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Error Indications (Type A)
If you see an error indication on the
display, fi nd the cause in the chart. If you
cannot clear the error indication, take the
vehicle to an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Indication Cause Solution
CHECK
USB
USB device
malfunction
Verify that the content
recorded in the USB
device has MP3/WMA/
AAC fi les and reconnect correctly.
If the error indication
continues to display,
consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
CHECK
iPod
iPod
malfunction
Verify that the content
recorded in the iPod
has playable fi les and
re-connect correctly.
If the error indication
continues to display,
consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
5–71
Interior Features
Audio System
How to use AUX mode (Type B)
1. Select the icon on the home screen and display the Audio screen.
2. Select icon to switch to the AUX mode. The following icons are displayed in the
lower part of the audio display.
Icon Function
Displays the Audio menu. Use to switch to a different audio source.
Adjusts the audio quality level. Refer to Volume/Display/Sound Controls on page 5-42 .
NOTE
If a device is not connected to the auxiliary jack, the mode does not switch to the AUX
mode.
Set the volume of the portable audio unit to the maximum within the range that the sound
does not become distorted, then adjust the volume using the dial of the commander
switch or the up/down switch of the audio control switch.
Audio adjustments can also be made using the portable audio device's volume setting.
If the connection plug is pulled out from the auxiliary jack while in AUX mode, noise may
occur.
5–72
Interior Features
Audio System
How to use USB mode (Type B)
Type Playable data
USB mode MP3/WMA/AAC/OGG fi le
This unit does not support a USB 3.0 device. In addition, other devices may not be
supported depending on the model or OS version.
Playback
1. Select the icon on the home screen and display the Audio screen.
2. Select the icon or icon to switch the USB mode. The following icons are
displayed in the lower part of the audio display.
Icon Function
Displays the Audio menu. Use to switch to a different audio source.
Current track list is displayed.
Select a desired track to play it.
Category list is displayed.
Tracks in the current track list are played repeatedly.
Select it again to play the current track repeatedly.
Select it again to cancel.
Tracks in the current track list are played randomly.
Select it again to cancel.
Tracks similar to the current track are searched in the device and a playlist can be created
using Gracenote's More Like This™. A playlist is created based on track information such
as artist, genre, and age.
If selected within a few seconds from the beginning of a song which has started to play, the
previous song is selected.
If more than a few seconds have elapsed, the song currently being played is replayed from
the beginning.
Long-press to fast reverse. It stops when you remove your hand from the icon or the
commander knob.
Track is played. When selected again, playback is temporarily stopped.
Advances to the beginning of the next song.
Long-press to fast forward.
Adjusts the audio quality level.
Refer to Volume/Display/Sound Controls on page 5-42 .
5–73
Interior Features
Audio System
NOTE
Drag the slider indicating the playback time to move to the desired location on the track.
The appearance of the repeat and shuffl e icons changes depending on the type of
operation in which the function is used.
Category list
Select the icon and display the following category list.
Select a desired category and item.
Category Function
Playlist Displays playlists on the device.
Artist Displays the artist name list. All the tracks or tracks for each album of the selected artist can be played.
Album Displays the album name list.
Song All the tracks in the device are displayed.
Genre Displays the genre list. All the tracks or tracks per album or artist in the selected genre can be played.
Audiobook Displays the audiobook list. Chapters can be selected and played.
Podcast Displays the podcast list. Episode can be selected and played.
Folder Displays the folder/fi le list.
Example of use (to play tracks in
particular genre)
1. Select to display the category list.
2. Select the icon.
3. Select a desired genre.
4. Select the icon.
5. Select the icon. A list of all the
tracks in the selected genre is
displayed.
6. Select a desired track to play it.
7. If is selected during playback, the
list in Step 5 is displayed.
All Artists
Genre Type 1
Genre Type 2
Genre Type 3
All Albums
Artist Name A
Artist Name B
All Songs
Album Title 1
Album Title 2
Genres
5–74
Interior Features
Audio System
NOTE
An artist or album in the genre can be
selected.
Select the icon to move to a folder
one level higher.
*Some models. 5–75
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Bluetooth ® (Type A/Type B) *
Bluetooth ® Hands-Free outline
When a Bluetooth ® device (mobile phone) is connected to the vehicle's hands-free unit
via radio wave transmission, a call can be made or received using the talk button, pick-up
button and hang-up button, or by operating the panel. For example, even if a device (mobile
phone) is in your coat pocket, a call can be made without taking the device (mobile phone)
out and operating it directly.
Bluetooth ® audio outline
When a portable audio unit equipped with the Bluetooth ® communication function is
programmed to the vehicle, you can listen to music stored on the programmed portable
audio device from the vehicle's speakers. It is not necessary to connect the portable audio
device to the vehicle's external input terminal. After programming, operate the vehicle audio
control panel to play/stop the audio.
NOTE
For your safety, a device can be paired (programmed) only when the vehicle is parked. If
the vehicle starts to move, the pairing procedure will end. Park the vehicle in a safe place
before pairing.
The communication range of a Bluetooth ® equipped device is about 10 meters (32 ft) or
less.
CAUTION
Some Bluetooth ® mobile devices are not compatible with the vehicle. Consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer, Mazda's call center or Web support center for information
regarding Bluetooth ® mobile device compatibility:
U.S.A.
Phone: 800-430-0153
Web: www.MazdaUSA.com/bluetooth
Canada
Phone: 800-430-0153
Web: www.mazdahandsfree.ca
Mexico
Center of Attention to Client (CAC)
Phone: 01-800-01-MAZDA
Web:
www.mazdamexico.com.mx
5–76
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Applicable Bluetooth ® specifi cation
Ver. 2.0 or higher (Type A)
Ver. 2.1 EDR (Type B)
Component Parts
Microphone
Talk button, Pick-up button and Hang-up button
Microphone
Talk button
Hang-up button
Pick-up button
Audio unit
Type A Type B
Microphone (hands-free)
The microphone is used for speaking voice commands or exchanging conversation.
Talk button, Pick-Up button and Hang-Up button (hands-free)
The basic functions of Bluetooth ® Hands-Free can be used for such things as making calls or
hanging up using the talk, pick-up and hang-up buttons on the steering wheel.
Commander switch (Type B)
The commander switch is used for volume adjustment and display operation. Tilt or turn the
commander and move the cursor. Press the commander knob to select the icon.
5–77
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Volume adjustment
The power/volume dial of the audio unit *1 or the dial of the commander switch *2 is
used to adjust the volume. Turn the dial to the right to increase volume, to the left to
decrease it.
The volume can also be adjusted using the volume button on the steering wheel.
*1 Type A
*2 Type B
(Type B)
Conversation volume and the volume of the voice guidance and ringtone can each be set in
advance.
1. Select the icon on the home screen and display the Communication screen.
2. Select the icon.
3. Adjust the and the using the slider.
NOTE
The volume of the audio unit cannot be adjusted while Bluetooth ® Hands-Free is being used.
5–78
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Bluetooth ® Preparation (Type A)
Bluetooth ® Hands-Free Preparation
Pairing code setting
The 4-digit pairing code setting for
registration of your cell phone (pairing)
can be set beforehand.
NOTE
The initial setting value is “0000”.
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Setup”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
Pairing options, confi rmation prompts,
language, passcode, select phone or
select music player.”
4. Say: [Beep] “Pairing options”
5. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
Pair, Edit, Delete, List, or Set Pairing
Code.”
6. Say: [Beep] “Set pairing code”
7. Prompt: “Your current pairing code is
XXXX. Do you want to change it to a
different pairing code?”
8. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
9. Prompt: “Please say a 4-digit pairing
code.”
10. Say: [Beep] “YYYY”
11. Prompt: “YYYY is this correct?”
12. Say: [Beep] “Yes” or “No”
13. If “Yes”, go to Step 14. If “No”, the
procedure returns to Step 9.
14. Prompt: “Your new pairing code is
YYYY. Use this pairing code when
pairing devices to the Hands free
system. Do you want to pair a device
now?”
15. Say: [Beep] “Yes” or “No”
16. If “Yes”, the system switches to the
device registration mode. If “No”, the
system returns to standby status.
Device programming (Pairing)
To use Bluetooth ® Hands-Free, the device
equipped with Bluetooth ® has to be
programmed to the hands-free unit using
the following procedure.
A maximum of seven devices including
hands-free mobile phones and Bluetooth ®
audio devices can be programmed to one
vehicle.
NOTE
If a Bluetooth ® device has already been
programmed to the vehicle as a Bluetooth ®
audio device, it does not need to be
programmed again when using the device
as a hands-free mobile phone. Conversely,
it does not need to be programmed again
as a Bluetooth ® audio device if it has
already been programmed as a hands-free
mobile phone.
1. Activate the Bluetooth ® application of
the device.
NOTE
For the operation of the device, refer to its
instruction manual.
2. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
3. Say: [Beep] “Setup”
4. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
Pairing options, confi rmation prompts,
language, passcode, select phone or
select music player.”
5. Say: [Beep] “Pairing options”
6. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
Pair, Edit, Delete, List, or Set Pairing
Code.”
7. Say: [Beep] “Pair”
8. Prompt: “Start the pairing process on
your Bluetooth ® device. Your pairing
code is 0000 (XXXX). Input this on
your Bluetooth ® device when prompted
on the device. See device manual for
instructions.”
5–79
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
9. Using the device, perform a search
for the Bluetooth ® device (Peripheral
device).
NOTE
For the operation of the device, refer to its
instruction manual.
10. Select “Mazda” from the device list
searched by the device.
11. Input the 4-digit pairing code to the
device.
12. Prompt: “Please say the name of the
device after the beep.”
13. Say: [Beep] “XXXX - - -” (Say a
“device tag”, an arbitrary name for the
device.) Example: “Stan's device.”
NOTE
Say a programmed “device tag” within 10
seconds.
If more than two devices are to be
programmed, they cannot be programmed
with the same or similar “device tag”.
14. Prompt: “XXXXXX - - - (Ex. “Stan's
device”) (Device tag). Is this correct?”
15. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
16. Prompt: “Pairing complete”
After a device is registered, the system
automatically identifi es the device. By
activating Bluetooth ® Hands-Free again,
or by activating Bluetooth ® Hands-Free
fi rst after switching the ignition from
OFF to ACC, the system reads out a voice
guidance, “XXXXXX - - - (Ex. “Stan's
device”) (Device tag) is connected”.
NOTE
When the programming is completed,
the symbol is displayed.
Some Bluetooth ® audio devices need a
certain amount of time before the
symbol is displayed.
Device registration can also be done by
operating the audio unit.
Depending on the device, the
registration status may be lost after a
certain period of time. If this occurs,
repeat the entire process from Step 1.
Registered device read-out
Bluetooth ® Hands-Free can read-out the
devices registered to its system.
NOTE
Do this function only when parked. It is
too distracting to attempt while driving
and you may make too many errors to be
effective.
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Setup”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
Pairing options, confi rmation prompts,
language, passcode, select phone or
select music player.”
4. Say: [Beep] “Pairing options”
5. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
Pair, Edit, Delete, List, or Set Pairing
Code”
6. Say: [Beep] “List”
5–80
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
7. Prompt: “XXXXX..., XXXXX...,
XXXXX... (Ex. Device A, device B,
device C)” (The voice guidance reads
out the device tags registered to the
hands-free system.)
Press the talk button with a short press
during the read-out at the desired
device, and then say one of the
following voice commands to execute
it.
“Select phone”: Selects device (Mobile
phone) when the talk button is shortpressed.
“Select music player”: Selects device
(Music player) when the talk button is
short-pressed.
“Edit”: Edits device when the talk
button is short-pressed.
“Continue”: Continues the list readout.
“Delete”: Deletes the registered device
when the talk button is short-pressed.
“Previous”: Returns to the previous
device in read-out when the talk button
is short-pressed.
8. Prompt: “End of list, would you like to
start from the beginning?”
9. Say: [Beep] “No”
10. Prompt: “Returning to main menu.”
Device selection
If several devices have been programmed,
the Bluetooth ® unit links the device last
programmed. If you would like to link
a different programmed device, it is
necessary to change the link. The order
of device priority after the link has been
changed is maintained even when the
ignition is switched off.
(Hands-free phone)
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Setup”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
Pairing options, confi rmation prompts,
language, passcode, select phone or
select music player.”
4. Say: [Beep] “Select phone”
5. Prompt: “Please say the name of
the device you would like to select.
Available devices are XXXXX... (Ex.
device A), XXXXX... (Ex. device B),
XXXXX... (Ex. device C). Which
device please?”
6. Say: [Beep] “XXXXX... (Ex. Device
B)”
7. Prompt: “XXXXX... (Ex. Device B).
Is this correct?”
8. Say: [Beep] “Yes” or “No”
9. If “Yes”, go to Step 10. If “No”, the
procedure returns to Step 5.
10. Prompt: “XXXXX... (Ex. Device B)
selected.”
(Music player)
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Setup”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
Pairing options, confi rmation prompts,
language, passcode, select phone or
select music player.”
4. Say: [Beep] “Select music player”
5. Prompt: “Please say the name of
the device you would like to select.
Available devices are XXXXX... (Ex.
device A), XXXXX... (Ex. device B),
XXXXX... (Ex. device C). Which
device please?”
6. Say: [Beep] “XXXXX... (Ex. Device
B)”
7. Prompt: “XXXXX... (Ex. Device B).
Is this correct?”
5–81
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
8. Say: [Beep] “Yes” or “No”
9. If “Yes”, go to Step 10. If “No”, the
procedure returns to Step 5.
10. Prompt: “XXXXX... (Ex. Device B)
selected.”
NOTE
When the selected device connection is
completed, the or symbol is
displayed.
Some Bluetooth ® audio devices need a
certain amount of time before the or
symbol is displayed.
Device (Music player) selection can
also be done by operating the panel
button.
Deleting a device
Registered devices (Mobile phone) can be
deleted individually or collectively.
NOTE
Do this function only when parked. It is
too distracting to attempt while driving
and you may make too many errors to be
effective.
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Setup”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
Pairing options, confi rmation prompts,
language, passcode, select phone or
select music player.”
4. Say: [Beep] “Pairing options”
5. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
Pair, Edit, Delete, List, or Set Pairing
Code.”
NOTE
A registered device (Mobile phone) can be
deleted using the registration list.
6. Say: [Beep] “Delete”
7. Prompt: “Please say the name of
the device you would like to delete.
Available devices are XXXXX... (Ex.
device A), XXXXX... (Ex. device
B), XXXXX... (Ex. device C), or all.
Which device please?”
8. Say: [Beep] “X” (Say the number of
the device to be deleted.)
NOTE
Say “All” to delete all devices (Mobile
phone).
9. Prompt: “Deleting XXXXX... (Ex.
device B...) (Registered device tag). Is
this correct?”
10. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
11. Prompt: “Deleted”
Registered device editing
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Setup”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
Pairing options, confi rmation prompts,
language, passcode, select phone or
select music player.”
4. Say: [Beep] “Pairing options”
5. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
Pair, Edit, Delete, List, or Set Pairing
Code.”
6. Say: [Beep] “Edit”
7. Prompt: “Please say the name of the
device you would like to edit. Available
devices are XXXXX... (Ex. device A),
XXXXX... (Ex. device B), XXXXX...
(Ex. device C). Which device please?”
8. Say: [Beep] “X” (Say the number of
the device to be edited.)
9. Prompt: “New name please?”
10. Say: [Beep] “XXXXX... (Ex. Device
C)” (Speak a “device tag” an arbitrary
name for the device.)
5–82
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
11. Prompt: “XXXXX... (Ex. device C)
(Device tag), is this correct?”
12. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
13. Prompt: “New name saved.”
Bluetooth ® Audio Preparation
Bluetooth ® audio device set-up
Bluetooth ® audio programming, changes,
deletions, and display of programmed
device information can be performed.
1. The mode changes as follows each time
the menu button ( ) is pressed.
Select “ BT SETUP ”.
*
*
2. Turn the audio control dial and select a
desired mode.
Display Mode Function
PAIR
DEVICE
Pairing
program
mode
Bluetooth ® audio
device programming
LINK
CHANGE
Link change
mode
Changing link to
Bluetooth® audio
device
PAIR
DELETE
Pairing
deletion
mode
Deleting link to
Bluetooth® audio
device
DEVICE
INFO
Device
information
display mode
Displaying vehicle's
Bluetooth® unit
information
3. Press the audio control dial to
determine the mode.
Bluetooth ® audio device programming
Any Bluetooth ® audio device must be
programmed to the vehicle's Bluetooth ®
unit before it can be listened to over the
vehicle's speakers.
A maximum of seven devices including
Bluetooth® audio devices and hands-free
mobile phones can be programmed to one
vehicle.
5–83
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
NOTE
If a Bluetooth ® device has already
been programmed to the vehicle as a
hands-free mobile phone, it does not
need to be programmed again when
using the device as a Bluetooth ® audio
device. Conversely, it does not need to
be programmed again as a hands-free
mobile phone if it has already been
programmed as a Bluetooth ® audio
device.
Device registration can also be done
using voice recognition.
Concerning the operation of a Bluetooth ®
audio device itself, refer to its instruction
manual.
Some Bluetooth ® audio devices have PIN
codes (four digits). Refer to the audio
device's instruction manual because the
programming procedure differs depending
on whether it has a PIN code or not.
Programming a Bluetooth ® audio device
which has a four-digit PIN code
1. Using the audio control dial, select
the pairing program mode “ PAIR
DEVICE ” in the “ BT SETUP ” mode.
(Refer to “Bluetooth ® audio device setup” for details.)
2. Press the audio control dial to
determine the mode. After “ ENTER
PIN ” is displayed on the audio display
for three seconds, “ PIN 0000 ” is
displayed and the PIN code can be
input.
3. Input the PIN code of your Bluetooth ®
audio device by pressing channel preset
buttons 1 to 4 while “ PIN 0000 ” is
displayed.
Press channel preset button 1 to input
the fi rst digit, 2 for the second, 3 for the
third, and 4 for the forth. For example,
if the PIN code were “4213” press
channel preset button 1 four times (1,
2, 3, 4), button 2 twice (1, 2), button
3 once (1), and button 4 three times
(1, 2, 3). If the “ PIN 0000 ” display
disappears before fi nishing the PIN
code input, repeat the procedure from
Step 1.
NOTE
Some devices accept only a particular
pairing code (Usually, “0000” or
“1234”).
If pairing cannot be completed, refer to the
owner's manual of your mobile device, and
try those numbers if necessary.
4. Press the audio control dial while
the input PIN code is displayed.
“ PAIRING ” fl ashes on the audio
display.
5. Operate the Bluetooth ® audio device
and set it to the program mode while
“ PAIRING ” is fl ashing.
6. When the programming is completed,
and “ PAIR SUCCESS ” are displayed
after about 10-30 seconds, after which
“ PAIR SUCCESS ” continues to be
displayed for three seconds, and then
the unit returns to the normal display.
5–84
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
NOTE
Some Bluetooth ® audio devices need a
certain amount of time before the
symbol is displayed.
If the programming failed, “ Err ”
fl ashes for three seconds .
Programming cannot be performed
while the vehicle is moving. If you
attempt to perform programming
while the vehicle is moving, “ PAIR
DISABLE ” is displayed .
If seven Bluetooth ® audio devices
have already been programmed to
the vehicle, programming cannot be
performed and “ MEMORY FULL ”
is displayed. Delete one programmed
device to program another one.
Programming a Bluetooth ® audio device
which does not have a four-digit PIN
code
1. Using the audio control dial, select
the pairing program mode “ PAIR
DEVICE ” in the “ BT SETUP ” mode.
(Refer to “Bluetooth ® audio set up” for
details.)
2. Press the audio control dial to
determine the mode. After “ ENTER
PIN ” is displayed on the audio display
for three seconds, “ PIN 0000 ” is
displayed and the PIN code can be
input.
3. Press the audio control dial while “ PIN
0000 ” is displayed. “ PAIRING ” fl ashes
on the audio display.
4. Operate the Bluetooth ® audio device
and set it to the program mode while
“ PAIRING ” is fl ashing.
5. As the Bluetooth ® audio device
requires a PIN code, input “0000”.
6. When the programming is completed,
and “ PAIR SUCCESS ” are displayed
after about 10-30 seconds, after which
“ PAIR SUCCESS ” continues to be
displayed for three seconds, and then
the unit returns to the normal display.
NOTE
If pairing cannot be completed, try
“1234” instead. Refer to the owner's
manual of your mobile device for the
right PIN code.
Some Bluetooth ® audio devices need a
certain amount of time before the
symbol is displayed.
If the programming failed, “ Err ”
fl ashes for three seconds.
Programming cannot be performed
while the vehicle is moving. If you
attempt to perform programming
while the vehicle is moving, “ PAIR
DISABLE” is displayed .
If seven Bluetooth ® audio devices
have already been programmed to
the vehicle, programming cannot be
performed and “ MEMORY FULL ”
is displayed. Delete one programmed
device to program another one.
Device selection
If several devices have been programmed,
the Bluetooth ® unit links the device last
programmed. If you would like to link
a different programmed device, it is
necessary to change the link. The order
of device priority after the link has been
changed is maintained even when the
ignition is switched off.
1. Using the audio control dial, select the
link change mode “ LINK CHANGE ”
in the “ BT SETUP ” mode. (Refer to
“Bluetooth® audio device set-up” for
details.)
5–85
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
2. Press the audio control dial to
determine the mode.
3. The name of the currently linked
Bluetooth® audio device is displayed.
If no Bluetooth ® audio device is
currently linked, the name of the fi rst
device among the programmed devices
is displayed.
4. Turn the audio control dial to select the
name of the device you would like to
link.
Device name 1
Device name 2
Device name 3
Device name 4
Device name 5
Device name 6
Device name 7
5. Press the audio control dial to select the
device you would like to link. The
symbol disappears, and “ PAIRING ”
fl ashes in the audio display.
NOTE
When “ GO BACK ” is selected and the
audio control dial is pressed, the display
returns to “ LINK CHANGE ”.
6. If the link to the desired device is
successful, the symbol is displayed
again, together with “ LINK
CHANGED ”. “ LINK CHANGED ” is
displayed for three seconds, then it
returns to the normal display.
NOTE
Some Bluetooth ® audio devices need a
certain amount of time before the
symbol is displayed.
If a hands-free type mobile phone has
been the most recently programmed
device, the Bluetooth ® unit links this
device. If you would like to use a
Bluetooth® audio type device which
has been previously programmed to
the Bluetooth ® unit, the link must be
changed to this device.
If an error occurs while trying to link
a device, “ Err ” fl ashes in the audio
display for three seconds, and the
display returns to “ LINK CHANGE ”.
If this occurs, check the programming
status of the Bluetooth ® audio device
and the location of the device in the
vehicle (not in the trunk or a metal-type
box), and then try the link operation
again.
Device selection can also be done using
voice recognition.
How to confi rm the device currently
linked
Switch to the link-change mode. (Refer to
“Changing the link to a Bluetooth ® audio
device”)
The device name displayed fi rst is the
device which is currently linked.
5–86
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Deleting a device
1. Using the audio control dial, select the
pairing delete mode “ PAIR DELETE ”
in the “ BT SETUP ”mode. (Refer to
“Bluetooth® audio device set-up” for
details.)
2. Press the audio control dial to
determine the mode.
3. The name of the fi rst device among the
programmed devices is displayed.
4. Rotate the audio control dial and select
the name of the programmed device
you would like to delete.
Device name 1
Device name 2
Device name 3
Device name 4
Device name 5
Device name 6
Device name 7
NOTE
Only the names of programmed devices
can be displayed. If only one device is
programmed, only the name for this device
is displayed.
5. If a selection other than “ GO BACK ”
is made and the audio control dial is
pressed, “ SURE ? NO ” is displayed.
6. Rotate the audio control dial clockwise
and switch the display to “ SURE ?
YES ”.
NOTE
The display changes as follows depending
on whether the audio control dial is
rotated clockwise or counterclockwise.
-Clockwise: “ SURE ? YES ” displayed
-Counterclockwise: “ SURE ? NO ”
displayed
7. Press the audio control dial to delete
the selected device.
NOTE
Select “ GO BACK ” and press the audio
control dial to return to the “ PAIR
DELETE ” display.
8. “ PAIR DELETED ” is displayed for
three seconds after the deletion is
completed, and then it returns to the
normal display.
NOTE
If an error occurs while trying to delete
the programmed device, “ Err ” fl ashes
in the display for three seconds and the
display returns to “ LINK DELETE ”.
Bluetooth ® audio device information
display
1. Using the audio control dial, select the
pair device information display mode
“DEVICE INFO” in the “BT SETUP”
mode. (Refer to “Bluetooth ® audio
device set-up” for details.)
2. Press the audio control dial to
determine the mode.
3. The name of the Bluetooth ® unit device
is displayed.
5–87
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
4. Rotate the audio control dial to select
the information for the Bluetooth ® unit
which you would like to view.
Device name
BT address
NOTE
When “ GO BACK ” is selected and the
audio control dial is pressed, the display
returns to “ DEVICE INFO ”.
Available Language (Type A)
The available languages are English,
Spanish, and Canadian French. If the
language setting is changed, all of the
voice guidance and voice input commands
are done in the selected language.
NOTE
If the language setting is changed,
device registration is maintained.
Phonebook records are not cleared,
but each language has a separate
phonebook. Therefore, entries created
in one language will need to be reentered in the phonebook of the new
language.
Do these steps before you start driving.
These less used functions are too
distracting to undertake while driving
until you are fully familiar with the
system.
(Method 1)
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Setup”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
Pairing options, confi rmation prompts,
language, passcode, select phone or
select music player.”
4. Say: [Beep] “Language”
5. Prompt: “Select a language: English,
French, or Spanish.”
6. Say: [Beep] “French” (Speak the
desired language: “English”, “French”
or “Spanish”)
NOTE
Other language settings can also be made
while in the current setting by saying
the name of the language in the native
pronunciation.
7. Prompt: “French (Desired language)
selected. Is this correct?”
8. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
9. Prompt: “French (Desired language)
selected” (Spoken in the newly selected
language).
(Method 2)
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “French” (Say the desired
language: “English”, “French” or
“Spanish”). (Change the desired
language by saying the language
name.)
NOTE
Other language settings can also be made
while in the current setting by saying
the name of the language in the native
pronunciation.
5–88
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
3. Prompt: “Would you like to change
the language to French (Desired
language)?”
4. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
5. Prompt: “Please wait. Switching to
French phonebook. French selected”
(Spoken in the newly selected
language).
Voice Recognition (Type A)
The Mazda Bluetooth ® Hands-Free system
can be used to make calls or operate the
audio unit using voice recognition which
includes numerous convenient commands.
In this section, the basic operation of the
voice recognition is explained.
Activating Voice Recognition
To Activate the Main Menu: Press the
pick-up button or talk button with a short
press.
Ending Voice Recognition
Use one of the following methods:
Press and hold the talk-button.
Press the hang-up button.
Skipping Voice Guidance (for faster
operation)
Press and release the talk-button.
NOTE
The Bluetooth ® Hands-Free system
is operable several seconds after the
ignition is switched to ACC or ON
(requires less than 15 seconds).
When operating the audio unit or the
A/C while using Bluetooth ® HandsFree, the beep sounds or voice
guidance (audio unit)/cannot be heard.
Tutorial
The tutorial explains how to use
Bluetooth® Hands-Free.
To activate the tutorial, do the following:
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Tutorial”
3. Follow the prompts to receive the
appropriate voice guidance instructions.
Commands useable anytime during
voice recognition
“Help” or “Go Back” are commands
which can be used at anytime during voice
recognition.
Help function use
The help function informs the user of all
the available voice commands under the
current conditions.
1. Say: [Beep] “Help”
2. Follow the prompts to receive the
appropriate voice guidance instructions.
Returning to previous operation
This command is for returning to the
previous operation while in the voice
recognition mode.
Say: [Beep] “Go Back”
To prevent a deterioration in the voice
recognition rate and voice quality, the
following points should be observed:
The hands-free system cannot perform
voice recognition while voice guidance
or a beep sound is operating. Wait until
the voice guidance or the beep sound is
fi nished before saying your commands.
Dialects or different wording other
than hands-free prompts cannot be
recognized by voice recognition. Speak
in the wording specifi ed by the voice
commands.
5–89
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
It is not necessary to face the
microphone or approach it. Speak the
voice commands while maintaining a
safe driving position.
Do not speak too slow or too loud.
Speak clearly, without pausing between
words or numbers.
Close the windows and/or the moonroof
to reduce loud noises from outside
the vehicle, or turn down the airfl ow
of the air-conditioning system while
Bluetooth® Hands-Free is being used.
Make sure the vents are not directing air
up towards the microphone.
NOTE
If the voice recognition performance is not
satisfactory.
Refer to Voice Recognition Learning
Function (Speaker Enrollment) (Type A)
on page 5-90 .
Refer to Troubleshooting (Type A/Type B)
on page 5-129 .
Security Setting (Type A)
If a passcode is set, the system cannot be
activated unless the passcode is input.
NOTE
Do this function only when parked. It is
too distracting to attempt while driving
and you may make too many errors to be
effective.
Passcode setting
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Setup”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
Pairing options, confi rmation prompts,
language, passcode, select phone or
select music player.”
4. Say: [Beep] “Passcode”
5. Prompt: “Passcode is disabled. Would
you like to enable it?”
6. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
7. Prompt: “Please say a 4-digit
passcode. Remember this passcode. It
will be required to use this system.”
8. Say: [Beep] “XXXX” (Say a desired
4-digit passcode, “PCode”.)
9. Prompt: “Passcode XXXX (Passcode,
PCode). Is this correct?”
10. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
11. Prompt: “Passcode is enabled.”
Using Bluetooth ® Hands-Free with a
passcode
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Prompt: “Hands-Free system is
locked. State the passcode to continue.”
3. Say: [Beep] “XXXX” (Say the set
passcode “PCode”.)
4. If the correct passcode is input, voice
guidance “XXXXXX... (Ex. “Mary's
device”) (Device tag) is connected” is
announced.
If the passcode is incorrect, voice
guidance “XXXX (4-digit passcode,
Pcode) incorrect passcode, please try
again” is announced.
Canceling the passcode
NOTE
Do this function only when parked. It is
too distracting to attempt while driving
and you may make too many errors to be
effective.
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Setup”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
Pairing options, confi rmation prompts,
language, passcode, select phone or
select music player.”
5–90
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
4. Say: [Beep] “Passcode”
5. Prompt: “Passcode is enabled. Would
you like to disable it?”
6. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
7. Prompt: “Passcode is disabled.”
Confi rmation Prompts
The confi rmation prompt confi rms the
command content to the user before
advancing to the operation requested by
the user. When this function is turned
on, the system reads out the voice
input command previously received
and confi rms whether the command is
correct before advancing to the command
execution.
When the confi rmation prompt function is
turned on:
(Ex. “Calling John's device. Is this
correct?”)
When the confi rmation prompt function is
turned off:
(Ex. “Calling John's device.”)
NOTE
If the confi rmation prompt function is
turned off when making an emergency
call, the system reads out and confi rms the
command before executing it.
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Setup”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
Pairing options, confi rmation prompts,
language, passcode, select phone or
select music player.”
4. Say: [Beep] “Confi rmation prompts”
5. Prompt: “Confi rmation prompts
are on/off. Would you like to turn
confi rmation prompts off/on?”
6. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
7. Prompt: “Confi rmation prompts are
off/on.”
Voice Recognition Learning
Function (Speaker Enrollment)
(Type A)
The voice recognition learning function
enables voice recognition appropriate to
the characteristics of the user's voice. If the
recognition of the voice input commands
to the system is not adequate, this function
can largely improve the system's voice
recognition of the user. If your voice can
be recognized suffi ciently without using
this function, you may not realize the
added benefi t of the function. To register
your voice, the voice input command
list must be read out. Read out the list
when the vehicle is parked. Perform the
registration in as quiet a place as possible
5-88 . The registration must be performed
completely. The required time is a few
minutes. The user needs to be seated in the
driver's seat with the voice input command
list for voice recognition learning open to
the page indicated below.
When voice recognition learning is done
for the fi rst time
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Voice training”
3. Prompt: “This operation must be
performed in a quiet environment while
the vehicle is stopped. See the owner's
manual for the list of required training
phrases. Press and release the talk
button when you are ready to begin.
Press the hang-up button to cancel at
any time.”
4. Press the talk button with a short press.
5. The voice guidance reads out the voice
input command number (refer to the
voice input command list for voice
recognition learning). (Ex. “Please read
phrase 1” )
5–91
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
6. Say: [Beep] “0123456789” (Say
the voice input command for voice
recognition learning (1 to 8) according
to the voice guidance.)
7. Prompt: “Speaker enrollment is
complete.”
NOTE
If an error occurred in the voice
recognition learning, re-learning can be
done by pressing the talk button with a
short press.
Voice recognition re-learning
If voice recognition learning has already
been done.
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Voice training”
3. Prompt: “Enrollment is enabled/
disabled. Would you like to disable/
enable or retrain?”
4. Say: [Beep] “Retrain”
5. Prompt: “This operation must be
performed in a quiet environment while
the vehicle is stopped. See the owner's
manual for the list of required training
phrases. Press and release the talk
button when you are ready to begin.
Press the hang-up button to cancel at
any time.”
6. Press the talk button with a short press.
7. The voice guidance reads out the voice
input command number (refer to the
voice input command list for voice
recognition learning). (Ex. “Please read
phrase 1”)
8. Say: [Beep] “0123456789” (Say
the voice input command for voice
recognition learning (1 to 8) according
to the voice guidance.)
9. Prompt: “Speaker enrollment is
complete.”
NOTE
If an error occurred in the voice
recognition learning, re-learning can be
done by pressing the talk button with a
short press.
Voice input command list for voice
recognition learning
When reading out, the following points
must be observed:
Read out the numbers one at a time
correctly and naturally.
(For example, “1234” must be read out
“one, two, three, four” not “twelve,
thirty four”.)
Do not read out parentheses. “(” and
hyphens “-” are used for separating
numbers in a phone number.
Ex. “(888) 555-1212” must be spoken
“Eight, eight, eight, fi ve, fi ve, fi ve, one,
two, one, two.”
Phrase Command
1 0123456789
2 (888) 555-1212
3 Call
4 Dial
5 Setup
6 Cancel
7 Continue
8 Help
NOTE
The applicable phrase appears in the
audio display.
After user voice registration is
completed, voice guidance “Speaker
enrollment is complete” is announced.
5–92
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Voice recognition learning on/off
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Voice training”
3. Prompt: “Enrollment is enabled/
disabled. Would you like to disable/
enable or retrain?”
4. Say: [Beep] “Disable” or “Enable”
5. When “Disable” is spoken, the voice
recognition learning is turned off.
When “Enable” is spoken, the voice
recognition learning is turned on.
6. Prompt: “Speaker Enrollment is
disabled/enabled.”
Bluetooth ® Preparation (Type B)
Device programming (Pairing)
To use Bluetooth ® audio and Hands-Free,
the device equipped with Bluetooth ®
has to be programmed to the unit using
the following procedure. A maximum of
seven devices including Bluetooth ® audio
devices and hands-free mobile phones can
be programmed.
Pairing Procedure
1. Select the icon on the home screen
and display the Settings screen.
2. Select the tab.
3. Select the icon.
4. Turn the Bluetooth ® setting on.
5. Select the icon to display
the message and switch to the device
operation.
6. Using your device, perform a search
for the Bluetooth ® device (Peripheral
device).
7. Select “Mazda” from the device list
searched by the device.
8. (Device with Bluetooth ® version 2.0)
Input the displayed 4-digit pairing code
into the device.
(Device with Bluetooth ® version 2.1
or higher)
Make sure the displayed 6-digit code
on the audio is also displayed on the
device, and touch the icon.
A connection license agreement may be
required depending on the device.
9. If pairing is successful, the profi le list
for the device is displayed.
10. (Devices compatible with Mazda
Email / SMS function)
SMS (Short Message Service)
messages, MMS (Multimedia
Messaging Service) messages, and
E-mail for the device are downloaded
automatically. A download permission
operation may be required depending
on your mobile device.
NOTE
When Call history and messages are
downloaded automatically, each automatic
download setting must be on.
Refer to Communication Settings on page
5-110 .
After a device is registered, the system
automatically identifi es the device. By
activating Bluetooth ® Hands-Free again, or
by activating Bluetooth ® Hands-Free fi rst
after switching the ignition from OFF to
ACC, the device connection condition is
indicated in the audio display.
IMPORTANT note about pairing and
automatic reconnection:
If pairing is to be redone, fi rst clear
the programmed device indicated as
“Mazda”.
5–93
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
When you update the operating
system of your mobile device (such
as Windows/Android/iOS) the pairing
information may be invalidated.
Therefore, the device may need to be
reprogrammed to the hands-free unit.
Before you pair your device, make sure
that Bluetooth ® is “ON”, both on your
phone and on the vehicle.
Device selection
If several devices have been programmed,
the Bluetooth ® unit links the device last
programmed. If you would like to link
a different programmed device, it is
necessary to change the link. The order
of device priority after the link has been
changed is maintained even when the
ignition is switched off.
Connecting other devices
1. Select the icon on the home screen
and display the Settings screen.
2. Select the tab.
3. Select the icon.
4. Turn the Bluetooth ® setting on.
5. Select the name of the device you
would like to connect.
6. icon selection
Connects both devices as hands-free
and Bluetooth ® audio.
icon selection
Connects as a hands-free device.
icon selection
Connects as Bluetooth ® audio.
When the connection is completed, the
profi le list for the device is displayed.
Select the icon to display the device list
screen and display the or icon in the
newly connected device.
Disconnecting a device
1. Select the icon on the home screen
and display the Settings screen.
2. Select the tab.
3. Select the icon.
4. Turn the Bluetooth ® setting on.
5. Select the device name which is
currently connected.
6. Select the icon.
Deleting a device
Selecting and deleting devices
1. Select the icon on the home screen
and display the Settings screen.
2. Select the tab.
3. Select the icon.
4. Turn the Bluetooth ® setting on.
5. Select the device name which you
would like to delete.
6. Select the icon.
7. Select the icon.
Deleting all devices
1. Select the icon on the home screen
and display the Settings screen.
2. Select the tab.
3. Select the icon.
4. Select the icon.
5. Select the icon.
6. Select the icon.
Changing PIN code
PIN code (4 digits) can be changed.
1. Select the icon on the home screen
and display the Settings screen.
2. Select the tab.
3. Select the icon.
4. Select the icon.
5. Select the icon.
6. Input the new PIN code to be set.
7. Select the icon.
5–94
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Available Language (Type B)
The Bluetooth ® Hands-Free System
applies to the following languages:
English
Spanish
French
Refer to Settings on page 5-55 .
Voice Recognition (Type B)
The Mazda Bluetooth ® Hands-Free system
can be used to make calls or operate the
audio unit using voice recognition which
includes numerous convenient commands.
In this section, the basic operation of the
voice recognition is explained.
Activating Voice Recognition
Press the talk-button.
Ending Voice Recognition
Use one of the following methods:
Press the hang-up button.
Say: [Beep] “Cancel”
Perform the touch panel operation or
commander switch operation while the
vehicle is stopped.
Skipping Voice Guidance (for faster
operation)
Press and release the talk-button.
NOTE
Switch the ignition to ACC or ON
and the Bluetooth ® Hands-free system
becomes operational within 30 seconds.
When operating the audio unit or the
A/C while using Bluetooth ® HandsFree, the beep sounds or voice
guidance (audio unit)/cannot be heard.
Troubleshooting for Voice Recognition
If you do not understand an operation
method while in the voice recognition
mode, say “Tutorial” or “Help”.
Commands useable anytime during
voice recognition
“Go Back” and “Cancel” are commands
which can be used at anytime during voice
recognition.
Returning to previous operation
This command is for returning to the
previous operation while in the voice
recognition mode.
Say: [Beep] “Go Back”
Cancel
The Bluetooth ® Hands-Free system
transitions to standby status if the
following operation is performed while the
system is activated.
Say: [Beep] “Cancel”
To prevent a deterioration in the voice
recognition rate and voice quality, the
following points should be observed:
Phone related commands are available
only when your phone is connected via
Bluetooth® . Make sure your phone is
connected via Bluetooth ® before you
operate phone related voice commands.
Music play commands, such as Play
Artist and Play Album can be used only
in USB audio mode.
Do not speak too slowly or loudly (no
loud voice).
Speak clearly, without pausing between
words or numbers.
The hands-free system cannot perform
voice recognition while voice guidance
or a beep sound is operating. Wait until
the voice guidance or the beep sound is
fi nished before saying your commands.
*Some models. 5–95
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Dialects or different wording other
than hands-free prompts cannot be
recognized by voice recognition. Speak
in the wording specifi ed by the voice
commands.
It is not necessary to face the
microphone or approach it. Speak the
voice commands while maintaining a
safe driving position.
Close the windows and/or the moonroof
to reduce loud noises from outside
the vehicle, or turn down the airfl ow
of the air-conditioning system while
Bluetooth® Hands-Free is being used.
Make sure the vents are not directing air
up towards the microphone.
NOTE
If the voice recognition performance is not
satisfactory.
Refer to Troubleshooting (Type A/Type B)
on page 5-129 .
Bluetooth ® Hands-Free
(Type A) *
Making a Call
Phonebook Usage
Telephone calls can be made by saying
the name of a person (voice tag) whose
phone number has been registered in
Bluetooth® Hands-Free in advance. Refer
to Phonebook registration.
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Call”
3. Prompt: “Name please.”
4. Say: [Beep] “XXXXX... (Ex. “John's
phone”)” (Say a voice tag registered in
the phonebook.)
5. Prompt: “Calling XXXXX... (Ex.
“John's phone”) XXXX (Ex. “at
home”). Is this correct?” (Voice tag and
phone number location registered in
phonebook).
6. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
7. Prompt: “Dialing”
NOTE
The “Call” command and the voice tag
can be combined.
Ex. In Step 2, say, “Call John's phone”,
then, Steps 3 and 4 can be skipped.
Phonebook registration
Phone numbers can be registered to the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free phonebook.
NOTE
Do this function only when parked. It is
too distracting to attempt while driving
and you may make too many errors to be
effective.
5–96
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Phonebook”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
New entry, edit, list names, delete,
erase all or import contact.”
4. Say: [Beep] “New entry”
5. Prompt: “Name please.”
6. Say: [Beep] “XXXXX... (Ex. “Mary's
phone”)” (Say a voice tag for the name
registered.)
7. Prompt: “Adding XXXXX... (Ex.
“Mary's phone”) (Registered voice tag).
Is this correct?”
8. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
9. Prompt: “Home, Work, Mobile, or
Other?”
10. Say: [Beep] “Mobile” (Say “Home”
, “Work”, “Mobile”, or “Other”, for
the desired location to be registered.)
11. Prompt: “Mobile (Location to be
registered). Is this correct?”
12. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
13. Prompt: “Number, please.”
14. Say: [Beep] “XXXXXXXXXXX”
(Say the phone number to be
registered.)
15. Prompt: “XXXXXXXXXXX (Phone
number registration). After the beep,
continue to add numbers, or say
Go-Back to re-enter the last entered
numbers, or press the Pick-Up button to
save the number.”
16. (Registration)
Press the pick-up button or say “Enter”,
then go to Step 17.
(Adding/inputting telephone
number)
Say, “XXXX” (desired telephone
number), then go to Step 15.
(Telephone number correction)
Say, “Go Back”. The prompt replies,
“Go Back. The last entered numbers
have been removed.”. Then go back to
Step 13.
17. Prompt: “Number saved. Would you
like to add another number for this
entry?”
18. Say: [Beep] “Yes” or “No”.
19. If “Yes”, an additional phone number
registration can be made for the same
entry.
If “No”, the system returns to standby
status.
(Import contact)
Phonebook data from your device (Mobile
phone) can be sent and registered to your
Bluetooth® Hands-Free phonebook using
Bluetooth® .
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Phonebook”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
New entry, edit, list names, delete,
erase all or import contact.”
4. Say: [Beep] “Import contact”
5. Prompt: “The hands free System
is ready to receive a contact from a
phone. Only a home, a work, and a
mobile number can be imported, This
process requires operation of a mobile
phone. refer to the phone's manual for
more information”
5–97
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
6. Device (Mobile phone) operation:
Select one entry from the phonebook
and send it using Bluetooth ® .
7. Prompt: “X (Number of locations
which include data) numbers have been
imported. What name would you like to
use for these numbers?”
8. Say: [Beep] “XXXXX... (Ex. “Mary's
phone”)” (Say a voice tag for the name
registered.)
9. Prompt: “Adding XXXXX... (Ex.
“Mary's phone”) (Voice tag). Is this
correct?”
10. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
11. Prompt: “Number saved. Would you
like to import another contact?”
12. Say: [Beep] “Yes” or “No”
13. If “Yes”, the procedure proceeds to
Step 5.
If “No”, the procedure proceeds to Step
14.
Editing phonebook
The data registered to the Bluetooth ®
Hands-Free phonebook can be edited.
NOTE
Do this function only when parked. It is
too distracting to attempt while driving
and you may make too many errors to be
effective.
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Phonebook”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
New entry, edit, list names, delete,
erase all or import contact.”
4. Say: [Beep] “Edit”
5. Prompt: “Please say the name of the
entry you would like to edit or say,
“List names”.”
6. Say: [Beep] “XXXXX... (Ex. “Mary's
phone”)” (Say the voice tag for the
registered name to be edited in the
phonebook.)
7. Prompt: “Home, Work, Mobile, or
Other?”
8. Say: [Beep] “Home” (Say the
registered location to be edited:
“Home”, “Work”, “Mobile”, or
“Other”.)
9. Prompt: “XXXXX... (Ex. “Mary's
phone”) (Registered voice tag) XXXX
(Ex. “Home”) (Registered location). Is
this correct?”
10. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
11. Prompt: The current number is
XXXXXXXXXXX (Ex. “555-1234”)
(Currently registered number). New
number, please.”
NOTE
If there was no previous phone number
registered to a location (Ex. “Work”),
the prompt will only read out “Number,
please”
12. Say: [Beep] “XXXXXXXXXXX (Ex.
“555-5678”)” (Say the new phone
number to be registered.)
13. Prompt: “XXXXXXXX (Telephone
number) After the beep, continue to add
numbers, or say Go-Back to re-enter
the last entered numbers, or press the
Pick-Up button to save the number.”
5–98
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
14. (Number Change)
Press the pick-up button, then go to
Step 15.
(Adding/inputting telephone
number)
Say, “XXXX” (desired telephone
number), then go to Step 13.
(Telephone number correction)
Say, “Go Back”. The prompt replies,
“Go Back. The last entered numbers
have been removed. Number, please.”.
Then go back to Step 12.
15. Prompt: “Number changed.”
Phonebook data deletion
(Erasing individual phonebook data)
Individual data registered to the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free phonebook can be
cleared.
NOTE
Do this function only when parked. It is
too distracting to attempt while driving
and you may make too many errors to be
effective.
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Phonebook”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
New entry, edit, list names, delete,
erase all or import contact.”
4. Say: [Beep] “Delete”
5. Prompt: “Please say the name of the
entry you would like to delete or say,
“List names”. ”
6. Say: [Beep] “XXXXX... (Ex. “John's
phone”) ” (Say the registered voice tag
to be deleted from the phonebook.)
7. Prompt: “Deleting XXXXX... (Ex.
“John's phone”) (Registered voice tag)
Home (Registered location). Is this
correct?”
8. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
9. Prompt: “XXXXX... (Ex. “John's
phone”) (Registered voice tag) Home
(Registered location) deleted.”
(Complete deletion of the phonebook
data)
All data registered to the Bluetooth ®
Hands-Free phonebook can be erased.
NOTE
Do this function only when parked. It is
too distracting to attempt while driving
and you may make too many errors to be
effective.
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Phonebook”
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
New entry, edit, list names, delete,
erase all or import contact.”
4. Say: [Beep] “Erase all”
5. Prompt: “Are you sure you want to
erase everything from your Hands Free
system phonebook?”
6. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
7. Prompt: “You are about to delete
everything from your Hands Free
system phonebook. Do you want to
continue?”
8. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
9. Prompt: “Please wait, erasing the
Hands Free system phonebook.”
10. Prompt: “Hands-Free system
phonebook erased.”
Read-out of names registered to the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free phonebook
Bluetooth ® Hands-Free can read out the
list of names registered to its phonebook.
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Phonebook”
5–99
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
3. Prompt: “Select one of the following:
New entry, edit, list names, delete,
erase all or import contact.”
4. Say: [Beep] “List names”
5. Prompt: “XXXXX..., XXXXX...,
XXXXX... (Ex. “John's phone”,
Mary's phone, Bill's phone)” (Voice
guidance reads out the voice tags
registered to the phonebook.)
Press the talk button with a short press
during the read-out at the desired name,
and then say one of the following voice
commands to execute it.
“Continue”: Continues the list readout.
“Call”: Calls the registered phonebook
data when the talk button is shortpressed.
“Edit”: Edits the registered phonebook
data when the talk button is shortpressed.
“Delete”: Deletes the registered
phonebook data when the talk button is
short-pressed.
“Previous”: Returns to the previous
phonebook data in read-out when the
talk button is short-pressed.
6. Prompt: “End of list, would you like to
start from the beginning?”
7. Say: [Beep] “No”
8. The procedure returns to Step 3.
Redial Function
Redialing the number of the person
previously dialed using the phone is
possible.
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Redial”
3. Prompt: “Dialing”
Telephone Number Input
NOTE
Practice this while parked until you are
confi dent you can do it while driving in a
non-taxing road situation. If you are not
completely comfortable, make all calls
from a safe parking position, and only
start driving when you can devote your full
attention to driving.
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Dial”
3. Prompt: “Number, please”
4. Say: [Beep] “XXXXXXXXXXX
(Telephone number)”
5. Prompt: “XXXXXXXXXXX.
(Telephone number) After the beep,
continue to add numbers, or say
Go-Back to re-enter the last entered
numbers, or press the Pick-Up button to
execute dialing.”
6. (Dialing)
Press the pick-up button or say “Dial”,
then go to Step 7.
(Adding/inputting telephone
number)
Say, “XXXX” (desired telephone
number), then go to Step 5.
(Telephone number correction)
Say, “Go Back”. The prompt replies,
“Go Back. The last entered numbers
have been removed.”. Then go back to
Step 3.
7. Prompt: “Dialing”
NOTE
The “Dial” command and a telephone
number can be combined.
Ex. In Step 2, say, “Dial 123-4567” then,
Steps 3 and 4 can be skipped.
5–100
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Emergency calls
A call can be made to the emergency
phone number (911: U.S.A./Canada, 066:
Mexico) using the voice input command.
It may not function properly in some areas
in Mexico.
1. Press the pick-up button or talk button
with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Emergency”
3. - U.S.A./Canada vehicles - Prompt:
“Dialing “911”, is this correct?”
- Mexico vehicles - Prompt: “Dialing
“066”, is this correct?”
4. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
5. Prompt: “Dialing”
Receiving an Incoming Call
1. Prompt: “Incoming call, press the
pick-up button to answer”
2. To accept the call, press the pick-up
button.
To reject the call, press the hang-up
button.
Hanging Up a Call
Press the hang-up button during the call. A
beep sound will confi rm that call is ended.
Mute
The microphone can be muted during a
call.
1. Press the talk button with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Mute”
3. Prompt: “Microphone muted”
Canceling mute
1. Press the talk button with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Mute off”
3. Prompt: “Microphone unmuted”
Transferring a Call from HandsFree to a Device (Mobile Phone)
Communication between the hands-free
unit and a device (Mobile phone) is
canceled, and the line can be switched
to a standard call using a device (Mobile
phone).
1. Press the talk button with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Transfer call”
3. Prompt: “Transferred call to phone”
Transferring a Call from a Device
(Mobile Phone) to Hands-Free
Communication between devices (Mobile
phone) can be switched to Bluetooth ®
Hands-Free.
1. Press the talk button with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Transfer call”
3. Prompt: “Transferred call to Hands
Free system”
Call interrupt
A call can be interrupted to receive an
incoming call from a third party.
Switch to a new incoming call using the
following methods.
Method 1
1. Press the pick-up button.
2. Prompt: “Swapping calls.”
Method 2
1. Press the talk button with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Swap calls”
3. Prompt: “Swapping calls.”
NOTE
To refuse an incoming call, press the
hang-up button.
After receiving a new incoming call, the
previous call is placed on hold.
5–101
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Switching calls
Switching back to the previous call can
also be done.
Method 1
1. Press the pick-up button.
2. Prompt: “Swapping calls.”
Method 2
1. Press the talk button with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Swap calls”
3. Prompt: “Swapping calls.”
Three-way call function
1. Press the talk button with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Join calls”
3. Prompt: “Joining calls”
Making a call using a telephone number
1. Press the talk button with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Dial”
3. Prompt: “Number, please”
4. Say: [Beep] “XXXXXXXXXXX
(Telephone number)”
5. Prompt: “XXXXXXXXXXX.
(Telephone number) After the beep,
continue to add numbers, or say
Go-Back to re-enter the last entered
numbers, or press the Pick-Up button to
execute dialing.”
6. (Dialing)
Press the pick-up button or say “Dial”,
then go to Step 7.
(Adding/inputting telephone
number)
Say, “XXXX” (desired telephone
number), then go to Step 5.
(Telephone number correction)
Say, “Go Back”. The prompt replies,
“Go Back. The last entered numbers
have been removed.”. Then go back to
Step 3.
7. Prompt: “Dialing”
Making calls using the phonebook
1. Press the talk button with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Call”
3. Prompt: “Name please.”
4. Say: [Beep] “XXXXX... (Ex. “John's
phone”)” (Say a voice tag registered in
the phonebook.)
5. Prompt: “Calling XXXXX... (Ex.
“John's phone”) XXXX (Ex. “at
home”). Is this correct?” (Voice tag and
phone number location registered in
phonebook).
6. Say: [Beep] “Yes”
7. Prompt: “Dialing”
Redialing function
1. Press the talk button with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Redial”
3. Prompt: “Dialing”
Ending the current call
Press the hang-up button during the call.
DTMF (Dual Tone MultiFrequency Signal) Transmission
This function is used when transmitting
DTMF via the user's voice. The receiver
of a DTMF transmission is generally a
home telephone answering machine or
a company's automated guidance call
center (When you send tone signals
back according to the voice guidance
recording).
1. Press the talk button with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “XXXX... send” (Say
DTMF code)
3. Prompt: “Sending XXXX... (DTMF
code)”
*Some models.5–102
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Bluetooth ® Hands-Free
(Type B) *
Making a Call
Phonebook Usage
Telephone calls can be made by saying
the contact name in the downloaded
phonebook or the name of a person whose
phone number has been registered in the
Bluetooth® Hands-Free. Refer to Import
contact (Download Phonebook).
1. Press the talk-button.
2. Wait for the beep sound.
3. Say: “Call XXXXX... (Ex. “John”)
Mobile”.
4. Follow the voice guidance to place the
call.
Screen operation
1. Select the icon on the home screen
and display the Communication screen.
2. Select the icon to display the
contact list.
3. Select the contact you would like
to call to display the details for the
contact.
4. Select the desired phone number to
make the call.
Import contact (Download Phonebook)
Phonebook data from your device (Mobile
phone) can be sent and registered to your
Bluetooth® Hands-Free phonebook using
Bluetooth® .
(Automatic downloading)
The “Auto Download Contacts”
setting must be on. When hands-free is
connected to the device, the phonebook is
downloaded automatically.
Refer to Communication Settings on page
5-110 .
(Manually downloading)
If the “Auto Download Contacts” setting
is off, download the phonebook using the
following procedure.
1. Select the icon on the home screen
and display the Communication screen.
2. Select the icon to display the
contact list.
3. Select the icon.
4. Select the icon or
icon to switch to the
device operation.
5. If the icon is selected,
select the icon.
6. Download will be started from the
mobile phone.
NOTE
If the phonebook has been already
registered to the hands-free unit, the
current phonebook is overwritten
during “Import All Contacts”.
A maximum of 1000 contacts can be
registered to the phonebook.
Phonebook, incoming/outgoing call
record, and favorite memories are
exclusive to each mobile phone to
protect privacy.
Redial Function
This voice command places a call to the
last person called.
1. Press the talk button with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Redial”
5–103
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Call back Function
This voice command makes a call to the
last person who called you.
1. Press the talk button with a short press.
2. Say: [Beep] “Call back”
Favorites Contacts
A maximum of 50 contacts can be
registered. It will take less time to make a
call after registering the telephone number.
In addition, you do not have to look for the
person you want to call in the phonebook.
Registering to your favorites
1. Select the icon on the home screen
and display the Communication screen.
2. Select the icon to display the
favorites list.
3. Select the
icon.
4. Select the icon.
5. Select the contact.
NOTE
If the battery is disconnected, your
favorites list will not be deleted.
Making a call from your favorites
1. Select the icon on the home screen
and display the Communication screen.
2. Select the icon to display the
favorites list.
3. (Only one phone number is
registered to contact)
Select the contact information you
would like to call. Go to Step 5.
(Multiple phone numbers are
registered to contact)
Select the contact you would like to
call to display the screen indicating the
details for the contact. Go to Step 4.
4. Select the phone number you would
like to call.
5. Select the icon.
Deleting from your favorites
1. Select the icon on the home screen
and display the Communication screen.
2. Select the icon to display the
favorites list.
3. Select the
icon.
4. Select the icon.
5. Select the contact information which
you would like to delete.
6. Select the icon.
Changing the display order of your
favorites list
1. Select the icon on the home screen
and display the Communication screen.
2. Select the icon to display the
favorites list.
3. Select the
icon.
4. Select the icon.
5. The contact can be moved after it is
selected.
6. Move the contact and select the
icon.
Changing contact name of your
favorites
1. Select the icon on the home screen
and display the Communication screen.
2. Select the icon to display the
favorites list.
3. Select the icon.
4. Select the contact to display the
keyboard screen.
5. If a new name is input and the icon
is selected, the contact name is stored.
5–104
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
NOTE
If the contact is long-pressed when the
favorites list is displayed, the contact
information can be edited (deleted,
moved).
Telephone Number Input
NOTE
Practice this while parked until you are
confi dent you can do it while driving in a
non-taxing road situation. If you are not
completely comfortable, make all calls
from a safe parking position, and only
start driving when you can devote your full
attention to driving.
1. Input the telephone number using the
numerical keypad.
2. Select the icon to make the call.
Numeral or symbol entry
Use the numerical keypad.
Long-press the icon to input +.
Select the icon to delete the currently
input value.
Long-press the icon to delete all input
values.
Mobile 911 (U.S.A./Canada only)
If the vehicle is involved in a moderate
to severe collision, a call is made
automatically to 911 from the connected
device. The “Mobile 911” setting must be
on.
Refer to Communication Settings on page
5-110 .
CAUTION
Mobile 911 is a secondary function
of the audio entertainment system.
Therefore, the Mobile 911 function
cannot assure that a call will always
be made to 911 in the event that the
vehicle is involved in an accident. Also,
a hands-free device must be paired
and connected. The 911 operator can
verify the vehicle's position information
using the GPS on the hands-free device
if equipped. The 911 operator can verify
the vehicle's position information.
Though the system can be set to not call
911, doing so will defeat the purpose
of the system to immediately contact
rescue personnel to assist you after your
accident. For the safety of the driver and
all passengers, Mazda recommends that
the Mobile 911 system remain activated
so that a call will be made to 911 when
needed.
1. If the vehicle is involved in a moderate
to severe collision, notifi cation of the
call to 911 is made via audio and screen
display. To cancel the call, press the
icon or hang-up
button within 10 seconds.
2. If the icon or
hang-up button is not pressed within 10
seconds, the call is made to 911
automatically.
5–105
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Receiving an Incoming Call
When an incoming call is received, the incoming call notifi cation screen is displayed. The
“Incoming Call Notifi cation” setting must be on.
Refer to Communication Settings on page 5-110 .
To accept the call, press the pick-up button or select the icon.
To reject the call, press the hang-up button or select the icon.
The following icons are displayed on the screen during a call. Icons which can be used differ
depending on use conditions.
Icon Function
Displays the Communication menu.
Ends the call.
Transferring a call from hands-free to a mobile phone
Communication between the hands-free unit and a device (Mobile phone) is canceled, and
the line can be switched to the device (Mobile phone) as a standard call.
Transferring a call from a device (mobile phone) to hands-free
Communication between devices (mobile phone) can be switched to Bluetooth ® HandsFree.
Mute
The microphone can be muted during a call.
When selected again, the mute is canceled.
A call is made to other person during a call and a 3-way call can be made. Select the contact
from the following to make a call.
: Call History is displayed.
: The phonebook is displayed.
: The dial pad is displayed. Input the phone number.
The device may be unusable depending on the contractual content.
The call on hold is made to make a 3-way call.
The device may be unusable depending on the contractual content.
Switches the call on hold.
DTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency Signal) Transmission
This function is used when transmitting DTMF via the Numerical Keypad. The receiver of
a DTMF transmission is generally a home telephone answering machine or a company's
automated guidance call center.
Input the number using a numerical keypad.
5–106
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
NOTE
If the ignition is switched off during a
hands-free call, the line is transferred
to the device (Mobile phone)
automatically.
If the DTMF code has two or more
digits or symbols, each one must be
transmitted individually.
Call Interrupt
A call can be interrupted to receive an
incoming call from a third party.
The device may be unusable depending on
the contractual content.
When the icon is selected or
the pick-up button on the steering wheel is
pressed, the current call is held and the
system switches to the new incoming call.
When the icon is selected, the
current call is ended and the system
switches to the new incoming call.
When the icon is selected or the
hang-up button on the steering wheel is
pressed, an incoming call is refused.
5–107
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Receiving and Replying to Messages (available only with Email/SMS
compatible phones)
SMS (Short Message Service) messages,
MMS (Multimedia Messaging Service)
messages, and E-mail received by
connected devices can be downloaded,
displayed, and played (read by the
system).
Additionally, replies can also be made
to calls and messages in the received
messages.
Downloading messages
Up to 20 new messages can be
downloaded and displayed from a
connected device.
NOTE
For e-mail, 20 messages for each account
can be downloaded.
(Automatic downloading)
The “Auto Download Email” (E-mail)
or “Auto Download Text” (SMS/MMS)
setting must be on. When the hands-free
unit is connected to the device, a message
is downloaded automatically.
Refer to Communication Settings on page
5-110 .
(Manually downloading)
When the “Auto Download Email”
(E-mail) or “Auto Download Text” (SMS/
MMS) setting is off, the phonebook
is downloaded using the following
procedure.
1. Select the icon on the home screen
and display the Communication screen.
2. Select the icon or icon to
display the Inbox.
3. Select the icon.
4. Download will be started from the
mobile phone.
NOTE
Attached data is not downloaded.
Messages up to 1 kilobyte (e-mail)/160bytes (SMS/MMS) can be downloaded.
A message list is created for each
device.
If the connected device does not
correspond to MAP 1.0, the AT
command is used to download. The
downloaded message indicates that it is
already read.
Downloading using the AT command
may not function depending on the
connected device.
Receiving messages
(Method 1)
When a device receives a message, a
message received notifi cation is displayed.
The “E-mail/SMS Notifi cations” setting
must be on.
Refer to Communication Settings on page
5-110 .
Select the icon and display the
message.
(Method 2)
1. Select the icon on the home screen
and display the Communication screen.
2. Select the icon and display
the new message list for e-mail and
SMS/MMS.
3. Select the message you would like to
display.
5–108
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
The following icons are displayed in the lower part of the details on the message. Icons
which can be used differ depending on use conditions.
Icon Function
Displays the Communication menu.
Displays the inbox.
Plays back a message.
When selected again, playback is temporarily stopped.
Displays the previous message.
Displays the next message.
Only replies to the sender of the currently displayed message.
Select the sentence on the displayed reply screen and select the sentence for sending from
the preset message.
Select the icon.
(Only E-mail)
Replies to all members including CC.
Select the sentence on the displayed reply screen and select the sentence for sending from
the preset message.
Select the icon.
Makes a call to a person who sent a message.
For E-mail, if a phone number of a person who sent a message is in the phonebook, a call
can be made.
Deletes a message.
The messages stored in a device is also deleted.
NOTE
Up to three preset messages can be selected.
5–109
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Example of use (verify unread E-mail)
1. Select the icon on the home screen
and display the Communication screen.
2. Select the icon to display the
inbox.
3. Select the unread message displayed in
bold.
4. The details of the message are
displayed and replying to the message,
making a call, or playback can be
performed.
Changing account for displaying
(E-mail only)
1. Select the icon.
2. Select the account which you would
like to display. Only the messages for
the selected account are displayed in
the inbox.
Editing preset messages
1. Select the icon on the home screen
and display the Communication screen.
2. Select the icon.
3. Select the icon.
4. Select the preset message which you
would like to edit. The keyboard screen
is displayed.
5. When the message is input and is
selected, the message is stored as a
preset message.
NOTE
Select the icon to change the
language.
Select the icon to switch between
capitalized and lower-case characters.
Select the icon to return to the
previous screen without storing the edit.
5–110
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Communication Settings
Select the icon on the home screen and display the Communication screen.
Select the icon to change the setting.
Item Setting Function
Email/SMS
Notifi cations On/Off Notifi es when a new messages is received.
Incoming Call
Notifi cation On/Off Notifi es when an incoming call is received.
Auto Download Call
history On/Off
Downloads Call History automatically when the hands-free unit is
connected to the device.
Auto Download
Contacts* On/Off
Downloads the phonebook automatically when the hands-free unit is
connected to the device.
Auto Download Text On/Off Downloads SMS/MMS automatically when the hands-free unit is connected to the device.
Auto Download
Email* On/Off
Downloads E-mail automatically when the hands-free unit is connected
to the device.
Ringtone Fixed/In-band/Off Changes the ringtone setting.
Phone Volume Adjusts using the slider. Adjusts the conversation volume.
VR and Ringtone Adjusts using the slider. Adjusts the voice guidance and ringtone volume.
Contacts Sort Order
First Name,
Last Name Displays the contact information in alphabetical order of the fi rst name.
Last Name,
First Name Displays the contact information in alphabetical order of the last name.
Preset Messages —
Edits the preset message.
Refer to Receiving and Replying to Messages (available only with
E-mail/SMS compatible phones) on page 5-107 .
Mobile 911 On/Off Mobile Utilizes the Mobile 911 function.
Reset Communication
Settings — Initializes all Communication Settings.
* Depending on the device, it may be necessary to acquire download permission on the
device side.
5–111
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Audio Operation Using Voice Recognition
Main audio operation
When the talk button is pressed and the following command is spoken out, the audio can be
operated. The commands in the () can be omitted. The specifi ed name and number are put
into the {}.
Voice command Function Corresponding audio source
(Go to/Play) AM (Radio) Switches the audio source to AM radio. All
(Go to/Play) FM (Radio) Switches the audio source to FM radio. All
(Go to/Play) Bluetooth (Audio) Switches the audio source to BT audio. All
(Go to/Play) Pandora Switches the audio source to Pandora ® All
(Go to/Play) Aha (Radio) Switches the audio source to Aha™ Radio. All
(Go to/Play) Stitcher Switches the audio source to Stitcher™ Radio. All
(Go to/Play) USB 1 Switches the audio source to USB 1. All
(Go to/Play) USB 2 Switches the audio source to USB 2. All
Play Playlist {Playlist name} Plays the selected playlist. USB
Play Artist {Artist name} Plays the selected artist. USB
Play Album {Album name} Plays the selected album. USB
Play Genre {Genre name} Plays the selected genre. USB
Play Folder {Folder name} Plays the selected folder. USB
Play Audiobooks Displays the list at the top level of the Audiobooks. USB
Play Podcasts Displays the list at the top level of the Podcasts. USB
NOTE
The above commands are examples of the available commands.
Some commands cannot be used depending on devices and use conditions.
If the Bluetooth ® device, USB, or AUX is not connected, the related commands cannot be
used.
5–112
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Gracenote Database
When a USB device is connected to this unit and the audio is played, the album name,
artist name, genre and title information are automatically displayed if there is a match in
the vehicle's database compilation to the music being played. The information stored in this
device uses database information in the Gracenote music recognition service.
CAUTION
For information related to the most recent Gracenote database which can be used and
how to install it, go to the Mazda Hands Free Website:
http://www.mazdahandsfree.com
Introduction
Music recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote ® . Gracenote is the
industry standard in music recognition technology and related content delivery. For more
information visit www.gracenote.com.
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright © 2000 to present Gracenote.
Gracenote Software, copyright © 2000 to present Gracenote. One or more patents owned
by Gracenote apply to this product and service. See the Gracenote website for a nonexhaustive list of applicable Gracenote patents. Gracenote, CDDB, MusicID, MediaVOCS,
the Gracenote logo and logotype, and the “Powered by Gracenote” logo are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Gracenote in the United States and/or other countries.
Gracenote ® End User License Agreement
This application or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California
(“Gracenote”. The software from Gracenote (the “Gracenote Software” enables this
application to perform disc and/or fi le identifi cation and obtain music-related information,
including name, artist, track, and title information (“Gracenote Data” from online servers
or embedded databases (collectively, “Gracenote Servers” and to perform other functions.
You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End-User functions of this
application or device.
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers
for your own personal non-commercial use only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or
transmit the Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to any third party. YOU AGREE
NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
5–113
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions. If your
license terminates, you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote Servers, including all ownership rights. Under no
circumstances will Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information
that you provide. You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under this Agreement
against you directly in its own name.
The Gracenote service uses a unique identifi er to track queries for statistical purposes. The
purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifi er is to allow the Gracenote service to count
queries without knowing anything about who you are. For more information, see the web
page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote service.
The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.”
Gracenote makes no representations or warranties, express or implied, regarding the
accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves the right
to delete data from the Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any cause that
Gracenote deems suffi cient. No warranty is made that the Gracenote Software or Gracenote
Servers are error-free or that functioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will
be uninterrupted. Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new enhanced or additional
data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the future and is free to discontinue
its services at any time.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT
WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR
LOST REVENUES.
© 2000 to present. Gracenote, Inc.
Updating the database
The Gracenote media database can be updated using USB device.
1. Connect a USB device containing the software for updating Gracenote.
2. Select the icon on the home screen and display the Settings screen.
3. Select the tab and select the icon.
4. Select the icon. The list of the update package stored in the USB device and the
version are displayed.
5. Select the package to use the update.
6. Select the icon.
NOTE
Gracenote can be downloaded from the Mazda Hands-free Website.
*Some models.5–114
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Bluetooth® Audio (Type A) *
Applicable Bluetooth ® specifi cation
Ver. 2.0 or higher
Response profi le
A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution
Profi le) Ver. 1.0/1.2
AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control
Profi le) Ver. 1.0/1.3
A2DP is a profi le which transmits only
audio to the Bluetooth ® unit. If your
Bluetooth® audio device corresponds only
to A2DP, but not AVRCP, you cannot
operate it using the control panel of the
vehicle's audio system. In this case, the
Bluetooth® audio device can be operated
by controlling the device itself, the same
as when a portable audio system without
the Bluetooth ® communication function is
connected to the AUX terminal.
Function A2DP
AVRCP
Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.3
Playback — X X
Pause — X X
File (Track) up/down — X X
Reverse — — X
Fast-forward — — X
Text display — — X
X: Available
—: Not available
NOTE
The battery consumption of Bluetooth ®
audio devices increases while
Bluetooth® is connected.
If a general mobile phone device is
USB connected during music playback
over the Bluetooth ® connection, the
Bluetooth® connection is disconnected.
For this reason, you cannot have music
playback over a Bluetooth ® connection
and music playback using a USB
connection at the same time.
The system may not operate normally
depending on the Bluetooth ® audio
device.
How to Use the Bluetooth ® Audio
System
Switching to Bluetooth ® audio mode
To listen to music or voice audio recorded
to a Bluetooth ® audio device, switch to
the Bluetooth ® audio mode to operate
the audio device using the audio system
control panel. Any Bluetooth ® audio
device must be programmed to the
vehicle's Bluetooth ® unit before it can be
used.
Refer to Bluetooth ® Preparation (Type A)
on page 5-78 .
1. Turn on the Bluetooth ® audio device's
power.
2. Switch the ignition to ACC or ON.
Make sure that the “ ” symbol is
displayed in the audio display. The
symbol is not displayed if an unprogrammed Bluetooth ® audio device
is being used or the vehicle's
Bluetooth® unit has a malfunction.
5–115
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
NOTE
Some Bluetooth ® audio devices need a
certain amount of time before the “ ”
symbol is displayed.
3. Press the media button ( ) to
switch to the Bluetooth ® audio mode
and start playback.
If the current device version is lower
than AVRCP Ver. 1.3: “ BT Audio ” is
displayed.
If the current device is AVRCP Ver. 1.3:
The playback time is displayed.
NOTE
If the Bluetooth ® audio device does not
begin playback, press the Play/Pause
button (4).
If a call is received on a hands-free
mobile phone during playback from
the Bluetooth ® audio device, the
playback is stopped. Playback from the
Bluetooth® audio device resumes after
the call ends.
Playback
1. To listen to a Bluetooth ® audio device
over the vehicle's speaker system,
switch the mode to Bluetooth ®
audio mode. (Refer to “Switching to
Bluetooth® audio mode”)
2. To stop playback, press the Play/Pause
button (4).
3. Press the button again to resume
playback.
Selecting a fi le (track)
Selects the next fi le (track)
Short-press the track up button ( ).
Selects the beginning of the current fi le
(track)
Short-press the track down button ( ).
Fast-forward/Reverse (AVRCP Ver. 1.3)
Fast-forward
Press and hold the fast-forward button
( ).
Reverse
Press and hold the reverse down button
( ).
Switching the display (only AVRCP Ver.
1.3)
For fi les with a song title and other
information that have been input, the
display switches between display of the
song title and other information each
time the text button (3) is pressed during
playback.
Album title
Song title
Artist name
Playback time
NOTE
If title information is not available,
“ NO TITLE ” is displayed.
This unit cannot display some
characters. Characters which cannot be
displayed are indicated by an asterisk
( ).
*Some models.5–116
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Display scroll
Only 13 characters can be displayed at one
time. To display the rest of the characters
of a long title, press and hold the text
button (3). The display scrolls the next 13
characters. Press and hold the text button
(3) again after the last 13 characters have
been displayed to return to the beginning
of the title.
Bluetooth ® Audio Device
Information Display
If a Bluetooth ® audio device is connected,
the following information is displayed in
the audio display.
AVRCP Ver.
lower than 1.3
AVRCP
Ver. 1.3
Device name X X
Title — X
Artist name — X
Album name — X
File number — X
Playback time — X
Folder number — —
X: Available
—: Not available
NOTE
Some information may not display
depending on the device, and if the
information cannot be displayed, “ NO
TITLE ” is indicated.
Bluetooth® Audio (Type B) *
Applicable Bluetooth ® specifi cation
Ver. 2.1 + EDR
Response profi le
A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution
Profi le) Ver. 1.0/1.2
AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control
Profi le) Ver. 1.0/1.3/1.4
A2DP is a profi le which transmits only
audio to the Bluetooth ® unit. If your
Bluetooth® audio device corresponds only
to A2DP, but not AVRCP, you cannot
operate it using the control panel of the
vehicle's audio system. In this case, the
Bluetooth® audio device can be operated
by controlling the device itself, the same
as when a portable audio system without
the Bluetooth ® communication function is
connected to the AUX terminal.
Function A2DP
AVRCP
Ver. 1.0 Ver. 1.3 Ver. 1.4
Playback X X X X
Pause X X X X
File (Track)
up/down — X X X
Reverse — — X X
Fast-forward — — X X
Text display — — X X
Repeat — —
Depends
on device
Depends
on device
Shuffl e — —
Depends
on device
Depends
on device
Scan — —
Depends
on device
Depends
on device
Folder up/
down — — — X
X: Available
—: Not available
5–117
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
NOTE
The battery consumption of Bluetooth ®
audio devices increases while
Bluetooth® is connected.
If a general mobile phone device is
USB connected during music playback
over the Bluetooth ® connection, the
Bluetooth® connection is disconnected.
For this reason, you cannot have music
playback over a Bluetooth ® connection
and music playback using a USB
connection at the same time.
The system may not operate normally
depending on the Bluetooth ® audio
device.
5–118
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
How to Use the Bluetooth ® Audio System
Switching to Bluetooth ® audio mode
To listen to music or voice audio recorded to a Bluetooth ® audio device, switch to the
Bluetooth® audio mode to operate the audio device using the audio system control panel.
Any Bluetooth ® audio device must be programmed to the vehicle's Bluetooth ® unit before it
can be used.
Refer to Bluetooth ® Preparation (Type B) on page 5-92 .
1. Turn on the Bluetooth ® audio device's power.
2. Switch the ignition to ACC or ON.
3. Select the icon on the home screen and display the Audio screen.
4. When Bluetooth ® is selected, switches to the Bluetooth ® audio mode to begin playback.
NOTE
If the Bluetooth ® audio device does not begin playback, select the icon.
If the mode is switched from Bluetooth ® audio mode to another mode (radio mode), audio
playback from the Bluetooth ® audio device stops.
Playback
To listen to a Bluetooth ® audio device over the vehicle's speaker system, switch the mode to
Bluetooth® audio mode. (Refer to “Switching to Bluetooth ® audio mode”)
After switching to the Bluetooth ® audio mode, the following icons are displayed in the
lower part of the display. Icons which can be used differ depending on the version of the
Bluetooth® audio device which you are currently using.
Icon Function
Displays the Audio menu. Use to switch to a different audio source.
(AVRCP Ver. 1.4 only)
Displays the top level folder/fi le list.
Select the folder which you want to select.
The fi les in the selected folder are displayed.
Select the fi le you want to play.
(AVRCP Ver. 1.3 or higher)
Replays the song currently being played repeatedly.
When selected again, the songs in the folder are played repeatedly.
Select it again to cancel.
Icons change when the song is repeated or the folder is repeated.
(AVRCP Ver. 1.3 or higher)
Plays songs in the folder in random order.
When selected again, the songs on the device are played in random order.
Select it again to cancel.
Icons change during folder shuffl e or device shuffl e.
5–119
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Icon Function
Scans the titles in a folder and plays the beginning of each song to aid in fi nding a desired
song.
When selected again, the beginning of each song on the device is played.
When selected again, the operation is canceled and the song currently being played
continues.
Returns to the beginning of the previous song.
Long-press to fast reverse. It stops when you remove your hand from the icon or the
commander knob.
Plays the Bluetooth ® audio. When selected again, playback is temporarily stopped.
Advances to the beginning of the next song.
Long-press to fast forward. It stops when you remove your hand from the icon or the
commander knob.
Adjusts the audio quality level.
Refer to Volume/Display/Sound Controls on page 5-42 .
Example of use (When searching for a
song from the top level of a device)
1. Select the icon and display the
folder/fi le list at the top level.
2. When the folder is selected, folders/fi le
lists in the folder are displayed.
When the playlist is selected, the fi le
list is displayed.
3. Select the desired song.
NOTE
Select the icon to move to a folder one
level higher.
5–120
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Bluetooth ® Audio Device
Information Display
If a Bluetooth ® audio device is connected,
the following information is displayed in
the audio display.
AVRCP
Ver. lower
than 1.3
AVRCP
Ver. 1.3
AVRCP
Ver. 1.4 or
higher
Device name X X X
Remaining
battery
charge of
device
X X X
Song name — X X
Artist name — X X
Album name — X X
Playback
time — X X
Genre name — X X
X: Available
—: Not available
NOTE
Some information may not display
depending on the device, and if the
information cannot be displayed,
“Unknown - - -” is indicated.
*Some models. 5–121
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
How to Use Pandora ®*
What is Pandora ® ?
Pandora ® is free personalized Internet radio. Simply enter a favorite artist, track, genre,
and Pandora ® will create a personalized station that plays their music and more like it.
Rate songs by giving thumbs-up and thumbs-down feedback to further refi ne your station,
discover new music and help Pandora ® play only music you like.
* Pandora ® , the Pandora ® logo, and the Pandora ® trade dress are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Pandora Media, Inc., used with permission.
NOTE
To operate Pandora ® from your Bluetooth ® device, perform the following in advance:
Create Pandora ® account on the Web.
Create Pandora ® station using Pandora ® application.
Install Pandora ® application on your device.
Playback
Select the icon on the home screen and display the Audio screen. When icon is
selected, the following icons are indicated in the bottom part of the audio display.
Icon Function
Displays the Audio menu. Use to switch to a different audio source.
Displays the station list.
Use to switch to other stations.
Thumbs-Down
Press the icon to tell Pandora ® not to play this track.
Thumbs-Up
Press the icon to tell Pandora ® “you like this track” and it helps to bring in more tracks
like it to your station.
Bookmarking
Bookmarks the song or artist currently being played.
Plays the track. When selected again, playback is temporarily stopped.
Goes to the next song.
5–122
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Icon Function
Adjusts the audio quality level.
Refer to Volume/Display/Sound Controls on page 5-42 .
NOTE
The skip function may not be available
depending on the device.
The number of skips is limited by
Pandora® .
If the icon is selected when the skip
song function is running, the next song
is skipped.
Selection from station list
Selection can be made from a programmed
radio station list.
1. Select the icon.
2. Select the desired radio station.
NOTE
When is selected, songs randomly
selected from the radio station list are
played.
Selecting the sort method
The displayed order of the station list can
be changed.
1. Select the icon.
2. Select the icon.
3. Select the icon to display in the
order starting from the newly created
station.
4. Select the icon to display in
alphabetical order.
NOTE
The displayed order of cannot be
changed.
Bookmarking
You can bookmark song or artist to check
out later on the Web.
1. Select the icon.
2. Select to bookmark the
song.
3. Select to bookmark the
artist.
*Some models. 5–123
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
How to Use Aha™*
Aha is an application which can be accessed easily by personalizing various Internet content
such as Internet radio and podcasts.
Stay connected to your friends activities by getting updates from Facebook and Twitter.
Your travel is assisted by locating surrounding restaurants or cafes, or acquiring traffi c
information in real time using the Location Based Services.
For details on Aha, refer to “http://www.aharadio.com/”.
* Aha, the Aha logo, and the Aha trade dress are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Harman International Industries, Inc., used with permission.
NOTE
The service content provided by Aha varies depending on the country in which the user
resides.
To operate Aha from your Bluetooth ® device, perform the following in advance:
Install the Aha application to your device.
Create an Aha account for your device.
Log onto Aha using your device.
Select the preset station on your device.
Playback
Select the icon on the home screen and display the Audio screen. When the icon is
selected, the following icons are displayed at the bottom of the audio display. The displayed
icon differs depending on the selected station.
In addition, icons other than these icons may be displayed.
Icon Function
Displays the Audio menu. Use to switch to a different audio source.
Displays the main menu.
Use to switch to other stations.
Displays the content list.
Use to switch to other desired content on the station.
Reverses for 15 seconds.
Fast-forwards for 30 seconds.
5–124
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Icon Function
Like/Thumbs-Up*
Evaluates the current content as “Like”.
Dislike/Thumbs-Down*
Evaluates the current content as “Dislike”.
Shout
Records voice.
Records voice and posts it as playable audio to Facebook and other social stations.
Map (Only navigation-equipped vehicles)
Sets the destination of the navigation to the location searched using the Location Based
Services.
Call
A call can be made to the telephone number of a shop searched using the Location Based
Services. Can be used only when the connected device is connected as Hands-Free.
Returns to the previous content.
Pauses playback of the content. When selected again, playback resumes.
Goes to the next content.
Adjusts the audio quality level.
Refer to Volume/Display/Sound Controls on page 5-42 .
* Some stations may use alternate variations of Like and Dislike, based on station type or
provider.
Main menu
Select the icon.
Switch the tab and select the station category.
5–125
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Tab Function
Presets Displays the preset station list set on the device. Select the preset station name to play the station content.
Location Based Services
Select the desired station.
Guidance is provided to the searched destination near the vehicle's position.
You can designate desired categories previously set using the fi lter setting
on your device.
NOTE
The available Location Based Services may differ because the services depend on the
content provided by Aha™.
5–126
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Example of use (Location Based
Services)
1. Select the desired station from the
location base service tab on the main
menu.
The destination name or address
playback starts in the order of the
destination name list.
2. Select the icon and display the
content list. Other cafes can be
selected.
Selection of other destinations from the
list can be made.
3. When the icon is selected, the
location of the currently displayed
destination is displayed on the
navigation (only with navigation
system).
4. When the icon is selected, a phone
call is placed to the currently displayed
destination.
Shout
Some social stations, such as Facebook or
Caraoke, support the ability to record and
share voice messages using the “Shout”
function.
1. Select the icon and start the
countdown (3, 2, 1, 0). Recording starts
when the countdown reaches zero.
2. Records voice.
3. Select the icon and store/post the
recording.
NOTE
A maximum of 30 seconds can be
recorded.
Recording is stopped automatically
after 30 seconds have elapsed from
when the recording started. You can
then store or delete the recording.
*Some models. 5–127
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
How to Use Stitcher™* Radio
What is Stitcher™ Radio?
Stitcher™ Radio is an application for streaming Internet radio or podcasts on demand.
Recommended content is automatically selected by registering content which you put into
your favorites, or by pressing the Thumbs-Up or Thumbs-Down button.
For details on Stitcher™ Radio, refer to “http://stitcher.com/”.
* Stitcher™, the Stitcher™ logo, and the Stitcher™ trade dress are trademarks or registered
trademarks of Stitcher, Inc., used with permission.
NOTE
To operate Stitcher™ Radio from your Bluetooth ® device, perform the following in advance:
Install the Stitcher™ Radio application to your device.
Create a Stitcher™ Radio account for your device.
Log onto Stitcher™ Radio using your device.
Playback
Select the Audio screen and display the icon on the home screen. When icon is
selected, the following icons are indicated in the bottom part of the audio display.
Icon Function
Displays the Audio menu. Use to switch to a different audio source.
Displays the station list.
Use to switch to other stations.
Thumbs-Down
Evaluates the current program as “Dislike”.
Thumbs-Up
Evaluates the current program as “Like”.
Adds the current station to your favorites or deletes the current station from your favorites.
Reverses for 30 seconds.
Plays the station. Select it again to pause playback.
Goes to the next station.
5–128
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Icon Function
Adjusts the audio quality level.
Refer to Volume/Display/Sound Controls on page 5-42 .
Station list
1. Select the icon and display the station list.
Favorites station name: Select to display the program registered to your favorites.
Category name: A recommended category selected from your favorites by Stitcher™
is displayed.
Select it to display the category program.
2. Select the program name to play it.
*Some models. 5–129
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Add to your favorites
If the current program has not been
registered to your favorites, it can be
registered to your favorites.
1. Select the icon to display the
favorites station which the registration
can be added.
2. Select the station name which you want
to register.
3. Select the button to add the
program to the selected favorites
station.
NOTE
Multiple favorites stations can be
selected and registered.
Favorites stations registered by
oneself as well those set by default are
displayed.
Delete from your favorites
If the current program has already been
registered to your favorites, the program
can be deleted from your favorites.
1. Select the icon.
2. The program is automatically deleted
from the favorites station.
Troubleshooting (Type A/
Type B) *
Mazda Bluetooth ® Hands-Free
Customer Service
If you have any problems with Bluetooth ® ,
contact with our toll-free customer service
center.
U.S.A.
Phone: 800-430-0153 (Toll-free)
Web: www.MazdaUSA.com/bluetooth
Canada
Phone: 800-430-0153 (Toll-free)
Web: www.mazdahandsfree.ca
Mexico
Center of Attention to Client (CAC)
Phone: 01-800-01-MAZDA (Toll-free)
Web: www.mazdamexico.com.mx
Bluetooth ® Device pairing, connection
problems
Symptom Cause Solution method
Unable to
perform pairing —
First make sure
the device is
compatible with
the Bluetooth ®
unit, and then
check whether
the Bluetooth ®
function and
the Find Mode/
Visible setting *1
on the device
are turned on.
If pairing is still
not possible after
this, contact
an Authorized
Mazda Dealer
or Mazda
Bluetooth®
Hands-Free
Customer
Service.
5–130
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Symptom Cause Solution method
Pairing cannot
be performed
again
The pairing
information
programmed
to the
Bluetooth®
unit or
device is not
recognized
correctly.
Perform
pairing using
the following
procedure.
Clear “Mazda”
stored in the
device.
Perform pairing
again.
Unable to
perform pairing
The
Bluetooth®
function
and the Find
Mode/Visible
setting*1 on
the device
may turn off
automatically
after a period
of time has
elapsed
depending on
the device.
Check whether
the Bluetooth ®
function and
the Find Mode/
Visible setting *1
on the device
are turned on
and pairing or
reconnect.
Does not
connect
automatically
when starting
the engine
Automatically
connects,
but then
disconnects
suddenly
Disconnects
intermittently
The device is
in a location
in which
radio wave
interference
can occur
easily, such
as inside a
bag in a rear
seat, in a rear
pocket of a
pair of pants.
Move the device
to a location in
which radio wave
interference is
less likely to
occur.
Does not
connect
automatically
when starting
the engine
The
programmed
pairing
information is
updated when
the device OS
is updated.
Perform pairing
again.
*1 Setting which detects the existence of a device
external to the Bluetooth ® unit
NOTE
When you update the operating
system of your mobile device (such
as Windows/Android/iOS) the pairing
information may be invalidated.
Therefore, the device may need to be
reprogrammed to the hands-free unit.
If you pair your phone which has
already been paired to your vehicle
more than once in the past, you need to
delete “Mazda” on your mobile device.
Then, execute the Bluetooth ® search
on your mobile device once again, and
pair to a newly detected “Mazda”.
Before you pair your device, make sure
that Bluetooth ® is “ON”, both on your
phone and on the vehicle.
Voice recognition related problems
Symptom Cause Solution method
Poor voice
recognition
Excessive, slow
speech.
Excessive,
forceful speech
(shouting).
Speaking before
the beep sound
has ended.
Loud noise
(speaking or
noise from
outside/inside
vehicle).
Airfl ow from
A/C is blowing
against the
microphone.
Speaking in
off-standard
expressions
(dialect).
Regarding the
causes indicated
on the left, be
careful with
how you speak.
In addition,
when numbers
are spoken in
a sequence,
recognition
ability will
improve if no
stop is placed
between the
numbers.
False
recognition
of numbers
5–131
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Symptom Cause Solution method
Poor voice
recognition
There is a
malfunction in the
microphone.
A poor
connection or
malfunction
with the
microphone
may have
occurred.
Consult an
Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
Phonerelated
voice
recognition
is disabled
There is a problem
with the connection
between the
Bluetooth® unit and
the device.
If there is any
malfunction
after checking
the pairing
situation,
check for
device pairing
or connection
problems.
Names
in the
phonebook
are not
easily
recognized
The Bluetooth ®
system is under a
condition in which
recognition is
diffi cult.
By carrying out
the following
measures,
the rate of
recognition will
improve.
Clear memory
from the
phonebook
which is not
used very
often.
Avoid
shortened
names, use
full names.
(Recognition
improves
the longer
the name is.
By not using
names such
as “Mom”,
“Dad”,
recognition
will improve.)
When
operating
the audio,
a song
name is not
recognized
Song names cannot
be recognized by
voice.

Symptom Cause Solution method
You want
to skip
guidance

Guidance can
be skipped
by quickly
pressing and
releasing the
Talk button.
Regarding problems with calls
Symptom Cause Solution method
When starting
a call, vehicle
noise from the
other party can
be heard
For about three
seconds after
starting a call,
the Bluetooth ®
unit's Noise
Suppression
function
requires time to
adapt to the call
environment.
This does
not indicate a
problem with
the device.
The other party
cannot be heard
or the speaker's
voice is quiet
The volume is
set at zero or
low.
Increase the
volume.
5–132
Interior Features
Bluetooth®
Other problems
Symptom Cause Solution method
The indication
for the
remaining
battery is
different
between the
vehicle and the
device
The indication
method is
different
between the
vehicle and the
device.

When a call
is made from
the vehicle,
the telephone
number is
updated in
the incoming/
outgoing call
record but the
name does not
appear
The number
has not been
registered into
the phonebook.
If the number
has been
registered into
the phonebook,
the incoming/
outgoing
call record is
updated by the
name in the
phonebook
when the engine
is restarted.
The cell phone
does not
synchronize
with the vehicle
regarding the
incoming/
outgoing call
record
Some types
of cell phones
do not
synchronize
automatically.
Operate the
cell phone for
synchronization.
It takes a
long time to
complete the
function for
changing the
language
A maximum of
60 seconds is
required.

*Some models. 5–133
Interior Features
Interior Equipment
Sunvisors
When you need a sunvisor, lower it for use
in front or swing it to the side.
Sunvisor
Side Extension Sunvisors *
The visor extender extends the sunvisor's
range of sun shading.
To use, pull it out.
CAUTION
When moving the sunvisor, retract the
visor extender to its original position.
Otherwise, the visor extender could hit
the rearview mirror.
Vanity Mirrors
To use the vanity mirror, lower the
sunvisor.
If your vehicle is equipped with a vanity
mirror light, it will illuminate when you
open the cover.
To prevent the battery from being
discharged, the vanity mirror will only
illuminate in the tilt range shown below.
off
off
on *Some models.5–134
Interior Features
Interior Equipment
Interior Lights
Overhead Lights
Switch
Position Overhead Lights
Light off
Light is on when any door is open
Light is on or off when the
illuminated entry system is on
Light on
With Map Lights
Front
Rear
Without Map Lights
NOTE
(With map lights)
The map lights and rear overhead light
also turn on and off when the front
overhead light switch is operated.
Map Lights *
When the overhead light switch is in the
door or off position, press the lens to
illuminate the map lights, and then press
the lens again to turn them off.
NOTE
The map lights will not turn off even if the
lens is pressed in the following cases:
The overhead light switch is in the ON
position.
The overhead light switch is in the door
position with the door open.
The illuminated entry system is on.
5–135
Interior Features
Interior Equipment
Luggage Compartment Lights (5–door)
Switch
Position Luggage Compartment Light
Light off
Light on when the liftgate is open
Trunk Light (4–door)
The trunk light is on when the lid is open
and off when it's closed.
NOTE
To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the trunk open
for a long period when the engine is not
running.
Illuminated Entry System
When the illuminated entry system
operates, the overhead light (switch is in
the DOOR position) turn on for:
About 30 seconds after the driver's door
is unlocked and the ignition is switched
off.
About 15 seconds after all doors are
closed and the ignition is switched off.
About 5 seconds after all doors are
closed and the ignition is switched off
when the key is out of the vehicle.
Illuminates for about 15 seconds when
the ignition is returned from ACC to
OFF.
The light also turns off when:
The ignition is switched on and all doors
are closed.
The driver's door is locked.
NOTE
Battery saver
If any door is left open with the
overhead light switch in the DOOR
position, or the liftgate/trunk lid is left
open, the overhead light or luggage
compartment light/trunk light turns
off after about 30 minutes to prevent
battery depletion.
The operation of the illuminated entry
system can be changed.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-12 .
*Some models.5–136
Interior Features
Interior Equipment
Accessory Sockets
Only use genuine Mazdaaccessories or the
equivalent requiring no greater than 120 W
(DC 12 V, 10 A).
Type A
The accessory sockets can be used
regardless of whether the ignition is on or
off.
Type B *
The ignition must be switched to ACC or
ON.
With CD Player
Without CD Player
CAUTION
To prevent accessory socket damage or
electrical failure, pay attention to the
following:
Do not use accessories that require
more than 120 W (DC 12 V, 10 A).
Do not use accessories that are not
genuine Mazda accessories or the
equivalent.
Close the cover when the accessory
socket is not in use to prevent foreign
objects and liquids from getting into
the accessory socket.
Correctly insert the plug into the
accessory socket.
Do not insert the cigarette lighter into
the accessory socket.
5–137
Interior Features
Interior Equipment
Noise may occur on the audio playback
depending on the device connected to
the accessory socket.
Depending on the device connected
to the accessory socket, the vehicle's
electrical system may be aff ected,
which could cause the warning light to
illuminate. Disconnect the connected
device and make sure that the problem
is resolved. If the problem is resolved,
disconnect the device from the socket
and switch the ignition off . If the
problem is not resolved, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
NOTE
To prevent discharging of the battery, do
not use the socket for long periods with the
engine off or idling.
Connecting the accessory socket
1. Open the lid.
2. Pass the connection plug cord through
the cutout of the console and insert the
plug into the accessory socket.
Plug
Cup Holder
WARNING
Never use a cup holder to hold hot
liquids while the vehicle is moving:
Using a cup holder to hold hot
liquids while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. If the contents spill, you
could be scalded.
Do not put anything other than cups or
drink cans in cup holders:
Putting objects other than cups
or drink cans in a cup holder is
dangerous.
During sudden braking or
maneuvering, occupants could be
hit and injured, or objects could be
thrown around the vehicle, causing
interference with the driver and the
possibility of an accident. Only use a
cup holder for cups or drink cans.
Front
*Some models.5–138
Interior Features
Interior Equipment
Rear *
The rear cup holder is on the rear center
armrest.
Bottle Holder
Bottle holders are on the inside of the
doors.
Bottle holder
CAUTION
Do not use the bottle holders for
containers without caps. The contents
may spill when the door is opened or
closed.
*Some models. 5–139
Interior Features
Interior Equipment
Storage Compartments
WARNING
Keep storage boxes closed when
driving:
Driving with the storage boxes open is
dangerous. To reduce the possibility of
injury in an accident or a sudden stop,
keep the storage boxes closed when
driving.
Do not put articles in storage spaces
with no lid:
Putting articles in storage spaces with
no lid is dangerous as they could be
thrown around the cabin if the vehicle
is suddenly accelerated and cause
injury depending on how the article is
stored.
CAUTION
Do not leave lighters or eyeglasses
in the storage boxes while parked
under the sun. A lighter could explode
or the plastic material in eyeglasses
could deform and crack from high
temperature.
Overhead Console *
This console box is designed to store
eyeglasses or other accessories.
Push and release to open.
Glove Compartment
To open the glove compartment, pull the
latch toward you.
To close the glove compartment,
fi rmly press in the center of the glove
compartment lid.
5–140
Interior Features
Interior Equipment
Center Console
To open, pull the release latch.
Storage tray
The storage tray can be removed.
Storage tray
Rear Coat Hooks
WARNING
Never hang heavy or sharp objects on
the assist grips and coat hooks:
Hanging heavy or sharp-ended objects
such as a coat hanger from the assist
grips or coat hooks is dangerous as
they can fl y off and hit an occupant
in the cabin if a curtain air bag was to
deploy, which could result in serious
injury or death.
Always hang clothes on the coat hooks
and the assist grips without hangers.
Coat hook
6–1
6 Maintenance and Care
How to keep your Mazda in top condition.
Essential Information ........................................................................ 6-2
Introduction ................................................................................... 6-2
Scheduled Maintenance ..................................................................... 6-4
Scheduled Maintenance (U.S.A., Canada, and Puerto Rico) ........ 6-4
Scheduled Maintenance (Mexico) .............................................. 6-13
Maintenance Monitor .................................................................. 6-20
Owner Maintenance ......................................................................... 6-22
Owner Maintenance Precautions ................................................ 6-22
Hood ............................................................................................ 6-24
Engine Compartment Overview ................................................. 6-26
Engine Oil ................................................................................... 6-27
Engine Coolant ............................................................................ 6-29
Brake/Clutch Fluid ...................................................................... 6-31
Washer Fluid ............................................................................... 6-31
Body Lubrication ........................................................................ 6-32
Wiper Blades ............................................................................... 6-33
Battery ......................................................................................... 6-37
Battery Replacement ................................................................... 6-39
Tires............................................................................................. 6-41
Light Bulbs .................................................................................. 6-45
Fuses ........................................................................................... 6-58
Appearance Care.............................................................................. 6-63
Exterior Care ............................................................................... 6-63
Interior Care ................................................................................ 6-69
6–2
Maintenance and Care
Essential Information
Introduction
Be extremely careful and prevent injury to yourself and others or damage to your vehicle
when using this manual for inspection and maintenance.
If you are unsure about any procedure it describes, we strongly urge you to have a reliable
and qualifi ed service shop perform the work, preferably an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Factory-trained Mazda technicians and genuine Mazda parts are best for your vehicle.
Without this expertise and the parts that have been designed and made especially for your
Mazda, inadequate, incomplete, and insuffi cient servicing may result in problems. This
could lead to vehicle damage or an accident and injuries.
For expert advice and quality service, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
To continue warranty eligibility and to protect your investment, it is your responsibility to
properly maintain your vehicle according to factory recommended schedules outlined in this
manual. As part of this you must keep your maintenance records, receipts, repair orders and
any other documents as evidence this maintenance was performed. You must present these
documents, should any warranty coverage disagreement occur. Failure to do so can result in
your warranty being voided either in whole or in part.
This evidence may consist of the following:
The Mazda Scheduled Maintenance Record, refer to the Warranty Booklet, must be
completely fi lled out showing mileage, repair order number, date for each service, and
signed by a qualifi ed automotive service technician who service vehicles.
Original copies of repair orders or other receipts that include the mileage and date the
vehicle was serviced. Each receipt should be signed by a qualifi ed automotive service
technician.
For self maintenance, a statement that you completed the maintenance yourself,
displaying mileage and the date the work was performed. Also, receipts for the
replacement parts (fl uid, fi lters, etc.) indicating the date and mileage must accompany this
statement.
NOTE
If you elect to perform maintenance yourself or have your vehicle serviced at a location
other than an Authorized Mazda Dealer, Mazda requires that all fl uids, parts and materials
must meet Mazda standards for durability and performance as described in this manual.
Claims against the warranty resulting from lack of maintenance, as opposed to defective
materials or authorized Mazda workmanship, will not be honored.
6–3
Maintenance and Care
Essential Information
Any auto repair shop using parts equivalent to your Mazda's original equipment may
perform maintenance. But we recommend that it always be done by an Authorized
Mazda Dealer using genuine Mazda parts.
Selecting “Maintenance Monitor” enables the system to notify you of your vehicle's
approaching inspection/servicing period (page 6-20 ).
6–4
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance (U.S.A., Canada, and Puerto
Rico)
Follow Schedule 1 if the vehicle is operated mainly where none of the following conditions
(severe driving conditions)apply.
Repeated short-distance driving
Driving in dusty conditions
Driving with extended use of brakes
Driving in areas where salt or other corrosive materials are used
Driving on rough or muddy roads
Extended periods of idling or low-speed operation
Driving for long periods in cold temperatures or extremely humid climates
Driving in extremely hot conditions
Driving in mountainous conditions continually
If any do apply, follow Schedule 2. (Canada and Puerto Rico residents follow Schedule 2.)
Vehicles using Engine Oil Flexible Maintenance
Engine Oil Flexible Maintenance is available for U.S.A. and Puerto Rico residents whose
vehicle is operated mainly where none of the following conditions apply:
Extended periods of idling or low-speed operation such as police car, taxi or driving
school car
Driving in dusty conditions
If any do apply, follow Schedule 2 with engine oil fi xed maintenance.
Once engine oil fl exible maintenance is selected, the vehicle calculates the remaining oil life
based on engine operating conditions. The vehicle lets you know when an oil change is due
by illuminating the wrench indicator light in the instrument cluster. Change the oil as soon
as possible within the next 500 km (250 miles) or 15 days. Refer page 6-20 for the details.
Mazda Genuine 0W-20 Oil and Castrol ® 0W-20 Oil are required to achieve optimum
performance.
NOTE
Please ensure that the Flexible Oil Maintenance Setting is reset after each Oil and Filter
replacement.
For maintenance guidelines beyond the miles/months listed, follow the maintenance
intervals provided in the Scheduled Maintenance Tables.
6–5
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Schedule 1
U.S.A. residents - Engine oil fl exible maintenance interval
Use when the maintenance monitor for “Oil Change” is set to “Flexible”. For details, see
maintenance monitor. (page 6-20 )
Maintenance Interval
Number of months or kilometers (miles), whichever comes fi rst.
Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
×1000 km 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128
×1000 miles 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
ENGINE
Drive belts I I
Engine oil & fi lter *1 Replace when wrench indicator light is ON. (Max interval: 12 months/16,000km (10,000 miles))
COOLING SYSTEM
Engine coolant
FL22 type *2 Replace at fi rst 192,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years; after that, every 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 5 years.
Others Replace at fi rst 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 4 years; after that, every 2 years.
FUEL SYSTEM
Air fi lter Replace when any equivalent timing of replacing engine oil. (Max interval:36 months/60,000km (37,500 miles))
Fuel lines and hoses *3 I I I I
Hoses and tubes for emission *3 I I
IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plugs Replace every 120,000 km (75,000 miles).
CHASSIS and BODY
Brake lines, hoses and connections I I I I
Disc brakes I I I I I I I I
Tire (Rotation) Rotate every 8,000 km (5,000 miles).
Steering operation and linkages I I I I
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and wheel
bearing axial play I I I I
Driveshaft dust boots I I I I
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body T T T T
Exhaust system and heat shields I I
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Cabin air fi lter Replace when any equivalent timing of replacing engine oil. (Max interval:24 months/48,000km (30,000 miles))
Chart symbols:
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, fi ll up, or replace if necessary.
T: Tighten
6–6
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Remarks:
*1 The engine oil and fi lter must be changed at least once a year or within 16,000km (10,000 miles) since last
engine oil and fi lter change. The system must be reset whenever replacing the engine oil regardless of the
message/wrench indicator light display.
*2 Use FL22 type coolant in vehicles with the inscription “FL22” on the radiator cap itself or the surrounding area.
Use FL22 when replacing the coolant.
*3 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not
void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at the
recommended time or mileage/kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.
6–7
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
U.S.A. residents - Fixed maintenance interval
Use when the maintenance monitor for “Oil Change” is set to “Fixed”. For details, see
maintenance monitor. (page 6-20 )
Maintenance Interval
Number of months or kilometers (miles), whichever comes fi rst.
Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48
×1000 km 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96
×1000 miles 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60
ENGINE
Drive belts I
Engine oil & fi lter R R R R R R R R
COOLING SYSTEM
Engine coolant
FL22 type *1 Replace at fi rst 192,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years; after that, every 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 5 years.
Others Replace at fi rst 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 4 years; after that, every 2 years.
FUEL SYSTEM
Air fi lter R
Fuel lines and hoses *2 I I
Hoses and tubes for emission *2 I
IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plugs Replace every 120,000 km (75,000 miles).
CHASSIS and BODY
Brake lines, hoses and connections I I
Disc brakes I I I I
Tire (Rotation) *3 Rotate every 12,000 km (7,500 miles).
Steering operation and linkages I I
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and wheel
bearing axial play I I
Driveshaft dust boots I I
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body T T
Exhaust system and heat shields Inspect every 72,000 km (45,000 miles) or 5 years.
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Cabin air fi lter R R
Chart symbols:
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, fi ll up, or replace if necessary.
R: Replace
L: Lubricate
T: Tighten
6–8
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Remarks:
*1 Use FL22 type coolant in vehicles with the inscription “FL22” on the radiator cap itself or the surrounding area.
Use FL22 when replacing the coolant.
*2 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not
void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at the
recommended time or mileage/kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.
*3 To equalize tread wear for maintaining good performance in handling and braking, rotate the tires every 12,000
km (7,500 miles). However Mazda recommends to rotate every 8,000km (5,000 miles) to help increase tire life
and distribute wear more evenly.
6–9
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Schedule 2
U.S.A. (severe driving conditions) and Puerto Rico residents
Maintenance Interval
Number of months or kilometers (miles), whichever comes fi rst.
Months 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48
×1000 km 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96
×1000 miles 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
ENGINE
Drive belts I
Engine oil & fi lter
Flexible *1 Replace when wrench indicator light is ON. (Max interval:12 months/16,000km (10,000 miles))
Fixed R R R R R R R R R R R R
COOLING SYSTEM
Engine coolant
FL22 type *2 Replace at fi rst 192,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years; after that, every 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 5 years.
Others Replace at fi rst 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 4 years; after that, every 2 years.
Engine coolant level I I I I I I I I I I I I
FUEL SYSTEM
Air fi lter
U.S.A.
(severe
driving
conditions)
R
Puerto Rico R R
Fuel lines and hoses *3 I I
Hoses and tubes for emission *3 I
IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plugs Replace every 120,000 km (75,000 miles).
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Function of all lights I I I I I I I I I I I I
CHASSIS and BODY
Brake lines, hoses and connections I I
Brake and clutch fl uid level I I I I I I I I I I I I
Disc brakes I I I I
Tire (Rotation) Rotate every 8,000 km (5,000 miles).
Tire infl ation pressure and tire wear I I I I I I I I I I I I
Steering operation and linkages I I
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and wheel
bearing axial play I I
Driveshaft dust boots I I
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body T T
6–10
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Maintenance Interval
Number of months or kilometers (miles), whichever comes fi rst.
Months 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48
×1000 km 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96
×1000 miles 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
Exhaust system and heat shields Inspect every 72,000 km (45,000 miles) or 5 years.
All locks and hinges L L L L L L L L L L L L
Washer fl uid level I I I I I I I I I I I I
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Cabin air fi lter Replace every 40,000 km (25,000 miles) or 2 years.
Chart symbols:
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, fi ll up, or replace if necessary.
R: Replace
L: Lubricate
T: Tighten
Remarks:
*1 Engine oil fl exible maintenance is available for U.S.A. and Puerto Rico residents whose vehicle is operated
mainly where none of the following conditions apply.
Extended periods of idling or low-speed operation such as police car, taxi or driving school car
Driving in dusty conditions
If any do apply, follow fi xed maintenance.
The engine oil and fi lter must be changed at least once a year or within 16,000 km (10,000 miles) since last
engine oil and fi lter change. The system must be reset whenever replacing the engine oil regardless of the
message/wrench indicator light display.
*2 Use FL22 type coolant in vehicles with the inscription “FL22” on the radiator cap itself or the surrounding area.
Use FL22 when replacing the coolant.
*3 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not
void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at the
recommended time or mileage/kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.
6–11
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Canada residents
Maintenance Interval
Number of months or kilometers (miles), whichever comes fi rst.
Months 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48
×1000 km 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96
×1000 miles 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
ENGINE
Drive belts I
Engine oil & fi lter R R R R R R R R R R R R
COOLING SYSTEM
Engine coolant
FL22 type *1 Replace at fi rst 192,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years; after that, every 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 5 years.
Others Replace at fi rst 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 4 years; after that, every 2 years.
Engine coolant level I I I I I I I I I I I I
FUEL SYSTEM
Air fi lter R
Fuel lines and hoses *2 I I
Hoses and tubes for emission *2 I
IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plugs Replace every 120,000 km (75,000 miles).
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Function of all lights I I I I I I I I I I I I
CHASSIS and BODY
Brake lines, hoses and connections I I
Brake and clutch fl uid level I I I I I I I I I I I I
Disc brakes I I I I
Tire (Rotation) Rotate every 8,000 km (5,000 miles).
Tire infl ation pressure and tire wear I I I I I I I I I I I I
Steering operation and linkages I I
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and wheel
bearing axial play I I
Driveshaft dust boots I I
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body T T
Body condition (for rust, corrosion and
perforation) I I I I
Exhaust system and heat shields Inspect every 72,000 km (45,000 miles) or 5 years.
All locks and hinges L L L L L L L L L L L L
Washer fl uid level I I I I I I I I I I I I
6–12
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Maintenance Interval
Number of months or kilometers (miles), whichever comes fi rst.
Months 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48
×1000 km 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96
×1000 miles 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Cabin air fi lter Replace every 40,000 km (25,000 miles) or 2 years.
Chart symbols:
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, fi ll up, or replace if necessary.
R: Replace
L: Lubricate
T: Tighten
Remarks:
*1 Use FL22 type coolant in vehicles with the inscription “FL22” on the radiator cap itself or the surrounding area.
Use FL22 when replacing the coolant.
*2 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not
void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at the
recommended time or mileage/kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.
6–13
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Scheduled Maintenance (Mexico)
Follow Schedule 1 if the vehicle is operated mainly where none of the following conditions
(severe driving conditions) apply.
Repeated short-distance driving
Driving in dusty conditions
Driving with extended use of brakes
Driving in areas where salt or other corrosive materials are used
Driving on rough or muddy roads
Extended periods of idling or low-speed operation
Driving for long periods in cold temperatures or extremely humid climates
Driving in extremely hot conditions
Driving in mountainous conditions continually
If any do apply, follow Schedule 2.
NOTE
For maintenance guidelines beyond the kilometers/months listed, follow the maintenance
intervals provided in the Scheduled Maintenance Tables.
6–14
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Schedule 1
Maintenance Interval
Number of months or kilometers, whichever comes fi rst
Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72
×1000 km 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
ENGINE
Drive belts I I I
Engine oil R R R R R R R R R R R R
Engine oil fi lter R R R R R R R R R R R R
COOLING SYSTEM
Cooling system I I I
Engine coolant
FL22 type *1 Replace at fi rst 200,000 km or 10 years; after that, every 100,000 km or 5 years
Others Replace every 2 years
FUEL SYSTEM
Air fi lter R R R R R R
Fuel lines and hoses I *2 I *2 I
Hoses and tubes for emission I *2 I *2 I
Fuel fi lter Replace every 60,000 km
IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plugs Replace every 120,000 km
CHASSIS and BODY
Brake lines, hoses and connections I I I I I I
Brake and clutch fl uid level I I I I I I I I I
Brake fl uid R R R
Disc brakes I I I I I I I I I I I I
Tire (Rotation) Rotate every 10,000 km
Tire infl ation pressure and tire wear I I I I I I I I I I I I
Steering operation and linkages I I I I I I I I I I I I
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and wheel
bearing axial play I I I I I I
Driveshaft dust boots I I I I I I
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body T T T T T T
Exhaust system and heat shields I I I I I I
All locks and hinges L L L L L L L L L L L L
Washer fl uid level I I I I I I I I I I I I
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Cabin air fi lter R R R
6–15
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Chart symbols:
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, fi ll up, or replace if necessary.
R: Replace
L: Lubricate
T: Tighten
Remarks:
*1 Use FL22 type coolant in vehicles with the inscription “FL22” on the radiator cap itself or the surrounding area.
Use FL22 when replacing the coolant.
*2 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not
void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at the
recommended time or kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.
6–16
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Schedule 2
Maintenance Interval
Number of months or kilometers, whichever comes fi rst
Months 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36
×1000 km 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
ENGINE
Drive belts I
Engine oil R R R R R R R R R R R R
Engine oil fi lter R R R R R R R R R R R R
COOLING SYSTEM
Cooling system I
Engine coolant
FL22 type *1 Replace at fi rst 200,000 km or 10 years; after that, every 100,000 km or 5 years
Others Replace every 2 years
Engine coolant level I I I I I I I I I I I I
FUEL SYSTEM
Air fi lter C R C R C R
Fuel lines and hoses I *2
Hoses and tubes for emission I *2
Fuel fi lter Replace every 60,000 km
IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plugs Replace every 120,000 km
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Function of all lights I I I I I I I I I I I I
CHASSIS and BODY
Brake lines, hoses and connections I I I
Brake and clutch fl uid level I I I I I
Brake fl uid R
Disc brakes I I I I I I
Tire (Rotation) Rotate every 10,000 km
Tire infl ation pressure and tire wear I I I I I I
Steering operation and linkages I I I I I I
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and wheel
bearing axial play I I I
Driveshaft dust boots I I I
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body T T T
Exhaust system and heat shields I I I
All locks and hinges L L L L L L
Washer fl uid level I I I I I I
6–17
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Maintenance Interval
Number of months or kilometers, whichever comes fi rst
Months 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36
×1000 km 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Cabin air fi lter R R R
Chart symbols:
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, fi ll up, or replace if necessary.
R: Replace
L: Lubricate
C: Clean
T: Tighten
Remarks:
*1 Use FL22 type coolant in vehicles with the inscription “FL22” on the radiator cap itself or the surrounding area.
Use FL22 when replacing the coolant.
*2 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not
void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at the
recommended time or kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.
6–18
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
(Cont.)
Maintenance Interval
Number of months or kilometers, whichever comes fi rst
Months 39 42 45 48 51 54 57 60 63 66 69 72
×1000 km 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120
ENGINE
Drive belts I I
Engine oil R R R R R R R R R R R R
Engine oil fi lter R R R R R R R R R R R R
COOLING SYSTEM
Cooling system I I
Engine coolant
FL22 type *1 Replace at fi rst 200,000 km or 10 years; after that, every 100,000 km or 5 years
Others Replace every 2 years
Engine coolant level I I I I I I I I I I I I
FUEL SYSTEM
Air fi lter C R C R C R
Fuel lines and hoses I *2 I
Hoses and tubes for emission I *2 I
Fuel fi lter Replace every 60,000 km
IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plugs Replace every 120,000 km
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Function of all lights I I I I I I I I I I I I
CHASSIS and BODY
Brake lines, hoses and connections I I I
Brake and clutch fl uid level I I I I
Brake fl uid R R
Disc brakes I I I I I I
Tire (Rotation) Rotate every 10,000 km
Tire infl ation pressure and tire wear I I I I I I
Steering operation and linkages I I I I I I
Front and rear suspension, ball joints and wheel
bearing axial play I I I
Driveshaft dust boots I I I
Bolts and nuts on chassis and body T T T
Exhaust system and heat shields I I I
All locks and hinges L L L L L L
Washer fl uid level I I I I I I
6–19
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Maintenance Interval
Number of months or kilometers, whichever comes fi rst
Months 39 42 45 48 51 54 57 60 63 66 69 72
×1000 km 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Cabin air fi lter R R R
Chart symbols:
I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, fi ll up, or replace if necessary.
R: Replace
L: Lubricate
C: Clean
T: Tighten
Remarks:
*1 Use FL22 type coolant in vehicles with the inscription “FL22” on the radiator cap itself or the surrounding area.
Use FL22 when replacing the coolant.
*2 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will not
void your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed at the
recommended time or kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.
6–20
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Maintenance Monitor
Maintenance Monitor (Type A audio)
“Oil Change” with a fl exible setting *1 is available. Consult your Authorized Mazda Dealer
when you want to change the setting *2 . Once the system turns on, the wrench indicator light
in the instrument cluster will be illuminated when remaining oil life becomes less than 500
km (250 mile), or remaining days are less than 15 (whichever comes fi rst).
Reset method
Press and hold the TRIP button with the ignition switched off, then switch it on. Keep
pressing the TRIP button for more than 5 seconds. The master warning light will fl ash for a
few seconds when the reset is completed.
*1 The fl exible setting is available in the United States and Puerto Rico. Based on the
engine operating conditions, the onboard computer in your vehicle calculates the
remaining oil life. Mazda Genuine 0W-20 oil and Castrol ® 0W-20 oil are required to
achieve optimum calculation performance.
*2 Once the Flexible Oil Maintenance Setting is selected, the system must be reset
whenever replacing the engine oil.
Maintenance Monitor (Type B audio)
1. Select the icon on the home screen to display the “Applications” screen.
2. Select the “Maintenance” to display the maintenance list screen.
3. Switch the tab and select the setting item you want to change.
You can customize settings in the setup display as follows:
Tab Item Explanation
Scheduled
Maintenance
Setting interval Notifi cation can be switched on/off.
Time (months) Displays the time or distance until maintenance is due.
Select this item to set the maintenance period.
“Scheduled Maintenance Due!” is displayed in red and
the wrench indicator light in the instrument cluster will be
illuminated when the remaining distance is less than 500 km
(250 miles), or the remaining number of days is less than 15
(whichever comes fi rst).
Distance (mile or km)
Reset
Resets the time and distance to the initial values.
Once the system turns on, it needs to be reset whenever
carrying out maintenance.
6–21
Maintenance and Care
Scheduled Maintenance
Tab Item Explanation
Tire Rotation
Setting interval Notifi cation can be switched on/off.
Distance (mile or km)
Displays the distance until tire rotation is due.
Select this item to set the tire rotation distance.
“Tire Rotation Due!” is displayed in red and the wrench
indicator light in the instrument cluster will be illuminated
when the remaining distance is less than 500 km (250 miles).
Reset
Resets the remaining distance to the initial value.
Once the system turns on, it needs to be reset whenever rotating
the tires.
Oil Change
Setting interval
Oil replacement period can be selected from the fl exible setting
or fi xed setting, or it can be set to non-display.
The fl exible setting is available only in the United States and
Puerto Rico. Once engine oil fl exible maintenance is selected,
the vehicle calculates the remaining oil life based on the engine
operating conditions. The vehicle lets you know when an oil
change is due by illuminating the wrench indicator light in the
instrument cluster. Mazda Genuine 0W-20 oil and Castrol ® 0W20 oil are required to achieve optimum performance.
Distance (mile or km)
(Displays only in fi xed
setting)
Displays the distance until the oil replacement is due.
Select this item to set the oil replacement distance.
“Oil Change Due!” is displayed in red and the wrench indicator
light in the instrument cluster will be illuminated when the
remaining distance is less than 500 km (250 miles).
Oil life (%)
(Displays only in fl exible
setting)
Displays the engine oil life until the oil replacement is due.
“Oil Change Due!” is displayed in red and the wrench indicator
light in the instrument cluster will be illuminated when the
remaining oil life distance is less than 500 km (250 mile), or
remaining days are less than 15 (whichever comes fi rst).
Reset
In fl exible setting: Resets the remaining oil life to 100%.
In fi xed setting: Resets the remaining distance to the initial
value.
Once the Flexible Oil Maintenance Setting is selected, the
system must be reset whenever replacing the engine oil.
6–22
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Owner Maintenance Precautions
The owner or a qualifi ed service technician should make these vehicle inspections at the
indicated intervals to ensure safe and dependable operation.
Bring any problem to the attention of an Authorized Mazda Dealer or qualifi ed service
technician as soon as possible.
When Refueling
Brake and clutch fl uid level (page 6-31 )
Engine coolant level (page 6-29 )
Engine oil level (page 6-28 )
Washer fl uid level (page 6-31 )
At Least Monthly
Tire infl ation pressures (page 6-41 )
At Least Twice a Year (For Example, Every Spring and Fall)
You can do the following scheduled maintenance items if you have some mechanical ability
and a few basic tools and if you closely follow the directions in this manual.
Engine coolant (page 6-29 )
Engine oil (page 6-27 )
Improper or incomplete service may result in problems. This section gives instructions only
for items that are easy to perform.
As explained in the Introduction (page 6-2 ), several procedures can be done only by a
qualifi ed service technician with special tools.
Improper owner maintenance during the warranty period may affect warranty coverage.
Refer to Introduction (page 6-2 ) for owner's responsibility in protecting your investment.
For details, read the separate Mazda Warranty statement provided with the vehicle. If you
are unsure about any servicing or maintenance procedure, have it done by an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
There are strict environmental laws regarding the disposal of waste oil and fl uids. Please
dispose of your waste properly and with due regard to the environment.
We recommend that you entrust the oil and fl uid changes of your vehicle to an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
6–23
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
WARNING
Do not perform maintenance work if you lack suffi cient knowledge and experience
or the proper tools and equipment to do the work. Have maintenance work done by a
qualifi ed technician:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle is dangerous if not done properly. You can be
seriously injured while performing some maintenance procedures.
If you must run the engine while working under the hood, make certain that you
remove all jewelry (especially rings, bracelets, watches, and necklaces) and all
neckties, scarves, and similar loose clothing before getting near the engine or cooling
fan which may turn on unexpectedly:
Working under the hood with the engine running is dangerous. It becomes even more
dangerous when you wear jewelry or loose clothing.
Either can become entangled in moving parts and result in injury.
Switch the ignition to off and make sure the fan is not running before attempting
to work near the cooling fan:
Working near the cooling fan when it is running is dangerous. The fan could continue
running indefi nitely even if the engine has stopped and the engine compartment
temperature is high. You could be hit by the fan and seriously injured.
Do not leave items in the engine compartment:
After you have fi nished checking or doing servicing in the engine compartment, do not
forget and leave items such as tools or rags in the engine compartment.
Tools or other items left in the engine compartment could cause engine damage or a fi re
leading to an unexpected accident.
6–24
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Hood
WARNING
Always check that the hood is closed
and securely locked:
A hood that is not closed and securely
locked is dangerous as it could fl y open
while the vehicle is moving and block
the driver's vision which could result in
a serious accident.
Opening the Hood
1. With the vehicle parked, pull the
release handle to unlock the hood.
Release handle
2. Insert your hand into the hood opening,
slide the latch lever to the right, and lift
up the hood.
Lever
NOTE
The lever is located a little to the left of
center when facing the vehicle.
3. Grasp the support rod in the padded
area and secure it in the support rod
hole indicated by the arrow to hold the
hood open.
Pad
Clip
Clip
Support rod
Closing the Hood
1. Check under the hood area to make
certain all fi ller caps are in place and all
loose items (e.g. tools, oil containers,
etc.) have been removed.
6–25
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
2. Lift the hood, grasp the padded area on
the support rod, and secure the support
rod in the clip. Verify that the support
rod is secured in the clip before closing
the hood.
ClipClip
Clip
3. Lower the hood slowly to a height of
about 20 cm (7.9 in) above its closed
position and then let it drop.
CAUTION
When closing the hood, do not push
it excessively such as by applying your
weight. Otherwise, the hood could be
deformed.
6–26
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Engine Compartment Overview
Windshield washer fluid reservoir Brake/Clutch fluid reservoir
Engine oil dipstick Battery Fuse block
Cooling system cap Engine coolant reservoir
Engine oil-filler cap
6–27
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Engine Oil
NOTE
Changing the engine oil should be
performed by an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
Refer to Introduction (page 6-2 ) for
owner's responsibility in protecting your
investment.
Recommended Oil
U.S.A., Canada, and Puerto Rico
Use SAE 0W-20 engine oil.
Mazda Genuine Oil is used in your
Mazda vehicle. Mazda Genuine 0W-20
Oil is required to achieve optimum fuel
economy.
For maintenance service, Mazda
recommends Mazda Genuine Parts and
Castrol® (U.S.A. only).
(ILSAC)
Only use SAE 0W-20 oil “Certifi ed For
Gasoline Engines” by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
Oil with this trademark symbol conforms
to the current engine and emission system
protection standards and fuel economy
requirements of the International Lubricant
Standardization and Approval Committee
(ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese
automobile manufacturers.
806040200–40 –20
30
120100
504020100–10–20–30–40
6–28
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Except U.S.A., Canada, and Puerto Rico
Use SAE 5W-30 engine oil.
Oil container labels provide important
information.
A chief contribution this type of oil makes
to fuel economy is reducing the amount of
fuel necessary to overcome engine friction.
For maintenance service, Mazda
recommends Mazda Genuine Parts and
Castrol® (Mexico only).
(ILSAC)
(Mexico)
Use SAE 5W-30 engine oil. If SAE 5W-30
engine oil is not available, use SAE 5W-20
engine oil.
The quality designation SM, or ILSAC
must be on the label.
806040200–40 –20
30
120100
504020100–10–20–30–40
Inspecting Engine Oil Level
1. Be sure the vehicle is on a level
surface.
2. Warm up the engine to normal
operating temperature.
3. Turn it off and wait at least 5 minutes
for the oil to return to the oil pan.
4. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, and
reinsert it fully.
Full
OK
Low
5. Pull it out again and examine the level.
The level is normal if it is between
Low and Full.
If it is near or below Low, add enough
oil to bring the level to Full.
6–29
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
CAUTION
Do not add engine oil over Full. This
may cause engine damage.
6. Make sure the O-ring on the dipstick is
positioned properly before reinserting
the dipstick.
7. Reinsert the dipstick fully.
Engine Coolant
Inspecting Coolant Level
WARNING
Do not use a match or live fl ame in the
engine compartment. DO NOT ADD
COOLANT WHEN THE ENGINE IS HOT:
A hot engine is dangerous. If the
engine has been running, parts of the
engine compartment can become very
hot. You could be burned. Carefully
inspect the engine coolant in the
coolant reservoir, but do not open it.
Switch the ignition to off and make
sure the fan is not running before
attempting to work near the cooling
fan:
Working near the cooling fan when it
is running is dangerous. The fan could
continue running indefi nitely even if
the engine has stopped and the engine
compartment temperature is high. You
could be hit by the fan and seriously
injured.
Do not remove either cooling
system cap when the engine and
radiator are hot:
When the engine and radiator are hot,
scalding coolant and steam may shoot
out under pressure and cause serious
injury.
NOTE
Changing the coolant should be done by
an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
6–30
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Inspect the antifreeze protection and
coolant level in the coolant reservoir at
least once a year—at the beginning of the
winter season—and before traveling where
temperatures may drop below freezing.
Inspect the condition and connections of
all cooling system and heater hoses.
Replace any that are swollen or
deteriorated.
The coolant should be at full in the
radiator and between the F and L marks
on the coolant reservoir when the engine
is cool.
If it is at or near L, add enough coolant to
the coolant reservoir to provide freezing
and corrosion protection and to bring the
level to F.
Securely tighten the coolant reservoir tank
cap after adding coolant.
CAUTION
Radiator coolant will damage paint.
Rinse it off quickly if spilled.
Use only soft (demineralized) water in
the coolant mixture. Water that contains
minerals will cut down on the coolant's
eff ectiveness.
Do not add only water. Always add a
proper coolant mixture.
The engine has aluminum parts and
must be protected by an ethyleneglycol-based coolant to prevent
corrosion and freezing.
DO NOT USE coolants Containing
Alcohol, methanol, Borate or Silicate.
These coolants could damage the
cooling system.
DO NOT MIX alcohol or methanol with
the coolant. This could damage the
cooling system.
Do not use a solution that contains
more than 60% antifreeze.
This would reduce eff ectiveness.
NOTE
If the “FL22” mark is shown on or near
the cooling system cap, it is recommended
to use Mazda Genuine FL22 engine
coolant.
If the coolant reservoir is empty or new
coolant is required frequently, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
6–31
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Brake/Clutch Fluid
Inspecting Brake/Clutch Fluid
Level
WARNING
If the brake/clutch fl uid level is low, have
the brakes inspected:
A low brake/clutch fl uid level is
dangerous.
A low level could indicate brake lining
wear or a brake system leak which
could cause the brakes to fail and lead
to an accident.
The brakes and clutch draw fl uid from the
same reservoir.
Inspect the fl uid level in the reservoir
regularly. It should be kept between the
MAX and MIN lines.
The level normally drops with
accumulated distance, a condition
associated with wear of brake and clutch
linings. If it is excessively low, have
the brake/clutch system inspected by an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Washer Fluid
Inspecting Washer Fluid Level
WARNING
Use only windshield washer fl uid or
plain water in the reservoir:
Using radiator antifreeze as washer
fl uid is dangerous. If sprayed on the
windshield, it will dirty the windshield,
aff ect your visibility, and could result in
an accident.
Using Washer Fluid Without Anti-freeze
Protection in Cold Weather:
Operating your vehicle in temperatures
below 4 degrees C (40 degrees F)
using washer fl uid without anti-freeze
protection is dangerous as it could
cause impaired windshield vision and
result in an accident. In cold weather,
always use washer fl uid with antifreeze protection.
NOTE
State or local regulations may restrict the
use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs),
which are commonly used as anti-freeze
agents in washer fl uid. A washer fl uid with
limited VOC content should be used only
if it provides adequate freeze resistance
for all regions and climates in which the
vehicle will be operated.
6–32
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Inspect fl uid level in the washer fl uid
reservoir; add fl uid if necessary.
L
Use plain water if washer fl uid is
unavailable.
But use only washer fl uid in cold weather
to prevent it from freezing.
NOTE
Front and rear washer fl uid is supplied
from the same reservoir.
Body Lubrication
All moving points of the body, such as
door and hood hinges and locks, should
be lubricated each time the engine oil is
changed. Use a nonfreezing lubricant on
locks during cold weather.
Make sure the hood's secondary latch
keeps the hood from opening when the
primary latch is released.
6–33
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Wiper Blades
CAUTION
Hot waxes applied by automatic car
washers have been known to aff ect the
wiper's ability to clean windows.
To prevent damage to the wiper blades,
do not use gasoline, kerosene, paint
thinner, or other solvents on or near
them.
When the wiper lever is in the AUTO
position and the ignition is switched ON,
the wipers may move automatically in
the following cases:
If the windshield above the rain
sensor is touched.
If the windshield above the rain
sensor is wiped with a cloth.
If the windshield is struck with a hand
or other object.
If the rain sensor is struck with a hand
or other object from inside the vehicle.
Be careful not to pinch hands or fi ngers
as it may cause injury, or damage the
wipers. When washing or servicing the
vehicle, make sure the wiper lever is in
the OFF position.
Contamination of either the windshield or
the blades with foreign matter can reduce
wiper effectiveness. Common sources are
insects, tree sap, and hot wax treatments
used by some commercial car washes.
If the blades are not wiping properly,
clean the window and blades with a good
cleaner or mild detergent; then rinse
thoroughly with clean water. Repeat if
necessary.
Replacing Windshield Wiper
Blades
When the wipers no longer clean well, the
blades are probably worn or cracked.
Replace them.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper arms
and other components, do not try to
sweep the wiper arm by hand.
NOTE
To prevent damage to the wiper arm
blades when raising both the driver and
passenger side wiper arms, raise the
driver side wiper arm fi rst. Conversely,
when setting down the wiper arms, set the
passenger side wiper arm down fi rst.
1. Raise the wiper arm.
2. Open the clip and slide the blade
assembly in the direction of the arrow.
6–34
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
3. Tilt the blade assembly and remove it
from the arm.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the windshield
let the wiper arm down easily, do not
let it slap down on the windshield.
4. Pull down the blade rubber and slide it
out of blade holder.
5. Remove the metal stiffeners from each
blade rubber and install them in the
new blade.
CAUTION
Do not bend or discard the stiff eners.
You need to use them again.
If the metal stiff eners are switched,
the blade's wiping effi ciency could be
reduced.
So do not use the driver's side metal
stiff eners on the passenger's side, or vice
versa.
Be sure to reinstall the metal stiff eners in
the new blade rubber so that the curve
is the same as it was in the old blade
rubber.
6. Carefully insert the new blade rubber.
Then install the blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
6–35
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Replacing Rear Window Wiper
Blade (5-Door)
When the wiper no longer cleans well, the
blade is probably worn or cracked.
Replace it.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper arm
and other components, do not move
the wiper by hand.
1. Remove the cover and raise the wiper
arm.
2. Firmly rotate the wiper blade to the
right until it unlocks, then remove the
blade.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the rear window,
do not let the wiper arm fall on it.
3. Pull down the blade rubber and slide it
out of the blade holder.
4. Remove the metal stiffeners from the
blade rubber and install them in the
new blade.
CAUTION
Do not bend or discard the stiff eners.
You need to use them again.
6–36
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
5. Carefully insert the new blade rubber.
Then install the blade assembly in the
reverse order of removal.
6–37
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Battery
WARNING
Wash hands after handling the battery and related accessories:
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Read the following precautions carefully before using the battery or inspecting
to ensure safe and correct handling:
Always wear eye protection when working near the battery:
Working without eye protection is dangerous. Battery fl uid contains SULFURIC ACID
which could cause blindness if splashed into your eyes. Also, hydrogen gas produced
during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode.
Wear eye protection and protective gloves to prevent contact with battery fl uid:
Spilled battery fl uid is dangerous.
Battery fl uid contains SULFURIC ACID which could cause serious injuries if it gets in eyes,
or on the skin or clothing. If this happens, immediately fl ush your eyes with water for 15
minutes or wash your skin thoroughly and get medical attention.
Always keep batteries out of the reach of children:
Allowing children to play near batteries is dangerous. Battery fl uid could cause serious
injuries if it gets in the eyes or on the skin.
Keep fl ames and sparks away from open battery cells and do not allow metal
tools to contact the positive ( ) or negative ( ) terminal of the battery when working
near a battery. Do not allow the positive ( ) terminal to contact the vehicle body:
Flames and sparks near open battery cells are dangerous. Hydrogen gas, produced
during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode. An
exploding battery can cause serious burns and injuries. Keep all fl ames including
cigarettes and sparks away from open battery cells.
Keep all fl ames, including cigarettes, and sparks away from open battery cells:
Flames and sparks near open battery cells are dangerous. Hydrogen gas, produced
during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode. An
exploding battery can cause serious burns and injuries.
6–38
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
NOTE
Before performing battery maintenance, remove the battery cover by pulling the tab.
Tab
Battery Maintenance
To get the best service from a battery:
Keep it securely mounted.
Keep the top clean and dry.
Keep terminals and connections clean,
tight, and coated with petroleum jelly or
terminal grease.
Rinse off spilled electrolyte immediately
with a solution of water and baking
soda.
If the vehicle will not be used for an
extended time, disconnect the battery
cables and charge the battery every six
weeks.
When replacing the battery, refer to the
specifi cation charts (page 9-4 ).
6–39
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Battery Replacement
If the buttons on the transmitter are
inoperable and the operation indicator
light does not fl ash, the battery may be
dead.
Replace with a new battery before the
transmitter becomes unusable.
CAUTION
Make sure the battery is installed
correctly. Battery leakage could occur if
it is not installed correctly.
When replacing the battery, be careful
not to touch any of the internal circuitry
and electrical terminals, bend the
electrical terminals, or get dirt in the
transmitter as the transmitter could be
damaged.
There is the danger of explosion if the
battery is not correctly replaced.
Dispose of used batteries according to
the following instructions.
Insulate the plus and minus terminals
of the battery using cellophane or
equivalent tape.
Never disassemble.
Never throw the battery into fi re or
water.
Never deform or crush.
Replace only with the same type battery
(CR2025 or equivalent).
The following conditions indicate that the
battery power is low:
The KEY indicator light (green) fl ashes
in the instrument cluster for about 30
seconds after the engine is turned off.
The system does not operate and
the operation indicator light on the
transmitter does not fl ash when the
buttons are pressed.
The system's operational range is
reduced.
Replacing the battery at an Authorized
Mazda Dealer is recommended to prevent
damage to the key. If replacing the battery
by yourself, follow the instruction below.
Replacing the key battery
1. Pull out the auxiliary key.
2. Insert a small, fl athead screwdriver
into the groove shown in the fi gure and
rotate the screwdriver to open the cover
slightly.
6–40
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
3. Insert the small, fl athead screwdriver
into the gap between the cover and
the transmitter, and then rotate the
screwdriver to detach the cover.
4. Remove the battery cap, then remove
the battery.
5. Insert a new battery with the positive
pole facing up, and then cover the
battery with the battery cap.
6. Close the cover.
7. Reinsert the auxiliary key.
CAUTION
Be careful not to allow the rubber ring
shown in the fi gure to be scratched or
damaged.
If the rubber ring detaches, reattach it
before inserting a new battery.
Rubber ring
6–41
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Tires
For reasons of proper performance, safety,
and better fuel economy, always maintain
recommended tire infl ation pressures and
stay within the recommended load limits
and weight distribution.
WARNING
Using Diff erent Tire Types:
Driving your vehicle with diff erent
types of tires is dangerous. It could
cause poor handling and poor braking;
leading to loss of control.
Except for the limited use of the
temporary spare tire, use only the
same type tires (radial, bias-belted,
bias-type) on all four wheels.
Using Wrong-Sized Tires:
Using any other tire size than what is
specifi ed for the vehicle (page 9-10 )
is dangerous. It could seriously aff ect
ride, handling, ground clearance,
tire clearance, and speedometer
calibration. This could cause you to
have an accident. Use only tires that
are the correct size specifi ed for the
vehicle.
Tire Infl ation Pressure
WARNING
Always infl ate the tires to the correct
pressure:
Overinfl ation or underinfl ation of tires
is dangerous. Adverse handling or
unexpected tire failure could result in a
serious accident.
Refer to Tires on page 9-10 .
Use only a Mazda-genuine tire valve
cap:
Use of a non-genuine part is
dangerous as the correct tire air
pressure cannot be maintained if the
tire valve becomes damaged. If the
vehicle is driven under this condition,
the tire air pressure will decrease which
could result in a serious accident. Do
not use any part for the tire valve cap
that is not a Mazda-genuine part.
Inspect all tire pressures monthly
(including the spare) when the tires are
cold. Maintain recommended pressures for
the best ride, handling, and minimum tire
wear.
Refer to the specifi cation charts (page
9-10 ).
After adjusting the tire pressure,
initialization of the tire pressure
monitoring system is necessary to make
the system operates normally.
Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Initialization on page 4-107 .
6–42
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
NOTE
Always check tire pressure when tires
are cold.
Warm tires normally exceed
recommended pressures. Do not release
air from warm tires to adjust the
pressure.
Underinfl ation can cause reduced fuel
economy, uneven and accelerated tire
wear, and poor sealing of the tire bead,
which will deform the wheel and cause
separation of tire from rim.
Overinfl ation can produce a harsh ride,
uneven and accelerated tire wear, and a
greater possibility of damage from road
hazards.
Keep your tire pressure at the correct
levels. If one frequently needs infl ating,
have it inspected.
Tire Rotation
WARNING
Rotate tires periodically:
Irregular tire wear is dangerous. To
equalize tread wear for maintaining
good performance in handling and
braking, rotate the tires every 12,000
km (7,500 miles). However Mazda
recommends to rotate every 8,000 km
(5,000 miles) to help increase tire life
and distribute wear more evenly.
Refer to Scheduled Maintenance on
page 6-4 .
During rotation, inspect them for correct
balance.
Do not include (TEMPORARY USE ONLY)
spare tire in rotation.
Forward
Also, inspect them for uneven wear and
damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused
by one or a combination of the following:
Incorrect tire pressure
Improper wheel alignment
Out-of-balance wheel
Severe braking
After rotation, infl ate all tire pressures to
specifi cation (page 9-10 ) and inspect the
lug nuts for tightness.
After adjusting the tire pressure,
initialization of the tire pressure
monitoring system is necessary to make
the system operates normally.
Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Initialization on page 4-107 .
CAUTION
Rotate unidirectional tires and radial
tires that have an asymmetrical tread
pattern or studs only from front to rear,
not from side to side. Tire performance
will be reduced if rotated from side to
side.
6–43
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Replacing a Tire
WARNING
Always use tires that are in good
condition:
Driving with worn tires is dangerous.
Reduced braking, steering, and
traction could result in an accident.
Replace all four tires at the same time:
Replacing just one tire is dangerous. It
could cause poor handling and poor
braking resulting in loss of vehicle
control. Mazda strongly recommends
that you replace all four tires at the
same time.
If a tire wears evenly, a wear indicator will
appear as a solid band across the tread.
Replace the tire when this happens.
New tread
Tread wear indicator
Worn tread
You should replace the tire before the band
crosses the entire tread.
After adjusting the tire pressure,
initialization of the tire pressure
monitoring system is necessary to make
the system operates normally.
Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Initialization on page 4-107 .
NOTE
Tires degrade over time, even when
they are not being used on the road. It
is recommended that tires generally be
replaced when they are 6 years or older.
Heat caused by hot climates or frequent
high loading conditions can accelerate
the aging process. You should replace the
spare tire when you replace the other road
tires due to the aging of the spare tire. The
period in which the tire was manufactured
(both week and year) is indicated by a
4-digit number.
Refer to Tire Labeling on page 8-23 .
Temporary Spare Tire
Inspect the temporary spare tire at least
monthly to make sure it is properly
infl ated and stored.
NOTE
The temporary spare tire condition
gradually deteriorates even if it has not
been used.
The temporary spare tire is easier to
handle because of its construction which
is lighter and smaller than a conventional
tire. This tire should be used only for an
emergency and only for a short distance.
Use the temporary spare tire only until the
conventional tire is repaired, which should
be as soon as possible.
Refer to Tires on page 9-10 .
*Some models.6–44
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
CAUTION
Do not use your temporary spare tire
rim with a snow tire or a conventional
tire. Neither will properly fi t and could
damage both tire and rim.
The temporary spare tire has a tread life
of less than 5,000 km (3,000 miles). The
tread life may be shorter depending on
driving conditions.
The temporary spare tire is for limited
use, however, if the tread wear solidband indicator appears, replace the tire
with the same type of temporary spare
(page 6-44 ).
NOTE
Tires degrade over time, even when
they are not being used on the road. It
is recommended that tires generally be
replaced when they are 6 years or older.
Heat caused by hot climates or frequent
high loading conditions can accelerate
the aging process. You should replace the
spare tire when you replace the other road
tires due to the aging of the spare tire. The
period in which the tire was manufactured
(both week and year) is indicated by a
4-digit number.
Refer to Tire Labeling on page 8-23 .
Replacing a Wheel
WARNING
Always use wheels of the correct size on
your vehicle:
Using a wrong-sized wheel is
dangerous. Braking and handling
could be aff ected, leading to loss of
control and an accident.
CAUTION
A wrong-sized wheel may adversely
aff ect:
Tire fi t
Wheel and bearing life
Ground clearance
Snow-chain clearance
Speedometer calibration
Headlight aim
Bumper height
Tire Pressure Monitoring System *
When replacing a wheel, make sure the
new one is the same as the original factory
wheel in diameter, rim width, and offset
(inset/outset).
Proper tire balancing provides the best
riding comfort and helps reduce tread
wear. Out-of-balance tires can cause
vibration and uneven wear, such as
cupping and fl at spots.
6–45
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Light Bulbs
Overhead lights (Front)/
Map lights
Vanity mirror
lights
Headlights (Low/High beam)
Daytime running lights/
Parking lights
Headlights (Low beam)
Headlights (High beam)/
Daytime running lights
Fog lights Fog lights
Front side-marker lights Front side-marker lights
Side turn signal lights Side turn signal lights
Overhead lights (Front)/
Map lights
Vanity mirror
lights
Some models.
Front turn signal lights Front turn signal lights
Brake lights (LED type)
Brake lights/Taillights/Rear
side-marker lights (Bulb type)
Taillights/Rear side-marker
lights (LED type) Taillights/Rear side-marker
lights (LED type)
Rear turn signal lights
Taillights (Trunk lid side)
Reverse lights
High-mount brake light
License plate lights
Trunk light
Overhead light (Rear) Overhead light (Rear)
Brake lights (LED type)
Luggage
compartment light
Brake lights/Taillights/Rear
side-marker lights (Bulb type)
Rear turn signal lights
Taillights (Trunk lid side)
Reverse lights
High-mount brake light
License plate lights
4-Door 5-Door
With Xenon Fusion Headlights With Halogen Headlights
6–46
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
WARNING
Do not replace the xenon fusion bulbs
yourself:
Replacing the xenon fusion bulbs
yourself is dangerous. Because the
xenon fusion bulbs require high
voltage, you could receive an electric
shock if the bulbs are handled
incorrectly. Consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer when the replacement is
necessary.
Never touch the glass portion of a
halogen bulb with your bare hands
and always wear eye protection when
handling or working around the bulbs:
When a halogen bulb breaks, it is
dangerous. These bulbs contain
pressurized gas. If one is broken, it will
explode and serious injuries could be
caused by the fl ying glass.
If the glass portion is touched with
bare hands, body oil could cause the
bulb to overheat and explode when lit.
Always keep halogen bulbs out of the
reach of children:
Playing with a halogen bulb is
dangerous. Serious injuries could be
caused by dropping a halogen bulb or
breaking it some other way.
NOTE
To replace the bulb, contact an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
If the halogen bulb is accidentally
touched, it should be cleaned with
rubbing alcohol before being used.
Use the protective cover and carton for
the replacement bulb to dispose of the
old bulb promptly and out of the reach
of children.
Replacing Exterior Light Bulbs
Headlights (With xenon fusion
headlights)
Low/High beam bulbs
You cannot replace the low/high beam
bulbs by yourself. The bulbs must be
replaced at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Headlights (With halogen headlights)
Low-beam bulbs
1. If you are changing the right bulb, start
the engine, turn the steering wheel all
the way to the left, and turn off engine.
If you are changing the left bulb, turn
the steering wheel to the right, and turn
off engine.
2. Make sure the headlight switch is off.
3. Pull the center of each plastic retainer
and remove the retainers.
Removal
Installation
6–47
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
4. Turn the screw counterclockwise and
remove it, and then partially peel back
the mudguard.
5. Disconnect the connector from the unit
by pressing the tab on the connector
with your fi nger and pulling the
connector downward.
6. Turn the socket and bulb assembly
to remove it. Carefully remove the
bulb from its socket in the refl ector by
gently pulling it straight backward out
of the socket.
7. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of the removal procedure.
High-beam bulbs/Daytime running
lights
1. Make sure the ignition is switched off,
and the headlight switch is off.
2. Lift the hood.
3. Disconnect the connector from the unit
by pressing the tab on the connector
with your fi nger and pulling the
connector downward.
6–48
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
4. Turn the socket and bulb assembly
to remove it. Carefully remove the
bulb from its socket in the refl ector by
gently pulling it straight backward out
of the socket.
5. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of the removal procedure.
Daytime running lights/Parking lights
(With xenon fusion headlights)
Due to the complexity and diffi culty of
the procedure, the LED bulbs must be
replaced by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
NOTE
LED bulb replacement is not possible
because it is built into the unit. Replace
the unit.
Front turn signal lights, Parking lights/
Front side-marker lights (With halogen
headlights), Front side-marker lights
(With xenon fusion headlights)
1. If you are changing the right bulb, start
the engine, turn the steering wheel all
the way to the left, and turn off engine.
If you are changing the left bulb, turn
the steering wheel to the right, and turn
off engine.
2. Make sure the headlight switch is off.
3. Pull the center of each plastic retainer
and remove the retainers.
Removal
Installation
4. Turn the screw counterclockwise and
remove it, and then partially peel back
the mudguard.
5. Turn the socket and bulb assembly
counterclockwise and remove it.
*Some models. 6–49
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
6. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.
Front turn signal lights
Parking lights/Front side-marker
lights (With halogen headlights),
Front side-marker lights (With
xenon fusion headlights)
7. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of the removal procedure.
Fog lights *
1. If you are changing the right bulb, start
the engine, turn the steering wheel all
the way to the left, and turn off engine.
If you are changing the left bulb, turn
the steering wheel to the right, and turn
off engine.
2. Make sure the fog light switch is off.
3. Pull the center of each plastic retainer
and remove the retainers.
Removal
Installation
4. Turn the screw counterclockwise and
remove it, and then partially peel back
the mudguard.
*Some models.6–50
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
5. Disconnect the connector from the unit
by pressing the tab on the connector
with your fi nger and pulling the
connector downward.
6. Turn the socket and bulb assembly
to remove it. Carefully remove the
bulb from its socket in the refl ector by
gently pulling it straight backward out
of the socket.
7. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of the removal procedure.
Side turn signal lights * , Brake lights
(LED type), Taillights/Rear side-marker
lights (LED type), Taillights (Trunk lid
side/Liftgate side), High-mount brake
light
Due to the complexity and diffi culty of
the procedure, the LED bulbs must be
replaced by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
NOTE
LED bulb replacement is not possible
because it is built into the unit. Replace
the unit.
Rear turn signal lights, Brake lights/
Taillights/Rear side-marker lights (Bulb
type)
4–Door
1. Make sure the ignition is switched off,
and the headlight switch is off.
2. Pull the center of each plastic retainer
and remove the retainers.
3. Remove trunk end trim.
Installation
Removal
4. Pull the center of each plastic retainer
and remove the retainers.
6–51
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
5. Peel back the trunk side trim.
Removal
Installation
6. Turn the socket and bulb assembly
counterclockwise and remove it.
7. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.
Rear turn signal lights
Brake lights/Taillights/Rear sidemarker lights (Bulb type)
8. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of the removal procedure.
5–Door
(Left side)
1. Make sure the ignition is switched off,
and the headlight switch is off.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Turn the socket and bulb assembly
counterclockwise and remove it.
6–52
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
4. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.
Rear turn signal lights
Brake lights/Taillights/Rear sidemarker lights (Bulb type)
5. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of the removal procedure.
6. Insert the cover tabs and install the
cover.
NOTE
Verify that the cover is securely installed.
(Right side)
1. Make sure the ignition is switched off,
and the headlight switch is off.
2. Turn the knob and remove the cover.
3. Turn the wing bolt and jack screw
counterclockwise.
4. Remove the jack
5. Turn the socket and bulb assembly
counterclockwise and remove it.
6–53
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
6. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.
Rear turn signal lights
Brake lights/Taillights/Rear sidemarker lights (Bulb type)
7. Install the new bulb.
8. Insert the wing bolt into the jack with
the jack screw pointing to the down
and turn the wing bolt clockwise to
temporarily tighten it.
9. Turn the jack screw in the direction
shown in the fi gure.
10. Turn the wing bolt completely to secure
the jack.
NOTE
If the jack is not completely secured, it
could rattle while driving. Make sure the
jack screw is suffi ciently tightened.
11. Install the cover in the reverse order of
the removal procedure.
12. Insert the cover tabs and install the
cover.
NOTE
Verify that the cover is securely installed.
6–54
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Reverse lights
4–Door
1. Make sure the ignition is switched off,
and the headlight switch is off.
2. Pull the center of each plastic retainer
and remove the retainers.
3. Peel back the trunk lid trim.
Removal
Installation
4. Disconnect the electrical connector
from the bulb by pressing the tab on the
connector with your fi nger and pulling
the connector.
5. Turn the socket and bulb assembly
counterclockwise and remove it.
6. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.
7. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of the removal procedure.
5–Door
1. Make sure the ignition is switched off,
and the headlight switch is off.
2. Remove the cover.
6–55
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
3. Disconnect the electrical connector
from the bulb by pressing the tab on the
connector with your fi nger and pulling
the connector.
4. Turn the socket and bulb assembly
counterclockwise and remove it.
5. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.
6. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of the removal procedure.
License plate lights
4–Door
1. Make sure the ignition is switched off,
and the headlight switch is off.
2. Pull the center of each plastic retainer
and remove the retainers.
3. Peel back the trunk lid trim.
Removal
Installation
4. Turn the socket and bulb assembly
counterclockwise and remove it.
5. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.
6. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of the removal procedure.
*Some models.6–56
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
5–Door
1. Make sure the ignition is switched off,
and the headlight switch is off.
2. Wrap a fl athead screwdriver with a soft
cloth to prevent damage to the lens,
and then remove the lens by carefully
prying on the edge of the lens with a
fl athead screwdriver.
3. Disconnect the bulb by pulling it out.
4. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of the removal procedure.
Replacing Interior Light Bulbs
Overhead lights (Front)/Map lights * ,
Overhead lights (Front) * , Overhead
lights (Rear) * , Vanity mirror lights*
1. Wrap a small fl athead screwdriver
with a soft cloth to prevent damage to
the lens, and then remove the lens by
carefully prying on the edge of the lens
with the fl athead screwdriver.
2. Disconnect the bulb by pulling it out.
Overhead lights (Front)/Map lights *
*Some models. 6–57
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Overhead lights (Front) *
Edge
Overhead lights (Rear) *
Edge
Vanity mirror lights *
3. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of the removal procedure.
Trunk light (4–Door)
1. Press both sides of the lens cap to
remove it.
2. Disconnect the bulb by pulling it out.
3. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of the removal procedure.
Luggage compartment light (5–Door)
1. Wrap a small fl athead screwdriver with
a soft cloth to prevent damage to the
lens and remove the lens by carefully
prying on the edge of the lens with the
fl athead screwdriver.
2. Disconnect the bulb by pulling it out.
3. Install the new bulb in the reverse order
of the removal procedure.
6–58
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Fuses
Your vehicle's electrical system is
protected by fuses.
If any lights, accessories, or controls do
not work, inspect the appropriate circuit
protector. If a fuse has blown, the inside
element will be melted.
If the same fuse blows again, avoid using
that system and consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
Fuse Replacement
Replacing the fuses on the vehicle's left
side
If the electrical system does not work, fi rst
inspect the fuses on the vehicle's left side.
1. Make sure the ignition is switched off,
and other switches are off.
2. Open the fuse panel cover.
3. Pull the fuse straight out with the
fuse puller provided on the fuse block
located in the engine compartment.
4. Inspect the fuse and replace it if it is
blown.
Normal Blown
5. Insert a new fuse of the same amperage
rating, and make sure it fi ts tightly. If
it does not fi t tightly, have an expert
install it. We recommend an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
If you have no spare fuses, borrow one
of the same rating from a circuit not
essential to vehicle operation, such as
the AUDIO or OUTLET circuit.
CAUTION
Always replace a fuse with a genuine
Mazda fuse or equivalent of the same
rating. Otherwise you may damage
the electric system.
6–59
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
6. Reinstall the cover and make sure that
it is securely installed.
Replacing the fuses under the hood
If the headlights or other electrical
components do not work and the fuses
in the cabin are normal, inspect the fuse
block under the hood. If a fuse is blown, it
must be replaced. Follow these steps:
1. Make sure the ignition is switched off,
and other switches are off.
2. Remove the fuse block cover.
3. If any fuse but the MAIN fuse is
blown, replace it with a new one of the
same amperage rating .
Normal Blown
WARNING
Do not replace the main fuse and
multiplex slow blow fuse by yourself.
Have an Authorized Mazda Dealer
perform the replacement:
Replacing these fuses by yourself is
dangerous because they are high
current fuses. Incorrect replacement
could cause an electrical shock or a
short circuit resulting in a fi re.
4. Reinstall the cover and make sure that
it is securely installed.
*Some models.6–60
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Fuse Panel Description
Fuse block (Engine compartment)
Multiplex slow blow fuse
DESCRIPTION FUSE RATING PROTECTED COMPONENT
1 FOG 15 A Fog lights *
2 H/L HI 20 A Headlight high beam *
3 H/CLEAN 20 A —
4 STOP 10 A Brake lights
5 ROOM 15 A Overhead light
6 7.5 A Engine control system
7 FUEL WARM — —
8 HAZARD 25 A Hazard warning fl ashers, Turn signal lights
9 ABS/DSCS 30 A ABS, Dynamic stability control system
10 METER2 — —
11 AUDIO2 7.5 A Audio system
12 BOSE 25 A Bose ® Sound System-equipped model *
13 AUDIO1 15 A Audio system
14 FUEL PUMP 15 A Fuel system
15 HID R DRL 15 A Headlight (RH)
*1 , Daytime running lights *
16 AT PUMP — —
17 HORN 15 A Horn
18 TAIL 15 A Taillights, License plate lights, Parking lights, Front side-marker lights
*Some models. 6–61
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
DESCRIPTION FUSE RATING PROTECTED COMPONENT
19 — — —
20 AT 15 A Transaxle control system
21 R.WIPER 15 A Rear window wiper *
22 A/C 7.5 A Air conditioner
23 ENGINE3 15 A Engine control system
24 ENGINE2 15 A Engine control system
25 ENGINE1 15 A Engine control system
26 GLOW SIG — —
27 EVVT 20 A Engine control system
28 WIPER 20 A Front window wiper and washer
29 DCDC REG — —
30 — — —
31 ADD FAN DE — —
32 P.WINDOW1 30 A Power windows
33 H/L LOW R 15 A Headlight low beam (RH) *2
34 H/L LOW L HID L 15 A Headlight (LH)
*1 , Headlight low beam (LH) *2
35 METER1 10 A Instrument cluster
36 IG2 30 A For protection of various circuits
37 — — —
38 FAN DE — —
39 DCDC DE — —
40 SRS1 7.5 A Air bag
41 ENGINE. IG1 15 A Engine control system
42 C/U IG1 15 A For protection of various circuits
43 — — —
*1 With xenon fusion headlights
*2 With halogen headlights
*Some models.6–62
Maintenance and Care
Owner Maintenance
Fuse block (Left side)
DESCRIPTION FUSE RATING PROTECTED COMPONENT
1 P.SEAT D 30 A Power seat *
2 D.LOCK 25 A Power door locks
3 P.WINDOW2 25 A Power windows
4 SEAT WARM 20 A Seat warmer *
5 R.OUTLET3 15 A Accessory sockets
6 SRS2/ESCL 15 A Seat weight sensor *
7 SUNROOF 10 A Moonroof *
8 M.DEF 7.5 A Mirror defroster *
9 R.OUTLET1 — —
10 MIRROR 7.5 A Power control mirror
11 F.OUTLET 15 A Accessory sockets
12 AT IND 7.5 A AT shift indicator *
13 — — —
14 — — —
15 — — —
6–63
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
Exterior Care
The paintwork on your Mazda represents
the latest technical developments in
composition and methods of application.
Environmental hazards, however, can
harm the paint's protective properties, if
proper care is not taken.
Here are some examples of possible
damage, with tips on how to prevent them.
Etching Caused by Acid Rain or
Industrial Fallout
Occurrence
Industrial pollutants and vehicle emissions
drift into the air and mix with rain or dew
to form acids. These acids can settle on a
vehicle's fi nish. As the water evaporates,
the acid becomes concentrated and can
damage the fi nish.
And the longer the acid remains on the
surface, the greater the chance is for
damage.
Prevention
It is necessary to wash and wax your
vehicle to preserve its fi nish according to
the instructions in this section. These steps
should be taken immediately after you
suspect that acid rain has settled on your
vehicle's fi nish.
Damage Caused by Bird Dropping,
Insects, or Tree Sap
Occurrence
Bird droppings contain acids. If these
are not removed they can eat away the
clear and color base coat of the vehicle's
paintwork.
When insects stick to the paint surface and
decompose, corrosive compounds form.
These can erode the clear and color base
coat of the vehicle's paintwork if they are
not removed.
Tree sap will harden and adhere
permanently to the paint fi nish. If you
scratch the sap off while it is hard, some
vehicle paint could come off with it.
Prevention
It is necessary to have your Mazda washed
and waxed to preserve its fi nish according
to the instructions in this section. This
should be done as soon as possible.
Bird droppings can be removed with a soft
sponge and water. If you are traveling and
these are not available, a moistened tissue
may also take care of the problem. The
cleaned area should be waxed according to
the instructions in this section.
Insects and tree sap are best removed with
a soft sponge and water or a commercially
available chemical cleaner.
Another method is to cover the affected
area with dampened newspaper for one to
two hours. After removing the newspaper,
rinse off the loosened debris with water.
6–64
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
Water Marks
Occurrence
Rain, fog, dew, and even tap water can
contain harmful minerals such as salt and
lime. If moisture containing these minerals
settles on the vehicle and evaporates, the
minerals will concentrate and harden to
form white rings. The rings can damage
your vehicle's fi nish.
Prevention
It is necessary to wash and wax your
vehicle to preserve its fi nish according to
the instructions in this section. These steps
should be taken immediately after you fi nd
water marks on your vehicle's fi nish.
Paint Chipping
Occurrence
Paint chipping occurs when gravel thrown
in the air by another vehicle's tires hits
your vehicle.
How to avoid paint chipping
Keeping a safe distance between you and
the vehicle ahead reduces the chances
of having your paint chipped by fl ying
gravel.
NOTE
The paint chipping zone varies with the
speed of the vehicle. For example, when
traveling at 90 km/h (56 mph), the paint
chipping zone is 50 m (164 ft).
In low temperatures a vehicle's fi nish
hardens. This increases the chance of
paint chipping.
Chipped paint can lead to rust forming
on your Mazda. Before this happens,
repair the damage by using Mazda
touch-up paint according to the
instructions in this section. Failure to
repair the affected area could lead to
serious rusting and expensive repairs.
Follow all label and container directions
when using a chemical cleaner or polish.
Read all warnings and cautions.
6–65
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
Maintaining the Finish
Washing
CAUTION
When the wiper lever is in the AUTO
position and the ignition is switched ON,
the wipers may move automatically in
the following cases:
If the windshield above the rain
sensor is touched or wiped with a
cloth.
If the windshield is struck with a hand
or other object from either outside or
inside the vehicle.
Keep hands and scrapers clear of the
windshield when the wiper lever is in
the AUTO position and the ignition
is switched ON as fi ngers could be
pinched or the wipers and wiper blades
damaged when the wipers activate
automatically.
If you are going to clean the windshield,
be sure the wipers are turned off
completely (when it is most likely
that the engine is left running) this is
particularly important when clearing ice
and snow.
Do not spray water in the engine
compartment. Otherwise, it could result
in engine-starting problems or damage
to electrical parts.
To help protect the fi nish from rust
and deterioration, wash your Mazda
thoroughly and frequently, at least once a
month, with lukewarm or cold water.
If the vehicle is washed improperly, the
paint surface could be scratched. Here are
some examples of how scratching could
occur.
Scratches occur on the paint surface when:
The vehicle is washed without fi rst
rinsing off dirt and other foreign matter.
The vehicle is washed with a rough, dry,
or dirty cloth.
The vehicle is washed at a car wash that
uses brushes that are dirty or too stiff.
Cleansers or wax containing abrasives
are used.
NOTE
Mazda is not responsible for scratches
caused by automatic car washes or
improper washing.
Scratches are more noticeable on
vehicles with darker paint fi nishes.
To minimize scratches on the vehicle's
paint fi nish:
Rinse off any dirt or other foreign matter
using lukewarm or cold water before
washing.
Use plenty of lukewarm or cold water
and a soft cloth when washing the
vehicle. Do not use a nylon cloth.
Rub gently when washing or drying the
vehicle.
Take your vehicle only to a car wash
that keeps its brushes well maintained.
Do not use abrasive cleansers or wax
that contain abrasives.
CAUTION
Do not use steel wool, abrasive
cleaners, or strong detergents
containing highly alkaline or caustic
agents on chrome-plated or anodized
aluminum parts. This may damage the
protective coating; also, cleaners and
detergents may discolor or deteriorate
the paint.
6–66
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
Pay special attention to removing salt, dirt,
mud, and other foreign material from the
underside of the fenders, and make sure
the drain holes in the lower edges of the
doors and rocker panels are clean.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial fallout, and similar deposits
can damage the fi nish if not removed
immediately. When prompt washing with
plain water is ineffective, use a mild soap
made for use on vehicles.
Thoroughly rinse off all soap with
lukewarm or cold water. Do not allow
soap to dry on the fi nish.
After washing the vehicle, dry it with a
clean chamois to prevent water spots from
forming.
WARNING
Dry off brakes that have become
wet by driving slowly, releasing the
accelerator pedal and lightly applying
the brakes several times until the brake
performance returns to normal:
Driving with wet brakes is dangerous.
Increased stopping distance or the
vehicle pulling to one side when
braking could result in a serious
accident. Light braking will indicate
whether the brakes have been aff ected.
When using a high water pressure car
wash
High water temperature and high water
pressure car washers are available
depending on the type of car wash
machine. If the car washer nozzle is
put too close to the vehicle, the force of
the spray could damage or deform the
molding, affect the sealability of parts,
and allow water to penetrate the interior.
Keep a suffi cient space (30 cm (12 in) or
more) between the nozzle and the vehicle.
In addition, do not spend too much time
spraying the same area of the vehicle, and
be very careful when spraying between
gaps in doors and around windows.
Waxing
Your vehicle needs to be waxed when
water no longer beads on the fi nish.
Always wash and dry the vehicle before
waxing it. In addition to the vehicle body,
wax the metal trim to maintain its luster.
1. Use wax which contains no abrasives.
Waxes containing abrasive will remove
paint and could damage bright metal
parts.
2. Use a good grade of natural wax for
metallic, mica, and solid colors.
3. When waxing, coat evenly with the
sponge supplied or a soft cloth.
4. Wipe off the wax with a soft cloth.
NOTE
A spot remover to remove oil, tar, and
similar materials will usually also take off
the wax. Rewax these areas even if the rest
of the vehicle does not need it.
6–67
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
Repairing Damage to the Finish
Deep scratches or chips on the fi nish
should be repaired promptly. Exposed
metal quickly rusts and can lead to major
repairs.
CAUTION
If your Mazda is damaged and needs
metal parts repaired or replaced,
make sure the body shop applies anticorrosion materials to all parts, both
repaired and new. This will prevent
them from rusting.
Bright-Metal Maintenance
Use tar remover to remove road tar and
insects. Never do this with a knife or
similar tool.
To prevent corrosion on brightmetal surfaces, apply wax or chrome
preservative and rub it to a high luster.
During cold weather or in coastal areas,
cover bright-metal parts with a coating
of wax or preservative heavier than
usual. It would also help to coat them
with noncorrosive petroleum jelly or
some other protective compound.
CAUTION
Do not use steel wool, abrasive
cleaners, or strong detergents
containing highly alkaline or caustic
agents on chrome-plated or anodized
aluminum parts. This may result in
damage to the protective coating
and cause discoloration or paint
deterioration.
Underbody Maintenance
Road chemicals and salt used for ice and
snow removal and solvents used for dust
control may collect on the underbody. If
not removed, they will speed up rusting
and deterioration of such underbody parts
as fuel lines, frame, fl oor pan, and exhaust
system, even though these parts may be
coated with anti-corrosive material.
Thoroughly fl ush the underbody and wheel
housings with lukewarm or cold water at
the end of each winter. Try also to do this
every month.
Pay special attention to these areas
because they easily hide mud and dirt.
It will do more harm than good to wet
down the road grime without removing
it.
The lower edges of doors, rocker panels,
and frame members have drain holes that
should not be clogged. Water trapped there
will cause rusting.
WARNING
Dry off brakes that have become
wet by driving slowly, releasing the
accelerator pedal and lightly applying
the brakes several times until the brake
performance returns to normal:
Driving with wet brakes is dangerous.
Increased stopping distance or the
vehicle pulling to one side when
braking could result in a serious
accident. Light braking will indicate
whether the brakes have been aff ected.
*Some models.6–68
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
Aluminum Wheel Maintenance *
A protective coating is provided over the
aluminum wheels. Special care is needed
to protect this coating.
CAUTION
Do not use any detergent other than
mild detergent. Before using any
detergent, verify the ingredients.
Otherwise, the product could discolor
or stain the aluminum wheels.
NOTE
Do not use a wire brush or any
abrasive cleaner, polishing compound,
or solvent on aluminum wheels. They
may damage the coating.
Always use a sponge or soft cloth to
clean the wheels.
Rinse the wheels thoroughly with
lukewarm or cold water. Also, be sure
to clean the wheels after driving on
dusty or salted roads to help prevent
corrosion.
Avoid washing your vehicle in an
automatic car wash that uses highspeed or hard brushes.
If your aluminum wheels lose luster,
wax the wheels.
Plastic Part Maintenance
When cleaning the plastic lenses of the
lights, do not use gasoline, kerosene,
rectifi ed spirit, paint, thinner, highly
acidic detergents, or strongly alkaline
detergents. Otherwise, these chemical
agents can discolor or damage the
surfaces resulting in a signifi cant loss
in functionality. If plastic parts become
inadvertently exposed to any of these
chemical agents, fl ush with water
immediately.
If plastic parts such as the bumpers
become inadvertently exposed to
chemical agents or fl uids such as
gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery
fl uid, it could cause discoloration,
staining, or paint peeling. Wipe off any
such chemical agents or fl uids using a
soft cloth immediately.
High water temperature and high water
pressure car washers are available
depending on the type of high pressure
car washer device. If the car washer
nozzle is put too close to the vehicle or
aimed at one area for an extended period
of time, it could deform plastic parts or
damage the paint.
Do not use wax containing compounds
(polish). Otherwise, it could result in
paint damage.
In addition, do not use an electrical or
air tool to apply wax. Otherwise, the
frictional heat generated could result
in deformation of plastic parts or paint
damage.
*Some models. 6–69
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
Interior Care
WARNING
Do not spray water in the cabin:
Splashing water on electrical parts
such as the audio unit and switches
is dangerous as it could cause a
malfunction or a fi re.
Dashboard Precautions
Prevent caustic solutions such as perfume
and cosmetic oils from contacting the
dashboard. They will damage and discolor
the dashboard. If these solutions get on the
dashboard, wipe them off immediately.
CAUTION
Do not use glazing agents.
Glazing agents contain ingredients
which may cause discoloration,
wrinkling, cracks and peeling.
Instrument panel top (soft pad)
Extremely soft material is used for the
soft pad surface. When cleaning, it is
recommended that you use a clean towel
dampened in a mild detergent to remove
soiling.
If the soft pad surface is rubbed harshly,
it could result in the surface being
damaged leaving white scratch marks.
Cleaning the Upholstery and
Interior Trim
Vinyl
Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
Clean vinyl with a leather-and-vinyl
cleaner.
Leather *
Remove dust and sand fi rst using a
vacuum cleaner or other means, then wipe
dirt off using a soft cloth with a leather
cleaner or a soft cloth soaked in mild soap.
Wipe off the remaining cleaner or soap
using a cloth soaked in clean water and
wrung out well.
Remove moisture with a dry, soft cloth
and allow the leather to further dry in a
well-ventilated, shaded area. If the leather
gets wet such as from rain, also remove
moisture and dry it as soon as possible.
NOTE
Because genuine leather is a natural
material, its surface is not uniform and
it may have natural scars, scratches,
and wrinkles.
To maintain the quality for as long as
possible, periodical maintenance, about
twice a year, is recommended.
Sand and dust on the seat surface may
damage the overcoat of the genuine
leather surfaces and accelerate wear.
Greasy soiling on genuine leather may
cause molding and stains.
Rubbing hard with a stiff brush or cloth
may cause damage.
Do not wipe the leather using alcohol,
chlorine bleach, or organic solvents
such as thinner, benzene, or gasoline.
Otherwise, it may cause discoloration
or stains.
*Some models.6–70
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
If the seats get wet, promptly remove
moisture with a dry cloth. Remaining
moisture on the surface may cause
deterioration such as hardening and
shrinkage.
Exposure to direct sunlight for long
periods may cause deterioration and
shrinkage. When parking the car under
direct sunlight for long periods, shade
the interior using sunshades.
Do not leave vinyl products on the seats
for long periods as they may affect
the leather quality and coloring. If the
cabin temperature becomes hot, the
vinyl may deteriorate and adhere to the
genuine leather.
Fabric
Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric
with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.
Clean it with a mild soap solution good
for upholstery and carpets. Remove fresh
spots immediately with a fabric spot
cleaner.
To keep the fabric looking clean and fresh,
take care of it. Otherwise its color will be
affected, it can be stained easily, and its
fi re-resistance may be reduced.
CAUTION
Use only recommended cleaners
and procedures. Others may aff ect
appearance and fi re-resistance.
Panel
When the panel needs to be cleaned, use a
soft cloth to wipe off dirt from the surface.
NOTE
Scratches or nicks on the panels resulting
from the use of a hard brush or cloth may
not be repairable.
Be particularly careful when cleaning the
following areas which are installed with
specially coated panels.
Piano black panel
Decoration panel *
Maintenance of the Active Driving
Display
The combiner and mirror surface have a
special coating. When cleaning, do not use
a hard or rough-surface cloth, or cleaning
detergent. In addition, if a chemical
solvent gets on the active driving display,
wipe it off immediately. Otherwise, the
combiner and mirror could be damaged
and the surface coating could be scratched.
Use a fi ne, soft cloth such as those used
for cleaning eyeglasses.
6–71
Maintenance and Care
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Lap/Shoulder Belt
Webbing
Clean the webbing with a mild soap
solution recommended for upholstery or
carpets. Follow instructions. Do not bleach
or dye the webbing; this may weaken it.
After cleaning the belts, thoroughly dry
the belt webbing and make sure there is no
remaining moisture before retracting them.
WARNING
Have an Authorized Mazda Dealer
replace damaged seat belts
immediately:
Using damaged seat belts is
dangerous. In a collision, damaged
belts cannot provide adequate
protection.
Cleaning the Window Interiors
If the windows become covered with an
oily, greasy, or waxy fi lm, clean them with
glass cleaner. Follow the directions on the
container.
CAUTION
Do not scrape or scratch the inside of
the window glass. It could damage the
thermal fi laments and the antenna
lines.
When washing the inside of the window
glass, use a soft cloth dampened in
lukewarm water, gently wiping the
thermal fi laments and the antenna
lines.
Use of glass cleaning products could
damage the thermal fi laments and the
antenna lines.
Cleaning the Floor Mats
Rubber fl oor mats should be cleaned with
mild soap and water only.
WARNING
Do not use rubber cleaners, such as tire
cleaner or tire shine, when cleaning
rubber fl oor mats:
Cleaning the rubber fl oor mats with
rubber cleaning products makes the
fl oor mats slippery.
This may cause an accident when
depressing the accelerator, brake, or
clutch (Manual transaxle) pedal or
when getting in or out of the vehicle.
After removing the fl oor mats for cleaning,
always reinstall them securely. 3-46
6–72
MEMO
*Some models. 7–1
7 If Trouble Arises
Helpful information on what to do if a problem arises with the vehicle.
Parking in an Emergency .................................................................. 7-2
Parking in an Emergency .............................................................. 7-2
Flat Tire............................................................................................... 7-3
Spare Tire and Tool Storage .......................................................... 7-3
Changing a Flat Tire ...................................................................... 7-6
Battery Runs Out ............................................................................. 7-15
Jump-Starting .............................................................................. 7-15
Emergency Starting ......................................................................... 7-18
Starting a Flooded Engine ........................................................... 7-18
Push-Starting ............................................................................... 7-18
Overheating ...................................................................................... 7-19
Overheating ................................................................................. 7-19
Emergency Towing ........................................................................... 7-21
Towing Description ..................................................................... 7-21
Tiedown Hooks ........................................................................... 7-22
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds ........................... 7-24
If a Warning Light Turns On or Flashes...................................... 7-24
Message Indicated on Display* ................................................... 7-34
Warning Sound is Activated ........................................................ 7-36
When Liftgate/Trunk Lid Cannot be Opened ............................... 7-40
When Liftgate/Trunk Lid Cannot be Opened ............................. 7-40
Active Driving Display Does Not Operate* .................................... 7-42
If the Active Driving Display Does Not Operate ........................ 7-42
7–2
If Trouble Arises
Parking in an Emergency
Parking in an Emergency
The hazard warning lights should always
be used when you stop on or near a
roadway in an emergency.
The hazard warning lights warn other
drivers that your vehicle is a traffi c hazard
and that they must take extreme caution
when near it.
Depress the hazard warning fl asher and
all the turn signals will fl ash. The hazard
warning indicator lights in the instrument
cluster fl ash simultaneously.
NOTE
The turn signals do not work when the
hazard warning lights are on.
Check local regulations about the use
of hazard warning lights while the
vehicle is being towed to verify that it is
not in violation of the law.
7–3
If Trouble Arises
Flat Tire
Spare Tire and Tool Storage
Spare tire and tools are stored in the locations illustrated in the diagram.
Tiedown eyelet
Flat tire belt
Spare tire
Jack
Spare tire hold-down bolt
Lug wrench Tool bag
Jack lever
Tiedown eyelet
Flat tire belt
Jack lever
Lug wrench
Spare tire
Jack
Spare tire hold-down bolt
5-Door
4-Door
Some models.
7–4
If Trouble Arises
Flat Tire
Jack
To remove the jack
1. (4–Door)
Push the tabs and remove the cover.
Tabs
(5–Door)
Turn the knob and remove the cover.
2. Turn the wing bolt and jack screw
counterclockwise.
To secure the jack
1. Insert the wing bolt into the jack with
the jack screw pointing to the down
and turn the wing bolt clockwise to
temporarily tighten it.
2. Turn the jack screw in the direction
shown in the fi gure.
3. Turn the wing bolt completely to secure
the jack.
NOTE
If the jack is not completely secured, it
could rattle while driving. Make sure the
jack screw is suffi ciently tightened.
4. Insert the cover tabs and install the
cover.
7–5
If Trouble Arises
Flat Tire
NOTE
Verify that the cover is securely installed.
Maintenance
Always keep the jack clean.
Make sure the moving parts are kept
free from dirt or rust.
Make sure the screw thread is
adequately lubricated.
Spare Tire
Your Mazda has a temporary spare tire.
The temporary spare tire is lighter and
smaller than a conventional tire, and is
designed only for emergency use and
should be used only for VERY short
periods. Temporary spare tires should
NEVER be used for long drives or
extended periods.
WARNING
Do not install the temporary spare tire
on the front wheels (driving wheels):
Driving with the temporary spare tire
on one of the front driving wheels is
dangerous. Handling will be aff ected.
You could lose control of the vehicle,
especially on ice or snow bound roads,
and have an accident. Move a regular
tire to the front wheel and install the
temporary spare tire to the rear.
CAUTION
When using the temporary spare tire,
driving stability may decrease compared
to when using only the conventional
tire. Drive carefully.
To avoid damage to the temporary
spare tire or to the vehicle, observe the
following precautions:
Do not exceed 80 km/h (50 mph).
Avoid driving over obstacles. Also, do
not drive through an automatic car
wash. This tire's diameter is smaller
than a conventional tire, so the
ground clearance is reduced about 10
mm (0.4 in).
Do not use a tire chain on this tire
because it will not fi t properly.
Do not use your temporary spare
tire on any other vehicle, it has been
designed only for your Mazda.
Use only one temporary spare tire on
your vehicle at the same time.
To remove the spare tire
1. Lift the trunk/luggage compartment
mat.
Trunk/Luggage compartment mat
7–6
If Trouble Arises
Flat Tire
2. Turn the spare tire hold-down bolt
counterclockwise.
Spare tire hold-down bolt
To secure the spare tire
Store the spare tire in the reverse order
of removal. After storing, verify that the
spare tire is stored securely.
Changing a Flat Tire
NOTE
If the following occurs while driving, it
could indicate a fl at tire.
Steering becomes diffi cult.
The vehicle begins to vibrate
excessively.
The vehicle pulls in one direction.
If you have a fl at tire, drive slowly to a
level spot that is well off the road and out
of the way of traffi c to change the tire.
Stopping in traffi c or on the shoulder of a
busy road is dangerous.
WARNING
Be sure to follow the directions for
changing a tire:
Changing a tire is dangerous if not
done properly. The vehicle can slip off
the jack and seriously injure someone.
No person should place any portion
of their body under a vehicle that is
supported by a jack.
Never allow anyone inside a vehicle
supported by a jack:
Allowing someone to remain in
a vehicle supported by a jack is
dangerous. The occupant could cause
the vehicle to fall resulting in serious
injury.
NOTE
Make sure the jack is well lubricated
before using it.
1. Park on a level surface off the right-ofway and fi rmly set the parking brake.
7–7
If Trouble Arises
Flat Tire
2. Put a vehicle with an automatic
transaxle in Park (P), a manual
transaxle in Reverse (R) or 1, and turn
off the engine.
3. Turn on the hazard warning fl asher.
4. Have everyone get out of the vehicle
and away from the vehicle and traffi c.
5. Remove the jack, tool, and spare tire
(page 7-3 ).
6. Block the wheel diagonally opposite
the fl at tire. When blocking a wheel,
place a tire block both in front and
behind the tire.
NOTE
When blocking a tire, use rocks or wood
blocks of suffi cient size if possible to hold
the tire in place.
Removing a Flat Tire
1. If your vehicle is equipped with a
wheel cover, pry off the wheel cover
with the beveled end of the jack lever.
NOTE
Force the end of the jack lever fi rmly
between wheel and cover, or removal will
be diffi cult.
2. Loosen the lug nuts by turning them
counterclockwise one turn each, but do
not remove any lug nuts until the tire
has been raised off the ground.
3. Place the jack on the ground.
7–8
If Trouble Arises
Flat Tire
4. Turn the jack screw in the direction
shown in the fi gure and adjust the jack
head so that it is close to the jack-up
position.
Jack head
5. Place the jack under the jack-up
position closest to the tire being
changed with the jack head squarely
under the jack-up point.
Jacking position
6. Continue raising the jack head
gradually by rotating the screw with
your hand until the jack head is inserted
into the jack-up position.
Tire blocks
Jacking position
7–9
If Trouble Arises
Flat Tire
WARNING
Use only the front and rear jacking
positions recommended in this manual:
Attempting to jack the vehicle
in positions other than those
recommended in this manual is
dangerous. The vehicle could slip off
the jack and seriously injure or even kill
someone. Use only the front and rear
jacking positions recommended in this
manual.
Do not jack up the vehicle in a position
other than the designated jack-up
position or place any objects on or
under the jack:
Jacking up the vehicle in a position
other than the designated jack-up
position or placing objects on or
under the jack is dangerous as it could
deform the vehicle body or the vehicle
could fall off the jack resulting in an
accident.
Use only the jack provided with your
Mazda:
Using a jack that is not designed for
your Mazda is dangerous. The vehicle
could slip off the jack and seriously
injure someone.
Never place objects under the jack:
Jacking the vehicle with an object
under the jack is dangerous. The jack
could slip and someone could be
seriously injured by the jack or the
falling vehicle.
7. Insert the jack lever and attach the lug
wrench to tire jack.
8. Turn the jack handle clockwise and
raise the vehicle high enough so that
the spare tire can be installed. Before
removing the lug nuts, make sure your
Mazda is fi rmly in position and that it
cannot slip or move.
*Some models.7–10
If Trouble Arises
Flat Tire
WARNING
Do not jack up the vehicle higher than is
necessary:
Jacking up the vehicle higher than
is necessary is dangerous as it could
destabilize the vehicle resulting in an
accident.
Do not start the engine or shake the
vehicle while it is jacked up:
Starting the engine or shaking
the vehicle while it is jacked up is
dangerous as it could cause the vehicle
to fall off the jack resulting in an
accident.
Never go under the vehicle while it is
jacked up:
Going under the vehicle while it is
jacked up is dangerous as it could
result in death or serious injury if the
vehicle were to fall off the jack.
9. Remove the lug nuts by turning them
counterclockwise; then remove the
wheel and center cap.
Locking Lug Nuts *
If your vehicle has Mazda optional
antitheft wheel lug nuts, one on each
wheel will lock the tires and you must use
a special key to unlock them. This key will
attach to the lug wrench and can be stored
with the spare tire. Register them with
the lock manufacturer by fi lling out the
card provided in the glove compartment
and mailing it in the accompanying
envelope. If you lose this key, consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer or use the lock
manufacturer's order form, which is with
the registration card.
Special keyAntitheft lug nut
To remove an antitheft lug nut
1. Obtain the special key for the antitheft
lug nut.
2. Place the special key on top of the
antitheft lug nut, and be sure to hold
the key square to it. If you hold the key
at an angle, you may damage both key
and nut. Do not use a power impact
wrench.
3. Place the lug wrench on top of the key
and apply pressure. Turn the wrench
counterclockwise.
7–11
If Trouble Arises
Flat Tire
To install the antitheft lug nut
1. Place the special key on top of the nut,
and be sure to hold the key square to
it. If you hold the key at an angle, you
may damage both key and nut. Do not
use a power impact wrench.
2. Place the lug wrench on top of the
special key, apply pressure, and turn it
clockwise.
Nut tightening torque
N·m (kgf·m, ft·lbf) 108—147 (12—14, 80—108)
Mounting the Spare Tire
1. Remove dirt and grime from the
mounting surfaces of the wheel and
hub, including the hub bolts, with a
cloth.
WARNING
Make sure the mounting surfaces of
the wheel, hub and lug nuts are clean
before changing or replacing tires:
When changing or replacing a tire,
not removing dirt and grime from the
mounting surfaces of the wheel, hub
and hub bolts is dangerous. The lug
nuts could loosen while driving and
cause the tire to come off , resulting in
an accident.
2. Mount the spare tire.
3. Install the lug nuts with the beveled
edge inward; tighten them by hand.
WARNING
Do not apply oil or grease to lug nuts
and bolts and do not tighten the
lug nuts beyond the recommended
tightening torque:
Applying oil or grease to lug nuts and
bolts is dangerous. The lug nuts could
loosen while driving and cause the tire
to come off , resulting in an accident.
In addition, lug nuts and bolts could
be damaged if tightened more than
necessary.
7–12
If Trouble Arises
Flat Tire
4. Turn the lug wrench counterclockwise
and lower the vehicle. Use the lug
wrench to tighten the nuts in the order
shown.
If you are unsure of how tight the nuts
should be, have them inspected at an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Nut tightening torque
N·m (kgf·m, ft·lbf) 108—147 (12—14, 80—108)
WARNING
Always securely and correctly tighten
the lug nuts:
Improperly or loosely tightened lug
nuts are dangerous. The wheel could
wobble or come off . This could result
in loss of vehicle control and cause a
serious accident.
Be sure to reinstall the same nuts you
removed or replace them with metric
nuts of the same confi guration:
Because the wheel studs and lug nuts
on your Mazda have metric threads,
using a non-metric nut is dangerous.
On a metric stud, it would not secure
the wheel and would damage the stud,
which could cause the wheel to slip off
and cause an accident.
5. Open the trunk/luggage compartment
mat.
Trunk/Luggage compartment mat
6. Remove the belt for securing the fl at
tire.
7–13
If Trouble Arises
Flat Tire
7. Put the fl at tire into the trunk/luggage
compartment on the left and toward the
back.
8. (Split-folding type seat)
Fold the rear seatback forward on the
right side of the rear seat.
9. (Split-folding type seat)
Unlock the rear seatback on the left
side and assure a clearance to pass the
belt.
(One-piece folding type seat)
Unlock the rear seatback and assure a
clearance to pass the belt.
10. Pass the belt through the rear seatback
as shown in the fi gure.
After passing the belt through, return
the rear seatback to the original
position.
(Split-folding type seat)
Belt
(One-piece folding type seat)
Belt
NOTE
Pass the belt underneath the seatbelts.
Belt
Seat belt
7–14
If Trouble Arises
Flat Tire
11. Pass the buckle through the wheel as
shown in the fi gure and secure it so that
the buckle does not contact the wheel.
(Aluminum wheel)
(Steel wheel)
12. Pass the belt through the buckle, then
pull the belt end to secure the fl at tire.
13. (Split-folding type seat)
Return the rear seatback on the right
side of the rear seatback to its original
position.
14. Remove the tire blocks and store the
tools and jack.
15. Check the infl ation pressure. Refer to
Tires on page 9-10 .
16. Have the fl at tire repaired or replaced
as soon as possible.
NOTE
Do not press the tire pressure monitoring
system set switch after installing the spare
tire. The switch is only to be pressed after
installing the repaired fl at tire or installing
a replacement tire (page 4-21 ).
WARNING
Do not drive with any tires that have
incorrect air pressure:
Driving on tires with incorrect air
pressure is dangerous. Tires with
incorrect pressure could aff ect
handling and result in an accident.
When you check the regular tires' air
pressure, check the spare tire, too.
NOTE
To prevent the jack and tool from rattling,
store them properly.
7–15
If Trouble Arises
Battery Runs Out
Jump-Starting
Jump-starting is dangerous if done incorrectly. So follow the procedure carefully. If you
feel unsure about jump-starting, we strongly recommend that you have a competent service
technician do the work.
WARNING
Follow These Precautions Carefully:
To ensure safe and correct handling of the battery, read the following precautions
carefully before using the battery or inspecting it.
Do not allow the positive ( ) terminal to contact any other metal object that
could cause sparks:
Flames and sparks near open battery cells are dangerous. Hydrogen gas, produced
during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode. An
exploding battery can cause serious burns and injuries. When working near a battery, do
not allow metal tools to contact the positive ( ) or negative ( ) terminal of the battery.
Keep all fl ames, including cigarettes, and sparks away from open battery cells:
Flames and sparks near open battery cells are dangerous. Hydrogen gas, produced
during normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode. An
exploding battery can cause serious burns and injuries.
Do not jump-start a frozen battery or one with a low fl uid level:
Jump-starting a frozen battery or one with a low fl uid level is dangerous. It may rupture
or explode, causing serious injury.
Connect the negative cable to a good ground point away from the battery:
Connecting the end of the second jumper cable to the negative ( ) terminal of the
discharged battery is dangerous.
A spark could cause the gas around the battery to explode and injure someone.
Route the jumper cables away from parts that will be moving:
Connecting a jumper cable near or to moving parts (cooling fans, belts) is dangerous. The
cable could get caught when the engine starts and cause serious injury.
7–16
If Trouble Arises
Battery Runs Out
CAUTION
Use only a 12 V booster system. You can damage a 12 V starter, ignition system, and other
electrical parts beyond repair with a 24 V power supply (two 12 V batteries in series or a
24 V motor generator set).
Connect cables in numerical order and disconnect in reverse order.
Jumper cables
Booster battery
Discharged battery
1. Remove the battery cover.
2. Make sure the booster battery is 12
V and that its negative terminal is
grounded.
3. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not allow both vehicles
to touch. Turn off the engine of the
vehicle with the booster battery and
all unnecessary electrical loads in both
vehicles.
4. Connect the jumper cables in the exact
sequence as in the illustration.
Connect one end of a cable to the
positive terminal on the discharged
battery (1).
Attach the other end to the positive
terminal on the booster battery (2).
Connect one end of the other cable to
the negative terminal of the booster
battery (3).
Connect the other end to the ground
point indicated in the illustration away
from the discharged battery (4).
7–17
If Trouble Arises
Battery Runs Out
5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and run it a few minutes. Then start the
engine of the other vehicle.
6. The i-ELOOP indicator light may fl ash
after the engine is started. The indicator
light turns off when the engine is
running and the charging is completed.
Make sure the i-ELOOP indicator light
is turns off before driving.
NOTE
If the vehicle is driven with the
i-ELOOP indicator light fl ashing, a
beep sound is heard.
If the steering wheel is operated with
the i-ELOOP indicator light fl ashing, it
may feel heavier than normal, however,
this does not indicate a malfunction.
The steering operation will return to
normal when the i-ELOOP indicator
light turns off.
Do not remove the jumper cables while
the i-ELOOP indicator light is fl ashing.
7. When fi nished, carefully disconnect the
cables in the reverse order described in
the illustration.
8. If the battery cover has been removed,
install it in the reverse order of
removal.
NOTE
Verify that the covers are securely
installed.
7–18
If Trouble Arises
Emergency Starting
Starting a Flooded Engine
If the engine fails to start, it may be
fl ooded (excessive fuel in the engine).
Follow this procedure:
1. If the engine does not start within
fi ve seconds on the fi rst try, wait ten
seconds and try again.
2. Make sure the parking brake is on.
3. Depress the accelerator all the way and
hold it there.
4. Depress the clutch pedal (Manual
transaxle) or the brake pedal
(Automatic transaxle), then press the
push button start. If the engine starts,
release the accelerator immediately
because the engine will suddenly rev
up.
5. If the engine fails to start, crank it
without depressing the accelerator.
If the engine still does not start using
the above procedure, have your vehicle
inspected by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Push-Starting
Do not push-start your Mazda.
WARNING
Never tow a vehicle to start it:
Towing a vehicle to start it is
dangerous. The vehicle being towed
could surge forward when its engine
starts, causing the two vehicles to
collide. The occupants could be injured.
CAUTION
Do not push-start a vehicle that has a
manual transaxle. It can damage the
emission control system.
NOTE
You cannot start a vehicle with an
automatic transaxle by pushing it.
7–19
If Trouble Arises
Overheating
Overheating
If the High engine coolant temperature
warning light illuminates, the vehicle loses
power, or you hear a loud knocking or
pinging noise, the engine is probably too
hot.
WARNING
Switch the ignition to off and make
sure the fan is not running before
attempting to work near the cooling
fan:
Working near the cooling fan when it
is running is dangerous. The fan could
continue running indefi nitely even if
the engine has stopped and the engine
compartment temperature is high. You
could be hit by the fan and seriously
injured.
Do not remove either cooling
system cap when the engine and
radiator are hot:
When the engine and radiator are hot,
scalding coolant and steam may shoot
out under pressure and cause serious
injury.
Open the hood ONLY after steam is no
longer escaping from the engine:
Steam from an overheated engine is
dangerous. The escaping steam could
seriously burn you.
If the High engine coolant temperature
warning light illuminates:
1. Drive safely to the side of the road and
park off the right-of-way.
2. Put a vehicle with an automatic
transaxle in park (P), a manual
transaxle in neutral.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Turn off the air conditioner.
5. Check whether coolant or steam is
escaping from the engine compartment.
If steam is coming from the engine
compartment:
Do not go near the front of the vehicle.
Stop the engine.
Wait until the steam dissipates, then
open the hood and start the engine.
If neither coolant nor steam is escaping:
Open the hood and idle the engine until
it cools.
CAUTION
If the cooling fan does not operate
while the engine is running, the engine
temperature will increase. Stop the
engine and call an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
6. Make sure the cooling fan is operating,
then turn off the engine after the
temperature has decreased.
7. When cool, check the coolant level.
If it is low, look for coolant leaks from
the radiator and hoses.
7–20
If Trouble Arises
Overheating
If you fi nd a leak or other damage, or if
coolant is still leaking:
Stop the engine and call an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
Cooling system cap
Coolant reservoir
Cooling fan
If you fi nd no problems, the engine is
cool, and no leaks are obvious:
Carefully add coolant as required (page
6-29 ).
CAUTION
If the engine continues to overheat or
frequently overheats, have the cooling
system inspected. The engine could be
seriously damaged unless repairs are
made. Consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
7–21
If Trouble Arises
Emergency Towing
Towing Description
We recommend that towing be done only
by an Authorized Mazda Dealer or a
commercial tow-truck service.
Proper lifting and towing are necessary
to prevent damage to the vehicle.
Government and local laws must be
followed.
A towed vehicle usually should have its
drive wheels (front wheels) off the ground.
If excessive damage or other conditions
prevent this, use wheel dollies.
Wheel dollies
When towing with the rear wheels on the
ground, release the parking brake.
CAUTION
Do not tow the vehicle pointed
backward with driving wheels on
the ground. This may cause internal
damage to the transaxle.
Do not tow with sling-type equipment.
This could damage your vehicle. Use
wheel-lift or fl atbed equipment.
7–22
If Trouble Arises
Emergency Towing
Tiedown Hooks
CAUTION
Do not use the front and rear tiedown
eyelets for towing the vehicle.
They have been designed only for
securing the vehicle to a transport
vessel during shipping.
Using the eyelets for any other purpose
could result in the vehicle being
damaged.
Tiedown Hooks
1. Remove the tiedown eyelet and the lug
wrench from the luggage compartment
(page 7-3 ).
2. Wrap a fl athead screwdriver or similar
tool with a soft cloth to prevent damage
to a painted bumper, and open the cap
located on the front or rear bumper.
Front
Rear
CAUTION
Do not use excessive force as it may
damage the cap or scratch the painted
bumper surface.
NOTE
Remove the cap completely and store it so
as not to lose it.
3. Securely install the tiedown eyelet
using the lug wrench.
Front
Lug wrench
Tiedown eyelet
7–23
If Trouble Arises
Emergency Towing
Rear
Lug wrench
Tiedown eyelet
4. Hook the tying rope to the tiedown
eyelet.
CAUTION
If the tiedown eyelet is not securely
tightened, it may loosen or disengage
from the bumper when tying the
vehicle. Make sure that the tiedown
eyelet is securely tightened to the
bumper.
7–24
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
If a Warning Light Turns On or Flashes
If any warning light turns on/fl ashes, take appropriate action for each light. There is no
problem if the light turns off, however if the light does not turn off or turns on/fl ashes again,
consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
(Vehicles with type B Audio)
The warning contents can be verifi ed on the audio.
1. Select the ( ) icon on the home screen to display the Applications screen.
2. Select the Warning Guidance.
Stop Vehicle in Safe Place Immediately
If any of the following warning lights turns on, the system may have a malfunction. Stop the
vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Signal Warning
Brake System Warning
Light
This warning has the following functions:
Parking brake warning/Warning light inspection
The light illuminates when the parking brake is applied with the ignition switched to
START or ON. It turns off when the parking brake is fully released.
Low brake fl uid level warning
If the brake warning light remains illuminated even though the parking brake is
released, the brake fl uid may be low or there could be a problem with the brake system.
Park the vehicle in a safe place immediately and contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
WARNING
Do not drive with the brake system warning light illuminated. Contact an
Authorized Mazda Dealer to have the brakes inspected as soon as possible:
Driving with the brake system warning light illuminated is dangerous. It indicates
that your brakes may not work at all or that they could completely fail at any
time. If this light remains illuminated, after checking that the parking brake is fully
released, have the brakes inspected immediately.
CAUTION
In addition, the eff ectiveness of the braking may diminish so you may need to
depress the brake pedal more strongly than normal to stop the vehicle.
7–25
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
Signal Warning
Electronic Brake Force
Distribution System
Warning
If the electronic brake force distribution control unit determines that some components
are operating incorrectly, the control unit may illuminate the brake system warning
light and the ABS warning light simultaneously. The problem is likely to be the
electronic brake force distribution system.
WARNING
Do not drive with both the ABS warning light and brake warning light illuminated.
Have the vehicle towed to an Authorized Mazda Dealer to have the brakes
inspected as soon as possible:
Driving when the brake system warning light and ABS warning light are
illuminated simultaneously is dangerous.
When both lights are illuminated, the rear wheels could lock more quickly in an
emergency stop than under normal circumstances.
Charging System
Warning Light
If the warning light illuminates while driving, it indicates a malfunction of the
alternator or of the charging system.
Drive to the side of the road and park off the right-of-way. Consult an Authorized
Mazda Dealer.
CAUTION
Do not continue driving when the charging system warning light is illuminated
because the engine could stop unexpectedly.
Engine Oil Warning
Light
This warning light indicates low engine oil pressure.
CAUTION
Do not run the engine if the oil pressure is low. Otherwise, it could result in extensive
engine damage.
If the light illuminates or the warning indication is displayed while driving:
1. Drive to the side of the road and park off the right-of-way on level ground.
2. Turn off the engine and wait 5 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan.
3. Inspect the engine oil level 6-28 . If it's low, add the appropriate amount of engine oil
while being careful not to overfi ll.
CAUTION
Do not run the engine if the oil level is low. Otherwise, it could result in extensive
engine damage.
4. Start the engine and check the warning light.
If the light remains illuminated even though the oil level is normal or after adding oil,
stop the engine immediately and have your vehicle towed to an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
7–26
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
Signal Warning
(Red)
High Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning
Light
The light fl ashes when the engine coolant temperature is extremely high, and
illuminates when the engine coolant temperature increases further.
Handling Procedure
Flashing light
Drive slowly to reduce engine load until you can fi nd a safe place to stop the vehicle
and wait for the engine to cool down.
Illuminated light
This indicates the possibility of overheating. Park the vehicle in a safe place
immediately and stop the engine.
Refer to Overheating 7-19 .
CAUTION
Do not drive the vehicle with the high engine coolant temperature warning light
illuminated. Otherwise, it could result in damage to the engine.
Power Steering
Malfunction Indicator
Light
The light illuminates/fl ashes if the electric power steering has a malfunction.
If the light illuminates/fl ashes, stop the vehicle in a safe place and do not operate the
steering wheel. There is no problem if the light turns off after a while. Contact an
Authorized Mazda Dealer if the light illuminates/fl ashes continuously.
NOTE
If the indicator light illuminates/fl ashes, the power steering will not operate normally.
If this happens, the steering wheel can still be operated, however, the operation may
feel heavy compared to normal, or the steering wheel could vibrate when turning.
Repeatedly jerking the steering wheel left and right while the vehicle is stopped or
moving extremely slowly will cause the power steering system to go into protective
mode which will make the steering feel heavy, but this does not indicate a problem. If
this occurs, park the vehicle safely and wait several minutes for the system to return
to normal.
*Some models. 7–27
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
Contact Authorized Mazda Dealer and Have Vehicle Inspected
If any of the following warning lights turns on/fl ashes, the system may have a malfunction.
Contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer to have your vehicle inspected.
Signal Warning
Master Warning
Light
(Vehicles with type B audio)
The light turns on when the system has a malfunction.
Operate the audio display and verify the content.
Refer to If a Warning Light Turns On or Flashes on page 7-24 .
(Vehicles without type B audio)
The light illuminates continuously if any one of the following occurs. Consult an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
There is a malfunction in the battery management system.
There is a malfunction in the brake switch.
ABS Warning Light
If the ABS warning light stays on while you're driving, the ABS control unit has detected a
system malfunction. If this occurs, your brakes will function normally as if the vehicle had
no ABS.
Should this happen, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
NOTE
When the engine is jump-started to charge the battery, uneven rpm occurs and the ABS
warning light may illuminate. If this occurs, it is the result of the weak battery and does
not indicate an ABS malfunction.
Recharge the battery.
The brake assist system does not operate while the ABS warning light is illuminated.
Check Engine Light
If this light illuminates while driving, the vehicle may have a problem. It is important to
note the driving conditions when the light illuminated and consult an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
The check engine light may illuminate in the following cases:
The fuel tank level being very low or approaching empty.
The engine's electrical system has a problem.
The emission control system has a problem.
The fuel-fi ller cap is missing or not tightened securely.
If the check engine light remains on, or it fl ashes continuously , do not drive at high speeds
and consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
Automatic
Transaxle Warning
Light*
The light/indication illuminates when the transaxle has a problem.
CAUTION
If the automatic transaxle warning light illuminates, the transaxle has an electrical
problem. Continuing to drive your Mazda in this condition could cause damage to your
transaxle. Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
*Some models.7–28
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
Signal Warning
Air Bag/Front Seat
Belt Pretensioner
System Warning
Light
A system malfunction is indicated if the warning light constantly fl ashes, constantly
illuminates or does not illuminate at all when the ignition is switched ON. If any of these
occur, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible. The system may not operate
in an accident.
WARNING
Never tamper with the air bag/pretensioner systems and always have an Authorized
Mazda Dealer perform all servicing and repairs:
Self-servicing or tampering with the systems is dangerous. An air bag/pretensioner
could accidentally activate or become disabled causing serious injury or death.
Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
Warning Light *
If the tire pressure monitoring system has a malfunction, the tire pressure warning
light fl ashes for about 1 minute when the ignition is switched ON and then continues
illuminating. Have your vehicle checked by an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as
possible.
WARNING
If the tire pressure monitoring system warning light illuminates or fl ashes, or the tire
pressure warning beep sound is heard, decrease vehicle speed immediately and avoid
sudden maneuvering and braking:
If the tire pressure monitoring system warning light illuminates or fl ashes, or the tire
pressure warning beep sound is heard, it is dangerous to drive the vehicle at high
speeds, or perform sudden maneuvering or braking. Vehicle drivability could worsen
and result in an accident.
To determine if you have a slow leak or a fl at, pull over to a safe position where you can
check the visual condition of the tire and determine if you have enough air to proceed
to a place where air may be added and the system monitored again by an Authorized
Mazda Dealer or a tire repair station.
Do not ignore the TPMS Warning Light:
Ignoring the TPMS warning light is dangerous, even if you know why it is illuminated.
Have the problem taken care of as soon as possible before it develops into a more
serious situation that could lead to tire failure and a dangerous accident.
(Red)
(Illuminate)
KEY Warning Light
If any malfunction occurs in the keyless entry system, it illuminates continuously.
CAUTION
If the key warning indicator light illuminates or the push button start indicator light
(amber) fl ashes, the engine may not start. If the engine cannot be started, try starting it
using the emergency operation for starting the engine, and have the vehicle inspected
at an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.
Refer to Emergency Operation for Starting the Engine on page 4-10 .
*Some models. 7–29
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
Signal Warning
(Amber)
(Flashes)
Lane Departure
Warning System
(LDWS) Warning
Light*
The warning light fl ashes when the system has a malfunction. Have your vehicle inspected
at an Authorized Mazda Dealer. The LDWS does not operate when the warning light fl ashes.
CAUTION
If any of the following cases occurs, the system may have a malfunction. Have the
vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
The light fl ashes while the vehicle is being driven.
The light does not illuminate when the ignition is switched ON.
Always use tires for all wheels that are of the specifi ed size, and the same manufacture,
brand, and tread pattern. In addition, do not use tires with signifi cantly diff erent
wear patterns on the same vehicle. If such improper tires are used, the LDWS may not
operate normally.
When an emergency spare tire is used, the system may not operate normally.
(Amber)
High Beam Control
System (HBC)
Warning Light *
When illuminated
The warning light illuminates if the area of the windshield in front of the forward sensing
camera (FSC) is fogged or obstructed.
When fl ashing
This light fl ashes if there is a malfunction in the high beam control system (HBC). Have
your vehicle inspected by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
(Amber)
(Flashing)
Mazda Radar
Cruise Control
(MRCC) Warning
Light*
The warning light fl ashes if there is a malfunction in the system while the Mazda Radar
Cruise Control (MRCC) system is on. Have your vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
7–30
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
Taking Action
Take the appropriate action and verify that the warning light turns off.
Signal Warning Action to be taken
Low Fuel
Warning
Light
The light turns on when the remaining fuel is
about 9.0 L (2.3 US gal, 1.9 Imp gal).
NOTE
The light illumination timing may vary because
fuel inside the fuel tank moves around according
to the driving conditions and the vehicle posture.
Add fuel.
Check
Fuel Cap
Warning
Light
If the check fuel cap warning light illuminates
while driving, the fuel-fi ller cap may not be
installed properly.
Stop the engine and reinstall the fuel-fi ller cap.
Refer to Fuel-Filler Cap on page 3-30
7–31
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
Signal Warning Action to be taken
Seat Belt
Warning
Light
With warning light for front passenger's seat
The seat belt warning light illuminates if the driver or front passenger's seat is occupied and the
seat belt is not fastened with the ignition switched ON.
Without warning light for front passenger's seat
The seat belt warning light illuminates if the driver's seat is occupied and the seat belt is not
fastened with the ignition switched ON.
Seat belt reminder
NOTE
Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer to deactivate or restore the belt reminder. Though the belt
reminder can be deactivated, doing so will defeat the purpose of the system to warn the driver and
the front passenger in the event that their seat belts are not fastened. For the safety of the driver
and front passenger, Mazda recommends not deactivating the belt reminder.
Front seat
If the vehicle is driven with the driver or front passenger's seat belt unfastened, the seat belt
warning light illuminates and a warning beep sounds.
NOTE
Some models do not have the seat belt reminder function for the front passenger's seat.
If the driver or front passenger's seat belt is unfastened (only when the front passenger seat is
occupied) and the vehicle is driven at a speed faster than about 20 km/h (12 mph), the warning light
will fl ash and a beep sound will be heard. After a short time, the warning light stops fl ashing, but
remains illuminated, and the beep sound stops.
Until a seat belt is fastened or a given period of time has elapsed, the beep sound will not stop even
if the vehicle speed falls below 20 km/h (12 mph).
NOTE
The warning light fl ashes and a beep sound will be heard for about 6 seconds if the driver's seat
belt is not fastened when the ignition is switched ON.
If a driver or front passenger's seat belt is unfastened after the beep sound turns off (warning light
remains illuminated), and the vehicle speed exceeds 20 km/h (12 mph), the warning light fl ashes
and beep sound activates again.
Placing heavy items on the front passenger seat may cause the front passenger seat belt warning
function to operate depending on the weight of the item.
To allow the front passenger seat weight sensor to function properly, do not place and sit on
an additional seat cushion on the front passenger seat. The sensor may not function properly
because the additional seat cushion could cause sensor interference.
When a small child sits on the front passenger seat, it is possible that the warning light will not
operate.
Door-Ajar
Warning
Light
The light turns on if any door is not closed
securely. Close the door securely.
*Some models.7–32
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
Signal Warning Action to be taken
Low Washer
Fluid Level
Warning
Light
This warning light indicates that little washer
fl uid remains. Add washer fl uid (page 6-31 ).
Tire
Pressure
Monitoring
System
Warning
Light*
When the warning light illuminates, and the
warning beep sound is heard (about 3 seconds),
tire pressure is too low in one or more tires.
WARNING
If the tire pressure monitoring system
warning light illuminates or fl ashes, or the
tire pressure warning beep sound is heard,
decrease vehicle speed immediately and
avoid sudden maneuvering and braking:
If the tire pressure monitoring system
warning light illuminates or fl ashes, or the
tire pressure warning beep sound is heard,
it is dangerous to drive the vehicle at high
speeds, or perform sudden maneuvering
or braking. Vehicle drivability could worsen
and result in an accident.
To determine if you have a slow leak or a
fl at, pull over to a safe position where you
can check the visual condition of the tire
and determine if you have enough air to
proceed to a place where air may be added
and the system monitored again by an
Authorized Mazda Dealer or a tire repair
station.
Do not ignore the TPMS Warning Light:
Ignoring the TPMS warning light is
dangerous, even if you know why it is
illuminated. Have the problem taken care of
as soon as possible before it develops into
a more serious situation that could lead to
tire failure and a dangerous accident.
Inspect the tires and adjust to the specifi ed
infl ation pressure (page 6-41 ).
NOTE
Perform tire pressure adjustment when the tires
are cold. Tire pressure will vary according
to the tire temperature, therefore let the
vehicle stand for 1 hour or only drive it 1.6
km (1 mile) or less before adjusting the tire
pressures. When pressure is adjusted on hot
tires to the cold infl ation pressure, the TPMS
warning light/beep may turn on after the tires
cool and pressure drops below specifi cation.
Also, an illuminated TPMS warning light,
resulting from the tire air pressure dropping
due to cold ambient temperature will remain
illuminated even if the ambient temperature
rises. In this case, it will also be necessary
to adjust the tire air pressures. If the TPMS
warning light illuminates due to a drop in tire
air pressure, make sure to check and adjust the
tire air pressures.
Tires lose air naturally over time and the
TPMS cannot tell if the tires are getting too
soft over time or you have a fl at. However,
when you fi nd one low tire in a set of four-that
is an indication of trouble; you should have
someone drive the vehicle slowly forward
so you can inspect any low tire for cuts and
any metal objects sticking through tread or
sidewall. Put a few drops of water in the valve
stem to see if it bubbles indicating a bad
valve. Leaks need to be addressed by more
than simply reinfl ating the tire as leaks are
dangerous — take it to an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
*Some models. 7–33
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
Signal Warning Action to be taken
(Amber)
Forward
Obstruction
Warning/
Smart
City Brake
Support
(FOW/
SCBS)
Indicator
Light*
The light turns on if the windshield and the radar
sensor are dirty or there is a malfunction in the
system.
Verify the reason why the warning light is
illuminated on the audio display (page 7-24 ).
If the reason why the warning light is
illuminated is due to a dirty windshield, clean
the windshield.
If the warning light is illuminated because of a
dirty radar sensor, clean the front emblem.
For any other reasons, have the vehicle
inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
KEY Warning Light
Take the appropriate action and verify that the warning light turns off.
Signal Cause Action to be taken
(Red)
(Flashing)
The advanced key battery is dead. Replace the battery (page 6-39 ).
The advanced key is not within the
operation range.
Bring the advanced key into the operation
range (page 3-7 ). The advanced key is placed in areas inside
the cabin where it is diffi cult for the key to
be detected.
A key from another manufacturer similar to
the advanced key is in the operation range.
Take the key from another manufacturer
similar to the advanced key out of the
operation range.
Without the ignition switched off, the
advanced key is taken out of the cabin, and
then all the door are closed.
Bring the advanced key back into the
cabin.
*Some models.7–34
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
Message Indicated on Display *
If a message is displayed in the type B audio display, take appropriate action (in a calm
manner) according to the displayed message.
(Display example)
Stop Vehicle in Safe Place Immediately
If the following messages are displayed in the Type B audio display, a vehicle system may
be malfunctioning. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Display Indicated Condition
Displays if the engine coolant temperature has increased
excessively.
Displays if the charging system has a malfunction.
7–35
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
Make Sure the Message is No Longer Displayed
Displays in the following cases:
Display Indicated Condition/Action to be taken
Displays if i-ELOOP requires charging. Leave the engine
idling and wait until the message disappears.
NOTE
If the vehicle is driven while the message is displayed, the
buzzer will sound.
If you turn the steering wheel while the message is
displayed, it will feel heavier than normal, but this does
not indicate an abnormality. The steering operation will
return to normal after the message has disappeared.
7–36
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
Warning Sound is Activated
Lights-On Reminder
The lights-on reminder is operable when
the time setting *1 of the auto headlight off
function is off.
If lights are on and the ignition is switched
to ACC or the ignition is switched off, a
continuous beep sound will be heard when
the driver's door is opened.
*1 If the light switch is left on, the auto
headlight off function automatically
turns off the lights about 30 seconds
after switching the ignition off. The
time setting can be changed.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-12 .
NOTE
When the ignition is switched to ACC,
the “Ignition Not Switched Off (STOP)
Warning Beep” (page 7-37 ) overrides
the lights-on reminder.
A personalized function is available to
change the sound volume for the lightson reminder.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-12 .
Air Bag/Front Seat Belt
Pretensioner System Warning
Beep
If a malfunction is detected in the air bag/
front seat belt pretensioner systems and the
warning light illuminates, a warning beep
sound will be heard for about 5 seconds
every minute.
The air bag and seat belt pretensioner
system warning beep sound will continue
to be heard for approximately 35
minutes. Have your vehicle inspected at
an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as
possible.
WARNING
Do not drive the vehicle with the air
bag/front seat belt pretensioner system
warning beep sounding:
Driving the vehicle with the air bag/
front seat belt pretensioner system
warning beep sounding is dangerous.
In a collision, the air bags and the front
seat belt pretensioner system will not
deploy and this could result in death or
serious injury. Contact an Authorized
Mazda Dealer to have the vehicle
inspected as soon as possible.
7–37
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
Seat Belt Warning Beep
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened
when the ignition is switched ON, a beep
sound will be heard for about 6 seconds. If
the driver or the front passenger's seat belt
is not fastened and the vehicle is driven
at a speed faster than about 20 km/h (12
mph), a beep sound will be heard again for
a specifi ed period of time.
NOTE
Some models do not have the seat
belt warning function for the front
passenger's seat.
Placing heavy items on the front
passenger seat may cause the front
passenger seat belt warning function to
operate depending on the weight of the
item.
To allow the front passenger seat
weight sensor to function properly, do
not place and sit on an additional seat
cushion on the front passenger seat.
The sensor may not function properly
because the additional seat cushion
could cause sensor interference.
When a small child sits on the front
passenger seat, it is possible that the
warning beep will not operate.
Ignition Not Switched Off (STOP)
Warning Beep
If the driver's door is opened while
the ignition is switched to ACC, a
continuous beep sound will be heard to
notify the driver that the ignition has not
been switched off (STOP). Left in this
condition, the keyless entry system will
not operate, the car cannot be locked, and
the battery power will be depleted.
Key Removed from Vehicle
Warning Beep
A beep sound will be heard 6 times and
the KEY warning light (red) will fl ash
continuously if the ignition has not been
switched off, all the doors are closed, and
the key is removed from the vehicle. This
is to notify the driver that the key has been
removed from the vehicle and the ignition
has not been switched off.
NOTE
Because the key utilizes low-intensity
radio waves, the Key Removed From
Vehicle Warning may activate if the key is
carried together with a metal object or it
is placed in a poor signal reception area.
Request Switch Inoperable
Warning Beep (With the advanced
keyless function)
If the request switch is pressed with a door
open or ajar or the ignition has not been
switched off while the key is being carried,
a beep will be heard for about 2 seconds
to indicate that the doors and the liftgate/
trunk lid cannot be locked.
Key Left-in-luggage Compartment
Warning Beep (With the advanced
keyless function)
If the key is left in the trunk with all doors
locked and the trunk lid closed, a beep
sound is heard for about 10 seconds to
remind the driver the key has been left in
the trunk. If this happens, open the trunk
lid by pressing the electric trunk lid opener
and remove the key. A key removed from
the trunk may not function because its
functions may have been temporarily
suspended. To restore the key function,
perform the applicable procedure (page
3-8 ).
7–38
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
Key Left-in-vehicle Warning Beep
(With the advanced keyless
function)
If a key is left in the vehicle cabin and all
the doors and the trunk are locked using
a separate key, a beep sound is heard for
about 10 seconds to remind the driver
that the key has been left in the vehicle
cabin. If this happens, open the door and
remove the key. A key removed from the
vehicle this way may not function because
its functions may have been temporarily
suspended. Perform the applicable
procedure to restore the functions of the
key (page 3-8 ).
i-ELOOP Warning Beep
The beep will activate if you attempt to
drive the vehicle under the following
conditions.
The i-ELOOP indicator light is fl ashing
green.
“i-ELOOP” charging" is indicated in the
Type B audio display.
The beep will stop when the vehicle is
stopped. Make sure the indicator light is
no longer illuminated and the message
is no longer displayed before driving the
vehicle.
Tire Infl ation Pressure Warning
Beep
The warning beep sound will be heard
for about 3 seconds when there is any
abnormality in tire infl ation pressures
(page 4-104 ).
Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS) Warning Sound
While the system is operating, if the
system determines that the vehicle may
depart from the lane, it sounds a warning
sound.
NOTE
The volume of the LDWS warning
sound can be changed.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-12 .
The type of the LDWS warning sound
can be changed.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-12 .
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)
System Warning Beep
Driving forward
The warning beep operates when the turn
signal lever is operated to the side where
the BSM warning light is illuminated.
NOTE
A personalized function is available to
change the BSM warning beep sound
volume.
Refer to Personalization Features on
page 9-12 .
Reversing
If vehicles approach from the rear on the
left and right, the Blind Spot Monitoring
(BSM) warning beep operates.
*Some models. 7–39
If Trouble Arises
Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds
Mazda Radar Cruise Control
(MRCC) System Warnings *
The Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
system warnings notify the driver of
system malfunctions and cautions on use
when required.
Check based on the beep sound.
Cautions What to check
The beep sounds 1 time
while the Mazda Radar
Cruise Control (MRCC)
is operating
The vehicle speed is
slower than 25 km/h (16
mph) and the Mazda
Radar Cruise Control
(MRCC) system has
been canceled.
The beep sounds
continuously while
driving
The distance between
your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead is too
close. Verify the safety
of the surrounding area
and reduce vehicle
speed.
When the Mazda
Radar Cruise Control
(MRCC) is operating,
the beep sounds and the
Mazda Radar Cruise
Control (MRCC)
warning light (amber)
in the instrument cluster
fl ashes.
A malfunction in
the system may be
indicated. Have your
vehicle inspected at
an Authorized Mazda
Dealer.
Collision warning
If there is the possibility of a collision
with a vehicle or obstruction ahead, the
beep sounds continuously and a warning is
indicated in the display.
Power Steering Warning Buzzer
If the power steering system has
a malfunction, the power steering
malfunction light turns on or fl ashes and
the buzzer operates at the same time.
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page
4-21 .
Over Rev. Buzzer *
The buzzer sounds to notify the driver if
the engine speed is about to exceed the
permissible engine speed.
CAUTION
Operate the accelerator and shift gears
according to the driving conditions so
that the buzzer does not sound. If the
engine speed exceeds the permissible
engine speed, the engine could be
damaged.
7–40
If Trouble Arises
When Liftgate/Trunk Lid Cannot be Opened
When Liftgate/Trunk Lid
Cannot be Opened
If the vehicle battery is dead or there is a
malfunction in the electrical system and
the liftgate/trunk lid can not be opened,
perform the following procedure as an
emergency measure to Open it:
(5–door)
1. Remove the cap on the interior
surface of the liftgate with a fl athead
screwdriver.
Cap
2. Turn the lever to the right to unlock the
liftgate.
Lever
Cap
(4–door)
1. Open the cover.
2. Open the cap.
Cover
Cap
3. Turn the screw counterclockwise and
remove it, and then remove the cap.
Screw
7–41
If Trouble Arises
When Liftgate/Trunk Lid Cannot be Opened
4. Move the lever to the left to fold the
seatback.
Cover
Lever
5. Move the lever to the left to open the
trunk lid.
(Type A)
(Type B)
After performing this emergency
measure, have the vehicle inspected at
an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as
possible.
*Some models.7–42
If Trouble Arises
Active Driving Display Does Not Operate*
If the Active Driving
Display Does Not Operate
If the active driving display does not
operate, switch the ignition off and then
restart the engine. If the active driving
display does not operate even with
the engine restarted, have the vehicle
inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
8–1
8 Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Important consumer information including warranties and add-on
equipment.
Customer Assistance ........................... 8-2
Customer Assistance (U.S.A.) ........ 8-2
Customer Assistance (Canada) ........ 8-6
Customer Assistance
(Puerto Rico) .................................. 8-9
Customer Assistance (Mexico) ...... 8-10
Mazda Importer/Distributors .......... 8-12
Importer/Distributor ..................... 8-12
Reporting Safety Defects .................. 8-13
Reporting Safety Defects
(U.S.A.) ........................................ 8-13
Reporting Safety Defects
(Canada) ....................................... 8-14
Warranty ............................................ 8-15
Warranties for Your Mazda .......... 8-15
Outside the United States/
Canada .......................................... 8-16
Registering Your Vehicle in A
Foreign Country (Except United
States and Canada) ....................... 8-17
Add-On Non-Genuine Parts and
Accessories .................................. 8-18
Cell Phones ........................................ 8-19
Cell Phones Warning .................... 8-19
Event Data Recorder ........................ 8-20
Event Data Recorder (U.S.A.
and Canada) ................................. 8-20
Uniform Tire Quality Grading System
(UTQGS) ............................................ 8-21
Uniform Tire Quality Grading System
(UTQGS) ...................................... 8-21
Tire Information (U.S.A.) ................. 8-23
Tire Labeling ................................ 8-23
Location of the Tire Label
(Placard) ....................................... 8-29
Tire Maintenance ......................... 8-32
Vehicle Loading ........................... 8-35
Steps for Determining the
Correct Load Limit ...................... 8-41
Declaration of Conformity ............... 8-42
Declaration of Conformity ........... 8-42
Service Publications .......................... 8-49
Service Publications ..................... 8-49
8–2
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
Customer Assistance (U.S.A.)
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. We are here to serve you. All
Authorized Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the tools to keep your Mazda vehicle in
top condition.
If you have any questions or recommendations for improvement regarding the service of
your Mazda vehicle or servicing by Mazda Dealer personnel, we recommend that you take
the following steps:
NOTE
If it becomes necessary to have the components or wiring system for the supplementary
restraint system modifi ed to accommodate a person with certain medical conditions in
accordance with a certifi ed physician, contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
STEP 1: Contact Your Mazda Dealer
Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer. This is the quickest and best way to
address the issue.
If your concern has not been resolved by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS, SALES,
SERVICE, or PARTS MANAGER, then please contact the GENERAL MANAGER of
the dealership or the OWNER.
If it becomes necessary to have the components or wiring system for the supplementary
restraint system modifi ed to accommodate a person with certain medical conditions in
accordance with a certifi ed physician, go to STEP 2.
STEP 2: Contact Mazda North American Operations
If for any reason you feel the need for further assistance after contacting your dealership
management or it becomes necessary to have the components or wiring system for the
supplementary restraint system modifi ed to accommodate a person with certain medical
conditions in accordance with a certifi ed physician, you can reach Mazda North American
Operations by one of the following ways.
Log on: at www.MazdaUSA.com
Answers to many questions, including how to locate or contact a local Mazda dealership in
the U.S., can be found here.
E-mail: click on “Contact Us” located on the “Inside Mazda” tab, or at the bottom of the
page at www.MazdaUSA.com
By phone at: 1 (800) 222-5500
8–3
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
By letter at:
Attn: Customer Assistance
Mazda North American Operations
7755 Irvine Center Drive
Irvine, CA 92618-2922
P.O. Box 19734
Irvine, CA 92623-9734
In order to serve you effi ciently and effectively, please help us by providing the following
information:
1. Your name, address, and telephone number
2. Year and model of vehicle
3. Vehicle Identifi cation Number (17 digits, noted on your registration or title or located on
the upper driver's side corner of the dash)
4. Purchase date and current mileage
5. Your dealer's name and location
6. Your question(s)
If you live outside the U.S.A., please contact your nearest Mazda Distributor.
STEP 3: Contact Better Business Bureau (BBB)
Mazda North American Operations realizes that mutual agreement on some issues may
not be possible. As a fi nal step to ensure that your concerns are being fairly considered,
Mazda North American Operations has agreed to participate in a dispute settlement program
administered by the Better Business Bureau (BBB) system, at no cost to you the consumer.
BBB AUTO LINE works with consumers and the manufacturer in an attempt to reach a
mutually acceptable resolution of any warranty related concerns. If the BBB is not able to
facilitate a settlement they will provide an informal hearing before an arbitrator.
You are required to resort to BBB AUTO LINE before exercising rights or seeking remedies
under the Federal Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. § 2301 et seq. To the extent
permitted by the applicable state “Lemon Law”, you are also required to resort to BBB
AUTO LINE before exercising any rights or seeking remedies under the “Lemon Law”. If
you choose to seek remedies that are not created by the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or
the applicable state “Lemon Law”, you are not required to fi rst use BBB AUTO LINE.
The whole process normally takes 40 days or less. The arbitration decision is not binding
on you or Mazda unless you accept the decision. For more information about BBB AUTO
LINE, including current eligibility standards, please call 1-800-955-5100 or visit the BBB
website at www.lemonlaw.bbb.org.
8–4
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
Being truly committed to customer satisfaction is more than a phrase with Mazda. We hope
to satisfy every customer directly, but if there is ever a question about our decision, Mazda
believes in providing a fast, fair and free method such as the BBB AUTO LINE to ensure
Mazda delivers on our commitment to do the right thing for our customers!
California Customers
1. Mazda North American Operations participates in BBB AUTO LINE, a mediation/
arbitration program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus [4200
Wilson Boulevard, Arlington, Virginia 22203] through local Better Business Bureaus.
BBB AUTO LINE and Mazda have been certifi ed by the Arbitration Certifi cation
Program of the California Department of Consumer Affairs.
2. If you have a problem arising under a Mazda written warranty, we encourage you to
bring it to our attention. If we are unable to resolve it, you may fi le a claim with BBB
AUTO LINE. Claims must be fi led with BBB AUTO LINE within six (6) months after
the expiration of the warranty.
3. To fi le a claim with BBB AUTO LINE, call 1-800-955-5100. There is no charge for the
call.
4. In order to fi le a claim with BBB AUTO LINE, you will have to provide your name and
address, the brand name and vehicle identifi cation number (VIN) of your vehicle, and a
statement of the nature of your problem or complaint. You will also be asked to provide:
the approximate date of your acquisition of the vehicle, the vehicle's current mileage,
the approximate date and mileage at the time any problem(s) were fi rst brought to the
attention of Mazda or one of our dealers, and a statement of the relief you are seeking.
5. BBB AUTO LINE staff may try to help resolve your dispute through mediation. If
mediation is not successful, or if you do not wish to participate in mediation, claims
within the program's jurisdiction may be presented to an arbitrator at an informal hearing.
The arbitrator's decision should ordinarily be issued within 40 days from the time your
complaint is fi led; there may be a delay of 7 days if you did not fi rst contact Mazda about
your problem, or a delay of up to 30 days if the arbitrator requests an inspection/report
by an impartial technical expert or further investigation and report by BBB AUTO LINE.
6. You are required to use BBB AUTO LINE before asserting in court any rights or
remedies conferred by California Civil Code Section 1793.22. You are also required to
use BBB AUTO LINE before exercising rights or seeking remedies created by Title I
of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seek
redress by pursuing rights and remedies not created by California Civil Code Section
1793.22 or Title I of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, resort to BBB AUTO LINE is
not required by those statutes.
8–5
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
7. California Civil Code Section 1793.2 (d) requires that, if Mazda or its representative
is unable to repair a new motor vehicle to conform to the vehicle's applicable express
warranty after a reasonable number of attempts, Mazda may be required to replace or
repurchase the vehicle. California Civil Code Section 1793.22 (b) creates a presumption
that Mazda has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its
applicable express warranties if, within 18 months from delivery to the buyer or 18,000
miles on the vehicle's odometer, whichever occurs fi rst, one or more of the following
occurs:
The same nonconformity [a failure to conform to the written warranty that substantially
impairs the use, value or safety of the vehicle] results in a condition that is likely to
cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven AND the nonconformity has
been subject to repair two or more times by Mazda or its agents AND the buyer or lessee
has directly notifi ed Mazda of the need for the repair of the nonconformity; OR
The same nonconformity has been subject to repair 4 or more times by Mazda
or its agents AND the buyer has notifi ed Mazda of the need for the repair of the
nonconformity; OR
The vehicle is out of service by reason of repair of nonconformities by Mazda or its
agents for a cumulative total of more than 30 calendar days after delivery of the vehicle
to the buyer.
NOTICE TO Mazda AS REQUIRED ABOVE SHALL BE SENT TO THE
FOLLOWING ADDRESS:
Mazda North American Operations
7755 Irvine Center Drive
Irvine, CA 92618
ATTN: Customer Mediation
8. The following remedies may be sought in BBB AUTO LINE: repairs, reimbursement
for money paid to repair a vehicle or other expenses incurred as result of a vehicle
nonconformity, repurchase or replacement of your vehicle, and compensation for
damages and remedies available under Mazda's written warranty or applicable law.
9. The following remedies may not be sought in BBB AUTO LINE: punitive or multiple
damages, attorneys' fees, or consequential damages other than as provided in California
Civil Code Section 1794 (a) and (b).
10. You may reject the decision issued by a BBB AUTO LINE arbitrator. If you reject the
decision, you will be free to pursue further legal action. The arbitrator's decision and any
fi ndings will be admissible in a court action.
11. If you accept the arbitrator's decision, Mazda will be bound by the decision, and will
comply with the decision within a reasonable time not to exceed 30 days after we receive
notice of your acceptance of the decision.
12. Please call BBB AUTO LINE at 1-800-955-5100 for further details about the program.
8–6
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
Customer Assistance (Canada)
Satisfaction Review Process
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is of primary concern to Mazda. All Authorized
Mazda Dealers have both the knowledge and tools to keep your Mazda in top condition.
In our experience, any questions, problems, or complaints regarding the operation of your
Mazda or any other general service transactions are most effectively resolved by your dealer.
If the cause of your dissatisfaction cannot adequately be addressed by normal dealership
procedures, we recommend that you take the following steps:
STEP 1: Contact the Mazda Dealer
Discuss the matter with a member of dealership management. If the Service Manager has
already reviewed your concerns, contact the owner of the dealership or its General Manager.
STEP 2: Contact the Mazda Regional Offi ce
If you feel that you still require assistance, ask the dealer Service Manager to arrange for
you to meet the local Mazda Service Representative. If more expedient, contact Mazda
Canada Inc. Regional Offi ce nearest you for such arrangements. Regional Offi ce address
and phone numbers are shown (page 8-8 ).
STEP 3: Contact the Mazda Customer Relations Department
If still not substantially satisfi ed, contact the Customer Relations Department, Mazda
Canada Inc., 55 Vogell Road, Richmond Hill, Ontario, L4B 3K5 Canada TEL: 1 (800) 2634680.
Provide the Department with the following information:
1. Your name, address and telephone number
2. Year and model of vehicle
3. Vehicle Identifi cation Number (VIN). Refer to the “Vehicle Identifi cation Labels” page
of section 9 of this manual for the location of the VIN.
4. Purchase date
5. Present odometer reading
6. Your dealer's name and location
7. The nature of your problem and/or cause of dissatisfaction
The Department, in cooperation with the local Mazda Service Representative, will review
the case to determine if everything possible has been done to ensure your satisfaction.
8–7
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
Please recognize that the resolution of service problems in most cases requires the use of
your Mazda dealer's service facilities, personnel and equipment. We urge you to follow the
above three steps in sequence for most effective results.
Mediation/Arbitration Program
Occasionally a customer concern cannot be resolved through Mazda's Customer Satisfaction
Program. If after exhausting the procedures in this manual your concern is still not resolved,
you have another option.
Mazda Canada Inc. participates in an arbitration program administered by the Canadian
Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). CAMVAP will advise you about how your
concern may be reviewed and resolved by an independent third party through binding
arbitration.
Your complete satisfaction is the goal of Mazda Canada Inc. and our dealers.
Mazda's participation in CAMVAP makes a valuable contribution to our achieving that goal.
There is no charge for using CAMVAP. CAMVAP results are fast, fair and fi nal as the award
is binding on both you and Mazda Canada Inc.
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP)
If a specifi c item of concern arises, where a solution cannot be reached between an owner,
Mazda, and/or one of its dealers (that all parties cannot agree upon), the owner may wish to
use the services offered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
CAMVAP uses the services of Provincial Administrators to assist consumers in scheduling
and preparing for their arbitration hearings. However, before you can proceed with
CAMVAP you must follow your Mazda dispute resolution process as outlined previously.
8–8
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
CAMVAP is fully implemented in all provinces and territories.
Consumers wishing to obtain further information about the Program should contact the
Provincial Administrator at 1 (800) 207-0685, or by contacting the Canadian Motor Vehicle
Arbitration Plan Offi ce at:
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan
235 Yorkland Boulevard, suite 300
North York, Ontario
M2J 4Y8
http://camvap.ca
Provincial Administrators may be reached locally as listed below:
Province/Territory CAMVAP Number
British Columbia & Yukon Territories 1 (800) 207-0685
Alberta & Northwest Territories 1 (800) 207-0685
Saskatchewan 1 (800) 207-0685
Manitoba 1 (800) 207-0685
Ontario 1 (800) 207-0685
Atlantic Canada 1 (800) 207-0685
Quebec 1 (800) 207-0685
Regional Offi ces
REGIONAL OFFICES AREAS COVERED
MAZDA CANADA INC.
WESTERN REGION
8171 ACKROYD ROAD
SUITE 2000
RICHMOND B.C.
V6X 3K1
(604) 303-5670
ALBERTA,
BRITISH COLUMBIA,
MANITOBA,
SASKATCHEWAN,
YUKON
MAZDA CANADA INC.
CENTRAL/ATLANTIC REGION
55 VOGELL ROAD,
RICHMOND HILL,
ONTARIO, L4B 3K5
(905) 787-7000
ONTARIO
MAZDA CANADA INC.
QUEBEC REGION
6111 ROUTE TRANS
CANADIENNE
POINTE CLAIRE, QUEBEC
H9R 5A5
(514) 694-6390
QUEBEC,
NEW BRUNSWICK,
NOVA SCOTIA,
PRINCE EDWARD ISLAND,
NEWFOUNDLAND
8–9
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
Customer Assistance (Puerto Rico)
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. That is why all Authorized Mazda
Dealers have the knowledge and the tools to keep your Mazda vehicle in top condition.
If you have any questions or recommendations for improvement regarding the service of
your Mazda vehicle or servicing by Mazda Dealer personnel, we recommend that you take
the following steps:
STEP 1
Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer. This is the quickest and best way to
address the issue. If your concern has not been resolved by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS,
SALES, SERVICE, or PARTS MANAGER, then please contact the GENERAL
MANAGER of the dealership or the OWNER.
STEP 2
If, after following STEP 1, you feel the need for further assistance, please contact your
area's Mazda representative (Indicated on the next page).
Please help us by providing the following information:
1. Your name, address, and telephone number
2. Year and model of vehicle
3. Vehicle Identifi cation Number (17 digits, noted on your registration or title or located on
the upper driver's side corner of the dash)
4. Purchase date and current mileage
5. Your dealer's name and location
6. Your question(s)
8–10
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
Customer Assistance (Mexico)
Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. We are here to serve you. All
Authorized Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the tools to keep your Mazda vehicle in
top condition.
If you have any questions or recommendations for improvement regarding the service of
your Mazda vehicle or servicing by Mazda Dealer personnel, we recommend that you take
the following steps:
Contact Your Mazda Dealer
Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer. This is the quickest and best way to
address the issue.
If your concern has not been resolved by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS, SALES,
SERVICE, or PARTS MANAGER, then please contact the GENERAL MANAGER of
the dealership or the OWNER.
If it becomes necessary to have the components or wiring system for the supplementary
restraint system modifi ed to accommodate a person with certain medical condition in
accordance with a certifi ed physician you must contact your dealership in order to avoid
the potential loss of the warranty of your vehicle which may occur if some third party is
hired by the customer to make any modifi cations to this system.
Log on: at www.mazdamexico.com.mx
Answers to many questions, including how to locate or contact a local Mazda dealership in
Mexico, can be found here.
E-mail: click on “Contactanos” at the top of the page at www.mazdamexico.com.mx
By phone at: 01 800 01 MAZDA (62932)
By letter at:
Attn: Customer Assistance
Mazda Motor de Mexico
Mario Pani #150, PB Col. Lomas de Santa Fe
Mexico, D.F. C.P. 05300
Del. Cuajimalpa de Morelos
Tel: Customer Assistance
01 800 01 MAZDA(62932).
8–11
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Customer Assistance
In order to serve you effi ciently and effectively, please help us by providing the following
information:
1. Your name, address, and telephone number
2. Year and model of vehicle
3. Vehicle Identifi cation Number (17 digits, noted on your registration or title or located on
the upper driver's side corner of the dash)
4. Purchase date and current mileage
5. Your dealer's name and location
6. Your question(s)
8–12
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Mazda Importer/Distributors
Importer/Distributor
U.S.A.
Mazda North American Operations
7755 Irvine Center Drive
Irvine, CA 92618-2922 U.S.A.
P.O. Box 19734
Irvine, CA 92623-9734 U.S.A.
TEL: 1 (800) 222-5500 (in U.S.A.)
(949) 727-1990 (outside U.S.A.)
CANADA
Mazda Canada Inc.
55 Vogell Road, Richmond Hill,
Ontario, L4B 3K5 Canada
TEL: 1 (800) 263-4680 (in Canada)
(905) 787-7000 (outside Canada)
PUERTO RICO/U.S. Virgin Island
International Automotive Distributor
Group, LLC. (Mazda de Puerto Rico)
P.O. Box 191850, San Juan, Puerto Rico
00919-1850
TEL: (787) 641-1777
MEXICO
Mazda Motor de Mexico
Mario Pani # 150, PB Col. Lomas de
Santa Fe Mexico, D.F. C.P. 05300 Del.
Cuajimalpa
TEL: Center of Attention to Clients:
01 (800) 016 2932. in Mexico
GUAM
Triple J Motors
157 South Marine Drive, Tamuning,
GUAM 96911 USA
P.O. Box 6066 Tamuning, Guam 96931
TEL: (671) 649-6555
SAIPAN
Pacifi c International Marianas, Inc.
(d.b.a. Midway Motors)
P.O. Box 887 Saipan, MP 96950
TEL: (670) 234-7524
Triple J Saipan, Inc.
(d.b.a. Triple J Motors)
P.O. Box 500487 Saipan, MP 96950-0487
TEL: (670) 234-7133/3051
AMERICAN SAMOA
Polynesia Motors, Inc.
P.O. Box 1120, Pago Pago, American
Samoa 96799
TEL: (684) 699-9347
8–13
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.A.)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffi c Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mazda Motor Corporation (Your Mazda
Importer/Distributor).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it fi nds that
a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your
dealer, or Mazda Motor Corporation (Your Mazda Importer/Distributor).
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-3274236 (TTY:1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,
NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC, 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
NOTE
If you live in the U.S.A., all correspondence to Mazda Motor Corporation should be
forwarded to:
Mazda North American Operations
7755 Irvine Center Drive
Irvine, California 92618-2922
or P.O. Box 19734
Irvine, CA 92623-9734
Customer Assistance Center or toll free at 1 (800) 222-5500
If you live outside of the U.S.A., please contact the nearest Mazda Distributor shown (page
8-12 ) in this booklet.
8–14
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada)
Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, Defect
Investigations and Recalls, may telephone the toll free hotline 1-800-333-0510, or contact
Transport Canada by mail at: Transport Canada, ASFAD, Place de Ville Tower C, 330
Sparks Street, Ottawa ON K1A 0N5.
For additional road safety information, please visit the Road Safety website at:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/menu.htm
8–15
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Warranty
Warranties for Your Mazda
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Powertrain Limited Warranty
Safety Restraint System Limited Warranty
Anti-perforation Limited Warranty
Federal Emission Control Warranty/California Emission Control Warranty
Emission Defect Warranty
Emission Performance Warranty
Emission Control Warranty
Replacement Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty
Tire Warranty
NOTE
Warranty information varies depending on the country. Refer to the Warranty Booklet for
detailed warranty information.
8–16
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Warranty
Outside the United States/Canada
Government regulations in the United States/Canada require that automobiles meet specifi c
emission regulations and safety standards. Therefore, vehicles built for use in the United
States/Canada may differ from those sold in other countries.
The differences may make it diffi cult or even impossible for your vehicle to receive
satisfactory servicing in other countries. We strongly recommend that you NOT take your
Mazda outside the United States/Canada.
United States
However, in the event that you are moving to Canada permanently, Mazda vehicles built
for use in the United States could be eligible for exportation to Canada with specifi c vehicle
modifi cations to comply with the Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS).
Canada
However, in the event that you are moving to the United States permanently, Mazda vehicles
built for use in Canada could be eligible for exportation to the United States with specifi c
vehicle modifi cations to comply with the United States Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (FMVSS).
NOTE
The above is applicable for a permanent import/export situation and not related to travelers
on vacation.
You may have the following problems if you do take your vehicle outside of the United
States/Canada:
Recommended fuel may be unavailable. Any kind of leaded fuel or low-octane fuel will
affect vehicle performance and damage the emission controls and engine.
Proper repair facilities, tools, testing equipment, and replacement parts may not be
available.
Please refer to your Manufacturer's Warranty Booklet for more information.
8–17
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Warranty
Registering Your Vehicle in A Foreign Country (Except
United States and Canada)
Registering your vehicle in a foreign country may be problematic depending on whether it
meets the specifi c emission and safety standards of the country in which the vehicle will be
driven. Consequently, your vehicle may require modifi cations at personal expense in order
to meet the regulations.
In addition, you should be aware of the following issues:
Satisfactory vehicle servicing may be diffi cult or impossible in another country.
The fuel specifi ed for your vehicle may be unavailable.
Parts, servicing techniques, and tools necessary to maintain and repair your vehicle may be
unavailable.
There might not be an Authorized Mazda Dealer in the country you plan to take your
vehicle.
The Mazda warranty is valid only in certain countries.
8–18
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Warranty
Add-On Non-Genuine Parts and Accessories
Non-genuine parts and accessories for Mazda vehicles can be found in stores.
These may fi t your vehicle, but they are not approved by Mazda for use with Mazda
vehicles. When you install non-genuine parts or accessories, they could affect your vehicle's
performance or safety systems; the Mazda warranty doesn't cover this. Before you install
any non-genuine parts or accessories, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
WARNING
Always consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer before you install non-genuine parts or
accessories:
Installation of non-genuine parts or accessories is dangerous. Improperly designed parts
or accessories could seriously aff ect your vehicle's performance or safety systems. This
could cause you to have an accident or increase your chances of injuries in an accident.
Be very careful in choosing and installing add-on electrical equipment, such as mobile
telephones, two-way radios, stereo systems, and car alarm systems:
Incorrectly choosing or installing improper add-on equipment or choosing an improper
installer is dangerous. Essential systems could be damaged, causing engine stalling, airbag (SRS) activation, ABS/TCS/DSC inactivation, or a fi re in the vehicle.
Mazda assumes no responsibility for death, injury, or expenses that may result from the
installation of add-on non-genuine parts or accessories.
8–19
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Cell Phones
Cell Phones Warning
WARNING
Please comply with the legal regulations concerning the use of communication
equipment in vehicles in your country:
Use of any electrical devices such as cell phones, computers, portable radios, vehicle
navigation or other devices by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. Dialing
a number on a cell phone while driving also ties-up the driver's hands. Use of these
devices will cause the driver to be distracted and could lead to a serious accident. If a
passenger is unable to use the device, pull off the right-of-way to a safe area before use.
If use of a cell phone is necessary despite this warning, use a hands-free system to at least
leave the hands free to drive the vehicle. Never use a cell phone or other electrical devices
while the vehicle is moving and, instead, concentrate on the full-time job of driving.
8–20
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Event Data Recorder
Event Data Recorder (U.S.A. and Canada)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR
is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment
or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety
systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes
and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash or near crash-like situation
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal
data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such
as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle
or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access
to the vehicle or the EDR.
Mazda will not disclose any of the data recorded in an EDR to a third party unless:
A written agreement from the vehicle owner or the lessee is obtained
Offi cially requested by the police or other law enforcement authorities
Used as a defense for Mazda in a law suit, claim, or arbitration
Ordered by a judge or court
However, if necessary Mazda will:
Use the data for research on Mazda vehicle performance, including safety.
Disclose the data or the summarized data to a third party for research purposes without
disclosing vehicle or owner identifi cation information.
8–21
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Uniform Tire Quality Grading System (UTQGS)
Uniform Tire Quality Grading System (UTQGS)
This information relates to the tire grading system developed by the U.S. National Highway
Traffi c Safety Administration for grading tires by tread wear, traction, and temperature
performance.
Tread Wear
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specifi ed government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one-and-a-half times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart signifi cantly from the norm because of variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction-AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades represent the
tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specifi ed
government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight ahead) traction tests
and does not include acceleration cornering (turning), hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Temperature-A, B, C
The temperature grades A (the highest), B, and C, represent the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on
a specifi ed indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperatures can lead to sudden tire failure.
Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher
levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
8–22
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Uniform Tire Quality Grading System (UTQGS)
WARNING
Keep your vehicle's tires properly infl ated and not overloaded:
Driving with improperly infl ated or overloaded tires is dangerous. Excessive speed,
underinfl ation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure. The temperature grade for this tire is established for a
tire that is properly infl ated and not overloaded.
These grades will be added to the sidewalls of passenger vehicle tires over the next several
years according to a schedule established by the NHTSA and the tire manufacturers.
The grade of tires available as standard or optional equipment on Mazda vehicles may vary
with respect to grade.
ALL PASSENGER VEHICLE TIRES MUST CONFORM TO THESE GRADES AND TO
ALL OTHER FEDERAL TIRE-SAFETY REQUIREMENTS.
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
For example:
TREADWEAR 200 TRACTION AA TEMPERATURE A
UTQGS MARK (example)
8–23
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Tire Labeling
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of
all tires. This information identifi es and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire
and also provides a tire identifi cation number for safety standard certifi cation and in case of
a recall.
Information on Passenger Vehicle Tires
Please refer to the sample below.
1. TIN: U.S. DOT tire identifi cation number
2. Passenger car tire
3. Nominal width of tire in millimeters
4. Ratio of height to width (aspect ratio)
5. Radial
6. Run-fl at tire
7. Rim diameter code
8. Load index & speed symbol
9. Severe snow conditions
10. Tire ply composition and materials used
11. Max. load rating
12. Tread wear, traction and temperature grades
8–24
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
13. Max. permissible infl ation pressure
14. SAFETY WARNING
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a tire size and load index rating. Here is an explanation
of the various components of that tire size and load index rating. Note that the tire size and
load index rating may be different from the example.
P
Indicates a tire that may be installed on cars, SUVs, minivans and light trucks as designated
by the Tire and Rim Association (T&RA).
NOTE
If your tire size does not begin with a letter this may mean it is designated by either ETRTO
(European Tire and Rim Technical Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire Manufacturing
Association).
215
“215” is the nominal width of the tire in millimeters. This three-digit number gives the
width in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger
the number, the wider the tire.
65
“65” is the aspect ratio. This two-digit number indicates the tire's ratio of height to width.
R
“R” is the tire construction symbol. R indicates “Radial ply construction”.
15
“15” is the wheel rim diameter in inches.
95
“95” is the Load Index. This two-or three-digit number indicates how much weight each tire
can support.
8–25
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
H
“H” is the speed rating. The speed rating denotes the maximum speed for which the use of
the tire is rated.
Letter Rating Speed Rating
Q 99 mph
R 106 mph
S 112 mph
T 118 mph
U 124 mph
H 130 mph
V 149 mph
W 168 * mph
Y 186 * mph
* For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph, tire manufacturers sometimes
use the letters ZR. For tires with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph, tire
manufacturers always use the letters ZR.
M S or M/S: Mud and Snow
AT: All Terrain.
AS: All Season. The “M S” or “M/S” indicates that the tire has some functional use in mud
and snow.
U.S. DOT Tire Identifi cation Number (TIN)
This begins with the letters “DOT” which indicates the tire meets all federal standards. The
next two numbers or letters are the plant code where it was manufactured, and the last four
numbers represent the week and year the tire was manufactured. For example, the numbers
457 means the 45st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example,
the number 2102 means the 21th week of 2002. The other numbers are marketing codes
used at the manufacturer's discretion. This information is used to contact consumers if a tire
defect requires a recall.
Tire Ply Composition and Materials Used
The number of plies indicates the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire.
In general, the greater the number of plies, the more weight a tire can support. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the tire materials, which include steel, nylon, polyester,
and other.
Maximum Load Rating
This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the
tire.
8–26
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Maximum Permissible Infl ation Pressure
This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should ever be put in the tire under
normal driving conditions.
Tread Wear, Traction and Temperature Grades
Tread wear: The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions on a specifi ed government test course. For example,
a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions
on specifi ed government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have
poor traction performance.
Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the
tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specifi ed indoor laboratory test wheel.
Snow Tires
In some heavy snow areas, local governments may require true snow tires, those with very
deeply cut tread. These tires should only be used in pairs or placed on all four wheels. Make
sure you purchase snow tires that are the same size and construction type as the other tires
on your vehicle.
SAFETY WARNING
The following safety warning appears on the tire's sidewall.
SERIOUS INJURY MAY RESULT FROM:
EXPLOSION OF TIRE/RIM ASSEMBLY DUE TO IMPROPER MOUNTING-MATCH
TIRE DIAMETER TO RIM DIAMETER; NEVER EXCEED 40 psi (275 kPa) TO SEAT
BEADS-ONLY SPECIALLY TRAINED PERSONS SHOULD MOUNT TIRES.
TIRE FAILURE DUE TO UNDER-INFLATION/OVERLOADING/DAMAGE-
FOLLOW OWNER'S MANUAL AND PLACARD IN VEHICLE-FREQUENTLY
CHECK INFLATION PRESSURE AND INSPECT FOR DAMAGE.
8–27
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Information on Temporary Tires
Please refer to the sample below.
1. Temporary tires
2. Nominal width of tire in millimeters
3. Ratio of height to width (aspect ratio)
4. Diagonal
5. Rim diameter code
6. Load index & speed symbol
T115/70D16 90M is an example of a tire size and load index rating. Here is an explanation
of the various components of that tire size and load index rating. Note that the tire size and
load index rating may be different from the example.
T
Indicates a tire that may be installed on cars, SUVs, minivans and light trucks as designated
by the Tire and Rim Association (T&RA).
115
“115” is the nominal width of the tire in millimeters. This three-digit number gives the width
in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
70
“70” is the aspect ratio. This two-digit number indicates the tire's ratio of height to width.
D
“D” is the tire construction symbol. D indicates “diagonal ply construction”.
8–28
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
16
“16” is the wheel rim diameter in inches.
90
“90” is the Load Index. This two-or three-digit number indicates how much weight each tire
can support.
M
“M” is the speed rating. The speed rating denotes the maximum speed for which the use of
the tire is rated.
Letter Rating Speed Rating
M 81 mph
8–29
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Location of the Tire Label (Placard)
You will fi nd the tire label containing tire infl ation pressure by tire size and other important
information on the driver's side B-pillar or on the edge of the driver's door frame.
SAMPLE
Recommended Tire Infl ation Pressure
On the tire label you will fi nd the recommended tire infl ation pressure in both kPa and
psi for the tires installed as original equipment on the vehicle. It is very important that the
infl ation pressure of the tires on your vehicle is maintained at the recommended pressure.
You should check the tire pressure regularly to insure that the proper infl ation pressure is
maintained.
Refer to Tires on page 9-10 .
NOTE
Tire pressures listed on the vehicle placard or tire information label indicate the
recommended cold tire infl ation pressure, measured when the tires are cold, after the vehicle
has been parked for at least 3 hours. As you drive, the temperature in the tire warms up,
increasing the tire pressure.
8–30
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
WARNING
Always check the tire infl ation pressures on a regular basis according to the
recommended tire infl ation pressure on the tire label and in conjunction with the
information in this owner's manual:
Driving your vehicle with under-infl ated tires is dangerous.
Under-infl ation is the most common cause of failures in any kind of tire and may result
in severe cracking, tread separation or “blowout”, with unexpected loss of vehicle
control and increased risk of injury. Under-infl ation increases sidewall fl exing and
rolling resistance, resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. It results in
unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of control and accidents. A tire can lose up to
half of its air pressure and not appear to be fl at!
It is impossible to determine whether or not tires are properly infl ated just by looking at
them.
Checking Tire Pressure
1. When you check the air pressure, make sure the tires are cold —meaning they are not hot
from driving even a mile.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire.
3. Firmly press a tire gauge onto the valve.
4. Add air to achieve recommended air pressure.
5. If you overfi ll the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the valve.
Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.
6. Replace the valve cap.
7. Repeat with each tire, including the spare.
NOTE
Some spare tires require higher infl ation pressure.
8. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other objects embedded that
could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air leak.
9. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts, bulges, cracks or other
irregularities.
8–31
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Glossary of Terms
Tire Placard: A label indicating the OE tire sizes, recommended infl ation pressure, and the
maximum weight the vehicle can carry.
Tire Identifi cation Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of each tire providing
information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant, tire size, and date of manufacture.
Infl ation Pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.
kPa: Kilopascal, the metric unit for air pressure.
psi: Pounds per square inch, the English unit for air pressure.
B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the front door.
Original Equipment (OE): Describes components originally equipped on the vehicle.
Vehicle Load Limit: The maximum value of the combination weight of occupants and
cargo.
Bead Area of the Tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.
Sidewall Area of the Tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.
Tread Area of the Tire: Area on the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when it's
mounted on the vehicle.
Seating capacity means the total allowable number of vehicle occupants. Seating capacity
is described on the tire label.
Production options weight is the combination weight of installed regular production
options weighing over 2.3 kilograms in excess of the standard items which they replace,
and not previously considered in the curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty
brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim.
Rim is the metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire
beads are seated.
8–32
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Tire Maintenance
Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear abnormally. Here are
some important maintenance points:
Tire Infl ation Pressure
Inspect all tire pressure monthly (including the spare) when the tires are cold. Maintain
recommended pressures for the best ride, top handling, and minimum tire wear. Use the
pressures specifi ed on the vehicle tire information placard or tire label for optimum service.
Tire Rotation
To equalize tread wear, rotate the tires every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) at the latest or sooner
if irregular wear develops. Mazda recommends to rotate every 8,000 km (5,000 miles) to
help increase tire life and distribute wear more evenly.
Do not include (TEMPORARY USE ONLY)
spare tire in rotation.
Forward
Inspect the tires for uneven wear and damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused by one or a
combination of the following:
Incorrect tire pressure
Improper wheel alignment
Out-of-balance wheel
Severe braking
After rotation, infl ate all tire pressures to specifi cation (page 9-10 ) and inspect the lug nuts
for tightness.
CAUTION
Rotate unidirectional tires and radial tires that have an asymmetrical tread pattern or
studs only from front to rear, not from side to side. Tire performance will be weakened if
rotated from side to side.
8–33
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Replacing a Tire
WARNING
Always use tires that are in good condition:
Driving with worn tires is dangerous. Reduced braking, steering, and traction could result
in an accident.
If a tire wears evenly, a wear indicator will appear as a solid band across the tread.
Replace the tire when this happens.
New tread
Tread wear indicator
Worn tread
You should replace the tire before the band crosses the entire tread.
NOTE
Tires degrade over time, even when they are not being used on the road. It is recommended
that tires generally be replaced when they are 6 years or older. Heat caused by hot climates
or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process. You should replace the
spare tire when you replace the other road tires due to the aging of the spare tire. The period
in which the tire was manufactured (both week and year) is indicated by a 4-digit number.
Refer to Tire Labeling on page 8-23 .
8–34
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Safety Practices
The way you drive has a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety. So cultivate good
driving habits for your own benefi t.
Observe posted speed limits and drive at speeds that are safe for the existing weather
conditions
Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
Avoid potholes and objects on the road
Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against the curb when parking
CAUTION
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving or you suspect your tire
or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your speed. Drive with caution until
you can safely pull off the road. Stop and inspect the tire for damage. If the tire is underinfl ated or damaged, defl ate it, remove the tire and rim and replace it with your spare tire.
If you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearest vehicle or tire dealer to
have the vehicle inspected.
8–35
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Vehicle Loading
WARNING
Do not tow a trailer with this vehicle:
Towing a trailer with this vehicle is dangerous because it has not been designed to tow a
trailer and doing so will aff ect the drive system which could result in vehicle damage.
This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle, to keep your loaded
vehicle weight within its design rating capability. Properly loading your vehicle will provide
maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading your vehicle, familiarize
yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle's weight ratings, from the
vehicle's Safety Certifi cation Label and Tire and Load Information Label:
WARNING
Overloaded Vehicle:
Overloading a vehicle is dangerous. The results of overloading can have serious
consequences in terms of passenger safety. Too much weight on a vehicle's suspension
system can cause spring or shock absorber failure, brake failure, handling or steering
problems, irregular tire wear, tire failure or other damage.
Overloading makes a vehicle harder to drive and control. It also increases the distance
required for stopping. In cases of serious overloading, brakes can fail completely,
particularly on steep grades. The load a tire will carry safely is a combination of the size of
the tire, its load range, and corresponding infl ation pressure.
Never overload the vehicle and always observe the vehicle's weight ratings from the
vehicle's Safety Certifi cation and Tire and Load Information labels.
8–36
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Base Curb Weight is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all
standard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or optional equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your
dealer plus any aftermarket equipment.
PAYLOAD
Payload is the combination weight of cargo and passengers that the vehicle is designed
to carry. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found on the Tire and Load
Information label on the driver's door frame or door pillar. Look for “THE COMBINATION
WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg or
XXX lbs” for your maximum payload. The payload listed on the tire label is the maximum
payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If any aftermarket or dealer installed
equipment has been installed on the vehicle, the weight of the equipment must be subtracted
from the payload listed on the tire label in order to be accurate.
8–37
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
SAMPLE
CARGO
Cargo Weight includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight, including cargo and
optional equipment.
The cargo weight limit decreases depending on the number of vehicle occupants. The cargo
weight limit can be calculated by subtracting the total weight of the vehicle occupants from
the “combination weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed” value on the tire
label.
8–38
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Examples: Based on a single occupant weight of 68 kg (150 lbs), and a value of 385 kg (849
lbs) for the “combination weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed”:
The cargo weight limit with one occupant is 385 kg (849 lbs) - 68 kg (150 lbs) = 317 kg
(699 lbs)
The cargo weight limit with two occupants is 385 kg (849 lbs) - (68 × 2) kg ( (150 × 2) lbs)
= 249 kg (549 lbs)
If the weight of the occupant increases, the cargo weight limit decreases by that much.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) is the total weight placed on each axle (front and rear) including vehicle curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried
by a single axle (front or rear). These numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance
Certifi cation Label located on the driver's door frame or door pillar. The total load on
each axle must never exceed its GAWR.
GVW
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) is the Vehicle Curb Weight cargo passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) is the maximum allowable weight of the fully
loaded vehicle (including all options, equipment, passengers and cargo). The GVWR is
shown on the Safety Compliance Certifi cation Label located on the driver's door frame
or door pillar. The GVW must never exceed the GVWR.
8–39
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
SAMPLE
WARNING
Never Exceed Axle Weight Rating Limits:
Exceeding the Safety Certifi cation Label axle weight rating limits is dangerous and could
result in death or serious injury as a result of substandard vehicle handling, performance,
engine, transmission and/or structural damage, serious damage to the vehicle, or loss of
control.
Always keep the vehicle within the axle weight rating limits.
GCW
8–40
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
GCW (Gross Combination Weight) is the weight of the loaded vehicle (GVW).
GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) is the maximum allowable weight of the
vehicle - including all cargo and passengers - that the vehicle can handle without risking
damage. The GCW must never exceed the GCWR.
WARNING
Never Exceed GVWR or GAWR Specifi cations:
Exceeding the GVWR or the GAWR specifi ed on the certifi cation label is dangerous.
Exceeding any vehicle rating limitation could result in a serious accident, injury, or
damage to the vehicle.
Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the originals
because they may lower the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacement tires
with a higher limit than the originals do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
Never exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specifi ed on the certifi cation label.
8–41
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Tire Information (U.S.A.)
Steps for Determining the Correct Load Limit
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting fi gure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For
example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be fi ve 150 lb passengers
in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400 - 750 (5 × 150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
8–42
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Declaration of Conformity
Declaration of Conformity
Keyless Entry System/Immobilizer System
8–43
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Declaration of Conformity
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) System
8–44
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Declaration of Conformity
NOTE
During printing time of this user manual the approvals listed above are granted.
WARNING
Change or modifi cations not expressively approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the use's authority to operate the equipment.
HomeLink Wireless Control System
CAUTION
HomeLink has been tested and complies with FCC and Industry Canada rules. Changes or
modifi cations not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate the device.
NOTE
FCC ID: NZLMOBHL4
CANADA:4112A-MOBHL4
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1- This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2- This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
8–45
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Declaration of Conformity
Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Type A
U.S.A. and Canada
FCC ID: CB2MBLUEC09 IC:279B-MBLUEC09
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
WARNING
Changes or modifi cations not expressively approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term “IC: ” before the radio certifi cation number only signifi es that Industry Canada
technical specifi cations were met.
The antenna used for this transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction
with any other antenna or transmitter. End-users and installers must be provided with
installation instructions and transmitter operating conditions for satisfying RF exposure
compliance.
Bluetooth ® Hands-Free Customer Service
U.S.A.
Phone: 800-430-0153 (Toll-free)
Web: www.MazdaUSA.com/bluetooth
Canada
Phone: 800-430-0153 (Toll-free)
Web: www.mazdahandsfree.ca
8–46
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Declaration of Conformity
Mexico
Brief description: Bluetooth module for Hands-free telephone and streaming audio
Name and address of the importer: Refer to "MEXICO" (page 8-12 ) in Importer/
Distributor section.
Brand name of the product: Johnson Controls Inc.
Model name of the product: MAZ
Names and addresses of where the warranty can be served: Refer to "MEXICO" (page
8-12 ) in Importer/Distributor section.
Names and addresses of where to acquire spare parts, consumables and accessories: Refer
to "MEXICO" (page 8-12 ) in Importer/Distributor section.
Warranty period, items covered by the warranty and its possible limitations or exceptions:
Refer to the Warranty Booklet for detailed warranty information.
Warranty procedure:
Center of Attention to Client (CAC)
Phone: 01-800-01-MAZDA
Web: www.mazdamexico.com.mx
Electrical specifi cations:
Voltage: 9-16V, Frequency: 2.4Ghz, Current: 270mA(Typ)
8–47
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Declaration of Conformity
Type B
8–48
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Declaration of Conformity
Forward Obstruction Warning (FOW)/Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
8–49
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Service Publications
Service Publications
Factory-authorized Mazda service publications are available for owners who wish to do
some of their own maintenance and repair.
When requesting any of our publications through an Authorized Mazda Dealer, refer to the
chart below.
If they do not have what you need in stock, they can order it for you.
PUBLICATION ORDER NUMBER PUBLICATION DESCRIPTION
9999-95-017B-14 2014 WORKSHOP MANUAL (English)
9999-MX-017B-14 2014 WORKSHOP MANUAL (Spanish)
9999-95-019G-14 2014 WIRING DIAGRAM (English)
9999-MX-019G-14 2014 WIRING DIAGRAM (Spanish)
9999-95-038C-14R1 2014 OWNER'S MANUAL (English)
9999-EC-038C-14R1 2014 OWNER'S MANUAL (English and French)
9999-PR-038C-14R1 2014 OWNER'S MANUAL (Spanish)
9999-95-064F-14 2014 SERVICE HIGHLIGHTS
9999-95-038C-14NAV 2014 NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL (English)
9999-EC-038C-14NAV 2014 NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL (English and French)
9999-PR-038C-14NAV 2014 NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL (Spanish)
WORKSHOP MANUAL:
Covers recommended maintenance and repair procedures of the drive train, body and
chassis.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
Provides electrical schematics as well as component location for the entire electrical system.
OWNER'S MANUAL:
This booklet contains information regarding the proper care and operation of your vehicle.
This is not a technician's manual.
SERVICE HIGHLIGHTS:
Provides description and operation of the many systems of your Mazda.
8–50
Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects
Service Publications
NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL:
This booklet contains information regarding the proper operation and use of the navigation
system. This is not a technician's manual.
9–1
9 Specifi cations
Technical information about your Mazda.
Identifi cation Numbers ...................................................................... 9-2
Vehicle Information Labels ........................................................... 9-2
Specifi cations ...................................................................................... 9-4
Specifi cations ................................................................................ 9-4
Personalization Features ................................................................. 9-12
Personalization Features ............................................................. 9-12
9–2
Specifi cations
Identifi cation Numbers
Vehicle Information Labels
Vehicle Identifi cation Number
The vehicle identifi cation number legally
identifi es your vehicle. The number is on a
plate attached to the cowl panel located on
the left corner of the dashboard. This plate
can easily be seen through the windshield.
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
Label (U.S.A. and Canada)
Chassis Number
Open the cover shown in the fi gure to
check the chassis number.
Vehicle Emission Control
Information Label (U.S.A. and
Canada)
Tire Pressure Label
9–3
Specifi cations
Identifi cation Numbers
Engine Number
Forward
9–4
Specifi cations
Specifi cations
Specifi cations
Engine
Item
Specifi cation
SKYACTIV-G 2.0 SKYACTIV-G 2.5
Type DOHC-16V in-line, 4-cylinder
Bore × Stroke 83.5 × 91.2 mm (3.29 × 3.59 in) 89.0 × 100 mm (3.50 × 3.94 in)
Displacement 1,997.6 ml (1,997.6 cc) 2,488.5 ml (2,488.5 cc)
Compression ratio 13.0
Electrical System
Item Classifi cation
Battery
Q-85 *1
12V-60Ah/20HR *2 or 12V-65Ah/20HR *2
Spark-plug number Mazda Genuine spark plug*3 PE5R-18-110 or PE5S-18-110
*1 Q-85 is designed for i-ELOOP system. Only Q-85 should be used to ensure correct operation of i-ELOOP
system. Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer for details.
*2 Not for i-ELOOP system.
*3 This spark plug provides the SKYACTIV-G engine with optimum performance. Contact an Authorized Mazda
Dealer for details.
CAUTION
When cleaning the iridium plugs, do not use a wire brush. The fi ne particulate coating on
the iridium alloy and platinum tips could be damaged.
Lubricant Quality
Lubricant Classifi cation
Engine oil Refer to Recommended Oil on page 6-27 .
Manual transaxle oil
API Service GL-4
SAE 75W-80
Automatic transaxle fl uid Mazda Genuine ATF FZ
Brake/Clutch fl uid SAE J1703 or FMVSS116 DOT-3
NOTE
Refer to Introduction on (page 6-2 ) for owner's responsibility in protecting your investment.
9–5
Specifi cations
Specifi cations
Capacities
(Approximate Quantities)
Item Capacity
Engine oil
SKYACTIV-G
2.0
With oil fi lter replacement 4.2 L (4.4 US qt, 3.7 Imp qt)
Without oil fi lter replacement 4.0 L (4.2 US qt, 3.5 Imp qt)
SKYACTIV-G
2.5
With oil fi lter replacement 4.5 L (4.8 US qt, 4.0 Imp qt)
Without oil fi lter replacement 4.3 L (4.5 US qt, 3.8 Imp qt)
Coolant
SKYACTIV-G
2.0
Manual transaxle 6.3 L (6.7 US qt, 5.5 Imp qt)
Automatic transaxle 6.5 L (6.9 US qt, 5.7 Imp qt)
SKYACTIV-G
2.5
U.S.A. and Canada 6.8 L (7.2 US qt, 6.0 Imp qt)
Mexico 6.7 L (7.1 US qt, 5.9 Imp qt)
Manual transaxle oil 1.70 L (1.80 US qt, 1.50 Imp qt)
Automatic transaxle fl uid 7.8 L (8.2 US qt, 6.9 Imp qt)
Fuel tank
U.S.A. and Canada 50.0 L (13.2 US gal, 11.0 Imp gal)
Mexico 51.0 L (13.5 US gal, 11.2 Imp gal)
Check oil and fl uid levels with dipsticks or reservoir gauges.
9–6
Specifi cations
Specifi cations
Dimensions
4-Door
(U.S.A. and Canada)
Item Vehicle specifi cation
Overall length 4,580 mm (180.3 in)
Overall width 1,795 mm (70.7 in)
Overall height 1,455 mm (57.3 in)
Front tread 1,555 mm (61.2 in)
Rear tread 1,560 mm (61.4 in)
Wheelbase 2,700 mm (106.3 in)
(Mexico)
Item Vehicle specifi cation
Overall length 4,580 mm (180.3 in)
Overall width 1,795 mm (70.7 in)
Overall height 1,450 mm (57.1 in)
Front tread 1,555 mm (61.2 in)
Rear tread 1,560 mm (61.4 in)
Wheelbase 2,700 mm (106.3 in)
5-Door
(U.S.A. and Canada)
Item Vehicle specifi cation
Overall length 4,460 mm (175.6 in)
Overall width 1,795 mm (70.7 in)
Overall height *1
Type A 1,470 mm (57.9 in)
Type B 1,455 mm (57.3 in)
Front tread 1,555 mm (61.2 in)
Rear tread 1,560 mm (61.4 in)
Wheelbase 2,700 mm (106.3 in)
9–7
Specifi cations
Specifi cations
(Mexico)
Item Vehicle specifi cation
Overall length 4,460 mm (175.6 in)
Overall width 1,795 mm (70.7 in)
Overall height *1
Type A 1,465 mm (57.7 in)
Type B 1,450 mm (57.1 in)
Front tread 1,555 mm (61.2 in)
Rear tread 1,560 mm (61.4 in)
Wheelbase 2,700 mm (106.3 in)
*1 The overall height is categorized according to the antenna type as follows:
Type A
Antenna
Type B
Except above.
9–8
Specifi cations
Specifi cations
Weights
U.S.A. and Canada
SKYACTIV-G 2.0
Item
Weight
Manual transaxle Automatic transaxle
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) 1,772 kg (3,907 lbs) 1,815 kg (4,001 lbs)
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
Front 925 kg (2,039 lbs) 975 kg (2,149 lbs)
Rear 855 kg (1,885 lbs) 848 kg (1,870 lbs)
SKYACTIV-G 2.5
Item Weight
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) 1,847 kg (4,072 lbs)
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
Front 997 kg (2,198 lbs)
Rear 854 kg (1,883 lbs)
Mexico
Item Weight
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
Total 1,865 kg (4,112 lbs)
Front 970 kg (2,138 lbs)
Rear 895 kg (1,973 lbs)
GAW (Permissible axle load)
Front 995 kg (2,194 lbs)
Rear 945 kg (2,083 lbs)
Air Conditioner
The type of refrigerant used is indicated on a label attached to the inside of the engine
compartment. Check the label before recharging the refrigerant. Refer to Climate Control
System on page 5-2 .
Item Classifi cation
Refrigerant Type HFC134a (R-134a)
*Some models. 9–9
Specifi cations
Specifi cations
Light Bulbs
Exterior light
Light bulb
Category
Wattage ECE R (SAE)
Headlights
Halogen
High beam 65 HB3 (9005)
Low beam 55 H11 (H11)
Xenon fusion High/Low beam 35 D4S (D4S)
Daytime running lights
With halogen bulb headlights 65 HB3 (9005)
With xenon fusion bulb headlights LED *1 — (—)
Parking lights (Front sidemarker lights) With halogen bulb headlights 5 WY5W (—)
Front side-marker lights With xenon fusion bulb headlights 5 W5W (—)
Parking lights With xenon fusion bulb headlights LED *1 — (—)
Front turn signal lights 21 WY21W (7443NA)
Fog lights * 55 H11 (H11)
Side turn signal lights * LED *1 — (—)
High-mount brake light LED *1 — (—)
Rear turn signal lights 21 WY21W (7443NA)
Brake lights/Taillights/Rear
side-marker lights
LED type LED *1 — (—)
Bulb type 21/5 W21/5W (7443)
Taillights (Liftgate side/Trunk lid side) * LED *1 — (—)
Reverse lights
4–Door 18 W16W (921)
5–Door 21 W21W (7440)
License plate lights 5 W5W (—)
*1 LED is the abbreviation for Light Emitting Diode.
*Some models.9–10
Specifi cations
Specifi cations
Interior light
Light bulb
Category
Wattage ECE R
Trunk light (4–Door) 3 —
Luggage compartment light (5–Door) 5 —
Overhead lights (Front)/Map lights * 8 —
Overhead light (Front) * 10 —
Overhead light (Rear) * 10 —
Vanity mirror lights * 2 —
Tires
NOTE
The tires have been optimally matched with the chassis of your vehicle.
When replacing tires, Mazda recommends that you replace tires of the same type originally
fi tted to your vehicle. For details, contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Check the tire pressure label for tire size and infl ation pressure.
Refer to Tire Infl ation Pressure on page 6-41 .
After adjusting the tire pressure, initialization of the tire pressure monitoring system is
necessary to make the system operates normally.
Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System Initialization on page 4-107 .
Standard tire
(U.S.A. and Canada)
Tire size
Infl ation pressure
Front Rear
P205/60R16 91H 250 kPa (36 psi) 250 kPa (36 psi)
215/45R18 89W 250 kPa (36 psi) 250 kPa (36 psi)
9–11
Specifi cations
Specifi cations
(Mexico)
Tire size
Infl ation pressure
Front Rear
P205/60R16 91H 250 kPa (2.5 bar, 36 psi) 250 kPa (2.5 bar, 36 psi)
Tire size
Infl ation pressure
Up to 3 persons —Full load
215/45R18 89W
Front 240 kPa (2.4 bar, 35 psi) 280 kPa (2.8 bar, 41 psi)
Rear 230 kPa (2.3 bar, 33 psi) 300 kPa (3.0 bar, 44 psi)
1 person's weight: About 75 kg
Temporary spare tire
Tire size Infl ation pressure
T125/70D16 96M 420 kPa (60 psi)
Lug nut tightening torque
When installing a tire, tighten the lug nut to the following torque.
108—147 N・m (12—14 kgf・m, 80—108 ft・lbf)
Fuses
Refer to Fuses on page 6-58 .
9–12
Specifi cations
Personalization Features
Personalization Features
The following Personalization Feature is available. This setting can only be changed by an
Authorized Mazda Dealer.
Items in which the feature setting can be changed differ depending on the market and
specifi cation.
Item Feature Factory Setting Available Settings
Daytime running
lights
The function of the daytime running lights can
be changed. On On/Off
The following Personalization Features can be changed by the vehicle owner. Items in which
the feature setting can be changed differ depending on the market and specifi cation.
Item Feature Factory Setting Available Settings
Power door lock
Changes the auto lock/unlock function setting
for all the doors according to the vehicle speed,
the vehicle power supply condition, and the
selector lever position.
Refer to Auto Lock/Unlock Function on page
3-17 .
Refer to Settings on page 5-55 .
Lock: When
Driving Unlock:
IGN Off
Lock: Shifting from
Park Unlock: In Park/
Lock: Shifting from
Park/
Lock: When Driving
Unlock: IGN Off/
Lock: When Driving/
Off
Keyless entry
system
The method for unlocking the doors using the
transmitter can be changed.
Refer to Transmitter on page 3-4 .
Refer to Settings on page 5-55 .
Once: Driver's
Twice: All Doors
Once: All Doors/
Once: Driver's Twice:
All Doors
The time required for the doors to relock
automatically after unlocking with the
transmitter can be changed.
Refer to Settings on page 5-55 .
60 seconds
90 seconds/
60 seconds/
30 seconds
9–13
Specifi cations
Personalization Features
Item Feature Factory Setting Available Settings
Advanced keyless
entry system
The volume of the answer-back beep during
advanced keyless entry system operation can
be changed.
Refer to Locking, Unlocking with Request
Switch (With the advanced keyless function)
on page 3-13 .
Refer to Settings on page 5-55 .
Medium
High/
Medium/
Low/
Off
The function to automatically lock the doors
when leaving the vehicle while carrying the
key can be changed.
Refer to Settings on page 5-55 .
Off On/Off
The method for unlocking the doors using the
request switch/transmitter can be changed.
Refer to Locking, Unlocking with Request
Switch, Door Handle (With the advanced
keyless function) on page 3-13
Refer to Transmitter on page 3-4 .
Refer to Settings on page 5-55 .
Once: Driver's
Twice: All Doors
Once: All Doors/
Once: Driver's Twice:
All Doors
The time required for the doors to relock
automatically after unlocking with the request
switch/transmitter can be changed.
Refer to Settings on page 5-55 .
60 seconds
90 seconds/
60 seconds/
30 seconds
Illumination entry
The time required for the interior lamp to turn
off automatically can be changed (prevents
battery depletion when a door is open/ajar).
Refer to Settings on page 5-55 .
30 minutes
60 minutes/
30 minutes/
10 minutes
The time required for the interior lamp to turn
off automatically after all doors are closed can
be changed.
Refer to Settings on page 5-55 .
15 seconds
60 seconds/
30 seconds/
15 seconds/
7.5 seconds
Three-fl ash turn
signal
The three-fl ash turn function can be changed.
Refer to Settings on page 5-55 . On On/Off
Auto-wiper control
The auto-wiper control function can be
changed.
Refer to Settings on page 5-55 .
On On/Off
Auto headlight off *1
The time required for headlights to turn off
after ignition is switched off can be changed.
Refer to Settings on page 5-55 .
30 seconds
120 seconds/
90 seconds/
60 seconds/
30 seconds/
Off *2
Auto-light control
The headlight illumination on/off timing based
on surrounding lightness/darkness can be
changed.
Refer to Settings on page 5-55 .
Medium
Light/
Medium Light/
Medium/
Medium Dark/
Dark
High Beam Control
System (HBC)
The High Beam Control System (HBC)
function can be changed. *3
Refer to Settings on page 5-55 .
On On/Off
Turn indicator
The turn indicator beep volume level can be
changed.
Refer to Settings on page 5-55 .
High High/Low
9–14
Specifi cations
Personalization Features
Item Feature Factory Setting Available Settings
Lights-on reminder *4
The volume of the lights-on reminder warning
alarm can be changed.
Refer to Settings on page 5-55 .
Off High/Low/Off
Blind Spot
Monitoring (BSM)
system
The volume of the BSM warning beep can be
changed.*5
Refer to Settings on page 5-55 .
High
High/
Low/
Off
Lane Departure
Warning System
(LDWS)
The warning sound for the Lane Departure
Warning System (LDWS) can be changed. *6
Refer to Settings on page 5-55 .
Beep Beep/Rumble Strip
The volume of the warning sound
for the Lane Departure Warning
System (LDWS) can be changed.
Refer to Settings on page 5-55 .
Rumble
strip High High/Mid/Low
Beep High High/Low
The sensitivity of the warning for the Lane
Departure Warning System (LDWS) can be
changed.
Refer to Settings on page 5-55 .
Low High/Low
The warning timing in which the Lane
Departure Warning System (LDWS)
determines that the vehicle may be deviating
from its lane can be changed.
Refer to Settings on page 5-55 .
Before line At line/Before line
Meter display
The distance unit can be changed.
Refer to Settings on page 5-55 . Miles or Km Miles/Km
The display language can be changed.
Refer to Settings on page 5-55 .
English, French,
or Spanish
English/
French/
Spanish
The temperature unit can be changed.
Refer to Settings on page 5-55 . F° or C° F°/C°
Forward Obstruction
Warning (FOW)
The system can be changed so that Forward
Obstruction Warning (FOW) does not
operate.*3
Refer to Settings on page 5-55 .
On On/Off
The distance at which the collision warning
activates can be changed.
Refer to Settings on page 5-55 .
Near Near/Far
The volume of the collision warning can be
changed.
Refer to Settings on page 5-55 .
High High/Low/Off
Smart City Brake
Support (SCBS)
The system can be changed so that Smart City
Brake Support (SCBS) does not operate. *3
Refer to Settings on page 5-55 .
On On/Off
Fuel Economy
Monitor
Setting can be changed so that the ending
screen of the Fuel Economy Monitor is
displayed.
Refer to Fuel Economy Monitor on page 4-86 .
OFF ON/OFF
9–15
Specifi cations
Personalization Features
Item Feature Factory Setting Available Settings
Fuel economy
resetting procedure
Setting can be changed so that the fuel
economy reset is linked with the trip meter
reset.
Refer to Fuel Economy Monitor on page 4-86 .
OFF ON/OFF
Active driving
display
Setting can be changed so that the Turn-byTurn (TBT) of the Active driving display is not
displayed.
Refer to Active driving display on page 4-19 .
On On/Off
*1 If the setting is changed to Off, the following operation is performed according to the headlight switch position:
At position: Headlights turn off immediately after the ignition is switched off.
At any position other than : Headlights do not turn off after the ignition is switched off.
*2 When set to Off, the lights-on reminder is operable.
*3 Though these systems can be turned Off, doing so will defeat the purpose of the system and Mazda recommends
that these systems remain On.
*4 The setting of the lights-on reminder can be changed with the time setting of auto headlight off function set to
Off. Refer to Lights-On Reminder on page 7-36 .
*5 Only the volume of the warning beep during Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) operation can be changed. The
volume of the warning beep during Rear Cross Traffi c Alert (RCTA) operation cannot be changed.
*6 For vehicles with an audio system other than the on-screen function type, the warning sound cannot be changed.
The warning sound is only a beep.
9–16
MEMO
10–1
10 Index
10–2
Index
A
Accessory Socket .............................. 5-136
Active Driving Display ....................... 4-19
Adaptive Front Lighting System
(AFS).................................................. 4-46
Add-On Non-Genuine Parts and
Accessories ......................................... 8-18
Advanced Key
Advanced keyless entry system ...... 3-9
Advanced Key removed from vehicle
warning beep ....................................... 7-37
Operational range .......................... 3-10
Air Bag/Front Seat Belt Pretensioner
System Warning Beep ......................... 7-36
Air Bag Systems ................................. 2-40
Ambient Temperature Display ............ 4-16
Antilock Brake System (ABS) ............ 4-79
Audio Control Switch
Adjusting the Volume .................... 5-58
Mute Switch .................................. 5-59
Seek Switch ................................... 5-58
Audio System ...................................... 5-16
AUX/USB/iPod mode ................... 5-59
Antenna ......................................... 5-16
Audio Control Switch ................... 5-58
Audio Set (Type A) ....................... 5-26
Audio Set (Type B) ....................... 5-38
Operating Tips for Audio System ... 5-17
Satellite Radio ............................... 5-48
Automatic Transaxle ........................... 4-30
Active Adaptive Shift (AAS) ........ 4-32
Direct Mode .................................. 4-39
Driving tips.................................... 4-40
Manual shift mode......................... 4-33
Shift-lock system ........................... 4-32
Shift position indication ................ 4-31
Warning light ................................. 4-31
B
Battery ................................................. 6-37
Maintenance .................................. 6-38
Specifi cations .................................. 9-4
Battery runs out ................................... 7-15
Jump-Starting ................................ 7-15
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)
System ............................................... 4-108
BSM OFF switch......................... 4-114
BSM warning light ...................... 4-113
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) .... 4-109
Care of radar sensors ................... 4-114
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) System
warning beep ....................................... 7-38
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system
Rear Cross Traffi c Alert (RCTA) ... 4-111
Bluetooth® ........................................... 5-75
Bluetooth® Audio (Type A) ......... 5-114
Bluetooth® Audio (Type B) ......... 5-116
Bluetooth® Hands-Free (Type A) ... 5-95
Bluetooth® Hands-Free (Type B) ... 5-102
Troubleshooting .......................... 5-129
Body Lubrication ................................ 6-32
Bottle Holder ..................................... 5-138
Brakes
Brakes assist .................................. 4-70
Foot brake...................................... 4-68
Pad wear indicator ......................... 4-69
Parking brake ................................ 4-69
Warning light ................................. 4-69
Break-In .............................................. 3-45
C
Capacities .............................................. 9-5
Carbon Monoxide ............................... 3-29
Cell Phones ......................................... 8-19
Center Console .................................. 5-140
Child Restraint
Child-restraint precautions ............ 2-22
Installing child-restraint systems... 2-28
LATCH child-restraint systems ..... 2-36
10–3
Index
Child Safety Locks for Rear Doors ..... 3-20
Climate Control System ........................ 5-2
Automatic Climate Control ............. 5-9
Dual-Zone Automatic Climate
Control........................................... 5-12
Gas specifi cations ............................ 9-8
Manual Climate Control .................. 5-5
Operating Tips ................................. 5-2
Vent Operation ................................ 5-3
Clock ................................................... 5-30
Collision warning ................................ 7-39
Control Status Display ........................ 4-87
Cruise Control ................................... 4-100
Cruise Control Switch ................. 4-100
Cruise Control Set Vehicle Speed
Display ................................................ 4-17
Cup Holder ........................................ 5-137
Customer Assistance ............................. 8-2
D
Dashboard Illumination ...................... 4-16
Daytime Running Lights ..................... 4-47
Defroster
Mirror ............................................ 4-57
Rear window ................................. 4-56
Dimensions ........................................... 9-6
Direct Mode
Automatic transaxle ...................... 4-39
Door Locks .......................................... 3-11
Drive selection .................................... 4-88
Driving In Flooded Area ..................... 3-49
Driving Tips
Automatic transaxle ...................... 4-40
Break-in ......................................... 3-45
Driving in fl ooded area.................. 3-49
Driving on uneven road ................. 3-51
Floor mat ....................................... 3-46
Hazardous driving ......................... 3-46
Money-saving suggestions ............ 3-45
Overloading ................................... 3-50
Rocking the vehicle ....................... 3-47
Winter driving ............................... 3-47
Driving on Uneven Road .................... 3-51
Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) ....... 4-81
DSC OFF Indicator Light.............. 4-82
DSC OFF Switch........................... 4-82
TCS/DSC Indicator Light ............. 4-81
E
Emergency Starting
Push-Starting ................................. 7-18
Starting a Flooded Engine ............. 7-18
Emergency Towing
Tiedown Hooks ............................. 7-22
Towing Description ....................... 7-21
Emission Control System .................... 3-28
Ending Screen Display ........................ 4-87
Engine
Coolant .......................................... 6-29
Engine Compartment Overview .... 6-26
Exhaust gas.................................... 3-29
Hood release .................................. 6-24
Oil .................................................. 6-27
Starting ............................................ 4-5
Essential information ............................ 6-2
Event Data Recorder ........................... 8-20
Exhaust Gas ........................................ 3-29
Exterior Care ....................................... 6-63
Aluminum Wheel Maintenance .... 6-68
Bright-Metal Maintenance ............ 6-67
Maintaining the Finish .................. 6-65
Plastic Part Maintenance ............... 6-69
10–4
Index
F
Flasher
Hazard warning ............................. 4-58
Headlights ..................................... 4-41
Flat Tire ................................................. 7-3
Mounting the Spare Tire................ 7-11
Removing a Flat Tire ....................... 7-7
Floor Mat ............................................ 3-46
Fluid
Brake/Clutch ................................. 6-31
Washer ........................................... 6-31
Fluids
Classifi cation ................................... 9-4
Fog Lights ........................................... 4-51
Foot Brake ........................................... 4-68
Forward Obstruction Warning
(FOW) ............................................... 4-116
Collision Warning ....................... 4-118
Rader Sensor ............................... 4-118
Forward Sensing Camera .................... 4-63
Front Seat .............................................. 2-5
Fuel
Filler lid and cap............................ 3-30
Gauge ............................................ 4-15
Requirements................................. 3-27
Tank capacity .................................. 9-5
Fuel Consumption Display ................. 4-86
Fuel Economy Monitor ....................... 4-86
Control status display .................... 4-87
Ending screen display ................... 4-87
Fuel consumption display ............. 4-86
G
Gauges ................................................. 4-12
Glove Compartment .......................... 5-139
H
Hazard Warning Flasher ...................... 4-58
Hazardous Driving .............................. 3-46
Head Restraint ..................................... 2-10
Headlights
Control........................................... 4-41
Flashing ......................................... 4-45
High-low beam .............................. 4-45
Leveling......................................... 4-45
High Beam Control System (HBC) .... 4-48
Hill Launch Assist (HLA) ................... 4-70
HomeLink Wireless Control System ... 4-59
Hood Release ...................................... 6-24
Horn .................................................... 4-58
I
i-ELOOP ............................................. 4-83
Control status display .................... 4-85
Display .......................................... 4-83
i-ELOOP indicator light ................ 4-85
i-ELOOP warning beep ....................... 7-38
If a Warning Light Turns On or
Flashes................................................. 7-24
If the Active Driving Display (ADD)
does not operate .................................. 7-42
Ignition
Switch .............................................. 4-4
Ignition not switched off (STOP)
warning beep ....................................... 7-37
Immobilizer System ............................ 3-41
Indicator Lights ................................... 4-24
AFS OFF ....................................... 4-46
BSM OFF .................................... 4-114
Low engine coolant temperature ... 4-26
Wrench .......................................... 4-26
Inside Trunk Release Lever ................ 3-25
Inspecting Brake/Clutch Fluid Level .. 6-31
Inspecting Coolant Level .................... 6-29
Inspecting Engine Oil Level ............... 6-28
Inspecting Washer Fluid Level............ 6-31
10–5
Index
Interior Care ........................................ 6-69
Cleaning the Lap/Shoulder Belt
Webbing ........................................ 6-71
Cleaning the Upholstery and Interior
Trim ............................................... 6-70
Cleaning the Window Interiors ..... 6-71
Dashboard Precautions .................. 6-69
Maintenance of the Active Driving
Display .......................................... 6-71
Interior Lights ................................... 5-134
Luggage Compartment Light ...... 5-134
Map Lights .................................. 5-134
Overhead Lights .......................... 5-134
J
Jack ....................................................... 7-4
Jump-Starting ...................................... 7-15
K
Key Suspend Function .......................... 3-8
Key left-in-luggage compartment
warning beep (With the advanced keyless
function) .............................................. 7-37
Key left-in-vehicle warning beep (With
the advanced keyless function) ........... 7-38
Keyless Entry System ........................... 3-3
Keys ...................................................... 3-2
Key suspend function ...................... 3-8
Transmitter ...................................... 3-4
L
Label Information ................................. 9-2
Lane-Change Signals .......................... 4-52
Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS) ............................................. 4-119
Canceling the system................... 4-123
LDWS warning ........................... 4-124
When the system operates ........... 4-122
Lane departure warning system (LDWS)
warning sound ..................................... 7-38
Liftgate ................................................ 3-21
Light Bulbs
Replacement .................................. 6-45
Specifi cations .................................. 9-9
Lighting Control.................................. 4-41
Lights-on reminder .............................. 7-36
Lubricant Quality .................................. 9-4
Luggage Compartment Light ............ 5-134
M
Maintenance
Information ...................................... 6-2
Scheduled ........................................ 6-4
Maintenance Monitor .......................... 6-20
Manual Transaxle Operation ............... 4-27
Recommendations for shifting ...... 4-29
Map Lights ........................................ 5-134
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) ... 4-91
Close Proximity Warning .............. 4-94
Display Indication ......................... 4-94
Radar Sensor Handling ................. 4-99
Setting the System ......................... 4-95
Shift-up/Shift-down Request
Display .......................................... 4-99
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
System warnings ................................. 7-39
Meters and Gauges .............................. 4-12
Mirror Defroster .................................. 4-57
Mirrors
Outside mirrors.............................. 3-33
Rearview mirror ............................ 3-34
Money-Saving Suggestions ................ 3-45
Moonroof ............................................ 3-39
O
Odometer and Trip Meter .................... 4-13
Outside Mirrors ................................... 3-33
Outside Temperature Display .............. 4-16
Over Rev. buzzer ................................. 7-39
Overhead Console ............................. 5-139
Overhead Lights ................................ 5-134
10–6
Index
Overheating ......................................... 7-19
Overloading ......................................... 3-50
Owner Maintenance
Battery replacement ...................... 6-39
Closing the Hood........................... 6-24
Engine Compartment Overview .... 6-26
Opening the Hood ......................... 6-24
Owner Maintenance Precautions... 6-22
P
Parking Brake ...................................... 4-69
Personalization Features ..................... 9-12
Power Steering .................................... 4-90
Power Windows .................................. 3-36
Power steering warning buzzer ........... 7-39
R
Radar Sensor ....................................... 4-65
Rear Coat Hooks ............................... 5-140
Rear Cross Traffi c Alert (RCTA) ...... 4-111
Rear Door Child Safety Locks ............ 3-20
Rear Seat ............................................... 2-8
Rear View Monitor............................ 4-125
Displayable range on the screen .. 4-127
Picture quality adjustment ........... 4-132
Rear view monitor operation ....... 4-128
Rear view parking camera
location ........................................ 4-126
Switching to the rear view monitor
display ......................................... 4-126
Variance between actual aoad
conditions and displayed Image ... 4-131
Viewing the display ..................... 4-128
Rear Window Defroster ...................... 4-56
Rear Window Washer .......................... 4-56
Rear Window Wiper ............................ 4-56
Rearview Mirror .................................. 3-34
Recommended Oil .............................. 6-27
Recreational Towing ........................... 3-52
Registering Your Vehicle in A Foreign
Country ............................................... 8-17
Replacement
Electrical battery ........................... 6-39
Fuse ............................................... 6-58
Light Bulbs .................................... 6-45
Tires ............................................... 6-43
Wheel ............................................ 6-44
Wiper ............................................. 6-33
Rocking the Vehicle ............................ 3-47
S
SRS Air Bags
Front passenger occupant
classifi cation system ...................... 2-56
How the SRS air bags work .......... 2-49
Limitations to SRS air bag ............ 2-54
Monitoring..................................... 2-61
SRS air bag deployment criteria ... 2-53
Supplemental restraint system
components ................................... 2-47
Safety Defects, Reporting ................... 8-13
Satellite Radio ..................................... 5-48
Scheduled Maintenance ........................ 6-4
Seat Belt System
2-point type ................................... 2-18
3-point type ................................... 2-15
Automatic locking ......................... 2-14
Emergency locking ........................ 2-14
Extender ........................................ 2-20
Pregnant women ............................ 2-14
Seat belt warning beep ........................ 7-37
Seats
Front seat ......................................... 2-5
Head restraint ................................ 2-10
Rear seat .......................................... 2-8
Seat warmer ..................................... 2-7
Security System
Immobilizer system ....................... 3-41
Theft-deterrent system .................. 3-43
Sensor
Radar Sensor ................................. 4-65
Service Publications ............................ 8-49
10–7
Index
Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) ..... 4-72
Deactivating the Smart City Brake
Support (SCBS) System operation ... 4-78
Laser sensor handling .................... 4-76
Smart City Brake Support (SCBS)
Warning Light (Red) ..................... 4-78
Spare Tire .............................................. 7-5
Specifi cations ........................................ 9-4
Speed Unit Selector ............................. 4-13
Speedometer ........................................ 4-13
Starting the Engine ................................ 4-5
Steering Wheel .................................... 3-32
Horn............................................... 4-58
Storage Compartments ...................... 5-139
Center console ............................. 5-140
Glove compartment ..................... 5-139
Overhead console ........................ 5-139
Rear coat hooks ........................... 5-140
Sunshade ............................................. 3-40
Sunvisors ........................................... 5-133
T
Tachometer .......................................... 4-14
Theft-Deterrent System ....................... 3-43
Tiedown
Hook .............................................. 7-22
Tire Information .................................. 8-23
Tire Pressure Monitoring System ..... 4-104
Tire infl ation pressure warning beep ... 7-38
Tires .................................................... 6-41
Flat Tire ........................................... 7-3
Replacing a Tire ............................ 6-43
Replacing a Wheel ........................ 6-44
Snow tires ...................................... 3-48
Specifi cations ................................ 9-10
Temporary Spare Tire .................... 6-43
Tire Infl ation Pressure ................... 6-41
Tire Rotation ................................. 6-42
Tire chains ..................................... 3-48
Uniform tire quality grading system
(UTQGS) ....................................... 8-21
Towing
Recreational towing ...................... 3-52
Trailer Towing ............................... 3-52
Towing Description ............................. 7-21
Traction Control System (TCS) .......... 4-80
TCS/DSC Indicator Light ............. 4-80
Transmitter ............................................ 3-4
Trip Computer ..................................... 4-17
Trip Meter ........................................... 4-13
Trouble
Battery runs out ............................. 7-15
Emergency Starting ....................... 7-18
Emergency Towing........................ 7-21
Flat Tire ........................................... 7-3
Overheating ................................... 7-19
Parking in an Emergency ................ 7-2
When liftgate/trunk lid cannot be
opened ........................................... 7-40
Trunk Lid ............................................ 3-21
Inside trunk release lever .............. 3-25
V
Vanity Mirrors ................................... 5-133
Vehicle Information Labels ................... 9-2
W
Warning Lights .................................... 4-22
Warning Message Indicated on
Display ................................................ 7-34
10–8
Index
Warning Sound is Activated ................ 7-36
Advanced Key removed from vehicle
warning beep ................................. 7-37
Air Bag/Front Seat Belt Pretensioner
System Warning Beep ................... 7-36
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) System
warning beep ................................. 7-38
Collision warning .......................... 7-39
Ignition not switched off (STOP)
warning beep ................................. 7-37
Key left-in-luggage compartment
warning beep (With the advanced
keyless function) ........................... 7-37
Key left-in-vehicle warning beep (With
the advanced keyless function) ..... 7-38
Lane departure warning system
(LDWS) warning sound ................ 7-38
Lights-on reminder ........................ 7-36
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)
System warnings ........................... 7-39
Over Rev. buzzer ........................... 7-39
Power steering warning buzzer ..... 7-39
Seat belt warning beep .................. 7-37
Tire infl ation pressure warning
beep ............................................... 7-38
i-ELOOP warning beep ................. 7-38
Warranty .............................................. 8-15
Weights.................................................. 9-8
Windows
Power windows ............................. 3-36
Windshield Washer ............................. 4-55
Windshield Wipers .............................. 4-53
Winter Driving .................................... 3-47
Wiper
Replacing Rear Window Wiper Blade
(5-Door)......................................... 6-35
Replacing Windshield Wiper
Blades ............................................ 6-33

PDF Document reader online

This website is focused on providing document in readable format, online without need to install any type of software on your computer. If you are using thin client, or are not allowed to install document reader of particular type, this application may come in hand for you. Simply upload your document, and Docureader.top will transform it into readable format in a few seconds. Why choose Docureader.top?

  1. Unlimited sharing - you can upload document of any size. If we are able to convert it into readable format, you have it here - saved for later or immediate reading
  2. Cross-platform - no compromised when reading your document. We support most of modern browers without the need of installing any of external plugins. If your device can oper a browser - then you can read any document on it
  3. Simple uploading - no need to register. Just enter your email, title of document and select the file, we do the rest. Once the document is ready for you, you will receive automatic email from us.

Previous 10

Next 10